IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 4^ 4^ 1.0 ^12^ 1^ itt 122 I.I S I& 120 ^ // '/ FhotogFaphic ^Sdaices Corporation 1 v k*^' 5V <> 23 WIST MAIN STRHT VtflBSTeR,N.Y. MStO (716it71-4S03 '^ r A. \ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historicai IVIicroreproductions / Institut Canadian da microraproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notaa/Notas tachniquaa at bibllographiquaa Tha Inatltuta haa attamptad to obtain tha baat original copy availabia for filming. Faaturaa of thia copy which may ba bibllographically uniqua, which may altar any of tha imagaa in tha raproduction. or which may aignif icantly changa tha uaual mathpd of filming, ara chackad balow. D Colourad covara/ Couvartura da coulaur I I Covara damagad/ D Couvartura andommagAe Covara raatorad and/or laminatad/ Couvartura raataurte at/ou pallicul6a n Cover titia missing/ La tit re de couverture manque r~y Coloured maps/ D D D D D D Cartes gAographiques en couieur Coloured inic (I.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couieur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrationa en couieur Bound with other material/ ReilA avac d'autres documenta Tight binding may cause shadowa or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure aarrie paut cauaar de I'ombre ou de la diatortion la long de la marge intirieurn Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II ae paut que certaines pagea blanches ajouttes lors d'une restauration apparaiaaant dana la taxte, mala, lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont paa AtA filmAea. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplAmentalres; L'Institut a microfilmi la mailleur exemplaire qu'il lui a 4t6 possible de se procurer. Les details da cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mAthode normale de filmage aont IndiquAs ci-daaaoua. I I Coloured pagea/ D Pages de couieur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagias Pagea restored and/oi Pages restaurAea et/ou pelliculAea Pages discoloured, stained or foxe< Pages dAcolorAes, tachettes ou piquAas Pages detached/ Pages dttachtes Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Quality inAgala de I'impreaaion Includes supplementary materii Compreiiu du material auppiimantaira Only edition available/ Seule Edition diaponibia r~n Pages damaged/ I I Pagea restored and/or laminated/ r~T Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Pages detached/ rry showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ I I Includes supplementary material/ |~~| Only edition available/ Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata alips, tissuaa. etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pacias totalament ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont it6 filmtes A nouveau de fa^on A obtenir la meilleure image possible. Thaeo to the Thelm posslbl of the filming Orlgini beginn the las aion. o other fl first pi alon. ai or illus The las ahall c< TINUEI ¥vhlcha Mapa, I differei entirely beginni right ai require metho< This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* su taux de reduction indiquA ci-deaaous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X y 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X lair* I dAtails |u«s du It modifier ig*r una a filmaga Tha copy fllmad har* haa baan raproduead thanka to tha ganaroalty of: Library Oiviiion Provincial AicMvtt of Britiih Columbia Tha imagaa appaarino Hara ara tha iMat quality poaalbia eonaMarlno tha condition and lagibillty of tha original copy and in kaaping with tha filming contract apaelfleationa. L'mamplalra f ilm4 f ut raproduit grica i la g4n4roaltA da: Library Division Provincial Archiva* of British Columbia Laa Imagaa auhrantaa ont 4t* raproduitas avac la plua grand aoir, compta tanu da la condition at da la nattatA da I'axamplaira filmA. at an conformity avac laa conditions du contrat da filmaga. iu6es Original copias in printad papar covara ara fllmad baglnning with tha front covar and anding on tha laat paga with a printad or lilustratad impras- sk>n. or tha back covar whan appropriate. All othar original copias ara filmed beginning on the f irat page with a printed or illuatratad impres- •ion. and anding on the lest paga with a printed or illustrated impression. Les eNempiairas origlnaux dont la couvarture an papier est ImprimAe sont filmte en commen^ent par la premier plat at en terminent salt par la darniire page qui comporte une empreinte d'Impression ou d'illustratlon. solt par la second plat, salon ie cas. Tous les eutres exemplaires origlnaux sont filmte en commenpant par la prami4re paga qui comporte une empreinte d'Impression ou d'illustration at en terminent per la darniAre paga qui comporte une telle empreinte. The last recorded frame on eech microfiche shall contain the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or tha symbol ▼ (meaning "END"). whichever applies. Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la darniire imege de cheque microfiche, selon Ie cas: la symbols — »• signifie "A SUiVRE". Ie symbols ▼ signifie "FIN". sire Meps. pletes. charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right end top to bottom, as many frames es required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les certes. plenches. tableeux. etc., peuvent Atre filmAs A des taux de reduction diffArents. Lorsque Ie document est trop grend pour Atre reproduit en un seul clichA. il est film* A partir de I'angle supAriaur gauche, de gauche i droite. et de t ..^ut en bes. en prenant la nombra d'images nAcessaira. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mAthoda. by errata ned to lant una peiura. fa^on A 1 2 3 32X 1 2 3 4 5 6 UNITED STATES EXPLORING EXPEDITION. M.u UNITED STATES EXPLORING EXPEDITION. DURING THE YEARS 1838, 1839, 1810, 1811, 1812. UNDKR TIIK CoMMANr) n i' CHARLES WILKES, U.S.N. ETHNOGRAPHY AND PHILOLOGY. nv HORATIO HALE, PHILOLOGIST OF THE EXPEDITION. i'nn,.u)Rr,i'Hi.\: LEA AND B L A N C H A R D 1846. / ^ CONTENTS, PAGE ALPHABET „ ETIIXOGIIAIMIK'AI, PART. OCEA.NirA 3 TOI.VNKSIA 4 MEl.ANKSIA ^■, VITI, OH THE KKEJEE GROUP.. 17 MIfllO.NESIA fiS, TOBI.OR WRD NORTH'S ISLAND 77 BANARE. OH ASCENSION ISLAND HO MILLE, OR THE MUU'.RAVE ISLANDS 87 TARAWA, OR THE KI.NGSMILL ISLANDS go HarL'MA, OR GRANVILLE ISLAND. 103 AUSTRALIA lOf, MIGRATIONS OK- THE OC-EAMC . RIBES. 117 POLYNESIA 1,7 TAHITI 121 NVKUIilVA ,gg HAWAH Iff B 47493 yI <; (» n r K N T s. HAWrroNliA \» MANliAKKVA 139 IIAI'A HI TIIK Al STKAl. IKI.ANim Ml I'ArMirn i« NKW ZKAI,AN1) »<• CHATHAM WI.A.M) I« FAKAAH) I« VAITll'l' IM (;k>k.iiai. ii.i.i sniATioNS i«W .MO.N'I'HS 100 WIXDS ni .NIIMKIIAIX 17« MTI \M> III.V^A 174 riKoi'lA IM TAHAWA 187 SV.V)l'Mim)K MIXKD LANtlUACJES IM OHIIil.N OK THE HJLVNESIA.NS liM NORTIIWESTKHN AMEUICA I'J7 PIIILOLOCUAL PART. COMPAKATIVK tillAMMAK Of THE l-OLV.NKSrAN DIALECW tt* E8f|ili'd Ihni rnrh kliii|>l<- aoiinil alioiilil Ix' inviiriiilily ri-|>n'iH'nlr bnii* uflho nytlrni in tliiit |irnpom> linlircl in ihi- Mrmoini oflhi) Anicriciin Arnilciny of ArlH iinil Scii'iic-i'i, Soini^ nlturnlicmi hnvi> \tn'U nuide, liul iiirli nn iiri- ii;jn'«'nlili' to llio |irin<'i|iles ihiTP IiikI ilnwii. The liiU luwin(( are tin' uniy |ie<-uliarili('!i nt'lhc nl|iliaM wliirh ruiiniro cxplnnnlion. I. Th« vowrU haw the iinini' ){fn lion of rlmraolers, to be contented with noting the exiHteiiec of these iiiinur shades uf •oiind in the lanj{ua^eI in whieh they oceur. U. The emisonants I), •, l>'>vc tlu ir usual Kiiglith MiuniU. (i is always hard, as in i!ii, get. (/ (c with a crdilla) has been used for the sound of s/< in iJiiiU. J is sounded as in Freiieh, or like : in plmirr. IJ is u.sed for a very harsh guttural, pronounced deep in the throat, which occurs in some of the Indian languages. U. Tlic new consonantal characters, which it has been found necessary to introduce, have been mostly taken from the Gret.'k. Thcia (0),itella (f) are employed to represent Iho difTerent articulations of hard and son Ih, as heard in the words thigh and thij, — each being the sounds which these two characters have in modern IJreek. For the latter (0> a capital letter (^) has been formed mom nearly resembling it than the awkward triangle of the Uroek alphabet. To represent tho hard guttural, common to the S|ianish and Cicr- c ppaMMwJMr' ' ' ^-in^HiiiPp A LP II A nET. ! miin (in Ihc former, /, — in the Inllor, c/i), the Orrck rhi (x) nnlurnlly suggrslotl itself; it hns, however, been somewlmt nitercil, for j^n-nlrr (•onvrnionco in writing, Hnd, oa here used (/.) nppronchoK to the onlinary j', which had formerly, in Spnnish, Ihc anme Hoiind OS the_;. For the sort giittund (the Germiin e iK'lween two vowels), the (Jrrt^k namma, which hns this sound in •In- modern Inngnngr, hns lieen adopted, but with n different cnpitnl (C). The niisnl ;/i.', iis henrd in the word »*//^'<«ir, is of frequent occurrence in the Oceanic dialects, nnd is met with ns orten at the beginning, as in the middle of words. For this element a jicculinr chnracter ({>), compounded of the two Unglish letters, has been adopted. The introduction .)f these letters has been rendered necessary by the principle on which the alphabet is constructed, and could not have lieen avoidei. The only diacritical marks employed are the usual signs of quantity, (~) and ( ), and the acute accent (')• The first two arc used for distinguishing two shades of sound in each of the vowel i. A is pronounced as in purt, and rt ns in jmt ; c as a in niatf, nnd f ns in met ,• i as in machine, and i as '\n pin ; o as in the English word i:olp, nnd () as in the same word in French ; m as oo in ^xjV, and « as in piilt ; S as a in hull, and A as rt in what, or o in not ; n as ii in murmur, or nearly os the French eu, and ns n in mutter. These marks are nn-ly applied except to the vowels of accented syllables,^ that is, of those syllables on which the stress of voice falls. Thus, in one of the Austra- lian dinlects, mugin means blind, nnd tniigin, niusquito; — in both words the accent or emphasis, is on the last syllable. The unaccented vowels are rarely sufliciently distinct to require this discrimination. The snmc, moreover, is frequently the ease even with the emphasized vowel, which sometimes hns a medium sound, neither long nor short,* nnd sometimes is inditlcrently pronounced with either quantity. In such cases, the oblique mnrk ( ) is employed to denote the syllable on »hicl' the ircent or emphasis should be • Tlifw tthiHt>8 in the vowel aoiindi inif^Ilt Ih- ah projn dy licsif'iinti'ii hy tlie ti'fllH hrond anil x/rm/fr, or oprn mill elmr, nit by tliodo here useil The iiainefl, li'iwevei , are uniiii|H>rttint, provideil tlie dintiiiction be rijrhtly underHtood. ALPIIABKT. XI lilnccd, n», miisn", Mnti, tiokwo. Someiinips, however, it is used nioiig with the other innrks, iis in JJiuhiIm; in which the first syllable is cinplmsizud, ami the third is pronounnul long. The I'ollowiny is Ihi- niplmliet, in the order which hns been adopted for the vociiliuliirics contained in this volume. It consists ol' thirty-two letters, which, with llio marks ol' (]iinntity, express thirty-nine elementary sounds. m xtt A A B D E F G G H I J K X L M N n o p Q R s T & U u V w Y z a a b f d 6 e f 9 y h i J k / / m n V P fl r s t d u u V TV y Z ALPHABET. as in mart, mat. as a in hall, what. as sh in shine. as the soft th in thy. as a in fate, and e in met. always hard, as in go, give. soft guttural, as in the German Tage. as in machine, pin.' as z in glazier. hard guttural, as ch in the German loch. nasal ng, as in singing, hanger. very har.'sh guttural. the hard or hissing th, as in thin. as in rule, pull. as M in burn, but. ■-."^•wr..v^!V.'-Si .-t (.;«ita.^-t»tt-^ , , f, K,'*4# %-nir.--' -■ t^'i^fitia^^'a.-, V-Jiv:^'«i(_?^'%^^''' ifTT '« \ .y^ Mftlr i.r;*. M « t « P ' Ji K S ^ A,*,*,. * P'. . ' ^ ::.i>< ««; il'itiii , •^'S.'-..r ' »♦, ,,. ^ ■ I.,,., — -Vh VAJ( lltKUCKK \ \ I ^ _ I- ?t..- v\ 4 ■ .\ #■ -J. --^ ' .• 1 • • ,..»...^..-\ V '■-"ir '"'<•. " ■ IT ILU.«l.r, I,s;t8.;il). II). II iV l->. ' V 'I .1 1 I 1' \.> \ UAKgt'KNAN ' • « m-KI-HIVA Jilhtititit . ^/VfAfAmi I' . » ..tltUttllil ^•••Tl ■ Hunnii k:: r/iirr A/n/M \J llnj -ui (•Unrt* ■^^Hbiriabiifl i&i ^V ' ETHNOGRAPHY Ml mr , ' iii |wi 3ii ffi | » .M* li- i in1>ili>- i-,r.i itti-,,'. E T H N Ct R A P H Y. OCEANIC A. The term Oceantca is now commonly applied to the land included in tliat portion of the f^lobe which lies between the coasts of Asia anil America. Besides the i^reat island or continent of New Holland, it comprises the extensive insular masses fornini^ wliat is called the East Indian Archipelago, and the countless smaller clusters scattered over the surface of the Pacific Ocean. The latest writers, particularly the French voyagers and geographers, have, with much propriety, subtlivided this region ii\to five minor departments, distinguished from one another both l)y their natural features, and by the character of their inhaliitants. These are Malaisia, Melanesia, Au.stralia, Micro- nesia, and Polynesia, all of which have been visited and examined, to a greater or less extent, in the course of our voyage. The first of these names is applied to tlie islands in the East Indian seas occupied by the yellow Malay race, — the principal of which are Sumatra, Java, Borneo, Celebes, the Moluccas, the Sooloo Group, and the Philippine Islands. The peninsula of Malacca and the island of Formosa are also inhabited, in great part, by people of this race. Melanesia comprises that part of Oceanica inhabited by a dark- skinned race, with woolly or frizzled hair ; it includes New Guinea and the adjacent islands of Arroo, Mysol, and Waygeoo, to the west. 4 ETII N()(iR A I'll Y. iiiiil New nritiiiti, Nuw Ireljiiid, tliu Soluinoii Islands, and tlu< New Ili'briilcs, ti) llio oast. Australid \n uiiothor nainti Ibr New Molluiid, tlie alH)ri^iiii>s of wliicli are reiiiurkal)le tor prosoiiliii^ the singular i-(itnl)iiiatiuii of a cornplexioii as dark as tliat of the African nu^roes, with soft and strait^lit liair, as in the wliite race. Mirnmesia is n term a|i|)hod to tlie lon^f raiij^e of little groups and strips of eoral rock, wiiich are scattered over the Pacific to the nortli of the ey liKhl-coloured trii)es, allied to the Malaisian, and all sjieakinir dialects of one general language. Tliis being the division which was first and longest under our observation, will be first described. I'OLYXKSIA. The principal grou|>sof Polynesia, with their native names and the estimated numl«'rs of their inhabitants, are as tollows : 1. The Navigator Islands. This group is situated between 1(59'^ and 173° of west longitude, anil between 13° and l5°of south latitude. It consists of four large islands, Saimii, Upolu, 'I'utuila, and Manila ; and four small, Manoiio, Apolima, Orosem/a, and Ofu. Savaii, the largest and most westerly, is almutone hundred miles in circuit. The native name for the whole grou|) is Samoa. The po|)ulation is esti- mated by the missionaries at tifty-si.v thousand si.v hundred, of which four-fifths belong to the two large islands of Savaii and Upolu. 2. The Friendly Islands. These lie south-.southwest of the pre- ceding, between the meridians of 173° anil 176° E., and the paral- lels of l!s° and 22° S. The group consists of three distinct clusters, that of Tonga, that of Habai, and that of Uafulti Hau. The first named is the southernmost, and consists of two large islands, Tonya and Eua, and several small ones. Tonga is the largest island of the Friendly Group, for which its name is commonly useut thirty miloH in circiinili'mici', — Aliii, MiiiHjiiiii, nixl Ailiilnhi, iiro racli ulxmt twenty; tlu- dIIhts, Mniih, .Mitinni. i\\u\ .U//;//^//, iirr of infonsitltTiildi' extent. 'I'lic |)iifil(in, (tr Dcpey- ster's Island, and Fimufuti, or Kllice's Island. The largest is about ten miles in circumference. The natives were numerous, but we had no means of forming any estimate of the entire population. North of the Friendly Group, in latitude 15° 50' S., longitude 174"^ W., are two small high islands, discovered by Schouten, and named by him Cocoa and Tmitor's Islands. They are each eight or ten miles in circumference, and are separated by a channel about a league in width. The native name is AV«rt, one of them being distinguished by the epithet tabu, or sacred. Ten degrees farther west is Good Hope Island, also discovered by Schouten, and called by the natives yh'.u Foil, or New Niun. At the same distance from this, in a north- west direction, are the Horn Islands, another discovery of the same navi;tator. The.se al.so, if our information is correct, are included in the general appellation of Nina. On the map, the name of Allii Fatti, 8 ET UNOO RA I'll V. (probably Liia Fatit, the Two Rocks,) is sometimes given to them. Liite the first meiitioned, they are small in extent, bnt lofty, and sepa- rated by a narrow channel. The number of inhabitants on these islands is unknown, but it cannot exceed three or four thousand. North of the Niua Croup, and west of the Navigators, in \'\° 26' of s"uth latitude, and about 176° of west lonjijitude, is Uea, or Wallis's Island, whicii is a compact cluster of tme high and several coral islets. Tif,()/)iii. in latitude 12° SO' 8., longitude 169° E., is the most westerly i.-.land now known to be inhabited by people of the Polyne- sian race. It is seven or eight miles round, with a population of about live hundred. Fotniia (or Erronan) and Nina (or I/ntner) are two small hilly islands, a few miles east of Tanna, one of the New Hebrides. Though so near to ami constantly communicaling with the dusky inhabitants of this group, the natives retain the physiognomy and language of the Polynesian race. Chatham Island, twelve degrees east of New Zealand, is peopled by a few hundred natives, who are said to have the customs and speak the dialect of the New Zealanders. Savage Island lies about four degrees east of the Friendly Group; it is small in extent, moderately elevated, and has but a scanty popu- lation. Pcnrhyn Island is the name given to a small ring of coral islets in latitude 9° S., longitude 158° VV., or midway between the Mar- quesas and Union Groups. The inhabitants were found to be nume- rous in proportion to the size of the island. Easter Island, or Vaihu, the most easterly of the Polynesian islands, is situated in latitude 27° S., longitude 109° 50' W. It is about thirty miles round, and is supposed to have not far from two thousand inhabitants. From the foregoing enumeration it will appear that the entire population of Polynesia does not reach half a million. There is, perhaps, no people which, in proportion to its numbers, has been the subject of so much interest and of such minute investigation. This may be ascribed in part to the character of the natives, in itself more pleasing and attractive than that of most savages, but principally it is due to the peculiai position of the islands which they inhabit, scat- tered over a vast ocean, which has been, tor the last hundred years, ploughed by the keels of every maritime power. In the course of our voyage we visited six out of the ten principal groups, namely, the I' () I, V N I". S I A. 9 Naviirator, Frioiully, Society, and Sandwich Islands, tiic Low Archi- pclajfo, and Now Zealand, and sovcral of tlio sniallor islands. Of most iM" those which wo did not see we obtained iiil'orniation, cither throuixh inti'lliifent persons wl\o liad resided on them, or through the natives tliemselves, whom we met at otlier j^roups. This was the case with reirard to all the islanils named in the preceding? list, except only Tikopia and Master Island, i'or which we must rely on the accounts of precedinff navij^ators. A tteneral view of the results of these observations, as respects the physical and mental characteristics, and what may be tern>ed the national peculiarities of the Polynesians, will be useful for the purpose of comparing them with other branches of the human family, and especially with the other races of Oceanica. IMI YSICAI, TR.VITS. As a race, the Polynesians are superior to most others in physical endowments. They are somewhat above the middle height, averaging five feet nine or ten inches, and are commonly well formed, with finely developed limbs and muscles. The women are inferior in this respect to the other sex, being too short and stout t'or graceful propor- tion ; yet most of them when young are not without a kind of pretti- ness, and occasionally one is seen who might be termed handsome. Their colour varies from a light to a dusky brown, with a slight tinge of yellow. It is remarkable that the lightest shixdes should be found nearest the equator, growing darker as we recede from it on either siilo. The fairest in complexion that we saw were the natives of Fakaafo, in latitude 9° S. ; next came the people of the Manjuesas, the Navigator, the Society, and Friendly CI roups, while the natives of New Zealand and the Sandwich Islanils are a shade deeper in hue than the rest. The latter (the New Zealanders and Hawaiians) are, as a body, inferior to the others in stature and beauty of form ; a fact which will be readily referred to their less abundant food and more laborious life. Perhaps the same circumstances will account for the diU'orence of complexion, which may have less direct relation to the heat of the climate than is c^ominonly su|)posed. The Polynesians have the hair generally thick, strong, and black, with a slight tendency to curl, dillering in this respect from the coarse lank hair of the American Indians. In some cases we have seen it of a lighter hue, brown or chestnut, but this is not common. The beard is scanty, and does not usually make its appearance till a 10 ETHNOGRAPHY. F t middle age. They have little hair on their bodies, and take pains to eradicate it from the armpits and breasts, under a notion of cleanliness. Almost as great a variety of physiognomy is observable in Poly- nesia as among any people of Europe. Perhaps the only general characteristic, besides the complexion and hair, is the slight spread of the nostrils at the base, as though the nose had been a little depressed. The eyes arc black, but neither large nor very bright; we obscrvcid a few individuals in whom they were set oblicpiely, like those of the Chinese, but in general their direction is rectilinear. The forehead varies very much in height and angle of direction, but is usually well developed. The cheek-bones project slightly, rather more for- ward than laterally. The nose is commonly short and straight, but in certain tribes, and in some individuals of all tribes, it is long and aquiline, — always appearing, however, to be slightly depressed and widened at the lower part The mouth is commonly the best feature in the face, the lips being moderately full, and the teeth white, even, and well set. The chin is short and seldom prominent. The ears are large, standing out from the head. The whole contour of the face is oval, and the leatures, though not strongly marked, are often so regularly disposed as to be truly handsome. The form of the head is not such as accords with our ideas of elegance. It is short and broad, the transverse diameter just above the ears being nearly as great as the longitudinal, from the middle of the forehead to the occiput. It is, at the same time, rather more elevated than usual among barbarous races, rising highest at tlie coronal region. The head is remarkably flat behind, a peculiarity that is most striking in the women, from its contrast witli the long, graceful oval, which we are accustomed to admire in the female head. The foregoing general description is applicable to all the tribes of Polynesia. But there are certain minor peculiarities which distin- guish the inhabitants of the diiierent groups from one another, and which require to be noticed. The natives of the Samoan and Tongan Islands are a fine-looking people. They are generally tall and well-pniportioned, with full, rounded faces and limbs, but without that grossness and la.vity of fibre common in the Taliitians. Their features, though not always regular, are generally pleasing; and in j,.i.ticular, the forehead is remarkable for its ample developeinent, which, with the breadth between the eyes, gives to the countenance an expression of noble- P O r, Y N E S T A. 11 ness and dignity. The people of Tonga are perhaps a little darker in colour, and of rather more hardy make than their northern neigh- bours, whom they otherwise closely resemble. Of the New Zealanders, the following description is taken from our notes made on the spot : — They are a fine race, evidently of the pure Polynesian stock, but inferior, as might be expected, to the indolent natives of the tropical islands in the regularity and elegance of their physiognomy. They have neither the round, swelling muscles, nor the soft contour of face, which distinguish the Tahitians and Samoans; but they are strongly formed, with hard, sinewy tiesh, and bold, well- defined features. In complexion they are a shade darker than the islanders before mentioned. The forehead is often high, but slopes backward ; the eyes are rather small, black, and piercing ; the nose, which is their most distinguishing feature, is frequently aquiline, and so prominent, that its ridge forms a straight line with the receding forehead. Altogether, a New Zealander, in complexion, form, and profile, comes very near a North American Indian. Some voyagers have believed that they saw in the natives of New Zealand at least two distinct races of men, of which one approached the yellow Polynesian, and the other the black Papuan family. The latter, they say, are distinguished by their shorter stature, darker com- plexion, and frizzled hair. Our observations did not confirm the correctness of these statements. It appeared to us that the physical differences were no greater than are seen in every country between different classes of people, — between the well-fed, luxurious idler, and the half-starved, ill-clad labouring man. We saw many stinted forms and dark complexions among them, but no instance of what could properly be termed frizzled or woolly hair. The natives of the Society Islands are a handsome, but effeminate people. The difference between the higher and tiie lower classes is particularly remarkable in the taller stature and bulkier forms, fre- quently overloaded with fat, of the former. The forehead is of good height, but retreats, and narrows towards the top. The inhabitants of the Low Archipelago arc a very dark-skinned race, with harsh, irregular features, sometimes short and thick, and sometimes aquiline and bold. Their forms usually indicate strength and activity, and the expression of their countenances is stern and fierce. The Marquesans have the reputation of being the iiandsomcst of the Polynesian tribes; and if we may judge from some individuals of 13 E T n N O G U A P H Y. both sexes whom we saw at Oahii, this reputation is not undeserved. Thev were of the middle size, elcsjantly proportioned, with small and ro!j;idar features. Tiioy laekcd, however, the intellectual expression given by the expanded and lofty brow of the Samoans. The Sandwich Islanders resemble the Tahitians, though of darker hue. The difference, also, between the chiefs and common people, is still more strongly marked, the former being generally large, and loaded with flesh, while the latter are commonly rather small and meagre. The head, in this people, as well as in the other tribes of Eastern Polynesia, although broad behind, diminishes in width towards the frontal region, and appears as though compressed at the temples. But the characteristic which distinguishes the Hawaiians from all the other islanders of the Pacific, is a slight projection of the mouth, which produces or is accompanied by a hollowness in the lower part of the cheek, and a peculiar pouting expression of the lips. We have not found this trait especially noted by any observer, with the exception of M. P. E. Botta, (son of the celebrated historian,) who visited these islands as naturalist on board the ship Le Heros, and has published his observations in the Annales des Voyages for 1831. He says, " The mouth is large, and presents in the form of the lips a cha- racter which would enable me to distinguish a Sandwich Islander among any people on the earth. The upper lip, instead of being arched, as with Europeans, seems square. The line which it traces rises straight up from the corner of the mouth, and then, turning at a right angle, becomes horizontal. It is, moreover, very near the nose, which is commonly flat and broad." In the course ot >>\\r voyage we saw, at most of the Polynesian groups. Sandwich Islanders, who had left vessels on board of which they had served, and taken up their residence among the natives, adopting their habits and mode of dress; — yet we were always able to distinguish them at first sight from the rest. The people of the Union Group (Fakaafo, &,c.,) resembled very closely those of Samoa, except, as has been before remarked, that they were of a sonicwiiat ligiiter hue, a fact the more remarkable, as they live on a low flat coral island, only nine degrees from the equator. They are of good size, well formed, with smooth skins and little beard. Their hair also, for some reason, seemed to be thinner than usual, and some of them were partially imld. This circum.stance may serve to account for the fact that among the articles which they brought ofl" for sale were several packages of false hair, neatly put up for wearing. POLYNESIA. 13 At Dcpcyster's Group, ten degrees farther west, are found people speakiiifr ,hc same language with those of the last-mentioiied islands, but of very different personal appearance. In colour, they are as dark as tlio New Zealanders. Their hair is thick and bushy, and in some slightly frizzled. They differ from all tlie other Polynesians in having iihundant beards. Their skin also is rough to the touch, as in the Molaucsiaus. For reasons which will be hereafter given, we are inclined to believe that some admi.vture from the neigiibouring negro tribes has given rise to these pccuharities. ClIARACTEn.* Tiie trait with which a stranger is first struck, in his intercourse with the Polynesian islanders, is a general gaiety and good humour, a desire to please, and a willingness to be amused, which are not only in themselves attractive, but which gratify us the more when we re- member tlie cold gravity of the American aborigines, or the sullen- ness and irritable pride of the natives of Australia. On the other hand, we find in the natives of the Caroline Archipelago, or at least of some groups in it, the same degree of good humour, accompanied by a real gooil nature and kindliness of heart, of which it is too often, among the Polynesians, but a deceptive indication. Connected, perhaps, with this is an extreme fickleness in their passions and purposes, a great susceptibility to new impressions, and a readiness to adopt new customs and new modes of tiiinking, — in which last characteristic they differ strikingly from most savage and many civilized nations. ' Xdtliini: is iiiorc common In the \vritinj,'s of many voyagers tlian such phrases as Ihc lullowini; :— " These natives, like all siivaiies, are cruel anil treacherous ;" — " The levity anil lieklcness ol'lhe savage cliiracter ;"— " The tendency to suiierstition, which is (Innid anions; „11 uncivilized tribes;" — "The parentnl allbctions which warm the most savage hi^art," \:c. These expressions are evidently loinidcd on a locsc idea that a cer- tain sameness uC character prevails among harharous races, and especially that some passion.-i and leelings arc found strongly developed in all. .\ little considersilion will show that this view must W- erroneous. It is civilization which produces \iniforTiiity. The yellow and lilack races of the I'acific, iidiahitiug contiguous islands, dillir more wid1^^^ . 18 ET UN or. RAP II Y. of the Marqucsans ; traits in whidli they surpass all the other Poly- nesians, and wliich liavo hitherto rendered every attempt to civilize them unavailing. The inllucnce of the political state of the islanders upon their cha- racter, will be exhibited in treating of the various governments of Polynesia. IIELKJION— THK TABU. It is not intended to give iiere a complete account, or even a general outline of the institutions and customs of the Oceanic islanders; only those will be mentioned wiiich seem peculiar to the ditl'orcnt races, and which serve to distingui-sh them from one another. I'nder this head must be ranked the institution of the tiihu, whidi seems to be confined to the Polynesian race, except in those instances where it has been borrowed from them l)y some of the neighbouring tribes. The word tdbu, or tapu, is u.sed, like mo.st words of tliis language, either as a noun, an adjective, or a verb. It may be defined as a law, or restric- tion, wliich derives its sanction from religion. The latter particular constitutes the only singularity of the system. Many of the tabus, or social regulations, arc, no doubt, strange enough, — but not more so than we find among most savage and many civilized nations. It is the circumstance that these regulations, so multifarious and min "te, are observed not merely as laws but as religious ordinances, and t. their tran.sgression i^3 considered a sin as well as a crime, that tjives to the institution its remarkable character. We are not altogetiier with- out examples of similar laws in our own code. Those which relate to disturbances of the Sabbath, and to the sanctity of the marriage tie, are instances of the force which human enactmeuts derive from the precepts of religion. Nor are the Polynesians the only people who have been governed by sucli regulations. The laws of Muses, ema- nating from a divine authority, have drawn from tliat source a vitality which has preserved them in full vigour to this day. Among the Jews it is tabu to eat certain kinds of meat, or to oiler in sacrifice any thing that has a blemish, — or to touch certain animals termed un- clean, &,c. The Mahometan code, tlie work of an earthly lawgiver, derives from its suppo.sed divine origin a force superior to tliat of any ordinary laws; — to those who submit to its injunctions it is tabu to eat pork and drink wine, — or to omit certain ablutions, — or to take food during a certain month from sunrise to sunset, &c. The institu- P () I, Y N K H I A. 10 tioiis of Tiyc.urKtis nro nnofhor example, owinp; their nuthority loss to their own excellence, or to the rank of the le^rislator, tlinn to the solemn oath hy whicii he enforced their observance, and to the mys- tery of iiis death. With the Fiacedeinonians it was tabu to use silver money, to wear certain clothes, to eat certain dishes, ami the like. These examples may (five us a clue to the probable ori;j[in of the tabu-system. If the individual to whom the Polynesians owe their present civil and religions code, for such in fact it is, was one who claimed to conunuiiicate with divine powers, or to possess superna- tural attributes, his |)rocepts would have, in the eyes of a i)eo[)lo so strongly indtued with religious feeling, an authority infuiitely supe- rior to that which they could derive from any other source. That such was actually the case, would seem probable from certain pecu- liarities in the language and cust«ins of the natives. In most of the groups, the word iiliki, (or ariki, ali'i, ariU, &c.,) is the usual word for chief In the dialect of New Zealand, however, which has retained many features of the original Polynesian tongue that have been else- where lost, the term (niki is a|)[)lied to an individual in a tribe who is considered to have received, by hereditary descent, a pecidiar rank and .sanctity, entitling him to certain ob.servances which are rendered to no others, and making his person inviolate in war. lie has, how- ever, no authority what.soever over the other freemen of a tribe. In Lee's vocabulary, xriki is rendered " a representative of God, — a priest," and wakariki, " making an ariki or priest.'' Thi.s, though not strictly correct, is perhaps as gooil a translation as could be given. In Samoan, d/i'i is chief, and lui'ti/i'i, priest; it seems likely that the latter was originally the same word with the former, and that the par- ticle I'd has lieen i)refixed for the sake of distinction. In short, we may suppose that the author of the tabu-code was a person, who, in the originsil seat of the Polynesian race, united the power of a ruler and lawgiver to the dignity of a chief-priest, and per- haps of an inspired being. From the latter circumstance, his laws or tabus, whether promulgated as divine commands or not, would be received and obeyed as such, and would retain their force, from this cause, long after the legislator was forgotten, llis descendants, lind- ing the duties of their religious office less to their taste than the enjoy- ments of civil power, miglit, like the Tjastern caliphs, devote them- selves chielly to the latter, while retaining the name {aliki), and perhaps much of the homage belonging of right to the former. Such 80 ET II NOti It A \> II V. BCPms to liiivt' Im'oh nciicriilly tlio cnso. In Now Zortlniid, iiloiio, the civil mitliority lias Ikhmi lost, and only tlu< rolitrioiis (liu;nity rctaiiu'd. Ill Samoa, a sciiaralion lias also Ih-imi I'tli'dcd boUvciMi tlio two olliccM, mid a nmv word t'oniu'd to dcsiiriiato tho Hacerdotal class. In all the otluT <][roii|)s llicrii is, [(ropcrly spcakin^x. n" iiricslliotKl. 'riicru arc certain individuals to wlioin llu' naiiif ol' tii/iiiit/n. (or tiiliitijii, tti/iiiyti, tahuiiit, tiiliiKi, iVc.,) is jriven, who take cliarni' ol llic loinpUis and inia^ri's, pi-rrorin ri'lijrions ritt^s, conimuniiato with the deities, &o. Except when enu'a^cd in the exercise of these Iniictions, they are not regarded as persons of peculiar sanctity, anil enjoy no consideration whatever lii^yond that which sprinj^s from their personal rank and wealth, or their inllweiice with the chiefs. 'I'lu) word hy which Ihoy arc called sij^nilies an artisan, or one who follows a particular profes- sion ; a house or canoe builder, a carver, a tattooer, a director of funeral ceremonies, iVc, are all called by this name, as well as a priest. Those of the latter class must, therefore, be considered merely as persons appointed by the real priests, — i. e., the i//i/ii, or chiefs, — to j^o throuf^h the drutlj^eries of their ollice, with which they are unwilling to be troubled. But in refusing to exercise the ordinary functions ol the priestly station, the chiefs have been careful not to renounce the dignity and immunities connected with it. The extraordinary personal respect evinced towards them cannot bo accounted for from their civil rank alone, since it is nearly as profound among those democratic tribes, who, like the Nukuhivans, pay little regard to their authority, as under the despotic governments of Tahiti and Hawaii. It is tabu lor a common man to enter without permissiontlie liou.se of a chief, or to wear a garment belonging to him, or to stantl in his presence at cer- tain times, or to do other acts savouring of undue familiarity and dis- respect. The penalty does, indeed, vary accoriling to the nature of the government. In the Manpiesas, the otl'ender would be mulcted of some of his jiroperty, by way of expiation; in Tonga, this would be accompanied by .severe [ler.sonal chastisement; while under the iron rule which jirevailed in the Sandwich Islands, death was the only atonement. A strong argument in favour of this view of the origin of the tabu, is found in the fact that on nearly if not (piite all the groups, there have been, at a very late period, men who have been regarded by the natives as partaking of the divine nature, — in short, as earthly gods. I'OI, V NEHI A. 31 At the Nnvipnfor TNlandN two hiicIi iiidividiinlH, fiithor mid son, l)y nariu", 'l'iiniiif(iiii(/fi, liad, lor many yi^irs, down to tlio period of tlm first arrival of tlio iniMKioimrios, lii-ld tin; iiilialiitaiitH in alavi! in which we know of living men having been thus deified, they nwi chiefs of high rank, and not ordinary priests {Itijinja), or persuius performing the sacerdotal functions. 22 ET 11 N OGR A r II V. M YTJrOI.On Y. The religious belief of the Polynesians reminds us of the classical mythology. There is a small numljer of gods of the first class, com- monly not more than ten, who have various attributes. One is the creator of the islands, another the god of war, another of thieving, another the ruler of the region of departed spirits, &,c. After these come a multitude of inferior deities, gods of the sea and the winds ; tutelar divinities of islands, towns, and families, with malignant sprites haunting the woods, caves, and desert places, whose delight it is to torment and annoy the human race. Many of the gods are said to have been men deified after death, or sometimes, perhaps, during life. The first rulers of a country frccpiently received divine honours. This 'vns the case with 'Oro at Raiatea, Taugiia at Rarotonga, and Atea at the Sandwich Islands. With one, or perhaps two exceptions, tiiere was no deity who was the object of worship tiiroughout the greater part of Polynesia. The gods of Samoa were unlike those of New Zealand, nor did the latter country have the same objects of worship as the Society Islands. The eastern groups, however, (Tahiti, Rarotonga, Hawaii, &,c.,) had several of their gods in common. Tane, Tu, Rongo, (Rono or lloo,) were wor- shipped in most of them, and appear to have been of Tahitian origin. The exception alluded to, is in the case of Tangaloa, (or Tarawa, Tanaloa, Taaroa,) who is worshipped in all the islands, except, per- haps, New Zealand. He is regarded as self existent, and as the creator of the earth, or at least the islands of the sea, and of the human race. His usual epithet at Samoa is Tangaloa layi, heavenly Tanga- loa. At Tahiti and Rarotonga he is termed Taaroa or Tangaroa nut, great Taaroa. At the little newly discovered island of Fakaafo, the natives spoke of him with great awe, as " Tangaloa i litnga i tc langi,'' Tangaloa above in the heavens. At Depeyster"s Group the natives at first refused to pronounce the name, and then said that Tangaloa was sacred or taini on their island. It seems likely that this was the original deity of the Polynesians, perhaps, before tliey left their pris- tine seat in the East Indian Archipelago. In the Tongan traditions, he is represented as living at liulolu, a kind of terrestrial paradise, situated far to the northwest, and sending thence his two sons to people the islands. » i^ POLYNESIA. 23 Another name, more generally tliffused than common, is that of Maui or Moui. At the FrieniUy Islands this is the god that supports the earth, and is the cause of earthquakes. Another name given to him is Mafuil-e, and by this appellation {MafiWe or Mafu'e,) he is known at the Navigator Islands as the god of earthquakes ; but the deity on whom the islands rest is called Ti'iti'i Aiahnrja. At Tahiti iMaui is, or rather was, another name for Taaroa, and was applied to him in the capacity of the god of earthquakes. He also, according to one story, created the sun and the islands of the sea; the latter, by dragging after him, through the seas, from east to west, an immense rock, {papa,) from which fragments were broken off' and formed the islands ; after which he left the great land to the east, where it still exists.* In the mytliology of New Zealand, Maui holds the same place, as principal deity and creator of the world, which is given to Tangaloa elsewhere. The natives often speak of two Mauis, the elder and the younger, Maui-mua and Maui-potiki, who are sometimes reprpsented as the gods who created mankind, and sometimes as the first men. At Hawaii one of the ancient kings is said to have had four sons, whose names were Maui-mua, Mcui-hope, Maui-tiitii, and Maui-aUihma. The latter succeeded him on the throne, and the history .says, that " He went to the sun and chased his beams, be- cause they flew so rapidly ; also, that he dragged with a hook these islands from Maui to Taula, towing them after him in a canoe ; and had those in the canoe landed safe at Hilo, on Hawaii, then all the islands in the group would have been united in one, but one of the party looking behind him, the hook broke, and the expected union failed of its consummation. "f Here is an extraordinary confusion of the names and traditions of the three last-mentioned groups. Maui- mua and Maui-hope correspond precisely in meaning to the two Mauis of New Zealand; Maui-tiitii and Maui-atalana, present, in the last term of each, the compound name, Tiitii-atalaja, of Samoa (the j( always becoming m in Hawaiian). Fiuallj, the traditions respect- ing the last-named Maui are evidently derived from those which pre- vail in Tahiti. Of the probable origin of this confusion we shall have occasion to speak hereafter. 'riki or Ti'i is another term of general prevalence, variously ap- • Sec l''i)vslrr'.s "Olisrrvatioiis mndc during a Voyngc roiiml the World," p. 341 ; also, lillis'.s l'i)lyiic'sinii licsciirclii's, vol. i. idiiip. v. f Mo'oololo lluwaii, in llic llawaiiiin SpectnlDf, vol. ii. p. 'JIS. 24 E T II N O G R A I' H V. plied. Ellis says tiiat the Tahitians considered Tii and Taaroa to be one and the same being, but that Taaroa dwelt in the region of chaos, and Tii in the world of light. In other traditions of the same people, Tii is given as the name of the first man. Tii was also tiie usual word for idol or image ; perhaps, because the first images that were made were those of this deity, or of Taaroa, under this form. In Rurotonga Tiki was the name of the first man, who v.r.o **upposed, after death, to have received dominion over the region of departed spirits ; a person who died was said to have "gone to Tiki." Tiki in Nukuhivan and Tii in Hawaiian signify an image. In the dialect of New Zealand, hei signifies an ornament suspended from the neck, and the compound term hei-tiki is applied to the little distorted images of jade which are thus worn. It has been seen that the reduplicate form, Tiitii, in Samoan, signifies the god who supports the islands, like Moui, in Tonga. It seems probable that the Polynesians originally recognised but one deity, who had dilferent appellations, according to his different attributes and oflUces. As the creator of the world, he was termed Tangaloa ; as the sustainer of the earth, (or, perhaps, originally, as the preserving power,) he was called Maui, and in the form in which he revealed himself to man, he had the name of Tiki. The meaning and application of these names has, however, been much confused, and undergone various alterations. The inferior divinities, who vary from one group to another, are generally supposed, by the natives tiiemselves, to have been merely deified men. u COSMOGONY. Two stories are prevalent among the Samoans with regard to the creation of the world, or, at least, of their islands. Both attribute the work to their great god, Tangaloa. According to one account, while the god was fishing, his hook caught in the rocks at the bottom of the sea, and in drawing it up, he raised with it the whole group of Samoa. The other story represents him as forming the land by throwing down large stones from the skies, from whicii his daughter, Tuli, (snipe,) made the different islands. She afterwards planted them with vegetables, one of which was a kind of vine, from whose stem a god, named ^'gui, tbrmed the first man, by marking out the body and members of a human being. In Tonga the first of the.se stories is the one generally received. POLYNESIA. 8S They add to the Samoan account that when the god Tangaloa had raised tlie islands to tlieir present altitude, his hook broke and left them ill that situation ; otherwise, they would have continued to rise until tliey formed one great land. The New Zealanders and Tahi- tians have the same account ot' their islands having been drawn up by a god while fishing, and both give to this god the name of Maui, which, as we have before shown, is but another appellation for Tan- galoa. The Tahitians have, besides, other stories, one of which, — to the effect, that the islands are fragments broken off from an immense rock, — has been already given. The word for rock is jjapa, which is also the name of the wife of Taaroa, and from this source some con- fusion may have arisen, as some of the traditions relate that the islands were born of Taaroa and Papa.* The Hawaiians, according to the Mo'o-olelo, before quoted, have the same story, that the islands were born of Papa, the wife of Atea, the progenitor of the human race. The belief, so generally prevalent, of the islands having been raised by a divinity, from the bottom of the sea, will appear natural enough if we consider the circumstances and character of the people. The situation of their islands, mere specks of land, surrounded by what must have appeared to the inhabitants an interminable ocean, and the fact that the Polynesians are emphatically a nation of fishermen, would be sufficient to suggest the idea. When the priests, to whom the religion and mythology of the race were especially committed, were called upon to account for the formation of the land which they inhabited, they would, of course, refer it to their great god Tangaloa, or -Maui, and no other mode would be so likely to occur to them as that by which they themselves had frequently drawn up fragments of coral rock from the bottom of the sea. The fact that two or more stories are sometimes current on the same group, shows in what light they are regarded by the natives, — not as articles of their religious creed, which they are bound to be- lieve, but merely as traditions handed down from their fathers, which, though respectable for their antiquity, may, after all, not be true. Their opinions on this subject, therefore, differ widely from those which they hold with regard to the existence and power of tlieir gods, of which none of them entertain a doubt. Pulyiicsian Kcsearches, vol. i. p. a60, Am. edit. 26 ETH.N OU II A !• II V. W O II S II 1 P. If we may judge from what appears in the eastern groups, the original form of worship of the Polynesians was no less simple than their theology. In Samoa, Tonga, and New Zealand, their divinities are regarded as spiritual beings, and approached only by prayers, invocations, penances, offerings of first fruits, libations, and similar forms. They have neither temples nor altars, nor, properly speaking, either idols or sacrifices. In Samoa, indeed, tiiey had a few inani- mate objects of reverence, which were worshipjied by a small portion of the population. Mr. Heath says, " A branch of bamboo, set up- right, with a bunch of cocoa-nut fibres tied at the top, was worshipped by part of Manono, a sacred stone by another district, and some families had roughly-carved wooden idols, as representations of de- ceased chiefs, to whom they paid religious homage.'* In the latter custom, of preserving the effigies of deified chiefs, we probably see the origin of the idolatrous worship which prevails in eastern Poly- nesia. In Tonga they have a few images as in Samoa, but the chief peculiarity in their system is a certain kind of human sacrifice, which differs from that of the Tahitians in its mode and object. On the sickness of a chief, it is usual to strangle an infant belonging to the same family, — sometimes his own child, — who.se death it is supposed will be accepted by the gods, in lieu of that of the sick person. In New Zealand there are no idols of any description, and the only approach to human sacrifice is the custom of immolating several slaves at the death of their master; which, liowever, is done rather out of respect to him, and to provide him with attendants in his future existence, than for the purpose of appeasing the gods. In the eastern groups we meet with a wholly different form of worship, with sensual and shocking rites. In Tahiti and Rarotonga the word marae, which in the Navigator and Friendly Islands signi- fies merely the public place or lawn in the centre of a village, is ap- plied to certain .sacred enclosures of stone, containing two or three houses, where are deposited the hideous idols which they worship, and in or before wliich their sacrifices are performed. In the Sand- wich Islands similar enclosures exist, bi\t with the name of heiau. In the Marquesas the maae is merely a grove, containing idols, and • Polynesian, vol. i. No. IS. 1' () I, Y N K S I A. 27 not surrounded by an enclosure. In all these groups human sacri- fices were coniinon. Tlio individuals selected were men of low rank, who had made themselves obnoxious to the chiefs or priests, and who were put to death as much to glut the vengeance of their oppressors as to propitiate the favour of tiic divinity. The native superstitions on the subjects of sorcery, inspiration, omens, apparitions, the worship of animals, and other similar matters, are not so j)eculiar and distinctive as to require a notice here. Their ideas, however, with respect to a future state, merit attention. At the Navigator Islands dilferent opinions prevail. All believe in the existence of a large island, situated far to the northwest, called Piil6tu, which is the residence of the gods. Some suppose that while the souls of common people perish with their bodies, those of the chiefs are received into this island, which is described as a terrestrial ely- sium, and become there inferior divinities. Others hold, (accordi ig to Mr. Heath,) that the spirits of the departed live and work in a dark subterraneous abode, and are eaten by the gods. A third, and very common opinion is, that the souls of all wlio die on an island, make their way to the western extremity, where they plunge into the sea; but what then becomes of them is not stated. The rock fronj which they leap, in the island of Upolu, was pointed out to us; the natives term it " Fatu-asofia" which was rendered tlie "jumping-off stone.'' Some one or other of ti^ese three opinions prevails in every part of Polynesia. At the Friendly Islands, that which relates to the i.sland lying to the westward, called by them Buh'itu, is the mo.st common. In New Zealand the dei)arted spirits are supposed to proceed to the northern end of the island, where, from a rock, called ReiiKja, they descend into the sea, and pass through it till they reach the islands of the Three Kings, a small cluster, about thirty miles from the North Cape, on which is placed the elysium of the islanders. At the Society Islands, according to Mr. Ellis, they supposed that the soul, on leaving the body, was conducted to the^o, or place of night, where it was eaten by the gods, — not at once, but by degrees, — and after it had three times undergone this operation, it acquired the rank and attributes of a divinity. They also believe in the existence of a para- dise, termed by them Rohutu noanoa, or sweet-scented llohutu, which was the abode of the gods and of deified spirits. It was situated near a high mountain, called Tamahani nnauna, glorious Tamahani, on the northwest side of the island of Ilaiatea. Rohutu may be a cor- ruption of Purotu. Tlie Rarotongans, says Mr. Williams, " repre- 28 ETIINOGR A I'll Y. ■^1*! seiitcd their paradise as a very lonsr house, encircled with heantifid slirubs and llowors, wliich never lost their bloom or fraj^rauce, and whose inmates enjoyed iinwitlieriiiresent the abcxle of spirits as a subterranean hades, and those which make it a terrestrial paradise, lying to the westward, have probably a common origin, and owe their dilference to the dif- ferent acceptations of the same word. H J CIVIL POLITY. A very simple form of society exists in all the Polynesian islands. There are usually three classes or ranks, — chiefs, landholders, and common people. In New Zealand, however, the first is wanting, and in the Sandwich Islands the second. The relative powers of the three classes also vary at tiie dirterent groups. On this subject it will be necessary to enter into some particulars. At the Navigator Islands the government is nominally, and in part actually in the hands of the whole bo I, Y N KHI A. US two iliviNiouM, onstcru arid wostorn. 'V\w fornior incliKli^s Ifaii, or Dow Island, mid idl to tlio I'liHt of it; tlio liiiter, tlioso lyiii^ in tlio wust ot this isliiiid, tiiirty-iiiiiu in number 'I'lic inliultitants of tlio former are independent, and still in their siivii^e stiite, Imviiijui little comma- niciition with one another. TIioho of tlie latter arc under the sway of iWjdiKi, or AiKiti, commonly called Chain Island. This supremacy is of modern date, and has been gained by coiKpiest. WIkmi the other islands were first visited by sliips, they were found inlialnted by a numerous and warlike population. About the beginning of the present century, the natives of Ngani'i began to accpiire a superioritj in arms over the rest. They attacketl one island after another, de- stroying most o*" llio people, and carrying the remainder captives to their own island, where they became the slaves of their coiKiuerors. In this way, thirty-eight of the I'auinolus were comi>lctely depopu- lated. On the introduction of Christianity, which took place about twenty-five years ago, through the agency of native 'i'ahilian mis- NionarieB, many of the captives were allowed to return to their several islands, — remaining, however, under the dominion of Ngana, which they consider the metropolis. The number upon each of the subject islands is very small, while on Chain Island there are said to be three or four thousand. How it happened that this peoph? should have originally obtained this superiority in war, cannot easily be explained. Their island is surpassed in size by several others. It has, however, a shallow lagoon, abi)unding in fish, which gives them a gootl supply of food, and the island is said to bo a grove of cocoa-nut trees from one end to the other. The probability is, that it hud always a some- what larger population, in proportion to its size, than the others, and being situated at some distance from the rest of the group, it was less exposed to sudden attack, and its people were more enterprising. A.s, moreover, they have always kept up a fretpiont communication with Tahiti, they were probably supplied with firearms sooner than the peo|)le of the other islands. The Chain Islanders acknowledge no king, but have several chiefs, who owe their iniluenco to various circumstances of birth, valour, reputed wisdom, &c. The state of society bears a general resem- blance to that which prevails in New Zealand. The Paumotus are generally considered as under the Tahitian government, but the sub- jection is merely nominal. The Society Islanders, in fact, stand in some dread of their fierce and warlike neighbours. At the Marquesas there is less distinction of rank than at any other rtrr < ill 36 ETHNOGRAPHY. group. There are certain persons to whom the title of aiki (or, more commonly, hakaiki) is given, but it procures them no power or influence beyond wliat they would otherwise possess. All that they derive from this distinction consists in certain tokens of respect which are paid to thein, in accordance with the regulations of the tabu- system. The rest of the people are landiiolders, or their relatives and tenants. A general feeling of equality and personal independence prevails, as in New Zealand. There is, however, this difference, that the slave-class being for the most part wanting, the pride of superi- ority is not felt. The jNlanjuesans have all the ferocity and all the free spirit of the New Zeaianders, and are far more sensual and dis- honest ; but the sullen hauteur which we find in the latter is very rare among the former. Tliey are, on the contrary, a frank, social, light-liearted people, very agreeable in a brief intercourse, but with few good qualities 1o attract on a longer intimacy. Besides the hakaiki, there is usually, in every tribe, a toa, or chief warrior, whose business it is to lead, or rather precede them to battle. But even there his authority extends but little beyond the right of advising, and every man fights or runs away according to his individual notions of propriety. In the naval branch of their service the same democratic principle prevails. Their war-canoes arc large, and composed of a number of pieces ; each piece frecjuently lias its separate owner, whose consent must bo ol)tained before the whole can be put together. In the Sandwich Islands, before the adoption of their present written constitution, a peculiar form of government prevailed, differing from the rest in the absence of a mid,'tii, spreadinjr out on all sides of the head. Sometimes these curls arc seen much lon<;er, falling; down to the middle of the hack. It is, however, very scjidom allowed to i^row naturally. The younj^ hoys have it cut very close, and sometimes shavetl to the skin, like the Tahilian.s. In ^irls, heforo marriajre, it is allowed to fi[row long, and is coloured white hy washinjj; it with a solution of lime, except a portion around the crown, which is plastered with a black pi<,'ment. After marria^'o, it is either cut to the length of one or two inches, or friz/led out like that of the men ; in hoth cases it is frequently soaked in colouring liquids, either red or black. The men in general have their hair dressed so as to form an immenso semi-globular mass, covering the top, back, and sides of the head. The arrangement of this cliereliar is performed for the chiefs by professional barbers, and is a work of great labour. Six hours are sometimes occupied in dress- ing a head, and the process is rej)eated at intervals of two or three weeks. It is probably to guard against disarranging this work, that the piece of bamboo which is placed under the neck in sleeping is employed, instead of the ordinary pillow. I'or the same purpose, the natives usually wear, during the day, a sa/a or kerchief of very thin gauze-like paper-cloth, which is thrown over the hair and tied closely around the head, so as to have very much the appearance of a turban. The colour of the Feejeeans is a chocolate-brown, or a hue midway between the jet-black of the negro, and the brownish yellow of the Polynesian. There are, however, two shades very distinctly marked, like the blonde and brunette complexions in the white race, besides all the intermediate gradations. In one of these shades the brown predominates, and in tlie other the copper. They do not belong to distinct castes or classes, but are found indiscriminately among all ranks and in all tribes. The natives are aware of the distinction, and call the lighter-coloured people \'iti ndamiiiiihimii, "red Fcejeeans," but they do not seem to regard it as any thing which requires or admits of explanation. These red-skinned natives must not be con- founded with the Tongu-Viti, or individuals of mixed Tongan and Feejeean blood, of whom there are many on some parts of the group. CHAK.VCTIMI. It is not a little remarkable that though the Feejeeans are an in- genious, shrewd, quick-witted people, surpassing the Polynesians in 18 50 ETHNOORAIMI V. tlicir kuowledife of various arts, and having a more regular and arti- ficial system of government, tliey are yet spoken of by all voyagers as savages, and uniformly treated as such, w liile the Polynesians are regarded ratlier as a semi-civilized race. Nor can there be any doubt that this liistinction, so \inivcrsally and involuntarily made, is a just one. Yet it is dillicult to perceive, at the lirst view, tlie grounils on wjiicli it rests. ^\ e shall be told tiiat civilization belongs to the character more than to the intellect ; but granting this to be correct, we may still be at a loss to discover in what respect the Feejceans are inferior to the Polynesians. The portrait which we have had to draw of the latter is by no means prepossessing. If the Feejeeans are ferocious in war, without natural alfection, parricides and cannil)als, there are few of the Polynesian tribes to whom tlie same description will not apply. Tliat proneness to sensuality, moreover, wliicli is common among the latter is wanting in the former, and the domestic lies are more sacred among them. The truth })erhaps is, tiiat tiie ililferenco in the character, as in the piiysiognoniy of the two races, lies not so much in any pafticular trait, as in a general debasement of tlie whole, — a lower graile of moral feeling, and a greater activity of the evil passions. Tlie Poly- nesians seem to be cruel, dishonest, and selfish, rather because they have always been so, and no better path lias ever been opened to them, than from any violent pmpensity to those vices. The proof of this is found in the fact that a very brief intercourse with foreigners has, in most cases, been suilicient to induce them to lay aside their worst practices, and adopt many of the im|)rovements of I'ivilization. But the Feejeeans are by nature and inclination a bloodthirsty, treacherous, and rapacious peojile. Their evil (jualities do not lie merely on the surface of the character, but have their roots deep in their moral organizaticm. In Ibrty years of intercourse with tiiesame class of civilized men to whom the Polynesians were indebted for their earliest instructions in many valuable arts, they have learned from them notliinti but the use of lirearms. — and though no visiter can have tailed to e.vpress his horror at tlie customs of eaniiibalism, infanticide, and human sacrilice, not the slightest etfect has iil-en pro- duced upon the natives. The Feejeean may be said to dilfer from tlie Polynesian as the wolf from the dog; both, when wild, are per- haps eijually fierce, but the ferocity of the one may be easily subdued, while that of the other is deep-.seated and uiitameable. One (juality, however, for which the Feejeeans are eminently distin- M E L A N E S t A. 61 ffuishetl, and in which they differ widely from the Polynesians, is their disposition to treachery, and, connected with it, their cai)acity for dis- simulation. During our intercourse with them, we iiad continually occasion to observe this trait in their dealings with us and with one another. They live a life of constant suspicion, no one daring to trust even the members of his own family. A native never leaves his home unarmed ; and the people in every town are constantly on the watch against a sudden invasion from tiio neighbouring tribes, however apparently peaceful. Their internal history, as related by them- selves, is full of instances of perfidy and treason. The group is divided into a number of independent states, connected among them- selves by peculiar relations, somewhat as in the little republics of ancient Greece. Among these states constant intrigues and niiichina- tions are carried on, and that with a degree of shrewdness and craft that frequently e.xcited our astonishment. All the arts of that baser species of state policy which we are accustomed to look upon as the growth of a corrupt civilization, are thoroughly understood and con- tinually practised by tjiis extraordinary race of savages. To weaken a rival state by secretly exciting its dependencies to revolt, — to stir up one class of society against another, in order to take advantage of their dissensions, — to make an advantageous treaty with a powerful foe, by sacrificing a weak ally, — to corrupt the fidelity of adiierents, by bribing them with the anticipated spoil of their own master, — to gain a battle before it is ibught, by tampering with the leaders of the opposing force, — all these, and many other tricks of the Machiavelian school, are perfectly familiar to the s\ibtlc chieftains of Viti. In treat- ing of the system of government which prevails in the group, we sh;ill have occasion to show more distinctly the inllucnce which this trait in the native character has upon their political relations. 1) i:i. KilON. The Feejeeans, though not perhaps so strongly influenced bv the devotional sentiment as their eastern neighbours, are vet much atlaciied to their religiovis observances. Many of these seem to have been Ixir- rowed from the Polynesians, es[)ecially the tahit, (or, as they term it, the tamhu,) which has the same force amoi\g them as with tlie others, though it is not, perliaps, of such \iniver.sal ap[)lication. Much of the Vitian mythology aj)pears to be also of Tongan derivation. E T II N O O R A P U V. According to the universal belief of the natives, the supreme deity, and governor of their island-world, is a being termed Ndeiigi'i. He is represented as having the form of a serpent in the head and one side of the body, while the rest is made of stone, by which he is rendered immortal. His residence is in a cave, in the mountiiins of Viti-levu, at a place called Nakauvandra, nearly opposite to Mbua, or Sandal- wood Bay. Earthipiakcs are supposed to be ])roduced by the gotl shifting his position, — and one of tlie Ihivibis, or distichs, which the natives frequently sing in their dances, refers to this belief: — Viikii'iiki ko Ndeyei, lacala a vaniia. Ndengei turns over. The earth trembles. The natives say that an earthquake is invariably followed by a season of fertility ; and they believe that when Ndengei is prevailed upon, by their prayers, to put an end to a famine, he does so by turning himself over, and thus causing the earth to shake. Scarcities they suppose to be produced by tlie malign interference of the inferior deities, who pray to Ndengei for food, until the trees are stripped of their fruits to supply them. No one knows the origin of Ndengei. He was first seen on the beach at Ra, in the form of a man, dressed in the native girdle of masi, or piiper-cloth, with long trains of it hanging to the earth, as is the custom among the chiefs. Not being recognised and worshipped at that place, he went to Mbcngga, where he was fir.st discovered to be a god. Rut the land was stony, and he did not like it. He looked towards Kandavu, but would not dwell there. He then went over to Rewa, and took up his abode in that district. Soon after this, a powerful god, by name Wairua, came from Tonga to llcwa, and to him Ndengei resigned the government of that town, on condition of always receiving for himself the ciioicest parts of all kiiuls of food (such as the head of the i)ig and tortoise, &c.) After living awhile in this situation, Ndengei hud an attack of leprosy, and determined to remove to Verata, which has ever since been considered impregnable. Here he resolved to be no more .seen by men, and for this purpose took the form of a serpent, as before related. According to one account, the natives hold that Ndengei created the first man and woman, though of what materials they do not say. This story, however, is directly opposed to the general belief that the MELANESIA. 53 god did not make his appearance till after the islands were peopled, and that he first ruled, in human shape, over some of the towns, — a story which reminds us of the Cretan Jove. Thus far the creed of all the islanders is the same. All, likewise, hold that Ndengei has a son, who stands at the door of his cave to receive the pra3'ers which are addressed to his father, and to act as mediator hetween him and the suppliants. But i'..d name given to this sou varies in every important district. In llewa it is Maittti ; in Mbau, Komui-NHDiil/ten'then' ; in Ovolau, Ritlxuooiiu ; in Mathuata, Rathinathina ; in Somusomu, Komai-natarusara ; and in Lakemha there are supposed to be two, — Tokai-ranihe and Tui-Lahemha. In fact, except in the circumstance of there being a single supreme ruler over the whole groi'p, the celestial governnient of the Feejee Islands appears to be modelled after the terrestrial. Each principal state has its own presiding deity, who is usually a sou of Ndengei. The infe- rior districts are ruled and protected by subordinate deities, who are commonly grandchildren of the god ; while every village has its own tutelar spirit, who is perhaps a still more distant descendant of the supreme divinity, though this is not certain. Furthermore, the same political relations which prevail between the different states, are also found among their governing deities. Thus, Somusomu, though to a certain degree independent, owns a kind of inferiority to Mbau, and may be termed a tributary ally. This the natives ascribe to the fact that at some former period the great spirit of Somusomu (whose polysyllabic name need not be repeated) met the great spirit of Mbau half-way between their resj)ective dominions, fought with him, was concpiered, and thereui)on proceeded to the mbure, or temple, of his antajjonist, and made over to him 'le town of Somu.somu. jjivins him the tama, or salute, as a superior. This tratlition probably refers to some victory gained in early times by the naval forces of Mbau over those of Somusomu. Besides the gods of districts and towns, they have others who are the deities of particular classes or professions, as Rokoht, the god of carpenters, Rakacomi, of lishcrmen. They have also mischievous and malignant spirits, who are supposed to be the cause of the petty evils which alllict men. On Lakemba, according to Mr. Cargill, there is an individual known as Mata-kalou, god-seer, whose business it is to discover and thwart the machinations of these spirits. The office is held by but one person at a time, and is hererlitary. Tiie natives also pay divine honours to disembodied souls, particularly those of their 14 04 ETIIIVOa R A PHY. ancestors; and certain animals, as the shark, land-crab, serpent, hawk, &c., are considered sacred, and reverenced, not as being themselves divine, bnt as the property of divinities. Tliere arc still other deities whose oflices and attributes are con- nected with tlic native belief respeo1in) traversed from east to. west by an immense wave, 56 ETHNOGRAPHY. Another story, which has been, no doubt, derived from their Poly- nesian neighbours, refers to the existeiico of an island called M/mrMii, situated somewhere in the ocean, but in what direction they do not know. It is represented as a terrestrial paradise, in which every species of fruit is produced without cidtivation. Tliey do not, how- ever, like the people of Samoa and Tonga, represent this island {Pii/'ilii) as the abode of their gods, or the place from whence their islands were peopled. There is no rcgidar hierarchy in this group. Every town has its mlx'fe or priest, whose business it is to consult the gods when required, and to perform various religious ceremonies. In the capital towns there is usually a mhcte km, or high priest, but it does not appear that he has any peculiar authority over the rest. Neither is the ollicc hereditary, or contined to any particular class. When a priest dies, some individual who possesses more than ordinary shrewdness, and desires to lead an easy, indolent life, determines to succeed him. He puts on a heavy, melancholy air, and pretends to dream of an event whicii is shortly to occur. He tells his dream, and if the event turns out accordingly, the chiefs and people begin to consider him a priest. By way of trying him, tiiey bring him a bowl of kava (or anygi'oia) after the usual form, and desire him to consult the gods about some business in which they are engaged. If he goes through the cere- mony to their satisfaction, and the oracle proves correct, he is forth- with installed in the vacant mhurt. The usual form of invocation is as follows. When a chief wishes to supplicate a god for the recovery of a sick friend, or the return of a canoe, or any desired object, he takes a root of kcnju and a whale's tooth to the temple, and offers them to the priest. After the kava has been brewed and drunk, the priest takes the whale's tooth in his hand, turns it over, gazes steadily at it, and then appears to be seized with a wliicli, taking its rise with tlie shock of mi I'mlhciuiikc in Chili, wns lull n.s liir as iho Bdiiiii Islands. At the Samlwii-h Ishiniis, accorilin;^ tu thi; account given by Mr. Jarvis in his History, p. »!. the water rosi', on tlio east coa.st of Hawaii, twenty Ccet above high-water mark, inundatcil the low lands, swept uway several villages, and destroyed many lives. Similar nndulations have been e.\perienccd at these islands on several occasions. If we suppo.sc (what is no way ini|irol)able) that, at some time within the last thru' or (olir thousand years, a wave ol' twice this height crossed the ocean, and swept over the Vitian Islands, it must have suhniergeil the w hole alluvial plain on the east side of Viti-levu, the most populous part ol' the group. jMultiludes would no doubt be destroyed. Others would escajM- in their canoi's, and as Mbengga is u mountainous island, in the neighbourhood of this district, it would naturally be the place of refuge for man v. MELANESIA. 57 spasm, accompanied by tremblings and involuntary motions. In this state of ecstasy he is supposed to be possessed by the deity, and what he says is looked upon as the direct response of the god to his prayers. A priest frequently pretends to receive some communication from the gods in iiis dreams, and then the people assemble to hear the message. By this device he obtains a drink of kava, and often a pro- pitiatory present, if his dreams are ominous of evil. All the people of a town frequently unite in offering a sacrifice to their tutelar divinity, to secure his favour and protection, more espe- cially from sickness. On such occasions the chief convenes his townsmen, and says to them, " Let us make a feast to the god, that we may not die." A tamhu is immediately laid upon pigs, turtle, and some other provisions, to preserve them for the ceremony. On the day appointed, every man brings his pig or other offering, with a whale's tooth, if he has one, to the temple. Here the chief advances and offiers his prayer in behalf of all, while the rest present their gifts. The priest takes the whale's tooth from the chief, and answers " Ke ndatou mbtila vakmidua," — We shall all live as one, i.e., without exception. He then supplicates the divinity to be propitious to the people, after which they return to their homes, leaving the provisions to be distributed at the pleasure of the priest. Human sacrifices are frequently offered by the high chief. They are generally prisoners taken in war. Sometimes, however, they are slaves procured by purchase from other tribes. As these, like other sacrifices, are to be eaten by the priests and people, they are usually kept for some time, and fed, till they are thought to be in good condi- tion. The victim is bound hand and foot, and roasted alive on heated stones, after the usual fashion of cooking. The body is then taken out, painted as for a festival, and carried to the temple to be presented to the god, after which it is cut up and distributed to the people. These horrible offerings are made on many occasions, and frequently out of vainglory on the pf rt of some chief. At those festivals when ordinary persons are expected to l)ring a pig, Tanoa, the old king of Mbau, always presents a human victim. When he launches a new canoe, ten or more men are slaughtered on the deck, that it may be soaked with human blood.* • From tlic Rev. David Cargill's necount. 15 59 E T II N O (J R A I' H V. O O V E R N M E N T. From these atrocities wo \villiii ai.asiri, are the Sj)arta, Athens, and Thebes of Viti. They are alternately in close alliance and at war. In the latter case, the policv v)f each belligerent is to e.vcite the dependencies of its opponent to rebellion, either by bribery, or by holding out the prospect of relief from oppression. A similar course is pursued by each city towards the important districts wliicli are subject to it. If these grow too powerftd, and begin to aspire to independence, the governing power .secretl\- foments rebellion among the inferior towns of the dependent state. Thus Ovolau, which is one of the largest islands subject to Mbau, is under the government of the chief of KI G I. A N E H I A. 69 Leinika, the principal town upon it. As this lias an excellent harbour, it hiis of late been much freciuented by shii)pin;f, anil has become the residence of many whites who have tiiken \\\y their abode among the natives. The chiefs of Mi)au imve watched with much uneasiness the increase of wealth and pov.er which their subordinate has derived from this source, and, afraid to attack him openly, so long as the re- quired tribute is regularly paid, are constantly employed in intrigues with the chiefs of the smaller towns and districts on the island, to induce them to take up arms against their legitimate ruler, in which case they would call in the intervention of Mbau, and thus give to the latter an opportunity of weakening the strength of their too powerful subject. A like game is played with Somusomu, which, though itself a "chief city," owns, as we have before stated, a certain subordination to Mbau, and is said to be spiritually subject {yguli kalou). The real cause of its inferior rank is, of course, its inability to cope with the forces of its spiritual superior. This iuai)ility, however, has been diminished of late by an unfortunate step on the part of the present king of Mbau, whose name is Tanoa. About ten years since he became unpopular with the most powerful chiefs in the capital, and a rebellion broke out, headed by members of his own family. The king was compelled to Uee, and took refuge in Somusomu, where he was received and defended with much loyalty, and thus enabled, in the end, to overpower the revolted party, and reassume his govern- ment. In retjuital for this great service, he made over to the chiefs of Somusomu the cluster of windward islands, of which Lakemba is the principal, which had previously been subject directly to Mbau. This great accession of power has so strengthened the government of Somusomu, that its allegiance to Mbau lias become very precarious. While we were in the group, a quarrel broke out between Somusomu and the town of Vuna, which is one of its tributaries. Tanoa instantly seized the opportunity to join in the contest, taking part with the rebellious town, in ho|)es of humbling his formidable dependency. Somusomu thereupon called in the assistance of Mathuata, and the contest was raging when we left the islands.* * Ciiplniii Wilkes inlorms mo thiit lie lids sirico rweivod iiilormnlion tlint Tnndii, find- ini; liis ntk'nipt ni^iiinst Soiiuisomii likely to be iinsiiecessrul, .sudiloiily made pence with it, luid lell with nil his iiiroe.s on the nlly, 'l\ii-.Mathuiit;i, burned several of his '.owns, and ravaged a great part of his dominions. This notable piece of generalship will give a good idea of the character of Feejcean policy. ■^ 60 E T H N O (i R A I> II Y. Besides the relations of actual subjection and spiritual inferiority, there is 3'ot niiotlier, termed mhati, which is that of i\ dependent ally to a protectiiifj power, — such, for example, as that which the Confede- ration of the Rhine held to the French empire, and some of the elates of India hold to Knjjlaiid. Uakiraki, a populous town and district on tiie iiortli coast of Viti-levn, is thus mbali to Mbau, — recruitiujf its forces in time of war, and receiving its protection when attacked. Another relation between tlie dilVerent governments is that supplied by the intermarriages of the head chiefs. A chief in one town, wiiose motlier is a member of the ruling family of another town, is said to be vusii (literally, nephew) to the latter. Thus Tauoa's mother was the daughter of a king of Uewa, and he is therefore a oasv to that city. The influences and privileges which accompany this relation are very great. A rum has nearly as much power in the state to which his mother belonged as in his own. In case of war with another power, he is sure of the assistance of his connexions, not precisely from the influence of family feeling, but in accordance with a long-established rule, which renders such iissistance an imperative obligation. More- over, should hostilities break out between two states, in one of which is a chief who is iiasu to the other, ho can pass between the two with perfect safety, and is received in the hostile town with as much respect and confidence as in time of peace. It is evident that such a relation, singular as it is, must contribute greatly to lighten the evils of war among this quarrelsome and sanguinary people. Another relation, somewhat similar to that of msn, though of less importance, is that of taii-rii. It has been before stated that nearly every district and town in Viti has its own guardian divinity. In some caises, however, it happens that two towns are under the protec- tion of the same god. A citizen of one is said to be luii-ni to those of the other, — whicii may be rendered fellow-worshipper. This con- nexion gives many of the same privileges as that of /'«.««. A knowledge of the internal divisions of the several states is also important to a right understanding of the intricacies of Vitian politics. There are usually in each large town two or more classes, or rather parties, among the iidiabitants. Thus in Mbau these are the Kai- vale-levu (literally, people of the great house or palace), who form the king's party, and are especially attached to his service. The Mhati- tomhi are the adherents of the family of that name, who formerly possessed the supreme power, of which they were deprived by the grandfather of the present king. Tlie Kai-Mbau are the independent M R I, A N E a I A. 61 chiofN and laiulliolders, wlio are not especially do voted to either family, and act rather for the j^ooil of the Htate, — or, in other words, for their own interest, which would be affeoted by either of the hos- tile families obtuinin;^ the undisputed pre-eminence. Finally, the lasikdH are a body of lishermen, who were brou(»ht to Mbau from a small island near Kandavu, in order to keep the capital supplied with fish. Althouf,'h they have no chiefs amon>{ them, their numbers and their close union ^'ive them considerable inllueuce. Each of these IkkUcs has interests which are, in some decree, opposed to those of the others, and it is by their mutual counteraction that the goveri\ment is preserved from def][eneratinj? into a despotism. The other states, in making war upon Mbau, usually seek to tamper with one of these parties, and the attempt is often successful. Nearly all the principal towns have these internal divisions. Owing probably to this state of things, the form of government approaches nearer to the republican than the monarchical. The respect \yak\ to the chiefs is great, but it is not servile. A head-chief will seldom venture to take any step contrary to the wishes of the great body of landholders,— otherwise he will run the risk of being deposed, or at least of a disaffection which, in case of a war, may lead to serious results. It is also tlie j)olicy of the interior chiefs and matanivanua to divide the supreme [wwer as much as possible. There is generally an olHcer, who is termed the Vu-ni-iialu (head of war), who is generalissimo of tlie land and sea forces, and commands in battle, even though the king be present. This oitice is commonly conferred on a high chief of a different family from that of the king, and one whose interests would lead him to oppose any attempt on the part of the latter to acquire supreme power. In the organization of labour, and the division of the various occu- pations, the Feejeeans are much farther advanced than any of the Po- lynesian tribes. In every large district there are towns inhabited by people devoted to a particular trade or profession. In one all the citizens will be warriors {tamalai-iHilu), in another fishermen [tunin- dau), in another carpenters {matui-sau), &c. They are all considei^ed to be under the direction of the head-chief, who can, if he pleases, order the warriors to assist the carpenters, or the latter to fight, and so of the rest. Besides the principal professions, several others are practised by individuals. There are physicians {cu-ni-wai), and mid- wives {mbni-ni-ynne), who are said to possess consitierable skill, and to understand many of the arts and specifics employed among civilized 16 .. I 69 E T 11 N O ipon Mbau, and having obtained possession of it, expelled tho former occu- j)ants entirely. The Kai-Levuka are now a sort of " broken clan,'" living scattered about among the various islands, and employed by the ciuefs as sailors and traders. They have a chief of their own. who resides on the island of Lakemba, but he is not looked upon by the Feejeeans as belongiiii^ to the real aristocracy of the islands. When a Levuka man visits Mbau he is still treated with the best o( every thing, as a sort of acknowledgment of his just right to the soil. This people, also, and those of Kamba, a promontory of Viti-lovu, M R L A N R 8 I A. 03 nenr Mbaii, aro tlioHO by wliotn tlio coromniiy of inaiiKurntiii^ the hend-diiel' of tlint town imist bo pcrformi'd. and in i'onMtM|iienco, lie (loos not take, an niiglil 1)« exjwctod, tho titio of 'I'lii-Mhaii, but is known an 'Viii-Kamba and 'rni-Levuka. Tho forc^oinj^ obNcrvatiohH will Huftico to j^ivo a (roncral idoa of the political organization of tho Foojceans. Wo shall next advert to some of their most roniarka))le cUNtoms, and espeeially to hucIi as display the peculiar character of the people. The institution of the tambit, which has already been noticed, as well as tlm ceremonies connected with tho drinking of /cami, although among those which first attract attention, from their frecpient occurrence, aro yet no similar to what they aro in tho Polynesian islands, (and especially in Samoa and Tonga,) that a particular account of them is not necessary. Tattoo- ing (which is called ygla) is another custom to which tho same observation will apply ; but it is remarkable that whilt!, among the Polynesians, it is tho men who are chiefly tattooi'd, in these islands, on the contrary, the women only are subjected to the operation, and tho men arc, with few exceptions, entirely exempt. The marks are imprinted in a broad band around the loins and thighs. As they are almost entirely covered by the ii/iii or cincture, and as tho colour is hardly perceptible on their dusky skins, it is ditlicult to comprehend the object of the custom. The tattooers are always females, who make it a regular profession (le>va vei-ygla), and are paid for their labour. The immolation of women at the burial of a chief has been thought to adbrd an evidence of connexion between these islands and some Asiatic nations. However this may be, the fact itself is suflicioutly striking. The reason assigned for the custom by tiie natives is con- nected with their belief concerning the destiny of the soul. As the disembodied spirit of the chief is supposed, before it linally descends to the Mbulu or hades, to dwell for a time in the Ihimhalhimlxi, which is usually some di.strict or island near his original home, anil to be there engaged in occupations similar to those which he followed during life, the natives consider that the wife, in accompanying him to this residence, is merely doing her duty towards her companion, who, without her, would be living a lonely and cheerless existence. The following account of tho ceremonies at the burial of a chief was received from Mr. Cargill, who had been an eye-witness to them a few months before our arrival. When a dying man is near his end, his friends place in his hands 64 ETHNOGRAPHY. a whale's tooth, which he will need to throw at a tree standing in the way to the regions of the dead ; and they believe that to hit this tree is an omen of future happiness. As soon as the breath is departed, the friends and attendants of the deceased fill the air with cries and lamentations. The grave-diggers are sent for to wash the body, they being the only persons who can touch it without being subjected to a tamhu for several months. When washed, it is laid out on a couch of mats and cloth, and carefully wiped, after which they proceed to dress and decorate it as for a festival. The corpse is first anointed with oil, and then the upper part, including the face, the arms down to the elbows, the neck and breast, is daubed with a black substance resembling soot. A white bandage of paper-cloth is wound round the head, and tied on the temple in a graceful knot. A club is put in the hand and laid acro,ss the breast, that he may appear as a chief and warrior in the next world. The body being thus equipped and laid on a new bier, the friends of the deceased, and the chiefs of the different tribes or clans in the town as.semble around it; each tribe presents a whale's tooth, and the chief or spokesman, holding it in his hand, says : — " This is our offering to the dead ; we are poor, and cannot find riches." All the persons present then clap their hands, and the king or a chief of rank replies, " At mumuiidi'i ni mute,''' (the end of death), — to which the people respond, " Mana, e mlina .'"' (Amen ! it is true !) 'I'he female friends then approach and ki.ss the corpse ; after which any one of his wives who wishes to die with him hastens to her brother or nearest relative, and says, — "I desire to die, that I may accompany my husband to the land of spirits; love me, and make haste and strangle me, that I may overtake him." Her friends apph'.ud her resolution, and aid her to adorn her person to th", best advantage. She is then seated in the lap of a woman, while another holds her head and stops her nostrils, that she may not breathe through tliem. The noose is then put round her neck, and four or five ^rong men pulling at each end of the cord, her struggles are soon over. The noose is then tied fast, and remains so until the friends of her hu.sband present a whale's tooth to her brother, saying — "This is the untying of the cord ot strangulation." The knot is then slipped, and the cord ' 'it loose around her neck. The ifrave-(iiii iidra, — the drying of blood. For this reason, parents frequently cut off the little fingers of their children, much against the will of the latter. When a cliief is otVended with any among his subjects, and threatens them with punishment, they sometimes, if he proves inex- orable to their j)rayers, have recourse to the sii-.gular expedient of cutting off tlicir little fingers (and sometimes the tliird), which they stick all together in tiic cleft of a bamboo, and present it to him. This extraordinary offering usually has tlie desired efTect. The ceremonies at tlio Inrth of a cliild have little that is remarkable, though they partake of the peculiarities which characterize most of their customs. As soon as tlie child is born, a (juantity of protisions is cooked and distributed among the friends of the family. At tlie end of four days the friends coinc to kiss t!ie cliild, ai.d a feast (called rahtmhoiKjirn) is made for them by the parents. At the end of ten days, another feast {rahiimliniiijitini) is made, and the matter is over. The child is namiid imnioilialely after birth, eitlier liy the father, or by the prie.st. If this is not done, the mother becomes disgusted with it, and strangles it, — .sayinir that it is a /iiniiifik (outcast). Xaines, which are always signiti( alive, are f"re(iueiitly changed, and an individual sometimes has several in the course of his life. With MELANESIA. 67 the ctiiefs, these new names answer for so many titles of nobility. Tanoa (Afft"a-bo\vl) was the original name of the present king of Mbau. He afterwards acquired that of Ndrendre-ni-ale, literally, diffi- cult to throw away, — which was explained from the fact that in one of his warlike expeditions he slew so many of his enemies that his people had some dilliculty in disposing of the dead bodies. Ilis third name was obtained in an attack upon Verata, in which he destroyed many of their canoes by fire, and was thenceforward known as Viso- wangga, or canoe-burner. A chief or landholder frc([ucutly receives his title from the name of his house, as noble families in Europe are named from their estates. Thus a chief of Mbau, whose pro})er ap- pellation was Veikoso, having had a house called Ngf/ara-ni-kii/i (lite- rally, dog's cave), was usually spoken of under the respectable title of Ko-mai-na-uggara-ni-kuli , — lie of the dog's cave. The taking of a certain fish or sea-slug, is attended with some sin- gular rites, and is important as connected witli the diversions of tlic year, not only in this group, but also in some of the Polynesian islands. This animal, which is called mhal6lo, is described as some- what resembling in shape a large centiiiede, being about three inches long, with a soft and gelatinous body, and innumerable legs. It is taken only on a single day in the year, usually in the latter part of November, whep it makes its ai)pearance, at a certain period in ihe last quarter of the moon, and at the time of "young llood" in the morning. The fish come out in dense swarms from holes in the coral, and spread out on the surface of the water. A bushel or more are sometimes caught from a single hole, by scooping them up as they ascend. As they will keep but a low days, they unist be eaten with- out delay, and the day of tlieir appearance is the commencement of a general feast at tho.se places where fhey are taken. For four days no warfare is carried on, anil a tambii is laid to [)revent noise or distur- bance of any kind. No labour must be done, and no person must be seen outside of his house. In Ovolau, the ceremony begins as soon as the vi/hi/i'i/o is brought in, by a mataiiirdinia ascending a tree, and invoking the kalou iii laiigi (spirit of the skies) to be favourable to them throughout the year, — grant them fine weather, fair winds, &c.. — ending his prayer with the words sit uti ! sa iili ! set oti ! (it is finished.) Thereupon a tremendous clatter, with drumming and shouting, is raised by all the people inside of the houses for about half an hour, and tlien a dead i[uiet ensues for four days, during which they are feasting on the mbali'ilo. If in any dwelling a noise is made. 68 ETHNOGRAPHY. as by a child crying, a forfeit (on") is immediately exacted by the chief, — usually some article of food to be eaten at the council-house. Besides the appearance of the mbaldlo, the natives have few means of determining with exactness the progress of time. Indeed, they pay little attention to this, and we were unable to obtain from several to whom we applied, the names of the months in their regular series. The following are those which are given by the missionaries us in use at Lakemba, but several of them are unknown in other parts of the groun. Scsi-ni-iigasau-lailai, . . February, . . (jc-wi-wgoiaM, flower of the reed.) Scsc-ni-v<:i, .lanuary. f r : I 1 ii The Feejeeans know nothing of astronomy, and have not even names for the most important constellations. They call the morning and evening stars volu-siiiija and voki-mhongi , literally, marking-tlay, and marking-niglit ; but they do not distinguish between the planets and the fixed stars. Their ignorance on this subject is probably to be ascribed to the fact that they never undertake voyages beyond the limits of their group. Though good sailors, they are bad navigators, in the technical sen.se of the term. In this respect they are far sur- passed by the Polynesians, though the latter (with the exception of the Tongans, who have learned the art from the Feejeeans) are inferior to them ill tlie construction and size of their canoes. These natives are somewhat remarkable for their industry. The desire for the actiuisition of properly which is so conspicuous a trait in their character, induces them to give more attention to the means b\" whicii tills may be iiccomplished tiian is usual among the careless and light-hearted Polynesians. They also pay much attention to cleanliness, being accustomed to bathe frequently, and rub their bodies with cucoa-iiut oil, u practice which has a beneficial elfect, in that climate, by cliecking the perspiration wliich would otherwise be M I C R O N E S I A. 69 excessive and clebilitatintr. Tlio following order of daily avocations is pretty regularly observed. When tiioy rise in tiie morning, wliich is commonly before the sun, the men first repair to the vihitie (town-iiousc or temple) to drink kavn. 'riiey eitlier wash tlicniselves all over, or at least rinse tiioir mouths, before they join in the drinking, 'riuiy tlien go to their plantations of yams and taro, or to any otlier work in wliich they may be engaged, and remain there until the sun becomes loo hot for com- fort, when Ihcy return home and take their first meal, called IxdtdUut ; this is usually abo\it nine or ten o'clock. During the heat of the day they lounge about, doing liglit jobs, talking or sleeping. Towards night, if they feel industrious, they return to tiieir plantations. Other- wise they dress in a clean girdle, wash and oil themselves, powder their hair witli ashes, and stroll about the village, chatting with their friends until the dusk of the evening, whicii is the usual time of retiring. Sometimes in the afternoon they repair to the r(ira iii melr, public j)lace for dancing, — and join in a tlance ; or lo the rara iii tiiujija, — place of games, — which is an oblong level space, two hundred yards long by ten wide, where they play at the game called tinrifia, — some- thing between ([uoits and cricket. It is played by two parties, one against the other. The implement used is a stiff reed, between three and four feet long, having on its head a heavv knob of iron-wood. This is darted heatl foremost, iVom one end of the rum towards the other, the object being to throw it to the greatest possible distance. It is not siMit all the way through the air, but slides ami bounds along the ground. 'Y\w game is a very e.vciting one. Several towns some- times engage in it at once, the vancpushed of one day being bound to fuul provisions for tlic next. The [jassions of the c(ind)atants are sometin\es wrongiit up .so liighly tliat ([vuuTols anil bloodshed ensue. A good player, {ndau-tingcj'i,) enjoys almost as much estimation thronjjhout the islands as a irreat warrior. M I C H X K S I A. This " region of small islands,'' as it is very a])propriately desig- nated, extends between the meriilians of 13'i^ K, and 17S° \V., and between the parallels of '21° N. and f)" S. The greatest number lie in a range between the i)arallels of 5° and 10° X., scattered as con- 18 70 ETHNOr.R A PlI Y. fnsedly along the ocean as seed strewn in a furrow. There arc about a hundred groups, if this name may be apphed to the coral rings, or lagoon islands, which consist of numerous small patches of rock, dis- posed in a circular or oval form and connected by reefs. Of all the groups, only si,\ belong to the class of high islands, and these are all surrounded by extensive reefs. They are the Pelew Islands, the Ladroncs, Yap, Ilogoleu, Banabe, and Ualau. These, though among the smallest of their class in the I'acific, are important wlien com- pared witli the coral clusters, all of which put together would not probably give t'lrce hundred stpiare miles of dry land. If, however, the reels and lagoons, from which tlic natives derive a grout part of their subsistence, be taken into consideration, the estimate will be greatly enlarged. The information which we possess concerning most of these islands is principally derived from the works of former voyagers, par- ticularly Duperrey, DT'rville, Kotzebue, and Liitke, and we shall therefore enter into no furtlier particulars respecting them than will be necessary to illustrate tiie account \\ liich we have to give, from other sources, of a few of tiie groups. For this purpose tiie situation of the wliole archipelago must be particularly noted. It ap[)roaclies within twenty degrees of Japan and Loo Clioo on tlie north, witbin five (It^grees of the Philippines on tlie west, has New (Juinea and the other Melanesian islands at the same distance on the south, and the Polynesians about as far otV to the southeast. It happens, moreover, that winds are common over this region from alltiiese points. The soutiieasl trades blow from tiie Navigators to the Kingsmill Islaiuis, and e.xtcud far north of the eijuator. In the winter the northwest monsoon comes down tVom the China Sea, frecpiently shifting round to the southwest, in which direction the most violent hurricanes occur. At this season of the year large fir-trees, sometimes with their branches and leaves adhering, are driven from some northern region to the Kingsmill Islands, — the .southernmost of Micronesia, — while the .southwest storms bring bamboos in like manner from a tropical clime to the same place. These oijservations are important for their bearing on the (juestion of the probable source or sources of the poi)ulation of these islands. The subject is one wiiich neither our space nor our materials will admitof our discussing in full, and it remains for .some future iiupiirer to trace out, by a comparison of language, physical traits, customs, and traditions, the origin and migrations of the Micronesian tribes. MICRONESIA. 71 That tliis may be done, judifiiig by wbat little we have liccn able to effect for two or three of the islands, we entertain no doubt. And it is certain that few more important fields now remain open for ethno- gra|)liical research. We sometimes speak of the numerous colonies which have pro- ceeded from Great Britain as being one people, inasmuch as they have issuctl from a single source ; and in this sense we may apply the term to the tribes of Polynesia. We also speak of tlie iidiabitants of the Koman empire — at least alter two or three centuries of concpicst — as forming one peo[)le, inasmuch as the various nations and tribes to which they belonged had been cemented and fused together, by the general ascendency and intermi.vture of one dominant race, — and in this sense alone the term is applicalile to tlie natives of the Microne- sian islands. Hence it will be seen that no general description can be given of the latter, which shall be every where equally correct, and which \\ ill not retpiire many allowances and exceptions. 'I'lie Micronesians, as a people, do not dilfcr greatly in complexion from their neighbours of Polynesia. Their colour varies from a light yellow, in some of the groujjs, particularly the western, to a reddish brown, which we find more conuaon in the east and southeast. The features are usually higii and bold, — the nose straight or a(piiline, the cheek-bones projecting, the chin rounded and prominent. The nose is commonly widened ai Ihe lower part, as in the Polynesian race, but this is not a universal trait The hair, which is black, is in some straight, in others curly. .' i e beard is usually scanty, though among the darker tribes it is more abundant, and these have often w hiskers and mustacliios. In stature, the natives more often fall below tliau exceed the middle height, and they are naturally slender. That which especially characterizes this people, is the great elevation of the forehead, and indeed of the whole heail, as compared with its breadth. This was general in those wliom we saw, and is apparent in nearly all the portraits of natives which have been given by dilfe- rent voyagers. In character, the Micronesians — at least those of them who belong to the lighter coloured tribes — will compare advantageously with any other people, whether savage or civilized. Their most pleasing, and, at the same time, their most striking trait, is a certain natural kindli- ness and goodness of heart, to which all their visiters, of every country and character, bear the same testimony. \\ ilson at the Pelew Islands, Kotzebue at Radack, Dupcrrey and D'Lirville at m i ';( f' I M 7a E T II N O U R A P II Y. Ualaii, Liitke and Martens at all the western islands, O'Connel! and every other visiter at Banabe, Paul(lin//. Not only do the chiefs enjoy an unquestioned supremacy, but the distinctions between the diflerent clas.ses of po[)ulation, of which tliere are usually two or more, is maintained'with a rigidness whicli rennntls one of the in.stitution of ca.ste. They sei-m to be an honest people. Among themselves, they are said to be decidedly so. They sometimes, however, steal from ve.ssels, in which case, it would appear that iho greatness of the tempta- tion overcomes their better feelings. Their woril, it is said, may generally ho relied upon. They are very iiilelligeiit. The same observation has been made concerning the natives of Polynesia, but a distinction is observable betwecii the two m this res|u'ct. The latter are (luick in their per- ceptions, iniiT-nidus. and prompt in acquiring a new art. The Caro- line islanders, on the other hanil, ere a considerate and reflecting people, acute in reasoning, and desirous of understanding the meaning of any uovei appearance. It will be seen that the character here given is little more than a catalogue of good (|iialities. Sueli as it is, bowe\t'r, it is an e.xact stati'meiil of the impressions derived from personal observation, as well as from the accounts of others. There can be no doubt that these natives arc a liiiclv endowed race, in whom the moral feelings and the intellect generally [iredominate over the more violent pas- sions. That there are occasional exceptions, has been betbre re- marked, and some of them Mill be hereafter noticed. The dilference of character in the three Oceanic races is most clearly displayed m the recf!ption which they have given to their earliest civilized visitors. With the black tribes, a strong disposition has generally been evinced to get rid of the strangers as soon as possible, and to avoid coinmunicution with them. The Polynesian 19 74 KTIINOr. R A 1' M V. islntulcrs, on the other hand, Imvo almost always received thctn with a chitnorous wekonio and apjjarent l'rien(isiii|), and tlien made an attempt to got possession, by I'orce or fraud, of their vessel, or some of their property. While the natives of Micronesia, though scmetimcs shy at first, have seldom failed, in the end, to establish and maintain an intercourse of uninler'-upted friendship and mutual confidence. The only exceptions, and those not numerous, have been in the cases before noticed, where hardship and want, or an iiitermi.\ture of foreign blood, have deteriorated tiieir character. In treating of the Polynesians, wo have had occasion to remark that they liad probably attained, before their discovery, to as high a grade of civilization as the ciicumstances in which they were placed would permit. The same remark may be made concerning the natives of Micronesia, but with this difference, that while the former appear to have risen from a lower condition to their present state, the latter seem, on the contrary, to have descended from a higher grade which had been attained in some more favourable situation. As this view (which is that of Les.sou, and, in part, of Liilke,) is somewhat im- portant, it is proper to state the considerations on wliich it is fouiuled. 1. Although the Caroline islanders arc not more ingenious or more enterprising than the Polynesians, and altiiough, on the whole, tiiey seem to enjoy no more of the comforts of life, yet in many of the arts, and what may be termed sciences, they are decideilly superior. Those relating to navigation deserve particular notice. The latter of the two races, in their voyages, are usually guided by tlie winds, and pay little attention to the heavenly b(Klies. The Micronesians, on the other hand, sail altogether by the stars, with which they are well acfpuiinted. 'J'iiey divide the horizon into twenty-eight points, instead of the thirty-two of our compasses, giving to each a name. The Po- lynesians, on the contrary, have no special names even for the four cardinal points. East and jresl they c.\'[)ress by phrases signifying sunrise and sunset ; north and soiil/i usually by the names for certain winds, or by the words ritjlit IkiikI and left. Hut even these e.vprcs- sions arc rarely used. The canoes of the Caroline islanders are made to sail with either end foremost, resembling in that resi)ect, those which are in use at the Feejeo Islands, and which the natives of Tonga have borrowed from thence. Whether this motlel belongs properly to the black race or the Micronesian is uncertain ; but from its universiility among the latter, we should be inclined to ascribe it to them. Those who inhabit the high islands have also the art of MICRONESIA. 75 coatin^r the outHido of their canocH with a shining varnish. They make, bcsidt^s, by burning the coral rock, a fine lime, which is ini.vcd witii cocoa-nut oil, and used to whitewasii the inside of their canoes and render them water-tight. Neither of these arts is known to the Polynesians. 2. Some of their manufactmes evince a skill which seems to l)o tlio ofispring of civilization. This is particularly the case with their cinctures, or sushes, which are made of the fd)rous filaments of the banana plant. They are not braided by hand, like the fine mats of Polynesia, but woven in a simple loom. The shuttle resembles very closely in appearance, as in use, that of our weavers. These sashes have attracted much notice and admiration from foreigners, for the elegance of their to.xturc, and the beauty and regularity of the colours which are inwoven. Another of tiieir ornaments deserves notice, not so much for any skill displayed in its manulacture, as because it seems to bo universal among the islanders of Micronesia and peculiar to them. It consists of a string of alternate wooden and shell beads, if this term may bo applied to them. The " beads" are in the shape of a sixpence witli a hole through its centre, or more nearly like the "button-moulds" of our dress-makers. They are made of fragments of cocoanut-shell and sea-shells, which are broken or cut nearly to the re(iuired shape, and then filed down together till they are smooth, even, and e.vactly of equal size. Those of sea-shell are white, and those of cocoa-nut black. The}' are strung alternately upon a small cord, and appear like a round tle.xible stick, half an inch in diameter, marked with alternate white and black rings. They are worn, not round the neck, but round the waist, and only by the men.* • Siiico this Hiis wiilti'ii, my attcntiuu 1ms been drawn to a passngo in Cliamisso's voliiinc, npiiciKlcil to Kotz<'luic's voyiigc round tlip world, (Von> wliitli tlio orif^in, mid proljjilily tlio real niitinc, of this supposed ornimicnt may be iiili'trcd. In speaking of the natives of tlie Liidroiie Islands, ho i-eniarks: — "Wo hnvo discovered among their untii|iiilirs sonii'thing which seems to show n great ndvaiico made in civilization beyond any of the other islanders of the great ocean. We speak of the invention of money. . . . Disks of tortoiso-sliell, of the slinpo of button-moulds, but thin as p.iper, and made ex- tremely smooth by rubbing, are strung close togetlier on a thick cord of cocoa-nut sinnet. The whole tonus a (lexiblo cylinder of the thickness of a linger, and several feet in length, 'riiese disk.s were in circulation as a medium of exchange, and only a few of the chiefs had the right to make and issue them." — Chiimisiin's Wtrkc, Leipzig, 1830, vol. ii. p. 142. This " money" is evidently the same with the " Ix^ads" of the Kings- mill Islanders, except that the latter use other shells instead of that of the tortoise. From various slight circunistinicos uliieh arc now called to mind, it seems likely that these IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 ^^ Ui ^E la 11,2 |22 Hiotographic Sciences Corporation -'^ ' <» 33 WIST MAIN STMIT WnSTM,N.Y. I4SM (7l6)t73^S03 ^^ ^\ ^r\\ i 76 K TUN (MS « A I'll V. 3. The Caroline islanders tattoo tliemsolves not out of motives of decency, nor nltdgotlicr tor ornament, liut as a means of distin^uish- injr tlieir families ami clans, and of retainin(r tlie memory of persons, olijects, and events. Liitke found on one of the coral islamis a man wIk) liail murks tattcH>e(i upon iiim tn represent all the islands of the arciiipehiy;(). At IJanatie. tiie wife lias tattooed upon lier tlie marks standini; for the names of her imsliand's ancestors. 'I'he natives of this ijjroup, lookiiif^ over an lOnj^lish book, took it to Ite the white man's tattoo, hut could not understand the object of the frequent repe- tition of the same characters, sayinj^ that it was useless.* 4. \\ hile the system of "lovernment in most of the Polynesian groups is of a very simple character, that of the Caroline islanders is, on the contrary, unusually complex. Not only is the whole popula- tion, in many of the islands, divided into distinct classes, which never notivi'S dill artiially niiploy llic lriiikiiilnritr ii nii'cliiiiii it< trmlo; they bronchi thciii nil' in ;;ri'.'it ((iiiiiitltics, wuiii' iiidividiiiilH hiiviii); iiiiiiiy liilliomM lioil nriiiind ihi- wiiisl, iiiid im iirlii'lr i>rir.'iirii' ln'siilcs. It is iioiid in my jmirnal, thai on llic lirst ilay at Ta|iiitevo i'\|>n'SN4'd uith n-^^ard In the iisr ol' th(.> artiidcs in ijia'slioii is rorm-t, and that wi- wen; mistaken at llic tinio in iiii|)|Hi.Hing tlicin to Ix- mcn'ly oriio> inonls, — ihiMiyh Ihry may havi' Ik'cii wnrii as .sm-h, as snnw f Ihr .Snnlh Aini'rirnn soldirrs have thrir arcoiilrcnii'iits niNrnd willi silver I'niiis. ,\s the materials dI' which the disks are made an' vitv eiimiiicm, the value must .'irise rnmi Ihe lalMnir nei'es.snry to rut and |M>lish them li> their |irii|H'r >ha|ie, »hi<'h, liir the numlor eoiilained in a string, must Im" very gri'iit. Hut ihe iiiU'reiioes whieh may Ik' di'diiced iVom the general dilPisinn of this spd orimiiN-nt Icil us to allach to it when its probable origin and natnn- were iinsus|iectixl. • O'Connell's .Nurruiive, p. 103. 1 M I C R O N E H I A. 77 intermarry, but tlic rank of the chicfH, unci tlio succession to aiithority, are regulated according to a very intricate system, wliich lias evi- dently been the residt of desijin and study. t)f tliis we shall have occasion to (five s(»me examples, 5. 'I'iie religion of the MiiTonesians carries us at once to Eastern Asia. It is the worship of the s|)irits of their ancestors. They are called at the I^adrones, anili, at the Kinjismills, atili, at tlie Mul- graves, nuit and iiiiis, at llanahe, hnni or itiii, at Falalou, haiio, A:c. Prol)al)ly the ijuris of Lord North's Island, sit^iiifyiii)^ divinity, is the same word, as the ciiaiij^e of n to r is universal in these dialects. They have neither temples, imatfcs, nor sacrifices. Their worship consists merely in prayiiii^ and perfonninif certain ceremonies, — amoii'4 others the oH'crin;^ of a j)ortion of their fooecially as it will serve to prove liie sirikinif similarity of traits and customs wiiich prevail from one extremity of the Caroline Islands to the other. ••The complexion of tlie natives," says llolden in his narrative, "is a liirht coppi-r colour. — mucii li|j[hter than tliat of the Malays or the I'eiew islanders, which last, however, they resend)le in tiie hreadlh of their faces, hit;h (•heek-hones, ;iiirve, what lias heen l>efore remarked of the i'olynesian trihes, that the li^jhtest comjile.vioii is founil among those who are neari'st the ei|ualor. The natives worshij) a thnty wlmm they term //»/;•/.«, in which we perhaps see the anili or atiia of tlie lia.ikiiii.' <>t' 111'' I'riiw isliiiuliT'i, lie .siiys: — " 'I'lii'ir ciiiiiiilc.Niciii is n light cdpixT. I'liiir iiiis<^ uri' siiiiii hIiiiI IIiiI, IhjI imt so ll:il .•!■< lliosi' ol' ilic Arni'uiis, nor hit tlnir lips >'i lllH-k." \.iri:ili\i', |>. l". t 'I'll'' ('li!iii;;f 1111111 iiiiis 111 V""*' "imlil I*' .•icrnrilinu' I" ill'' •■iist.ini of the (liulirl, Thii^ «i liMn- 1)1111) tor iir-i (ll/iii), Mill; man lor umanc, man, iVo, i .\|i|»iiili\ In Narrulivc, p. Vi;i. Mli'UOX KSI A. 79 tlic i\ativos wear the Polynesian <„nr(llc of l)ark-clnth, wliicli llirv call by tlit^ wi'll-kiiowii naiiio of lopn. Tlu'v liavc, too, thi! won! lahii, si^riiityini,' a .sacrt'ij |ilac('. 'I'licso facts are valiinblo. as, combincil witli many other indications whicii will lie hereafter n(ites of Malaisia. "'I'lieir ini|ilenients of war are sjiears and chilis; they have no Ijows and arrows. Their spears are made of the wo()|h the horizontal jiar- tilioii. or upper lloor. For ornament, they .sometimes wear in their ears, which are always hored, a folde'(>(! RA l>ll V. Fold-lep (groat Fnlu), Ace* I urn inrliiied to think timt Haimlie or Uanolic will coino nearest to the |>ro|H>r native protuinriation. The Krniip ot' HannlH) consistN nt° the Mingle hi^^h iNland ot° that name, with many low isletN sitnated on an extensive eoral helt which surronnds it. The high island was supposed Ity Mr. I'unehard to be nlM)nt forty miles in lireumlerence, and he estimated the po|)ulation at fifteen thousand, — though others rciluee it to half this nundtur. l)'('onnell, however, saw, on one occasion, the warriors of one triluj collected to the nund)er of fifteen hundred men. As there are five tribes on the island, this would seem to show that Mr. I'unchard's estimate is not Iim) high. The natives are divided into three classes or castes, chiefs, gentry (or freemen), and slaves, or rather serfs. The first two belong to the yellow race, proper to this archipelago, and are of the middle sixe, with light complexions, prominent features, and smixilh skins. The others are termed by O'Comiell a negro race, and Liitke compares them to the Papuans ; he says, " 'I'hey have a wide, flat lace, with broad depressed noses, thick lips, and crisp hair [lea c/teiru.ccr('/)iis)."\ O'Connell, however, says that they have straight hair,| meaning, perhaps, that it is not woolly, like that of the African negro, lie adds, further, (the universal characteristic of the Melanesian race,) that "the skin is rough, and very unpleasant to the touch." Their colour is nut black, but dark brown; Littke calls it cheHtnut {c/ui- ' It must I*' n llti'Ifil iliii iliriHijiliDiil Micri)nc>»i;i ihc Itltrrs »/, r, iiml /, iin- iisrd ilil('ri'liitii)!i'iilily, U8 art' ft iind k,j) uiiil />, iiiiil Hdiiii'tiiiics / ,■ llie I (irimc diiiUvt lieccniirN th in iinutlicr, mid 3 in ii third. Ilcnriii)! iIm-su cIiiiii|j;('.s in mind, Wf lind niinM-rrislniids and );ri>ii|i!<. yaiiiii or \iimo \k very i-oinmoii : « i>lKi«?rved that the dillirenee in many ol' the names <:iven almve, priKmils, in part, Irom the dilli'iini luoiles ol' ortho- ({niphy ndopled hy the voya;jers I'mui uhoin they an' taken, — Kotwliue, I)u|(ern-y, Kicuri, and others. 'I'his ri'semhlanee in mimes is one ot' the clues which must be fol- lowed ill Iraciii); out the ini);rations liy »hich these islands have been |ieo|iled, t Kiiuri, OcPBiiie, vol. ii. p. 130. X .Narrutive, p. l',"*. M I C R O N K 8 I A. «*3 laitfiie). There in reason to Ix'licvo tliut these two rarcs are fouml in conjunction on other groups of Micronesia, {especially the large elevated cluster of llojifoleu,) while on some, us Nanionlouk, Nu(^uor, and the southern Kingsniill Islunils, uii amalgamation seems to have taken place. The three classes are called, according to O'Connell, Mooujohs {Miindjuh), Jerijo/is, (Tsherff/Jo) and i\i(/iirts (yaikut). The general term aroche {arotf), was applied to the lirst two; it may l)e translated gentleman or Jmtnan. These two classes rarely intermarry with one another, and never with the third. The distinction of caste is main- tained with great strictness; even in battle, a person of one class never attacks one of another, so that, says O'Coimell, " it is like the encounter of three distinct parties." All the land in the group is parcelled out into estates, which are the property of the chiefs and freemen. The serfs are consitlered as affixed to the soil. These estates are never alienated, and pass only by succession ; but this succession is not directly hereditary. The system of descent, lK)th of titles and property, is very intricate and difficult to understand. Accoriling to the account received from Mr. Punchard, every chief lias u distinguishing title, besides his own proper appellation. The highest rank in the two tribes of Matalalin and C is IsltijMU, who is usually called by foreigners the king ; then follow, in the line of succession, Watljai, 'Vak, Xotsh, Nanw, and others still lower. Before a chief can become hhipan he must rise through all these grades or offices, and, of course, there is only one in each tribe holding each of these titles. There are other offices or dignities, the holders of which can never rise to be Lhipaii . but these, also, have their inferior grades in regular succession. One of these is Nnnigin, a kind of high priest of the Kiti tribe. The son of a chief is never a chief; this distinction is derived from a certain class of women, called // 'n'ttsh (noble women), who, by law, can only marry common men; their rank determines that of the offi*pring. This account differs, in some particulars, from that given by O'Con- nell, but agrees with it in tlio main.* Besides the divisions of caste and office, there is another of tribes, of which there are five, — the Maitilaliii, who occupy the east or • Sv his Nnrmlivo, p. f.'fi. It is riirious that tlirrc nl)Ii' nnd cxiMTicncrd obsorvers, Ix->8.si)U, D'lrvillc, anil I.Olkc, in dcsMTibing lliu sysU'ni «r rimk and caste wliicli prevails at Ualau, dillbr so widely Irom one anullier, that their accuunis cannot bo reconciled. 81 F.TII NOO It .\ l> II V. wiiidwiinl side of the isluiul ; tin- Kifi «>ii the soiilli, iiiid tin' lijikoils, Sill, and /on the northwest, Mr. IMnudiiird thtnijjlil that tin- tlireo hist-naincd were not ori^inallv distinct. Tht's** tnltcs an- ntiminally indojicndcnt, and make war iipoit dtut anotlicr, hnt tlu'v aro still coii- ni'it<'il toiicthrr. like thi' (u'riinm States ni the middle a^es. hy a eertain u[eiieral svstein of pohev. with which even their wars do not interl'ere. A ehiel ol one trilie is recoirnised as suidi i)y the rest, and takes rank atnon^ tiuMii accordinu;ly. In eas<> of hostilities, the atlackini; party is lioinid to send word to the other of tin- time and place tixed upon lor tiie conflict, in order to i{ive opportunity for pre|)aration. Nothinj^ like compicst is ever attempted. The van- quished always retain their lands, the victors contenting themselves with the spoil of their villages. The fruit-trees are never destroyed. The priests, according to OC'onnell, have consideraiile inlluence. They are called iiiionDt, and lielon^f to the class of petty chiefs; indeed, this word is fre(|nently used to sijrnify merely r/iiif. Their worship is very simple. It consists in prayers and invocations addressetl to the spirks (/lani or ii/ii) of departed chiefs. They have neither tein[iles, idols, nor otlerinifs. Certain animals, also, particu- larly lish, are esteemed sacred anion;^ them, — some, as eels, Ikmiii; so to the whole people, while others arc merely prohihited to jmrticular families. OC.'onuell supposes this to proceed from some rude system of metempsychosis, connected with their ri'liijious helief '* The dead are wrapped in mats, and i)uried about three feet helow the surface of the earth. If a male, a paddle from his canoe is liuried with him; if a female, her spindle or distatV. Over the };rave a cocoa- nut tree is planted, the fruit of which is .^eldom \( ever disturbed, and, besides the paddle buried with the body, they sometimes lay one or more upon the ground near the j^rave. The well-known drink of the Polynesians, termed hy them kura or am, prepared from the root of the I'ijxr tnrl/nj.stiriuii, is also in use here. The mmle of preparation, however, is diirerent and more cleanly. The root, instead of \m\\\r chewed, is |>ounde(l on a large stone,* and then mi.ved with water, which is afterwards strained through a mesh of cocoa-nut fibres. It is served out at their public fea.sts with great ceremony, the distinctions of rank Iwing carefully observed. • 'I'his ohango, it will !»• obsorvcil, is prcfist-ly lliut whicli a rflincd pccipli! would maku in a(lu|1tlng such a custmn. M I (• It M v i;s I A 80 Tl ui niiinos sniliiii,' iilwavs willi llic oiilriu'if'T 1" wiiidwanl, viir- iiislu'd (III tlir oiilsiilc ami viiilcw allied williiii; tin' \vca|Hiiis ariiit'il Willi sharks' Icflii, llic slriiiijs ol' circular licads, and tln^ saslu's wovt'ii ill a Niiii|ilc liioiii, wliicli liavit liccii clscwlicri! tiiciitioiicd as cliaracicrislic ot' the Micnuicsiiiii race, arc all JMiind licrc, Sd also is till meal hat, iiiado ui cociia-iiilt leaves, vvliicli is eniiiiiioii to most ot tlio islands. 'I'lie natives liavo a variciv oi tlie doi,', tlie llesli of w liicli is considereil a delicacv. 'I'll P irinciiial vei;! 'lalilt ircMiuc- tioiis oC tlie island aro the hread-triiit, cocoa-niil, liaiiana, sii;rar-cani>. am .(■ 1 1 tin. ly 'I' wo other customs, which we learn Irom O'Coiiiiell, deserve to ho luentioned here. 'I'lie lirsl is that of sendinii messaui's hy means of leaves of a |iarticiilar tree, the |)oiiils of which are folded inwards in (lillertMit iikkIcs to express ditrerciit ineamnus. " Inclosed in a plan- tniii-Kmf, and secured hy twine, one of these primitive letters acconi- paiiies donations of presents, and demands for tli(Mi).— ilcdarations of war and promises of siilimissioii, — in short, all the stat»! despatches." 'I'Ik! t)tlier is that of voluntary emiirration, which: he says, " is resorted to when the pojinlation becomes too denser for comfortahle suhsistence. When it hecomes certain that sucli a step is necessary, a nuiiiher of tlie natives, with their wives and children, take to their canoes, victualled as liherally as the hoats w ill hear, and trust to chniice for a luirhour or a laiidini;." lie adds that the emiurants are, as may hu 8U|iposed, |iriiicipally of the lower orders. Another lact connected with this island lias exciteil much attention and curiosity. It is the existence of extensive ruins upon a low llat islet, un the south side of liaiialie, near the harliour of Matalalm. They itrc mostly in the I'orm of enclosuri's, of various extent, some of them covering more than a hundred sipiare yards, '{"he walls are nol less than thirty feet in lieiL^ht, and nearly as many in thickness. 'I'hey are built of enormous blocks of utoiie, wliicli seem, from the description, to bo polyijoiial prisms of basalt. Some of them are tweiity-five feet long and nearly two feet in diameter, and must weigh several tons. Metweeu the enclosures are passages which seem once to have been streets or foot-ways, but which are now filled with water, so as to admit canoes. The w hole island is overllowed at high tide, except the jiarts enclosed hy these walls, which keep the earth from being washed away. Hut in some places the walls tlieiii- Melves have been undermined by the .sea, and falUm. The natives can give no account of the origin of these structures, •Jf- Htt KT II N«ni U A I'M V. !■ attril)uliiiji tln'iii In tlie /itnii, or spirits. 'I'lu' ijciicrul i)|)iiiion of (ori'ij,'iiors who liiivr swii tlifin swiiis to lie thtit llu-y wi-rr tlio work ot° iinotlicr riico than that which now oc-iMipifs tliis i;ronp. 'I'licrc is, howcvfr. no occasion lor iiavni;; recourse to this hvpollicsis. On tho island of I'alati, liircc Imniircil miles cast ol' Manaho, similar striic- lurcK are in use at the present tiay. Acconiiiiij to the accounts oC l.cs.son, 1)1 rvilie, and l.iitke, as ipioted liy Kieiiri. all tlii^ principal cliiels ol' I alaii. \\ itii jireat part ol the popiilalion. have tli«'ir residence on a small low islet, called Leilei or liclc, siinaled oil' the eastern shore of the larm- island, and aJMHit loiir miles in circiiml'crenco. I'Trvilie says, "in approaching the shores of Leilci, a new sctMio presented itself to onr eyes, — line houses surrounded i»y lii^h walls, streets well paved, Aic" . . . And in another place, — "the streets were iMirdered liy eiiormoiis walls of rock, which prove lliat tliutti! natives, slight and I'eeiile in appearance, are iievortheless capahle of undertjoin^ severe lahonr At the end of the street, a wall still more considerahle than thos«! wliiih we had seen excited my "d- niiralion. It was not less than twenty feet liiijh l>y ten or twelve in thicknes.x. and forty or fifty on each side. One cannot well conceive how these people, without the aid of any machine, can transport blocks so ponderous as those which enter into thesis constructions, some of which must \veii;h many thousands (plusienrs inilliers). It is still more dilliciilt to ima<;ine what can he the utility of these hii^o masses. All that I could discover was that the residences of the chiefs were always accompanied by these enormous walls, wliieh seemed to lie one of the attributes of their dignity, like the ramparts and trenches which surrounded the castles of the nobility in the middle a<^es." [t seems evident that the constructions at I alau and Itanaho are of the sanu! kind, an its ori^iniii liciyht, and tlicre is sonm n-ason to hflievi) that at this tiuio it is ntidi'ri;oin<{ a very Kiadual elevation.* It is possihle that a eoniiterlialaiuiiiir iiioveinent in the o|i|i(iNitc ilireetion may he takini; pluet! aiiKini; the ('arolint* Islands, — or, at least, may have taken place not mniiy centuries ami. From the (U^- seri|ition ^;ivoii of Leilei, a chunirt! ot luvel of one or two feet would riMider it uniiiliahitahle, and reduce it, in a short time, to the same stale as the isle of ruins ut iianahe. W hen the natives say that these structures wore raised by luiiii or aiiiman (spirits), they may Ih' merely referring them to the divinities wlmin they worship, — i. e. the spirits of their ancestors, the actual hii.ioers On iiuntionin^; these viuwM to Mr. Dana, I am happy to tind that he considers the opinion liere expressed hif^hly probable, and confirmed by his observations in other parts of the i'acilic. .Mil. 1. 1:, OK riiK Mri.iiiivvK isi. an'ii>. In January of IS24, a part of the crew of the American whale-ship Globe mutinied, murdered the ofiicers, and sailed for the (/'aroline Islands. At the .Mulj^rave Group, the i^reater part, including those who had been the most (guilty, toifether with s(jnie who were innocent, but were com|)elled to submit to the direction of the others, landed and remained. They were received, at lirst, with the utmost kind- ness by the natives, but having rou.sed their hostility by violent measures and harsh treatment, the whole party was suddenly attacked and put to death, with the exception of two individuals. These, by name William Lay, and Cyrus M. Ilussey, were Ijoth mere youths, i^nd entirely innocent of participation in the mutiny. M'hey had pre- viously ac(|uired the good-will of the natives by their kind and prudent conduct towards them, and though detained as captives, and obliged to labour for their masters, they were not ill-treated. In December of the following year they were taken off by the (Initcd States scluwner Dolphin, which was despatched for that purpose, under the comnuuid of ("aptain John I'crcival. On their arrival at Oahu, the Kev. xMr. IJingham, missionary at • Sec llic (jt-ologicol l(e|iort iifllic Bx|ieditioii, by Mr. J. 1). Dana. I 88 KT II \()<; K A I' II V. HoiKiIulu, took down u vocaljiilurv ot such words of the iiativo laii- gnaiii- as tlii'v could rciiicmlicr. 'I'liis is now |iul)lislKHl Cor llic lirsl time, and it siHMns |iro|)cr to add to it a lew rcniariis respecting tho isianil and its inhabitants. Our inl'orniation is derived from a lirief and iin|irrten(iinif narrative, puhhslied liy Lay and llnssey at New I/ondiMi, in I'^'-Js. and t'nnn llie "Journal of the (^rnise of the United iStates schooner Dolphin ainoiiij the islands of the I'acilic," hy Lieu- tenant llirani I'auldinii,* which contains many interesting^ particulars related in a clear and succinct style. Mille is tlu' soutlicrnniost of the Katlack (Jhaiii, wliicli consists of twelve coral islets or clusters, and extends, in a north-northeast direc- tion, from (^ to I'^i-^of lutrth latitude, and from 10!)° to 17-J° of east longitude. Mille, which is in latitude (t°, loni^itudc 17"^^, is an oval ring of small islets, coiuiectcd hy reefs, and -nclosing an inland sea or lagoon one hundred and l()rty nules in cucumference. 'I'liere are more than a hundred of these islets, Ijut all of them together do not j)rohal)ly comprise more than lifleen or twenty .scpiar*; miles. The population is lietween I'wv and six hundretl. 'l"he people are of a light complexion, fairer tlian those of the Kingsmill Group, and np- peared to Mr. Paulding a dillerent race, 'i i.-v are of the middle staliuv and wfll-foriaed, with hanil.some features. With a few ex- ceptions, tiiey havi' not the depressed noses and thick lips which are found an long the l*olvne.-;i;ni tribes Thev are modest and manly iu tl leir deportment, and alk with an air of dignity. Mr. i'aulding rt'as much iileased with their conduct on the arrival of the vessel. •r ley gave us a most kind and hospitable rece|)tion, and freely oflcred whatever any of \ IS I'xpressed a wish |..i. Notl ling was stolen by them. They behaved in a most orderly niaiiner, looking round the deck iinpiiriiiirly, or sc>ated themselves and c itted f IM!!- liarly with our people, taking |)aiiis to make themselves understood. In their look and action they appeai-d 1o be lively and intelligent." Lay and lliis.sey give the same account of their beliavioiir towards the mutineers, before their anger was I'xcitetl by the ill conduct of the latter. IJolli of the cajitives, moreover, speak of the kind treatment which they ex|>erieiiced from the iialnes. The hardsiiips which they uuderwenl were only such a.s were shared by their captors. TIk! island is sterile, yiekling but a scanty sup|)ly of footl even lor its limiti )pulati( Th u' only vegetable productions (it to eat are l'iilili>lii(| ,il New V.iik, lpy ' K. TupiitiOiii'i, .... I »iuinin()ii(rs islimd, . . 1° v!0' S., 171" 4.')' Iv Niikiimiii, Hynm"s Islimd, (!) . . . 1" air S., 177" 40' !■;. J't'ni, I';ii/.ii Islimd, (!) . . . . -J" S., 176" \). 'J'ti/Kinii, ) .11.,, ., , f ,,. . V I Ninth anil cast ol Driiin- Oiiiiiili), > . . . . (I lUTrtain), i< i , i . . . C ( """"' 'i Islimd. Annul, J The first-named island is on no chart, and has probably never been visited. Our information concerning it is derived from the natives of Makin, who described it as lying aijout two days' sail (for their canoes) to the northeast, and as inhid)ited by people like tbemsclves, with whom they had fro(|uent communication. The last five were not visited by our scjuadron, and their names are given accoriling to Kirby's account. Nuknnau, he thought, was Byron's Island, and Peru, Eliza or llurd's Island. As to the rest, he only knew that they were in the southern part of the group, though he had an idea that Arurai was sometimes called by foreigners Hope Island. The charts, at this {loint, are confused, and none of them have so inanv 92 E T H N O O R A I' II Y. islands as the native accounts would re(|iiiro. Perhaps, one of the nanips may apply to Ocean Island, situated a lew degrees to the west of Tapntrouea, and inhahited, as I was assured by the captain of a whaler, at Oahu, by a similar people. Tlie group may be subdivided into at least four clusters, between which there is, at present, little conunuiiicalion, and the inhabitants of wiiicli, though forming but one people, speaking the same general language, yet dilfer more or less in their customs and institutions, and sliglitly in (halcet. The northern is composed of the three islands of Makiii, (or .l/.7/,/«,) Taritari, and Tarawa ni Makin. The first two are diviiitd only l)y a strait two miles in width. Taritari is the largest, having an extensive lagoon; but Makin, though small, is compact, with a good deal of fertile land, and is considered the metro- polis. The four islands, Maraki, Apia, Tarawa, and Maiana, form another cluster, of which Tarawa is the heail. The island of Apa- mama has connected with it, both locally and jjolitically, the smaller islands of Xonouki and Kuria. While Nonouti, Ta|)uteouea, Nuku- nau, and Peru, and, perhaps, the three remaining islands, form a fourth division, of which Tapuleouca may be considered the chief, — unless this title should be ilis|)uted by Byron's Islanil, of which we know only that it is large and populous. According to the observations of Mr. Dana, the whole group belongs, physically, to the same cla.ss with Tongatabu — that of coral islands slightly elevateil above their original level. The elevation, which is oidy of two or three feet, is not ipiile so great as at 'I'on^a, but is suilicient to give to the islands a larger surface of ilry land, anil a greater depth of soil than they would otherwise possess, or than is pos.sess(Hl, so far as we know, by any of the other coral islands of Mi- eronesi;i. The rei'fs and shoals, moreover, have tlii'ir extent much increased, atlbnling harbourage to many varieties and great numbers of lish, lobsters, turtle, shell-fish, and sea-slugs, from which tiie people draw a great part of their sustenance. Hesides the fruits of the cocoa- nut and pandamis, of which they havt; an abiiiidant supply, they have orchards of bread-tVuit trees and plantations of taro, which alford them an atrreeable variety. They have also a specii-s of purslain, of which we made a salad by no means uiipalataiilc, and on Makin they gather great (juantities of a nutritious berry, which they dry and make into a kind of sweet cake, considered by them a delicacy. This abundance of I'ood will account tor the large population of the group, so much greater than on most coral islands. At Taputeouea M I C R O N R S I A. 03 (Drurnmoiid's Island), the first wViich we visited, we were astonished at the nutnhers of tlie natives. Alter careful and repented ol)servn- tions, made in our visits to the sliore, and i)y tiie oHicers en<;aged in t!ie survey, tlie estimates varied lietween ten and fifteen thousand. This, however, was |)n>hal)!y one of the most tliickly inlialiited, the island appeurini^ like a continuous villairo from oik* end to tlie other. Kirby had once seen all the warriors of the tlin-e islands of Apamama, Nonouti.and Kuria collected loirether, in anticipation of an attack from the southern cluster, lie thouj^ht tiie nundicr was JM-tween si,\ and seven thousand. Supiiosini; this amount to be sonu'what e.vaii^^e- rated, we can hardly allow for the entire |)opulation of the three, less than twenty thousand. Finally, C>rvy estimated the people of '['ari- tnri and Makin at about i'lvv thousand. We should thus have for six islands of the i^roup (amcMiu; which two of the largest, 'i'arawa and Uyrons Island, an? not included) a total of thirty-five thousand. But allowint^ an averajfc of only live thousand to an islan)Vi>-niiii- ikiiu'd, may Ih' iiiloriod rniiii (lie |l)llii\viiif; <'\idiiirc. (!r. y nlalrd, tli.il .'dxiiit llini' yenrs licliin' lie lamlcd al .Makin, a parly of almut liliccii liiiiiilnil ii.ilivcs airiM'd llii'ii' ill I'mxw's Irciiii .\|iia, iVdrn wliii-li island tlu'y li.id Uiii drinii h\ llir warriors ul'r.iniM a. Licnlcnant I'anldin'; liunid al Ityrnn's Island n lar^^p iiopulaliori. lie says (.louriml, p. 9")), '• Ihu isU'i abrcaiil ol' us wa.s nil nijjht illinninalcd wiih niinicruiis fin'.s, nnd the air riinj; with l|ii> sliouH ol' luindrcds ..I" people. When llie day ilnwnr'd, llie wlii.lc ,H.'eaii was wliitcncd willi the lilljc sails iil" nuux's thai were seen eoniinj.' iVipin ivery direelion, and sonii' iiriliern as I'ar as llie eye eeuld distinfinish .so small an obje<-t. In an honr not less than a huiidivd of them were alongside, niul our deck wiu» covered with iioople." 24 04 KTII NOO R AIMI Y. ;l mulclle si/c, well made ami slender. Their colour is a copper-brown, a simde darker than that of the Tahitiaus. The hair is black, glossy, and line, with a sliirht tendency to curl. The features are small, but high and well-marked : the eye large, bright, and black, — the nose straight or slightly a(|uiline, but always widened at the lower part, — the mouth ratiicr large, with full lips and small teeth. The cheek- bones project forward so much as to give the eyes the apjiearance of being a little siuiken. They have inustachios and beard very black and line, liketlieir hair, but rather scanty. The usual hi'ighl is about five feet eight or nine inches, but wo saw many who were considerably below this standard. There are none of those burly persons among them which art; so conunon in die Sandwich and Society Islands, and we did not see one instance of obesity. The women are still smaller, in proportion, than the men, with slight figures, and small delicate features. Several among them woulil have been esteemed pretty in any country." The dilference which exists between these natives and those of Makin will be seen by comparing this description with that which follows : — " Having understood that they were of the same race with the other islanders, we were (piite unprepared for the extraordinary sight that was uow [jrcsented. Instead of the slender forms, sharp features, and steru countenances of the Drummond islanders, we saw a crowd of stout, hearty figures, and round, jolly faces, which, tliough dilferent in features, recalled to our minils the bulky chieftains of Ta- hiti. They were also lighter in complexion than the southern tribes, and more tattooed. " One t)f the first who came on board was a perfect mass of fill. Though of good height, he appeared really short, from his inuuense girtli. As he walked, the llesh of his cheeks and breasts siiook like a jelly, llis limbs were of enormous sizt\ but smooth as those of a cliild. Ilis face was round, with neatly-cut whiskers and nnistachios, and bis fine hair in idack glossy ringlets fell down on his slioulders. When he snuled, every I'eature was dilated with joy, and an even row of small white teeth was dis|)la\ed which a lady might have envied. There were several others on board of littli! inferior si/e, and a native in a ( anoe, who was pointed out to us by the white man as the king of tlie island, was actually so fat that he would not venture to ascend the ship's side. The greater part of the natives, who did not attain such an immoderate bulk, were distinguished by finely-moulded forms iiud hand.some faces. The outline of their features was regular MICRO N ESIA. 95 and pleasing', tlu)U'j;Ii all hail that spread of tho nostrils wliicli \vc have ohsorved in tlic soutlierri islanders. Tlie profiles of some were really heautiful." 'I'liis dilference in looks is accompanied by as <^reat a difTerence in character. Both arc iii<;hly ini^enious, as is shown in the construction of their houses and canoes, tho manufacture of their dres.ses and armour, and by the numerous comforts and conveniences witti which, under very unfavourable circumstances, they have manai.5ed to sur- round them.sclves. On the other hand, the natives of the soutliern islands arc suspicious and irritable, with a certain wildness and fero- city in their manners, which is in stron;| contrast with the miltl and kindly disjiosition of tiie people of Makin. 'I'he latter are a remark- ably soft and gentle race, not without a tinuie of elfeminacy. Of their humanity, a high idea is given by the statement of (irey, that, during the five years that he was among them, only one man was put to death. Cannibalism, moreover, is uidcnown among them, except by tradition; whereas on the southern islands, though not conmion, it is occasion- ally practised, and is not regarde>l with any particular horror. Kirby knew of five men being killed and eaten while he was on Apamama. It is said, however, that the southern natives, though easily oifended, are as readily appeased ; their animosity seldom settles into a long- continued rancour. From this statement wo must except certain cases arising out of jealousy between married women, who, when they conceive themselves aggrieved, will sometimes, for months together, carry about with them a small weapon of sharks' teeth concealed under their dress, and watch an opportunity of attacking the object of their jealousy. Desperate fights sometimes take jjlace between these fierce Amazons before they can bo parted. JJut ex- cepting such instances, Kirby always found the women more humane and gentle than the men. The respect paid to the chiefs varies at the different clusters. At Drummond's Island we remarked, in the manners of the natives, a kind of saiicy boldness and rude imlcpendence, which would hardly have existed among ii peoi)le u.sed to submi.ssion and deference. At Apamama tho chiefs have probably more respect paid them, and in Makin, Grey assured us that a strict subordination was maintained, and that the distinction of classes was strongly marked in the man- ners as well as the tisages of the inhabitants. Generosity, hospitality, and attention to the aged and infirm, are virtues highly esteemed and generally practised among all the natives. T 9fi E T H N O (i R A P II V. Kirby knew of no word for poor man except that for shive. Any porson wlio bus land, can always call npon his friends to |)rovido him witii a iiouso, a canoe, and the other necessaries of life; while one will) lias no land has nothing else, and is, of course, a slave. The worst stain on the character of this people is a shockinj^ and cnit'i practice, whicii Kot/ehue found also anioiii^ the people of Ua- dack, and DTrvillc on the island of Tikopia. It is that of destroying their nidKiru children, after the second or third, in order to escape the iiH-ouvenience of a uiiiuerous family. This is the reason a.ssijjncd hy tlie natives; the general arijiuuieut tiiat the islands would el.se become too densely peopled for tlieir means of subsistence seems not to occur to lliem. To the honour of tlie natives of Makin it should be recorded, that this eustoin does not e.vist ainonu; them. The women are, for the most part, better treated amonfj them than anions uncivilized people in j^eueral. All the haril, out-door labour, is pertbrmed l)y the men. They build the houses and canoes, catch the lish, collect and brint,' home the I'ruits which serve for lixHl, and do most til the cultivation. Tin- women aid them to clear and weed the iinuind, and attend to the domestic iluties which naturally fall to them. The custom also recpiires that when a man meets a female, be sliall [lay her the same mark of respect as is rendered to a chief, bv turiuiiLr aside irom the path to let her pass. This courtesy, how- ever, (lues not piTvade ail the intercourse of the sexes. A man, if proviiked, will not hesitate to strike a woman, who seldom fails to return the blow; sometimes .several of her compaidons will come to her aid, and the man is perhaps ^Vm] to escape well bruised, and covered with scratclies. Connected with tiie suspicious and irritable temper which cliarac- ten/.es the people of tiie soulliern clusters, is a disposition to sul- leiiuess and des|)ondeiicy, which sometimes leads them to commit suicide. Kirby knew five instances, on his own island, of men and women destroviii'^ themselves, and of several others who attempted it and were prevented by their friends. These cases of self-murder arose out of oHence taken at the conduct of some person whom fear or afrection made them uuwillinir to injure; the mingled s[)ite, mortili- cation, and nvc it* origin here, as at Danalw, in some riule idea ol" n iiictfiii psychosis. The ancestors of chiefs are rrprcseiitcil (so to speak) by tljeir skulls, which are carefully preserved iiy their (lesceiidaiits. When their spirits are to he invoked, these skulls are taken down, placed on a mat, and anointed with cocoa-nut oil; the lirows arc bound with leaves, and food is set before the (leshless jaws. The ^eneral term li)r spirit anil divinity is (inli. .\t Makin there are no priests, and the invocations are usually niiide by the head of tin- family, or by each indiviibial for himself On Tarawa and Apamama every family which has a tutelar divinity has also a priest, whose duty it is to perform the rites of worship, and whose per(|uisites consist in the I'ihhI otfcred to the ii <>( Kirliy (uul firi'V lo ilcliTinini', wIh-ii thrv l»';;aii svilli I, wlnllicr lliis Idler »iis n purl of tlio word, (ir mcp'ly llic pnTixid article tr. In llii.s ciuse «u nt first sii|i|piiseil tli.il li/niiiaii was a contruclion of /«• i/niiuit ; it may, Imwcver, U- iiwrcly n corruption of llic Polynesian word liijiiiifia, — tlie / JHjcoming l> in thi' Tariiwan langnayo. M k; u<».n ksi a. 90 ever they may chance to blow. At last it is supposed to arrive at llie Kdiiitilaiki, w sort of elysinin, wlicrit the spirits pass their time in feastinsr, daneiri^,', and whatever occupations were most a>,'reealiU' to them in their iMxIily existence. 'I'his elysium is placed l)V the natives on the island of Tarawa. On this there are several mounds, or rai.sod areas, of various sizes, the largest \w\\\^ about a mile loiin by half a mile in breadth.* None of these exccfd twenty-four feet in heiN«>rvt'ral tortoiso-sliclls sewed together. From two to six persons, necordinix to llu- si/.e of llie corpse, seal tluMiiselves opposite one another on the ll(N)r of the house (commonly the dwelliny others, ami in this wav tlio service is kept up for n space of time, varyiny with the rank of the decea.scd, I'rom four months to two years! All persons, \\hetiier free- horn or sl;i\i's, recciNc these peculiar honours after death. Diirinj^ the time tiic ciir|)se is thus lyiii;; in state, a fire is kept up day and liii.dit in the house, and its extinction would he reiriU'ded as a most unlnckv omen. At the end of the period, the remains are soinetimes wrapped in mats, and deposited in the loft of the house; hut more commonly they are huricd in a piece of ground set apart for the pur- pose, and the i;rave is marked iiy a stone erected at the head, another at the foot, and a third laid horizontally across these two, 'I'lii) skulLs of the chiefs are preserved and treated with the same marks of reve- rence as at the other islands. — 'I'o our impiiry how the people coiikl afford to spend their time ill tliis preposlerou.s manner, (irey replied at once, — " One halt' of them have iiothin;;; else to do," — a statement whicli, from wluit little we saw of the islands and the peo[ile, we could very well believe. (io v i: 11 s At i; NT. From what wc learned, it is likely that the form of iiovernincnt dill'ers to some e.xteiit on each of the liuir clusters into which the •fidiip is divided. We have, however, no iletinite inlormatioii e.vcejit in rctfard to llio.se of Apamama and .Makin. On the l()rmer we find a svsteni of civil policy similar to that which prevails in Polynesia. Society is divided into three ranks, chiefs or nobles {ii/a ox naiwiUi), landholders {katukd), and " immoii people or serfs [kawa). The immutu are the tree and well-born natives, who possess the i^jreater M I ( - R () N R H I A. 101 partoftlio lanil, niul nil tlio |H)liticnl niithurity. The hctuU of fnmiliRM an- riillcd iii'ti, ikiul tlio oldt'Ht ma olii town is tlio |•r^!Ni^lill^ cliicC {mil n ti n/Hi, lilcrally. I'roiit ot tlio luiul). The kulohi uro |mti«)ii« not (iriyiiiallv "f iiolilo liirtli, who, cilht-r l>v \\w liivoiir of their i-hief, or hy ^(mmI rtirtiiiie in wiir, hiive iu'(niire ; the niiddli* is open to the slaves and /,s very ani- mated, and violiMit ipiarrels occasionally take place hetwi-en ditferent Mpeakers, who are with ddlictdty prevented from coming to blows. Although no regular vote is taken, the sense of the majority is soon apparent, and determines tlie restdt. In some of the islands and clusters, certain chiefs hav(^ obtained, by success in war, a superiority over the rest of the nobles, and made themselves sovereigns of their respective countries. Kirby hiid understocnl that there was a king on Taputeouea, but if so, his authority is not unipiestioned, for two par- ties wi-re at war on the island when we visited it. There is a king on the group of Apamama, and another on that of Tarawa, both of whom have acipiired their powisr very lately. On Makin there is also a sovereign chief, but the system of govern- ment is, in some respects, ditlerent. There are, according to (Jrey, three ninks, ii'muitii or royal chiefs, liniiuita or gentry, and rang or common people. The first-named viere originally of the same class with the second. About a hundred years ago, Teouki, the graiul- fatlier of the reigning king, anil a mighty warrior, succeedeil in con- centrating in his own hands tiie sovereign power, which was before Uxl^'^ed with the whole Ixuly of the gentry or petty chiefs. His descendants constitute the inmata, and share among them the supre- macy, thongii there is one that retains especially the title of head-chief Besides these, there is a bu-ni-matuuy, or chief judge, as Grey termed • This word WHS sn written nt the titnc ; we hnvo since thuiighl thai it should |)orliii|)s be uma-ni-apu, literally, house of the town, or loun-liousr. 36 102 E T 11 N O R A P H V. him, who seems to be a sort of prime minister, and really has ihe. direction of the government. As regards tlieir system of descent we could ieain bnt little. At the time wo were there, the king was a young man, and his father was still living; though hardly past the prime of life, and in tlie full vigor of his faculties, he had resigned his power to his son, — but whether of his own accorti, or in obedience to some established law, Grey could not inform us. TATTOOTXr;. There is nothing peculiar or striking in the tattooing of these natives. It is mostly in short, ol)li(|ne lines, about an eighth of an ilich apart. These are arranged in per|HMidicular rows, of which there are four or five down the back, on each side of the spine ; with a similar marking in front, beginning just below the collar-bone. The legs also are imprinted, but not the arms or face. The women are tattooed in the same manner, but not so much as the men. There arc professional taltooers, whose prices are so high that slaves cannot, in general, afford to be thus ornaincnteil, but there is no law against it. On the dark-skinned race of the so\ithern clusters, the marking does not show very clearly, and at a little distance would hardly bo observed ; but on the natives of Makin it is (piite distinct. uousics, CANOKS, irn\ The dwelling-houses iiave two stories, a ground lloor and a loft, or garret, sep^iriitixl by a horizontal partition of slender sticks laid upon joists. iVccording to Kirby, this mode of building was adopli-d in order to escape the ravages made by the rats, which swarm in the islands, As the loft is only connected with the ground by the four corner posts, the lower part of the house being oj)en all arountl, these animals cannot reach the food, mats, and other articles which are kept in it. It is curious enough that an animal so insignificant should thus alfect the architecture of a numerous people. On the Ai)anuuna cluster, and the islands south of it, the loft is raised but three or lour feet above the groun 1, and of course the iiunates on the lower floor must be constantly in a sitting or reclining posture. On Tarawa, however, the houses were larger, and some had two upper stories, the second lloor being laid about three feet above, the first. On Makin, where the supply of timber is abundant, the houses are of MICRONESIA. 103 still ffrcatcr sizo, and the partition is made of siiflicient lioitjlit to cnal)lo the poopio to stand uprij^ht iiiiiler it. The ronncil-houscs iiavo no lofts, and are of great size. That at the town of Ltiroa, on Tapiiteouea, was a hundreil and twenty feet lonir, l)y forty-five wide, antl about forty liif^h at tiie ridj;e-i)ole. On the islands to the nortli they are still larijer, and from the descriptions of the two siN-inien, as well as from the tii.stant view which we had of them, must he enormous structures. Their canoes resend)le very nearly, in model, construction, and riuf, those of the Feejeeans. They are not llat on one side, like those of the iMulj^rave islanilers, hut have; the shape of a lon;r and narrow boat. 'I'he larj^est, which are found at Makin, arc not less than sixty feet in leii<^th, by si.v in width. They sail very near the wind, and move with a rapidity which has ac(piired for them the name of " (lyiuff proas." The dress, ornaments, and arms of the natives do not differ mate- rially from those which have been described as proper io the people on the low islands of this archipelaifo. The delensive armour, how- ever, intended to protect the body from the formidal)le edi^es of the sharks-teeth weapons, is probably peculiar to them. It consists of a jacket and trousers of a very thick, close network, braided of cocoa- nut sinnet, and u cuirass made likewise of this cord, but woven so compactly, am! in so many thicknesses, as to form a solid board, half an inch throujfh, which would torin a tolerable defence even a|j;ainst the blow of a sword. Its shape is nearly that of the ancient cuirass, except that a .s(|uare j)i<.'ce rises up behind to protect the head from a side blow. They have al.so caps or helmets, inu;eniously made of the skin of the porcui)ine-fish, (-ut oil at the head and then exteniled to the proper size. It becomes stiff and hard in drying, and the spines protruiling on every side aid in warding off the blows of the dreaded weapons. R O T U M A, I) K ti It .\ N V I I, I. V. I S I, A N O. This island is situated in 12° 30' of north latitude, and 177° 15' of east longitude. It is three hundred miles distant from any other land, and cannot properly be included in either one of the three ethnographical regions of the Pacific. Its inhabitants more resemble the Caroline islanders in their appearance and character, but their customs assimilate them rather to the Polynesians. Their dialect is 104 ETHNOGRAPHY. a mixture of Polynesian words, very much corrupted, with those of some other huiguage, unlike any which has been elsewhere found. They show, also, in some of their usages, and some words of their language, traces of communication willi their Feejeean neighlwurs to the south. During our brief stay at Tongafabu, in April of 1840, several natives of Rotuma came on board our vessel, and I took that oppor- tunity to obtain the vocabulary which is given in another place. The one to wiioin I was principally indebted was an elderly man, by name. 'Viii-Rotiimd.* a petty chief, who had been two voyages in a whaler, and had thus ac(|uired some knowledge of Knglisli. With him was a young chief of high rank, by name. 'Vokmiiiia, to whom the other seemed to act as guardian. They had left their island about two years before, with several attendants, in a whale-ship, for the purpose of visiting tlie Friendly Islands, and seeing something of the world. Unfortunately, since their arrival, Tui-Uotuma had be- come blind, and war having broken out on Tonga, between the Christian and heathen parties, their situation had become uncom- fortable. The old councillor, in particular, was desirous of getting away, giving as his rea.son, that the young chief, his companion, would one day be king, and that theretbre it would not be well for him to be at Tonga during the civil dis.sensions ; he would, as Tui- Rotuma expressed it, "see too much fight." The Uotumans resemble the Polynesians in form and complexion, but their features have more of the Euro|)ean cast. They have large noses, wide and prominent cheek-bones, full eyes, and considerable l)eard. Tliey are tattooed in large ma.sses over the middle of the body, from tiie navel nearly to the knee ; on the breast and arms they have light marks, varying .somewhat in shape, but generally like a row of arrow-heads. The expression of their countenances, which is mild, intelligent, and prei)o.s.sessing, corresponds with their character, which is superior in many respects to that of the Polynesians. Like the Caroline islanders, they are good-natured, confiding, and hospitable. No instance, I believe, of any difficulty between them and their foreign visitors has ever occurred. They are distinguished, moreover, for their forethought and consideration. Tlieir island, having a popula- • This name, in tlic Toii^a dinlrct, siwnilies " Ijird of Kcituiiia ;" it Unci, however, no siiih nieaniiig in tin- langungi- of this islnnil, but was simply an a|)|M'llativc. MICRONESIA. 100 tion of four or five thousand, with a circuit of only twenty-five miles, and a hilly surface, does not always produce a sufficient supply of food for its inhabitants. There are, therefore, many of the poorer classes who are eager to engage as seamen on board whale-ships, where they remain until they have accumulated sufficient property, in tliose articles which are estcemeil valuable among liieir country- men, to enable them, on tlieir return, to purcliase land and live com- fortably for the rest of their days. TIk^v make excellent sailors, and are biglily prized, not only for their intelligence and docility, but also for their prudence and regular conduct. Tlifir system of government is peculiar and singular. The island is divided into twenty-four districts, cacli under a high chief [nijnii- gntsli(i). Each of these chiefs, in rcguhir rotation, holds, for the space of twenty months, the sovereignty of the island, during which time he presides in the councils, and receives tribute from the rest. To- kanina belonged to this clas.s. Tlie official title of the head chief is riamhau, but they use also the Vitian word tidii, meaning kiiuj. Ne.xt to the high chiefs come the councillors or elders (/««/«//»«/ or w/rt/Aw/), who correspond to the matitbuks of Tonga. The mass of the people are called lluMnuri {da-muri), answering to the ti'uis, or lower class of the Friendly Islands. Of their religion I could obtain but little information. The word for god is oitii or aitii, which is probably the same with the Samoan aitu, spirit. Hi faka-oiti;, spir:t-house, is the word for temple, and hanua on aitu, land of spirits, is their term for heaven, or the resi- dence of the gods. But wliether these spirits are pro|)er divinities, my informant, wiiosc knowledge of English was limited to the most ordinary terms, could not explain. The dress, manufactures, and arts of these islanders have a general resemblance to tiiose of the Friendly and Navigator islands. Some of their customs, however, appear to be of Feejeean origin. Thus, one of the men who came on board had iiis hair disposed in frizzled masses aroiuid his head ; and the young girls are said to colour tlieir locks of a dingy white by washing them with lime-water. It is remarkable that the Hotumans reckon by periods of six months, or moons, instead of the full year. Living as tliey do, on a small island near the equator, at a distance from any e.vtensive land, tlie changes of temperature must be slight, and the difference of seasons iiardly perceptible. The westerly winds which blow from October to April do, no doubt, .serve to distinguish this period of the 37 106 ETHNOGRAPHY. year; but they cannot materially affect the course of vegetation. At the Kingsmill Group, situated directly under the equator, the natives reckon by j)criods often months, a number evidently adopted for con- venience of counting, and with no reference wiiatever to any natural seasons. The names of the Ilotuman montlis are — Oi-pnpa, Mnrcli (nnil September). l^ijldji, April (iinii October). liana, M'ly, f»\ and endiirama' of the neophytes. It is certain, however, that there is some variation iii liie details «[' the ceremonv, in dillerent places; for anionic the coast trihcs, one of these is the knockinif out of an upper Iront tooth, which is not done at W'el- liiifj;ton, and farther in the interior. Hut the nature and olijei t of the institution ajipeur to he every where the same. Its desiirn umpu's- tionahly is, to imprint upon the mind ol' the vounu; man the rules hy which his future life is to he reijulated ; and some of these are so striking', and, under the circumstances, so admiralile. that one is inclined to aserihe them to some iii^hcr stale of mental cultivation than now prevails amoiii; the natives. 'Thus, liie youiii; men. from the time they are initiated till they are married, are forliicMen to approach or speak to a female. 'I'liey must encamp !il a distance from them at niifht, and if they see one in the way, must make a lon<5 detour to avoid her. Mr. Watson told me that he had often heen put to irnnit inconvenience! in travelliiii^ throuu;h the woods with a youii^ man for his <(nide, as such a one could never lie iiuliiced to approach an encampnu'iit where tlu^re were any women. The moral intent of this regulation is evident. Another rule rerpiires the youny; men to pay implicit t)!)e(lience to their ciders. As there is no distinction of rank amoiiir them, it is evident that some authority of this kind is recpiired to preserve the order and harmony of social intercourse, A third re|iciis with llic cirlv now tiikcs hiM liini to ^ttrlkl', miil llio II lllltlNCS. 'I'l II' cim lli'i •«'''l oilier isoliliueil In |il;u't' himself in llie >;iiiii' poslure o\ coiivi'nUMircv In lliis w.'iy III!' eoiiiliiit is I'oi.tiiiiicil, with ultiriiiile liiilVels, nntil one ol tlieiil IS >tliniieil, or the e\|ilillloil Is eoiiMilereil siitlshii'tory. •I. \\ hal are called wars iiiiinnn thein iiimv more properly lie con- sidered duels (if this wiird may lie so a|i|i|ied) lietween two parties ol' men. One or more natives ol' a certain part ot tlii^ country, consi- »ieriiit( themselvux ai.'u'ri<'ved iiy the ads of others in another part, asseinlile their ni'iuhliors lo ronsiilt w illi them concerning the proper culirse lo he lilirsiied 'i'l le i^enerai opinion haviiiir I'cil declared lor war, a me.ss(>ngor or amimssador is sent to aniioiiiice their iiitention to These inimediatelv ii^seinlile their Iricnds and le o|i|iosile iiarlv ilesl. Ill some iiei;,'lihors, and all prepare lor the approachiiiLj coi cases, the dav is lixeil hy the messenoiT, in others not; Imt, at all ('\eiits, llii^ time is well • nderslood. The two armies (nsnallv Iroin liity to two hiiiulred each) mliiiiiili Miincliini's iiiduci'.s ii in i.i n.|aliiiic j]'- inixiiiu Willi iIk! liiod uf tilt Tlic ciislcini rclirrcd III alu iiivc iniiv [huMlily li.iM' iinsiii Iriiiii tins ciiu.si', ii I Ihi mid would llmi Ix.' Hut .-u hIidIIv iiiiitiisiui:iL>l (' !is il limy. 111 lirsi sinlil, ii|i|iinr. »! I "!»*"W>'^»"^wt«"«>SEr~:^ac-ww" IIG KT 11 N 0(J II A 1' II Y. Tlie fdrc^'oiniT (losi'ri|)ti(iii will siillice to !j;ivo ;i rreneral idea of the cliarai'tcr and customs of tliis aiiiu;iilar rac(!. l''or otlior details rela- tive to their lial)its and nsa;fes, \\u' reader is referred to tlie j^eneral liistory of tlic voyavii'ranii, or, as it is called at \\ ellin^'ton, tho hargmi, is per- iia|)s the most curious implement ever employed in warfare. It i.s shapcil somewhat like a saitre, bcinif a (lat stick, three feet lonij; and from one to two inches in breadth, which is curved or crooked at the middle, so as to form a very obtuse aufrle. Any one who saw it for the first time would naturidly set it down for a clumsy kind of wooden sword. It is, however, a missile, and, in the haiuls of a native, forms a tolerably ellicient weapon, wiiit-h is used not only in war, but in taking birds and other small animals. It is i^ras|)eil at one end by the ri<^ht hand, and thrown either upwards into the air, or ol)liquely downwarils, so as to strike the earth at sonii' distance from tlie thrower. In the former case, it flics with a rotary motion, as its .shape would lead us to e.xpcct. After ascendin<^ In a yreat distance throuiili the air, in the direction lirsl <^iven to it. it suddenly re- turns in an elliptical orbit, to a spot not far from the starling point. Though the curve thus described is oiu; which ini;,dit umpiestionably be determined by inatiiematical calculation, we must sujipose that it was accident which lirsl taiiglil the use of this extraordinary weapon. When thrown towards the ground, tiie ela.sticity given by its curved shape ciiuses it to rt'boti.ul and lly forwards; it continues in this direction, touchinif the earlli in a succession of rapid leajis, like a ball fireil en ricochet, until it strikes the object at which it is thrown. MIGRATIONS OF THE OCEANIC TRIBES. POLYNESIA. As \\w cxiiiniiiation of \\h\ nistdins ami idioms of llu' Polynesian tribes li-iives no room to doubt tbiit tliey form, in fact, but a sIiiltIc nation, and as tlio similarity of tlieir dialects warrants tlic su|)positiMn that no great lenirtli of time has elapsed since their dispersion, we are naturally led to incjuirc whether it may not be possible, by the com- parison of their idioms and traditions, and by other indications, to determine, with at least some deifree of probauility, the or-ginal point from which their separation took place, and the manner in which it was elfected. By this point is not meant the primitive seat of their race in the Malaisian Archipclairo, thouLjh we may hereufler venture a conjecture with regard to this, but merely the island or group in the Pacific which was the first inhabited, and which bore to the rest the relation of the mother-country to its colonies. The first result of ;i careful investigation is to produce the convic- tion that the progress of emigration was from west to east, and not in the contrary direction. This conclusion may he deduced merely from an e.vaniination of the comparative grammar and vocabulary of the various dialects. We see in those of the western groups many forms which are entirely wanting in the eastern tongues; others, which are complete in the former, are iound in the latter defective, and perverted from what seems evidently their original meaning. The reader is referred to H 40, 41, 54, f)5, of the Grammar, with respect es])ecially to the desiderative and reciprocal forms of the verb, the i)as- sive voice, and the plural of the possessive and tlemonstrative pronouns. Other comparisons serve to confirm this general deduction. We find in the west a comparatively simple mythology and spiritual worship, which, in the east, is perverteil to a debasing and cruel idolatry. The fashion of tattooing, whicli, in Samoa and Tonga, is ao mm ; 1 i. 118 ET II .\ OG R A I' II V. intended to answer tlie purposes of decency, has degenerated elsc- wliere into a mode oi" ornament. Other facts, of a similar nature, niiirht be mentioned, l)ut it will hardly be thought necessary. One circumstance, liowevcr, must be noted, which becomes apparent in this investigation. 'I'lie peo[)le of the Tonga or Friendly Group, though lielonsiing to the Polynesian iamily, form a class apart from the rest. This is seen in their lani;uaire, which differs strikii.^;,!" in several points, from the others, especially in the article, the pronouns, anil the passive voice of the verb. Several of their customs are, more- over, peculiar, such as that of infant sacrifice, of cutting off a finger to appease the gods, their fashion of canoe-making, &c. It is evident that these islanders have re(;eived modifications in their language and usages from a source which lias not alfectcil the rest. W't> shall, for the present, leave this group out of the ipiestion, in our discussion, and recur to it herjafter. Before [jroceeding fartlier, it will be necessary to examine the only argument of importance whicii has been urged against the migration of the eastern isitinders from the west. This is the supposed preva- lence of easterly winds witiiiu the tropics. Against this, many voyagers have adduced facts serving to .show that the.se winds are by no means constant, ami tliat they are freciuently interrupted l»y others from the contrary direction ; and somi- have suggested the connexion of these last with the northwest monsoon of the China and Malayan Seas.* The observations made (Am. cilit.), vol. i. p. liiS. t .Mi-i>i')ii;irv Diili'rpi'iM', p. ."i7. |; Strvv:ii-!'> \ciyiigc to lliu .Suulli J^cas, vol. i. p. -yi-i "PW 120 ETHNOGRAPHY. : 111 probable, tlierefore, tliat by foliowing this clue, the diflerent tribes of Polynesia might all be referred back to their original seat. On com- municating the.se views to Mr. Williams, (but a few weeks before his lamented death,) he informed me tiiat he had long entertained the opinion that the Samoan Islands were the source of population to the otlier groups of Polynesia. His intimate acquaintance with the lan- guage and traditions of tliree of the principal groups, and his general information on this subject, gave particular weight to his opinion. During the remainder of the voyage this investigation was pursued, and the results were found to accord perfectly with the view liere expressed. In the writings of former voyagers many statements were found incidentally confirming tiie conclusion thus formed, and the more valuable as they were made with no reference whatever to such a supposition. Before proceeding farther, a word of e.vplanation becomes neces- sary, with regard to the name of the island above-mentioned. Throughout Polynesia, with the exception of .Samoa, all the prin- cipal groups are known to tlie people of the other groups by the name of their largest island, used in a general sense, as we commonly say England for tlie whole group of British Islands. Thus the Sandwich Islands are termed Hanaii, — tlie Marcpiesas, Nnlmhiva, — the Society Islands, Tahiti, — the Gambier Group, Ma/igareva, and the Friendly Islands, Tonga. The Navigators, only, have a distinct name for their group. This word, Samoa, signifies in Malay all; it probably had originally the same signification in this dialect, and was applied to the group, as we use the word " Union," in speaking of the United States. In process of time it lost its general meaning, as an adjective, and became a mere appellative. At present, the only term for all, in this idiom, is uma, which means, properly, finished, com- plete. Before, however, the name Samoa came into general use, — or while it retained its primary sense of all, — some other means of designating the group must have been necessary, particularly for natives of other islands. It is reasonable to suppose that the same mode was adopted here as elsewhere, and that the name of the prin- cipal island was used for this purpose. By referring to the table of dialectical changes, given in the Com- parative Grammar, \ 2, it will be perceived that this name would, as has been already intimated, undergo certain alterations in the various idioms. The following are the regular forms as they may be deduced from the table : OCEANIC JI I G 11 A T I O .\ S. 121 1. Orii;iiinl r(irrii, Siiriii/ci. '■1, Siiiiiiiaii illnk'Ot, Sifiii'L .'). 'I'liliiliiiii, Jhivai'i. 4. Snmlwii'li Isliiiiil, lliinni'i. 5. Kiii(>l()n;;im mid Mniij;nri.'vnii, Afdi/.i. 0. Nukuliiv.in, Ilaiaihi. 7. \i« Zi'uliind, Hull (tiki. It will be found that this is, so to speak, tlie key-word, wliich unlocks the mystery of the Polynesian migrations. T A II I 1' I, c) It T II i: s () (• 1 1: r v i s i, a x n s. As our attention was not drawn to this subject of investigation (that which connects the Polynesians with Savaii) until after we left this group, we are unable here to add any thing to what has been given by others. Fortunately, this is amply sufficient for our pur- pose, and, as already remarked, has the great advantage of having been obtained and published without the possibility of a reference to any hypothesis like that now advanced. Mr. Ellis, in his Polynesian Researches (vol. ii. p. 234, American edition) says; — " Opon is the most remarkable place in Raiatea; of its earth, according to some of their traditions, the first pair were made by Tii or Taaroa, and on its soil they fi.ved their abode. Here 0;o held his court. It was called Hawaii ; and as distant colonies are said to have proceeded from it, it was probably the place at which some of the first inhabitants of the South Sea Islands arrived." As there is no iv in the Tahitian langiiage (at least in the usual orthogra- phy), it is here eviilently written instead of a v. In another part of the same work, (vol. i., p. 105,) the author, in treating of the origin of the Society islanders, inclines to refer them to the Sandwich Islaiids, his principal reason being that "in some of their [the Tahitian] tradi- tions Ilaivaii is mentioned as the ancient name of Opoa and Oro, who is by some described as both god and man, as having two bodies or forms, or being a kind of connecting link between gods and men, is described as the first king of Ilawiiii or Opoa in Raiatea." - The Tahitian v is fre(|ueiilly sounded like /r, and Mr. Ellis here evidently chooses the latter element in order to show more clearly the resem- blance or rather identity of the name with tlic Ilaivaii of the Sand- wich Islands. He was not, at that time, aware of the e.^ci-stence of a Savaii in the west; had he been so, we may conclude that the reason 31 133 ETII XOO R A PH Y. which led him to derive the Society Islanders from the nortiicrn group, would have induced liiin to refer both the Ilawaiis to tiiat source. Cook, in the history of his first voyage (vol. il'.., p. G9), comparing the New Zealauders with the South Sea (i. e. Society) islanders, observes that "tiie^v have both a tradition that their ancestors, at a very remote period of time, came from another country ; and, accord- ing to the tradition of both, the name of that country is Ileawije." There is no j in either the New Zealand or Tahitian language. It may be a mistake, made in printing or copying, for n that while the north and south point.s huvc been reversed, the east and west are eorrectly given. OjMl'Xjrrau is liir o ii/uilorrHit, meaning .south, and Op'itiri (iir o djitilim, north. TiitahaieUi. (pro|ierly tatahiiitd) is "morning," and Olir.'Va'ilirii should W' ii lii/i o tc rit, "the rising ol" the sun." Tiniili is lor the Intler part ol' the phrase te nitiiri rait i tc iri a tai, lilerally, "the sinking (of the son) lo the level ol' the se;i." 'Dxitrra is for /<« o ^' /•«, sunset. 7V/VJ Ijiuiilli'ii (/(■ III r urnlin) means, " Ihe sun is at lUHin." Of the seventy-nine names given on Ihe chart, forly-nine (supposing those in which the term llitte occurs to l)elong to Ihe Iv'cjec Oroup) can Ik' iileiitilied. .\s lo Ihe remainder, the uncerluinty prohnlily proccn-ds, in most cases, from ndslakes on Ihe part either of Tupaia (who gave the names and hicalities merely I'rom tradition) or of those to whom he communicated Ihe inli>rmation, or, fmally, of Forster hims<>lf, who made out the chart from two copies, dif- fering from one another in some res|H'cts, and selected the names from liiiir separate lists. Of these he remarks, — " some of the names were strangely s\\c\\, as tliere never were two pers(ms, in Ihe last and former voyages, who s|)elt the same name in the same manner," One conse(|uence of this discrepancy in Ihe original charts anil list:* has l)een thai, in making his selectiiuis, I'orster has, in some cases, given the same island twice. Thus we have llailunuii and Hrrvanii, both for Ixiiiiiivai ; liiniiitnrrii and liimalema both for HiiiiiUiira ; Ailrilin and ^^'nlll■l■m, Isith probably li)r Atiii ( Wimreen for O-AHii, tlie r and / iinving been conl'ounn|,\TI(>.N. 'ranniii llio Hisc /iiiiiiii JhiiKi I Inn II a ; |pri«lii(c(l llii' ImikI lliiwiiii; lliiiiiin iilii run, I'i pun nil Tnniiin, Iri niinri rn Jiiiint, I liiwiiii ^I'l'iil mill siiri'i'il, IIS II slii'll (Ixiilx ) lor 'rmiriiii, wliiMT(iilril(Mr vivilii'il) llii'ttiirld. 'I'liaf, l)y himii, Mr. MocrcnliniU mciins tci spell (in llin Frcricli ortliojrrapliy) huivaii, is I'vidnit from tlie tact tliiil on jiaifi! r)")"^, of this volume, lio rf(|iiot>'s tlio passii;re which we liave {.fivcn alxivo, anil spells this word iiIkiH, and on puift^ '-2'21, of the second volume, he remarks thai ()//«/7 is the name of the largest of the Sandwich Islands [Ihiwmi). Mr. Mocrenhont renders ohaii i>y universe, and it is likely enoiijfh that this may he the ineaninu now attached to it hy the Tahitian priests. 'I'he second part of the ode continues the work of creation, and ends with the line "/pan fenoim no lioti/r (or, i- jxtu J'cHiKi no Itdirfiii), — (inislied is the land of Hawaii. The third part relates the oriifin of the jijods who were horn of Taaroa and his wives, after the creation of oliii/i, and ends with " t('i moiia iri tr utoiKi Roo iirari nti i iroto /'pou fininii oiijiarou," which should, perhaps, he '■'tei vuKt iri tr atiid lion a rare ii(t ei rotopii Jiinaii Uporu," — the ifod Uoo remained in front, and seeinij that which was within, jjroduced Uporu. This version is ol)scure and may not he altoLfcthcr correct; but fiiuiiii oii/mroii, like /(///^/// /'iiioiifi hoaii, can hardly he mistaken. Upolit is the second of the Samoan Islands, nearly e(|ual in size and importance to Savaii. There can he little douht that this is an ancient Polynesian mythos, relatin^f to the supi)osed orijfin of the Navi^iator Islands, and that it was hroui^ht from thence hy the first emiifrauts to Tahiti, where it has [)robahly underifone only such alterations as the gratlual change in the language rendered nece.s.sary. NL'KI IIIVA, ()|{ Tin: M AUglKSAS I S I, A N S. That which lirst strikes us in this groui), i.s the number of dia- lectical dillerences in the language as spoken at the various islands, and even between diirerent districts of the same island. Mr. Alex- ander says,* "On the island of Nukuhiva, the iiihahitaiits of the 'ieii and 'I'liipi districts may he as readily distinguished as a Scotchman and a Yankee, while a Tahuatan may be tlistinguished from them • Huwailun Sjicctator, anil, o/h, . . . offt. . . iirolm, . . , . love. IdlllKl, . . . tilll'tll, . . lllllVlC, . . , liiiva-lxml. hiiijio, , , . ItiltlK), . iihii, . . , , . unlive cloth, liiliiimi, . . . tii/inm, . , . tlllllKI, . , , . nrtisnn. oiiultiiu, . . , onif/ii/iif , . . a/iiirii, , , . Ii-ii. tiktiu, (\uk.) . /, it seems prol)al)le that the northern portion of the Miu'ipicsan (ironp was lirst settled l)v emigrants tVom \ avau, and the soutliern hv otiiers I'rom 'I'aliiti, and that tlii'ir ilescendants havt> vince graduallv intermingled. The Tahitians may iiave hi-en the most numerous, and |)erliaps received additions from time to time, from their parent countrv, whn-ii is only seven hundred miles distant, — which uouhl aci'ount lor tlieir huigu;iL;c having liccome, in a great mrasurc. |ircdominant. It is to these, also, that the tradition with regard to llavaiki is prol)ai)l\' to hv referred. 'I'hc story of the Niikiihivans, as ('ommodore I'orter rei-eived it from tlic cliicf (lattanewa {Knifiiinii). was to the elfcct that Oiifaia, with his wife Aii'iiioiiiin, came from \ avail ciyhty-eigiit generations hack, (reckoned in the family of (iattaiicwa himself,) and hrought wilii them iprcad-fniit and sugar-cane, and a great variety of other plants. The\ had forty cliildreii, who were ail named after tlie plants which thcv Icid brought with them, with the exception of the lirst son, who was called I'o, or night.* They si'ttled in the valley of Tieuhoy * 'riicrc !•<, |H'ili.i|is, ;i iin--liikc line. 'I'Iuki' ili\ iiiili'.'s. In olliir nriiii|is, nf uliosc s. No one who has carefully compared the languages and customs of the two groups, has ever doubted that the natives of the Samlwich Islands were ilerived, eitlier directly or indirectly, from the Society Group. The traiiilions of the natives seem, at tirst sight, to confirm this beLef, for they generally state that the original settlers were from Tahiti (mai taliili). We tind. however, on further in(|uiry, that lakiti, in this language, mvxms /biritjn, (i/iroud. In the Hawaiian Vocabu- lary of Mr. Andrews, it is rendered "a foreign country;" and it is uncertain U' the natives had, when they were first visited by whites, any knowledge of a particular islaiul called by this name; while Niikiiliii'd ami Fdlii/iira, two of the .Manjue.sas Islands, are mentioned in their traditionar\ songs, as among the places visited by voyagers from Hawaii in former days.* Nevertheless, the word 'I'ahiti may, as Mr. Ellis suggests, have been originally used with reference to this island. \Ve shall have occasion to remark, in the terms Aoaiki I'orlli," as well as "to Ix- Imh-ii." I'Hptaiii I'ortor, hi'aring the plirnsc Imimu-jx) applied to Outaia aiul his cDiisort would naturally translate the word in its active sense. * See Ellis's Tonr round llawiiii, pp. 'JH7, and HI a. 33 lyo ETHNOGRAPHY. 15 and Tonga, similar instances of the changes in meaning, from a limited and relative, to a general and absolute sense, which proper names undergo at the second remove. In this manner, it seems pro- bable that the meaning given in Hawaiian to the word Tahiti, may have arisen. The Marquesans have been shown to be derived, in part, at lea.st, from the island of that name, and they have always retained a knowledge of its exi.stcnce. If, before they had been very long settled in the .Mar(|uesan Group, tiiey sent forth a colony to the Sandwich Islands, the members of this colony would, at starting, have the knowledge or tradition of no less tiian tiiree different places which they might term the mother-country, liamely, Savaii (or Havaih), Tahiti, and Nukiihiva. We ma}' suppose that, in j)rocess of time, the first and most distant was wholly forgotten; the second, only retained as a general name for foreign country, and the third, remembered more distinctly, though not perhaps as the source from vhence they were derived. That when the first settlers reached the Sandwich Islands, they retained a knowledjje of the original seat of their race in tiie Navi- gator Grou|), see.ns almost certain, from the fact that they gave to the largest island of their new country the name of the largest of the Samoan Islands, to whicii it bears, in shape and general ap[)e:irance, a striking resemblance. Moreover, to the north point of this island they gave the name of Upv/a, tlie second island of the Samoan Group, and a small rocky islet near Xiihaii was called Lehua, being that form which Lefuka, the name of one of tiie islands in the Friendly Group, would take in the Hawaiian language. Tiiese names may serve as a clue to the manner in which tiie migration to this group took j)lace. It is, prima facie, evident, that this could hardly have been by a canoe driven oil' to the iiortliward, as it was crossing from one of llie .Marquesas Islands to another. The tlistance is nearly two thousand miles, and a canoe would not accompiisii it in less than twenty days, with a constant.,' fair wind; but a southerly wind, for that K'ligth of time, is, in tiiat region, some- thing une.vampled. On tliis sup|)osition, miireover, they would, of course, be without provisions sullicicnt for sucii a voyage; and, in that case, it is inconceivable that dogs and |)igs shoiUd have been kept alive till their arrival. Yet their traditions distinctly state that these animals have been on the islands since they were first inhabited. This is confirmed by the fai't that they are of that peculiar breed proper to the South Sea Islands. But if we suppose that a party of OCEANIC MIGRATIONS. 131 Marquesans, mostly of Tahitian descent, with some few of Vavaiian origin, had set out in one or more large canoes, well provided with necessaries for a long voyage, to revisit the countries of their ances- tors, — the Navigator and Friendly Groups, — we see at once how the involuntary emigration might have taken place. Proceeding with the regular southeast trades, till they had arrived nearly at their destination, they were struck (we may suppose) by a northwesterly gale, such as has been before described. To {)revent being driven directly back, the natural proceeding would be to haul up as close to the wind as possible, which would give them a course nearly north- by-vvest. If the gale continued several days, witli cloudy weather, they would lose their reckoning entirely, and would then, in accord- ance with tiie usual custom of the islanders, proceed onward in the same direction, till they reached the land.* And if, as we have supposed, they were then in search of the island and group of Savaii, it was natural enough that they should give to their new h' me, which resembled it in many respects, the same name. Respecting the time when this migration took place we can form at least a plausible conjecture. The Hawaiians have a ^nealogy of their kings from the first Tahitian colonists down to the reigning sovereign. It comprises sixty-seven generations, whose names are given in full, in the Moo-olelo, a native history, before referred to. It might be doubted whetiier the natives could remember with accuracy so far back; but this doubt would cease on hearing one of them recite the genealogy in question. As given in the History, it stands as follows (beginning with the second king, the son of Watea and lloohotuta- lani) : IIISIIANU. O JIu/m, O llitiitiia/f), WIKK. Jliii'.iiiiiuwii/i/ac, J Ill/ill lie, lltlUllllll, CHILD. O Wtiui. O Iliiianulo. O Nanalehiti, &c. But in the native recitation, as we have heard it, the words tone, * One re.isiin of the j^rcnt ilUtnncc ti> wliiili these cliiincc-voyngps of the nntivcs pxtend, is foutiil ill llie viigiio a.ssiirnnce wliicli lliey have, tiiat the ocean is covoivd with islands in every direction. Aceorihiijjly, when they arc driven out to sea, and have lost the hearing of their own island, they do not erase their ed'orts in despair, or contimie to Iwat u|) and down without an ohject, — hut, selecting some cour.se, they sot their sail and steer holdly onward, husUinding their provisions as long as possihlc, in the hope of at length striking upon some unknown land. Mr. Williams gives several instances of long voyages made in this way by canoes running before the trade-wind. I 183 ETHNOGRAPHY. husband, wahine, wife, and tamaiti, child, are introduced after each name in the respective columns ; thus — O Jhilixi le t(ini; O llhiamaiioiitiiiic ta iva/iine, O Wiiia (e tamaiti. O H'aia If tunc, O lluhune to, u-uhine, O Jlinamilo le tamaiti, iVc. This, it will be seen, makes of it a species of verse, with, in fact, a greater approach to rhytlim than most of the native poems. Accord- ingly, the recitation is made in a kind of cliant, to a regular tune, and any person who can retain in his memory a song of a hundred lines can liave no difhculty in remembering this genealogy. There is no reason why it shoidd not have been known to liundreds, — in fact to tile whole priesthood of Hawaii, — and any lapse of memory in one woultl be corrected by the rest. The same ol)servations will apply to the genealogies preserved in the other groujjs of Polynesia. It is to be ob.served that this is not, properly s|)eaking, a li.st of kings, but merely of generations. In tiiose cases, wiiicii frequently happened, where two or more brothers succeeded one another on the throne, tiieir names are given in the column of children. Thus Liloa, the eleventh in aihrect line l)efore Tameiiameha, had two sons, llatau and Umi, of whom the first succeeded him, but was depo.sed for his tyranny, and the kingdom transferred to Umi. Both tiie.se names, witli those of their respective mothers, are given in tlie genealogy, but the former only among tiie children. For the same rea.sou Ti/rnldo ami 'ralatiiopiiii, who immediately preceded Tameiiameha, are not given, because the line of descent is not traced through them, but through the younger brother of the latter, Tcoua ;* and his name is tiierefoiv in the list, though he did not actually reign. 'I'hese ex- jilanatioiis are neces.sary, becau.se tlie nuiiiber of years to be allowed to a generation will be at least double that which we should assign to a reign. Among a people like the llawaiiaiis, constantly engaged in wars, in which the chiefs are expected to take an active part, the ave- rage duration of a reign can hardly be estimated at more than fifteen years, — while there; is no reason for assigning to a generation a shorter period than that at which it is commonly rated, — about thirty years. The people do, indeed, marry younger tiian in more nortiiern regions; but this consideration is coiinterbalancetl by the fact, which appears from the genealogical table, that, in many instances, the pedigree has ' Tle/iti, net. In the original draft of his grammar, Mr. Crook gave two forms of the indefinite and definite articles, a and ta, e and te. The first two are used before nouns commencing with a consonant, or the vowels • «* OCEANIC MIGRATIONS. 135 e and i, — and the last two before the vowels a, o, and u, as a hoe, a paddle, a ima, a hand ; e atu, a bouito (fish), e upoko, a head ; and in the jame manner, ta hoe, the paddle, te atu, the bonito, &c. Thirty years later (in 1829), on a second visit to Nukuhiva, he corrected this draft in many particulars, and among others, changed the a and ta, in all cases, to e and te, as in the Tahitian. It is, however, not un- likely that the first orthography was correct for the southern cluster of the Marquesas, and if so, we have the origin of the tsvo articles in Hawaiian, ta and te, — the former being the most common, and the latter used chiefly before nouns beginning with t, a, and o. The Tahitian uses for demonstrative pronouns tdua-riei, and taiia- ra, as taua va'a tiei, this canoe ; tana taata ra, tiiat man. The Hawaiian omits the ta, and has simply ua-nei and ua-la, as ua iva'a nei, ua tauata la. The Nukuhivan has, according to Mr. Crook, hua- nei and hua-na ; as, hua vu'a nei, hua anata ua. But it seems probable that the h here is superfluous. Mr. Crook spells the name of the island Uahuka, " Huahuga ;" ohihape, the name of a fish, he spells " hui-ZvOppe." However this may be, the similarity between this and the Hawaiian form is evident. The Manjuesan and Hawaiian are the only dialects which use the preposition ?«« before the locative adverbs, as — r.viiu.vr.tN. II.\WAIIAX. TAHITIAN. mti-mim, . . nui-miui, . . Ici III till, . . iK'liiru. nid-iiiiii. . iiiii-mitii, . fci. nitifi, . . bi'liind. nui.iiitti, . md-liiiKi, . . tvi llill. . (ll)OVO. ma-Uii, . . . iiKi.tiii, . . . ii-tiii, , . , by till" son, scn-wai'd As a plural sign, to denote a company or party, the Tahitian has pue ; the Nukuhivan (or Tahuatan) changes it lo poe, like the Ha- waiian. The first, to express " the party of artisans," would have " te pue tahua;" the second tapoetuhuna ; and the third, ta poe tahuna. The prohibitive sigh is, in Tahitian, eiaha (formerly aua), as eiaha oe e amu, eat thou not. The Tahuatan uses, instead of this, moi, fol- lowed by the conjunction ia, that; as, moi ia kai oe, beware that thou eat not. The Hawaiian abbreviates this to mai, as viai ai oe, eat not thou. On the other hand, it will be seen, by referring to the Grammar, that in many respects the Nukuhivan, as might be expected, differs from the Hawaiian and resembles the Tahitian ; and in a few parti- 136 ETIINOO RA 1" II V. I culnrs (such as the omission of the r and the use of the k), it is unlike botli.* H.VR(n'(tN(i A, OR Tin; IIKIIVKY ISLANDS. The tradition driven by Mr. Williams as prevalent in Aitutaki, one of tiio islands of this t,'roiip, has already been noticed. Beiiif^ desirous of kn(nvin;f wiiether the same aceount was current in Rarotoiif^a, I questioned, on the subject, a very intelligent native of that island whom I met at Upolu, whither he had accompanied the missionaries as an assistant. lie intormed me that the Raroton^ans, like the natives of Aitutaki, considered Acaiki to be the country beneath, iVom wliicii the tirst man, Mumuki, ascended, to look lor food ; and that Aaitipi, in the district of Aroroiigi, was the place where he came up. But whereabouts this lower country was, or how the ascent was accomplished, he could not explain. It has been observed, in another place, that, with all the islanders of the Pacific, wlio live between the tropics, the .same word means leeward, irextward, and helow. A similar use of the words up and doirn, with reference to opposite points of the compass, is common to most, if not all languaires. The trade-winds, at the Hervey Islands, blow usually from the southeast, and 8avaii, which lies to the northwest, is tiierefore as lu^arly as j)ossible " below" them. It is easy to .see that an e.\[)ression which had, at first, a meta- pliorical meaning, came, in process of timt;, to be taken literally. But the most valuable and detailed account which we possess of the peopling of any i.sland in the South Seas, is that given by Mr. Wiliiiims, at jjage Ifi') of his vohime. The chief incidents are as follows: Karika, a chief of an island to the westward, calletl Mitnnka, first discovered Rarotonga, and finding it uninhabited, took [)osse.ssion of it. Again putting to sea, he encountered Tangiia, a Tahitian chief, who was fleeing from the pursuit of an enemy. As Karika was [)re- paring to attack him, Tangiia made submission, and acknowledged himself the vassal of the other. They settled the land together, the former on tiie north (and west) side of tlie island, and the latter on * l'"iir till' ci|i|Mirliinily nl' I'diisulliiij; the .Mar(|ii('saii (iriiiniiiiir niiil \ iK'iiliulary of Mr, t'riiMk, I am iiulrbtod to llic Kuv. ('. S. .Stcwurl, iil llw; I'liitid .Siaifs Navy, Id wliuiii they wore prcjifiilcd by tliu author. 'J'lii! iK-rniission to muko llii.s use of Iii.s iniimi.srri|)t.>i was pri'vioiisly acconlc-d by .Mr. ("rook, whom «<• hail tlic plcasiirc of nn'cting at Sydney, in .New .Siuih NVali.'s. r:.--f: i. I OCEANIC MIGRATIONS. 187 the east, — these being, it will be remarked, the sides facing towards their respective countries. To this day the people of the former divi- sion are called Ngati-Karika, and those of the latter Ngati or Nya- Tangiia. We have seen in New Zealand (ante, p. 32), a similar use of this prefix, ngati, to express a clan descended from a common ancestor. It is said farther, that " the superior chieftainship is still vested in the Karika family ; for although \\\(i Ngati-Karika have been hraten many times, indeed generally, by the descendants of Tangiia, yetithe conquerors agree in allowing them the sujiremacy which tiiey have possessed from time immemorial." In confirmation of this account, it is stated that the Tahitians have traditions respecting Tangiia, his birth-place, family, &c., and that ho was a great traveller. It also appears (p. 47), that in former times, the intercourse between Raro- tonga and the Society Group was very fretiuent, or, as the natives express it, that the islands were joined together. Mr. Williams sup- poses that Manuka is the same as Manu'a, one of the Navigator Islands, which there seems no reason to doubt. On the chart of Tupaia, Rarotua (the Tahitian pronunciation of Rarotonga) is laid down to the soutiiwest of Tahiti, amid several other islands, the names of wliich cannot bo identified, but which are probably intended for the rest of the group. Most of the South Sea Islands have two names, as loreteu and Raiatea, Aimco and Muorea, Sala/aii and Saimii, and some of those given by Tupaia, being derived from tradition, may be at present out of use. Adeeha, however, wliich is laid down .somewhat farther to the east, was probab'y intended for Atiu. The signification of the word Rarotonga deserves notice. Raro means below, and iience leeward and n'estn-ard ; tonga means south, and from its position must be here an adjective. We may therefore render it the " southern leeward country," or the " southwestern land," wliich expresses very well its position relative to Tahiti. It is proper to inquire wiiether the language of the llarotongaiis offers any evidence to confirm this duplex origin of the people. What first strikes us, in looking over tiie vocabulary, is the peculiarity of the alphabet. It has the k and ng (or ij), the former of which is wanting in both the Samoan and Tahitian, and the latter in the Tahi- tian alone. But there is every reason to believe that the rejection of these two consonants from those languages is a matter of compara- tively late occurrence. On the other hand, the Rarotongan lacks the 35 139 KTII N()(iHA I'll V. /nnd tlic h, of which the former is found in the Samonn, nnd both in the Tahitian. With these exceptions, however, wliich atTect neither the substance nor the form of the lanIO.\N. B.\Rl>T(i.VUAN. TAIIITIA.N. Ji/i, . . . . . (/•/, . . . . . IlKllli, . . Ut (•lMM)sr. Ji/oi, . . nai^ iiHiii, . . Ill mix. liliiii, , . . riiini,. . . . . Ilillli, . . . Ill |iiiiir mil '(' I'i, . . . . hi) (ti, . . . . . '(I rni, . . . hIiu ! mmiKni^ (tLiUininm^ . . /if a, . . . . Ml 111'. Jlt\llut'(l^ fttftlVil, . . o'll, . . . . lilllLT. IIKDIIlill, . tiltuinl^ JUtl'ofltj . . Imiidsonic. miniulii/n, . iiiont/'fi, . /llttth'Ut, . . I.IW. With re<>ard to some of these it will be observed that the ilarotonifan ditlers from the Samoau not accordiiijf to the usual dialectical ciiauf^es, but irre;,nilarlv ; and this is what frequently hap[iens where wortis of one lantruajfc are adopted into another from oral communication, — as we ob.serve in the Norman French portion of our own tonj,'ue. But as the 'I'ahitian is itself an oll'sprinir of the Hamoaii, it may be thouirht tiiattho liarotongan words given above are merely old and obsolete Tahitian. In tliat case, we should probably liiid them in the Hawaiian, which is, like the liarotongan, of Tahitian derivation. As we do not, the presumption is that they arc some of the words which the descendants of Taiigiia have learned from those of Karika. Mr. Williams inlbrms us (p. 109), that the pre.sent high chief, Makea, is the twentv-ninth in descent from Karika. This would o c K A N k; M I (i n a T I O N 8. 139 give, nccordiiifr to our computation ('20 x 30 = H70), nearly nine hun- dred years since the wotllement of the llervoy Islands. M A N (i \ u !•; V A, «) It T ri i: n a m It 1 1; it i s i, a n n s. In the manuscript vocnl)uIary of tlio Maiij^arovan dialiict, wiiicli I owe to till! kindness of M. Mai^rret, fdrmerly missionary to tiiis j^Toup, is found the follmvinf^ di^finilion : " Ar/iiAi, — lias, en l)as ; /:o ntnyn fciiei, ko (ir/ii/ii tciut, — <;t'ci est lo haut, cela est le has." From tiiis it would apjusar that vl/y»'/.7, which, in the llcrvey Islands, is used to sijTiiil'y the rejfion l)eneatli, has conu! to diMiotc, iii tlu; (iamhier (Jrou[), simply li(lon\ or Ihdt ir/iirli is hiloir. I'lxamplcs of jsimiiar chanires are not uncommon in the other dialects. At tlu; Navi^'ator {frou|), the wind which hlows from tiie direction of the Tonifa Islands (i. e. from the south) is called tiie 'loiir/n wind. At the Ilervey and So- ciety Islands, this siunc word {tonga and , in) is used as the ;^eneral term lor .south wind. A frciu'alo?, Tenunigiii, wnH do- |k)8imI, and ohlij^cd Id flee abroad. 'I'ho UHiirper 'I'litioit Mucceedod, but "his rei^ii wiin sliort ; he was roiu|iiered Nuddeidy." His inline, it slioidd he remarked, does not appear in the lint, — whieh Nhows, will) several otiier eircuniHtaiices, that it is, in I'at-t. a ^ene- al()^;y, and not a coinpU'te eniiineralion of all who have held tlu! sove- reign power. The present king, Mapittrni, is the I'ourteenth in a diri'ft line Ironi Kan, who gained the snpreinaey alter the death ol' 'i'oronga, tlu^ .son-in-law of .Anna, the I'ighlh in dcseiMit from 'I'eatu- nioana. 'i'he son and grandson of 'I'orongii may he omitted, ni whieh ease it will appear that twcnly-lhe generations, or scm'ii hnndrt'd and fifty years, hiivi- I'lapsed since the arrival of the (irst culonisls. 'There- fore if we suppose, as all the eireumstauees indieate, that they eame from IJarotonua. they must have left tiiat island al)out four genera- tions, or one hundri'd and twenty years, alter it was settled. 'I'his would aeeount for some of the peculiarities in the dialect of Manga- revii. The only points ol'any importance in which it dillers from the Harotongan are, lirsl, in the use of latjn instead of inja, to lorm the partiei|)ial noun, as ti ojtr nn/i/, lor /c o/w (nja, the act of finishing; and secondly, in the use of man as a |)lural prefix. In both of these points it resembles the 'I'aliitian. Now if the Uarotongan emigrants win settled in .Mangareva came, as is most proi)able, from that side of itaroloiiga which faces towards the latter group, ^i. e., the eastern side,) they were of the i\i, or Tahitiaii party, and may, a* that time, havi; preserved some pecidiarities of their original tongue wliicii were afterwards lost, in Harotoiiga, on a more complete iiiter- nii.vture with the Sijali-Kfiiihn, or iSamoaii party. In the foregoing traditions, the e.vistence of cannibalism, at a very early period, will be noticed, as also the custom, with conipiered chiefs, of betaking themselves to the open sea to escai)u the ven- geance of their tidversarics, It was in this manner that 'Viinoe, or Crescent Island, a coral islet which lies abo\it thirty miles to the soutlu-ast of the (iaml)i(!r (Jroup, was peopled between sixty and seventy years ago, .V defeated party, lleeiiig from Mangareva, were drifted to this island, and remained there, w ith their descendants, till the arrival of the Catholic missionaries, who, hearing of their situation, sent for them and restored them to th(!ir original homes. This well- authenticated fact shows the manner in which most of the South Sea Islands have probably receivcsd their first inhabitants. What makes it more valuable, as an illu-stratioii, is the cireuiustancu that the ()(■ K.\ N !<• .M l(i U A no \M. 141 conrso of tlio emiy;riiiits herd was directly CDiitrnry to that of the traili'-wiiids. 'rriic, tlio (listaiico In not Kreut; lint it nuist lio ri'nu'm- beroti that tlio voyaijo was inailu on raits, tho only nu'ans of IranH- porlation possessed hy lliii Mantiarevans, — l)earinj> aliont tin; same relation, as rei,'ards safely and speed, to a canoe, as tho latter does to a steani-sliip. If A !■ A. This island, in onr •^eiwral snnunary, was included in the Austral Group, thoii)^h not, ]ierhaps, with strict |)ropriety, as it in situated four decrees apart Ironi llio rest, and a dill'erent dialect is spoken on it. It lii^s lifteen d('^'^ccs southeast of tin- llervey Islands, froni which it prohalily ditrived its popidation. I obtained at Tahiti, from a native of Hapa, a brief vocalndary of the lan^'uaiie spoken there, which turns out to be, with a few verbal <'xceplious. pure Itarotonjifan, and this in its minute peculiarilies. Tho llarotonj,'an, for example, uses nifi for the directivi^ pMiticU* sii^nifvini; motion towards a person, where the other tlialccls have mtii : the Uapan has the same. The particle ku is used before verbs in the same manner by both, &c. TUi: ATS THAI. I SI V \ US— II I M A T A K A, 11 I II I Tl , Tl I' I' A I, A N l> HA IV AVAL These islands lie south of tlie Society (J roup, and west of Karo- tonifa, and are nearly eipiidistanl from bulb. The probability is that they were settled from both directions, and at a very late day. Tho evidence in favor of this view is the following;. Tupuai is situated between Hurutu and llaivavai, anil about eij^lity miles from each. Mr. Ellis (Polynesian Researches, p. SHI) says: "Tupuai is stated, in the introduction to the Voyajfc of the Dull', to have been at that time but recently peo|>led by some natives of an island to the west- ward, probably llimatara, who, when sailinif to a spot they were accustomed to visit, were driven by stront; and unfavorable winils on Tupuai. A few years after this, a canoe sailin strike out from the Rarotongan the letters which are not contained in the Tahitian. 'I'hcre will still, howi^Ver, be a slight ditTerence in some of the words, as in those for "good," "cloth," and "spirit." The Austral dialect, it ap|)ears from this, has oniv six con- sonants, >ii, N, J), r. I, and v, a smaller nund)cr, proi)al)iy, than is Ibund in any other tongue. The guttural catch, marked by the inverted comma, should, however, be added, as constituting a distinct tilement. The island of Ilurutu is laid down twice on Tnpaias chart, once under its proper name (Ururutu), and in its proper |)lace, according to the real bearings (see p. <>), and again under the mistaken name of Ohitiroa (Cireat Feejee), and in the mistaken position which Tupaia's English friends induced him to assign to it. The error • Tliis cvi.'ii llic Itiimlungans could not do. Sw; Williniiis, |>. 10;). o (• i; A .\ I (; -M I <; ii a r i o \ s. 143 origitiateil in tlie following manner. Tupaia accompanied Cook in his voyage IVom Taliili to New Zealanii, in tlie course of wiiich Ilurutii was discovered. As tliey wore approacliing it, Tupaia in- formed them, says Parkinson, " thnt. it was an island called 0/ieile- roah, being one of the cluster ot nine which bore tlie title of Oheite added to them." The mistake of the Tahitian geographer proi)ably arose from being informed by his friends, wiio could only have com- municated with him, at that time, in his own language, that this island lay from Tahiti nearly in the direction of Apatoa, which they sup|)oscd to mean south, when it really signifn". north, or northrresl. As he could not doubt their assurance, he would probably take no pains to verify the fact by further inquiries, — and he might feel that any hesitation in giving the name of the island would throw some doubts ujran the accuracy of the geographical knowledge on which he had prided himself However this may be, the circumstance of the island being laid down in another place, under its own name, in company with llimatara, llaivavai, and tiie Ilervey Islands, shows clearly enough thaj. he was mistaken, and that he never discovered the island to be really that which he knew by its proper appellation O llurutu. On the whole, if we admit that llarotonga was peopled not quite nine hunched years ago, and Tupuai only about a century before its discovery, we cannot suppose that more than two or three centuries have elapsed since the other Austral islantls received their first inha- bitants. 1' At. Ml) 11, on r n i; i. ow a uc ii 1 1- 1: i, a c; o. Vd'itiiiolit is the Tahitian pronunciation of Valai-mot)!, which is the proiKU' native ap[)ellatioM of the archipelago. This very term m:\y serve as a good e.xemplitlcation of the composition of the dialect. Its meaning seems to be. " cloud of islands," for /w/.-» signities, in this language (but in no other of Polynesia), d cloud, and hiotii signities here, as in Tahitian, (in islnml. Like this compound name', the whole language is constituted of two elements, — the one similar to the Tahitian, tiie otlu^r peculiar, and unlike any that we lind else- where. The words which come under tin; latter description are not only numerous, but they are such as are usually original in a lan- guage, and very rarely introduced from abroad, — s\ich as man, woman, fire, water, gooci, bad, and the like. They seem to form 144 ET II NO(i R A 1> II Y. a part of some primitive tongue, which has been corrnpted and par- tially destroyed by an infusion of Tahitian. This intermixture must have talten place some time ago, — at least before the settlement of the Austral Islands, — for the form in which the Tahitian words exist is that which they liad before the disuse of the k and ng, which has made so great an alteration in the Innguage. Many of the Tahitian words, moreover, are perverted and disfigured as they would be in the pronunciation of foreigners (see Grammar, i 1). The gram- matical construction, however, so far as we are able to determine it, coincides with the Tahitian; as we find in the Vitian, tliougli the mass of words is peculiar, the grammar is chiefly Polynesian. From what source this foreign element which is here apparent was derived, cannot now be determined. A comparison of the peculiar words in the Paumotuan with the corresponding terms in various other languages of Oceanica has led to no satisfactory result. Perhaps, when the idioms of Melanesia are better known, the attempt may be renewed with more success.* Future inquirers, also, among the natives of the archipchigo, may possibly obtain some clue to their origin ; for it seems certain that their migration cannot be referred to a very early peritxl. If they inhabited the coral islands before the arrival of the Polynesian colonists at Tahiti and Nukuhiva, how did it happen tliat, being not oidy the best warriors, but the most skilful navigators of that part of the ocean, ttity did not at once seize upon these and the otlier high i.slands which are planletl on the out- skirts of the Paumotus on every side, and which contrast so strongly, in their beauty and fertility, with tlio.se bare and dismal abodes ' Had they once been in po.ssession of any of these larger islands, the half-starved crews of a few wandering Samoan canoes could never have succeeded in expelling them. Another evidence that their migration to their present seat is not of old date is the fact that they have not yet completed the settlement ? • Mr. Mn'nlu)Ul, «h-htiilding was not horrowed from the Tah'iians, and that their i.neeslors had thus a mean.^ of transportation such as would enable diem to reach these islands (nnn a great distance, without the necessity of stiippiog at inlermeiliale poin's. OCEANIC AI I G R A T I ') N S. 145 of their country. All the westernmost isltnds, as far east as Hun, or Bow Island, are inhabited, and before the late devastating wars of NganA, their population was tolerably numerous. As we advance towards the east and southeast, we find islands on which there are no inhabitants; and these gradually increase in number, until at length the eight nearest to the Gambler Group are all in that condition. Searlc's Island, when discovered by Wilson in 1797, was deserted, though he found some traces to show that it iiad been visiiod. Thirty years later, Beechey found there a scanty population, as did we in 1839. They could not have exceeded a hundred in number, and of course were in no condition, as yet, to send out colonists to the vacant islands south of tliem. The following list of Paumotuan words, with the corresponding terms in Polynesian, is given to confirm what has been said of the difference of the two lanuruatres. I"\U.irOTl'.\N. I'OLYNKSIAX. kciiji, ivi, bone. pakii. no. cloud. ruki* jmitii. dark. iji/ikc, kuli, dog. ncki. (ifi. fi re. P'irii, ikii. fish. nmmiui/i, Idnidliinr, girl. uiiK, Mfi, iiKiitiiki, good. tnreii, lasi, iiiii. great. pom, id 11, iipoko. head. korerekii, . ili, riki. little. hdkoi. tunc. man (vir). kdinike* . miisiiiii, miihuna, nioiin. loilr. till or iisly or in great pa;t, their ])opulation, lan- guage, customs, and mythology. \N'e observe, moreover, that one general stamp pervades them all, in these respects, and that they ditfer very strikingly, in many points, from the natives of the western grouj) (iSamoa and Tonga). It seems certain, therefore, that between the time of the settlement of Taliiti l)y Samoan emigrants, and the sending forth of the colonies wiiich peopled the surrounding groups, suflicient time must have elapsed for llu; language to have undergone considerable alteration, and for tlieir religious belief, tabu-system, and much of their social polity to have taken a new antl peculiar form. If the Uarotongans have been established nine centuries in their present abode, and tlie llawaiians fourteen, it seems impossible, on any calculation of probabilities, to allow less than three thousand years to the Tahitian people. ( M AT M .\ M 1 S t. .\ N l>. Our information concerning this island, was derived from an Eng- lish sailor, at the IJay of Isiantls. He said tliat he had lived for some time upon it, and found the natives similar to 'he New Zealanders, but loss civili/ed. Thtjy had tiie tradition that their ancestors were from the East Cape of New Zealand, and were driven in their canoes out to sea by a northwest gale. In this condition they fell in with Chatham Island, and established them.sehcs upon it. This took place, as near as our informant could learn, about ninety years ago. It is probalile that this account is in the main correct, with the excep- tion of the time, which tliey could hardly have iiatl the means of computiiiir with nuudi accuracy. These original inliabitaiits of Chat- OCEANIC M I {} RATIONS. 149 ham Island must not be confounded with the New Zcalanders who have lately l)o«ui carried thittier by tra(liiiivcr was rcwanlcil by a .sonj^ (irf;ratilinle, which two (>r the natives initiuilialcly commenced. Il was a monoldncHia hut not iinmc- IihIIous chant, and reminded us iil" the tones of the ("nthidic service." Soiiio natives on shore nrterwnrds <'vinccd tlieir gratitude in the same manner. as 150 ETHNOOR A I'll Y. tioii, which they kept up, with some intervals of shouting and clamor, until they left the ship. "The canoes were all double, and of course had no outriggers They were made of pieces of wood lashed together, like those of Samoa, and were ornamented with a few shells of tlie white ovula, commonly used for this purpose throughout tiie Friendly Group.* Tiie blades of their paddles were not oval, as in Tonga and Feejee, but oblong and slender, like those of the Navigator islanders. " There were eight or ten men in eacti canoe, and as they drew near, their color and features proclaimed that they belonged to the Poly- nesian race. There was little in either to distinguish them from the people of Samoa and Tonga. They wore the maro, or girdle, made of braided matting, like tiiat of the Paumotu islanders. Around tlieir heads, covering the forehead, they had narrow strips of the same matting tied, and one, who appeared to be a personage of note, had stuck in it several of the long red feathers from the tail of the tropic bird. Many of them had shades or eye-screens of thick braid, lied on the forehead, very similar to those used by weak-sighted people amonsr us. Their hair was cut an inch or two lon of the k, which the Sninoan dialect omits. We have frequently ohserved that a very slij;ht ch;itig(! of Jir.lect is sudleient to confuse, at lir.st, a native of one of these isl.inds ; while n fon'if^ner, who has a j;eneral smatlerins; of one dialect, can usually accommodate liim-sclf without dilhcully to such alterations. il, OCEANIC M Hi U A T I O N a 151 board wns canscil by a sinf^iilar apprehension that the ship would rise and bear them to the skies, from wliich they averred that we had de- scended. One of them, who had an ulcerated arm, had tlie courage, at last, to climb up to the gangway, and offer it to be cured, but he could not be prevailed upon to advance farther. " A brisk trade was, in the mean time, carried on through the ports for various articles of their manufacture. Besides matting, they had nets, fish-'nooks of bone, miniature canoes three or four feet long, wooden boxes, paddles, &,c., but no articles of food. A few of them, in their eagerness to trall'io, climbed ui) the sides of the sliip. While matters were in this state, a signal-gun was fired for the schooner. For a second they appeared stupified, and then such a hubbub arose as threw all their previous clamor into the shade. Those who were clinging to the ship leaped directly into the water, and scrambled to their canoes. All then seized their paddles and started for the land with the haste of desperation. " In a few minutes the boats were in readiness to go ashore, and we pusheil off towards the nearest islet. The entrance through which the canoes had disappeared into the lagoon was some distance further on ; but when we arrived at the shore, the natives were already on the beach prepared to receive us. They had recovered from their terror, and greeted us with every sign of friendship. We landed with some difficulty on a slu^lf of coral (such as surrounds most of these low islands) on which a slight surf was breaking. Before we reached the dry beach we were met by ten or twelve islanders, who testified by various signs their pleasure at our visit. " Their deportment evinced a singular union of confiding warmth and respectful fear. Some were shy, and retreated as we approached ; others, more bold, put their arms round our necks, and urged us to accompany them to their village. None of them, however, could remain quiet, and their agitation was evinced frequently in their peculiar motle, — by singing. Several times, while asking an islander the names of objects in his language, after telling me three or four, he would burst out into a song, which nothing could induce him to stop. This, though ludicrous enough, was very annoying. At other times they woulil speak for several minutes with surprising volubility, (juite regardless of its effect ujjou us; or they would breakout into hearty laughter without the least apparent cause. Their principal object appeared to be to trade, and tliey were continually repeating the word kajiloii, which, at first, we supposed to be the name of some 1A9 ETHNOQB A I'll Y. ': t nrticlo tlint they pnrticulnrly dosired. Unt ns every tluiifj seemed to be indili'iTciitlv kd/i/ou, we at hist ('(nicludetl that it was a freiiernl dcsijjiiation lor pri)|K'rty or inercliaiidisf. " At'tor riMiiaiiiiiiif an lioiir on tlie Immu-Ii, we complit'd witli tlieir iiivitalioii to visit llieir villai,'e. Tliis was on tlie imiiT. or la^nioii side of the islet. It was cotiiposeii of twenty or tiiirty lio\ises, about as larjfo as those of the Sandwieh ishmders, of oliloni,' shape, witli eaves slopinjf nearly to the f>ronnd. 'I'hc heiiflit of the ridi^e-poie was from ten to fifteen feet, and it projected at each end about a foot beyond the walls of the house, being eovered over the whole length with thatch. This thatch was of pandaiuis-loaves, laid on so loosely that a considerable thickness was necessary to exclude the rain. 'l"he inside of the houses was very clean, but we saw no furniture in any. It had probably been removed on our coming on shore. In one part of the town was a small open s|)ace streweil with sand and pebbles, which they called the mulai'. When I asked for the fale iitiin (house of tied) they appeared to understand me, and pointed to some place at a distance. " The most curious structures in the village were three small quays or piers of coral stone, five feet wide and two or three in height, built out into the lagoon, to the distance of about ten feet. On the end of each was a small house, standing partly on |iiles over the water. We could not letirn if they were intcniled for iamling-places, though this purpose seemed hardly probable. On going to them, wv saw the three canoes that had visited the ship lying off aluiut pistol-shot dis- tance in the lagoon, fdlcil with women and children. The natives hail evidently adopted ihis as the best modi? of placing their treasures beyond our reach, in case we should prove hostile. " We saw no arms among the peo[ile, nor in any of their houses, — neither were any scars visible upon their naked boilies ; so that we have some grounds for believing that this sim|)le people are, as yet, strangers to the miseries of war. When we asked for their chief, some pointed to an old, portly man, who appeared to have the most consideration among them; but others declared that there was none present, and that the great chief {alila) lived on an island in a south- east direction, but whether they meant merely an islet on the other side of the lagoon, or a more distant island, we could not lietermine. " Our impre.s.sion was that we saw the entire population of the island. Those who came off to the ship, twenty in niimber, were all whom we saw on shore, and it seemed likely that had there been others on OC K A N K; M l(i It a t I on m. \M (lifTerorit piirts of tlio island, tlioy would have inado their iippcaraiice beforti wo It'ft. 'i'lii-y wito so licaltliy and well-conditioned, that wo must suppose thenfi to bo woU supplied with the articles of food on wiiieli they suhsist. These are prohalily nolhint; more than fish and cocoa-nuts; ut least, wo sasv no odihle fruits but those lust, and no fowls or hogs. Three young pigs which we had on board were left here, and the natives readily took charge of them, but did not evince that surprise which might have been expected at the sight of an unknown animal. "The name of their island was Oaltifu (or perhaps, Atafu); that of the island where the high chief was said to reside was t'akaajo. I could not learn that they know of any country but their own. They re|)oated after mo the names /?»««« Samoa, fa nun 'Vongalahn, faniia Viti, and asked in what direction they lay, and if we came from thorn. Their decideil belief, however, was that we came from above, in the sky, and were divinities. This they rep(!ated to us froiiuenlly, and we could not convince them to the contrary. Indeed it is natural to suppose that their constant singing arose merely from a desire to propitiatt! our favor, according to their simple mode of worship. \Vhen a number of us hud collected in the iiiatai', the two oldest men seated themselves on a mat, and taking each two short slicks, began drumming on sinothcr larger one which lay on the ground before them, at tlio same time chanting a song, or pc^rhaps a hymn. Another wrapped a niiit about his middle, and went through the motions of a dance, which had ii resemblance! to those of New Zc.land. " As we were about to ((uit llie j)lace, a hatchet which had been brought on shore was missing, and was supposed to be stolen. As soon as this was made known, a tremendous excitement ensued. Tlie old chief started up and made a s[)eech, delivered with amazing volu- bility and strength of utterance, while his features worked with fearful agitation. We could guess at the purport of his argument from what followed, for his peoiile separated in all directions, and pre»ntly afterwards the missing article was retiu'ned. "The natives accompanied us in a body to the landing-place, and saw us safely into the boat. As they stood around, we had an oppor- tunity ofob.serving with attention their physiognomy and proportions. They were a well-formed race, of a yellow-copper complexion, with features varying considerably in stamp, but all of the proper Po- lynesian type, particularly as seen in the F'riendly Islands, with whose inhabitants they might readily be confounded. Their tattooing. lAt KTIINOO II A I'll V. however, was distinct niul poniliar, sliowiiiK that tlicy huvo l)oeu a st'paratf lril«' loii^j oiiduj^li to have alloreil thi-ir iMistoms coiisidcralily ill thin rt'H|HH't. The priiicipal mark wiw a Kort of' triangle, with the apex (Itiwiiwards, iinpriiiteil on each hauiu'h. A doiihle row of hues, with little crosses between, was drawn down ol)li(|uely upon (laeli clicek, and others of tlio same kind, be^'iniiinvT in the Nmall of thu I'ack, eaine nuind to the l)reast. 'I'his part ol" the Ixidy was stamped also witli many trian^nhir spots, of wliich the hirj^est were ahont an incli lony; and soniu of them had, l)esid that they might be for tiie elders of the village, when they meet in council, or for religious celebration. " At the foot of this pile of benches lay a piece of timber, which was recognised as the windlass of a vessel. It was about four feet long by one in diameter, and was much worn, as though it had been ex- posed to the action of the waves. When we asked from whence it came, they ro|)lietl, from the sea; and in answer to farther iiuiuiries, related that a few years ago (three or four), a vessel was lost in the surf, that two men got ashore, one of whom was nameil Fakaaukamea, (the other's name we omitted to write,) and that both have since died. On examining further it appeared that the windlass was not the only 10 ^jTU-r : ^li:.i kAi,'.^^i^:^ ^.: loS E Til NOG R A I'll Y. relic of tii? wreck. Three cross-beains, aliout twenty feet loii}?, and six inches thicK, wliich were fastened to the centre-posts ten feet from the trround, liad cvideii'ly been cnt and planed by rejjf>ilar tools, and we found, on in(iuiring, that they were also from the vessel. As the names of the two sur'ivors had both a Polynesian character, it oc- curred to us that ihey might possibly have been Sandwich islanders, and from tl'.om the natives may have obtained the word dchali) which so much |)u/.zled us. The Ilawaiians, being Christians, wovdd natu- rally apply the word to the native gods as a term of contempt, and the islanders, not understanihng of course its precise force, might, adopt it as synonymous witii their word utiia, deity. "Leaning against the largest post of the house were several spears or clubs, all much worn and battered, which the natives .said were Iikewi.se from the sea; they have probably drifted here IVom Samoa or the Fetgee Group. It is remarkable that they were the oidy arms that we saw on the island, and that the natives appeared to have no specific name for these, calling them simjjly Inkaii tana, ' wood of war.' "The.sc were the ' nly articles of c()nse(iuenco within the nici/ue ; but in front of it w;'.s an object which attracted our attention from its slia|)e, and from the fact, which wo soon learned, of its being the god himself, — the great 'Vui-'rokelau. Whatever may have been inside was ,so thickly covered that it appeared like a jjillar of matting, ten feet high and as many in circumference. The natives seemed so unwilling to have us examine it closely, that we did not choose to indulge our curiosity at the expense of their feelings. ■'At a little distance from the mdlac was a well about tbiirteen feet deep, neatly walled up. and surrounded by a high fence. There were not more than thirtv inchas of water in it, and from the care which was evidently taken of the j)lace, it is probable that the pure! element is an article of much rarity and value among them. Beyond this, along the shore of the lagoon, was a row of canoe-houses, [lerhaps fifty in number. The (kinoes themselves were in tiic centre of the lagoon filled with women and children. All. however, had not availed themselves of this refuge, for ni some of the houses were fouiul children and a few women, some of the \(iunger ones being remarkably pretty. The old (pieen, herself, was discovered hidden uiid(!r a mat, and betrayed greal terror on lieing exposed to view. "In one part of the village we found two tiniins, one of them being a mere trough or hollow log, like those of the Kriendly Islands. The m (OCEANIC M I(i R i» T I O N S. 159 m other was a cylindrical frame set upright on the ground, with a piece of shark's skin siretchcd tightly over the top. Its shape reminded us of tiio West India tomtom, and it was beaten, like our drums, with two sticks. As soon as its .sound was hearil, a few of the natives commenced a dance, ai)parcntly to divert us, for they laughed heartily at the same time. The motions of the dance were similar to tiiose we had seen at the other islands, hut, like their singing, more varied and pleasing. " The natives appeared to be still anxious for our departure, and kept urging us to our boats, pointing to the sun with the words iia po (it is night), and fre(|uently repeating Jiaiihi, Jiuitia hirn, which we interpreted ' very nuich tired.' At the same time they continued to bring us articles for trade, which they e.x(;hangetl for any tritlc we chose to offer them, preferring, however, knives and fish-hooks. Many of their manufactures gave evidence of considerable ingenuity. The principal were mats, boxes, lish-hocrhs, tiles, saws, drills, and orna- ments for the per.son. The mats were of two kinds, for beds and for clothing; the former were three or four feet stjuare, coarse, and braided of cocoa-nut and pandanus-lcaves. The maros, or girdles, were from six to eighteen inches wide, some of them very fine in texture, with fringes on the sides and ends. Tlieir lengtli varied from a few feet to five or six yards. The cinctures worn by the women were a singular fabric. They consisted of a great number of long leaves (probably pandanus) tied at one end to a cord, and then slit into fine strands. The leaves were dry, and appeared to be kept well oiled, ])robably to render them llexible. Th(>y were so many, and .so closely packed, that the dress, when rolled up, formed an enormous bundle of straw, of a weight which, one would have thought, must have rendered it exceedingly inconvenient. "The boxes were cylindrical, in the shape of small buckets, neatly hollowed from a solid piece, and of different ca[)acities, from a gill to a half-gallon. They were used by the natives in their canoes, to hold their fishing-tackle and other light articles that they wished to pre- serve from the wet. 'I'he lids were made to lit tight with a rim, like those of our snulf-boxes. The fisli-hooks were of bone, shark's teeth, and shell, many of them as small as our trout-hooks, and made with remarkable neatness. The files and saws were of shark's skin, stretched on sticks, — its roughness being sufficient to wear down the .soft woo'l and bont> to which it is applied. The construction of their drills was (juite ingenious, but coukl hardly be understood without a ixi ■tx- 160 KTHNOG R A !■ II Y. drawing. Tlicir ornamenfs wcro necklaces of bone and shell, ear- rings of tlie same, and, what was pcc\diar, false curls tied on a string to he bound around the head. I'erhaps this ornament owes its origin to the circumstance tliat these natives have thinner hair than those of other islands, and appear to he inclined \o haklness. This, and the curling of their hair, may result from tlieir being so much exposed, while hshing, to alternations of sun and rain. " The CMly edible fnnts which the island produces are those of the cocoa-nut and tlie pandanus; and the fact that the hard and dis- tasteful nuts of the latter are eaten, may lead us to believe that the natives are sometimes sufferers from want of food. The rest of their sustenance is drawn from the sea, on which we may suppose that they s^jeiul a good part of their time. Their tine athletic forms and hearty looks certainly did not give an idea of famine; and it would be an interesting subject of inquiry to discover the causes which prevent the population from increasing so as to press too closely upon the means of subsistence. "Judging from what we saw, we are inclined to rate the inhabitants at between five and six hundred. The nund)er of men who met us on the heuch was not far i'roni one hundred and lifty, which, by fair estimate, would give the aiwve total. This little spot of ground may therefore be considered, in proportion to its extent, veiy well peopled, as till' whole superlicies of dry land in all the islets cannot exceed two s(iuure miles. We are, moreover, inclined to believe that the natives w iioin we saw at the first island (Oatafu) belonged properly to this, ami were merely temporary residents at the other. This impression proceeds partly from their own declaration that they had no chief w itli them, and partly 'rom the circumstance that they had none but doidile canoes, which are best adapted fur a sea-voyage. The .scanti- ness of their numbers would also favor this supposition, and from it we ma;, luidtTstand how the occasional absence! of the people, on tiieir rett.rn to Fakaafo, might have cansetl the island to be reported as uniniiabited. " At length, after a stay of about three hours, it was determined to gratify the increasing impatience of tlie natives to be rid of us. We thereupon moved towards the boats, which were moored just outside the coral shelf, in the surf A^; this was at times pretty heavy, we were oliliged to wait for a lull, and watch our opportunity to spring on board. The natives who accomi)aiiie(l us were assiduous in ren- dering assistance, which was not perfectly disinterested, for they took O (; K A N I C .M I fi R A T I O N S. 161 the opportunity of our confusion to run away witli a cutlass and some other articles bclon<,nn<; to the men. These tliefts, committed in tlie most l)arefaced and audacious style, -, or in curved figures about an inch or two long, which the natives told lis were intended to represent |)igeons [lupe). " For dress, the men wore three kinds of mats, all braided from slips of tile paudaiius-leaf 'I'lie first was the maru (or nuilo) which has been already described. The second was a ginllc of thick fringe, iVoiii six iiiciies to ii foot in breadth, tied about tlie loins, so as partially to cnnceal liie maro. This they called ((thai. Tlie third kind were mats three or four feet wide, and live or six lonti, which w ere wrajiped alxnit the body, so as to cover it from the waist to the ancle. The mats were dyed, on the outside, in red, yellow, and black colors, dis|)o.seii in stpiares, diamonds, and other figures, so as to have a very pretty eflVct. They appeared to be reserved for state occasions, as the only person who wore one was the old chief, hut many were brought off for .sale. "Theiroriianients were not very iiuiiurous. They all had the lower rim of the ear pierced, and the aperture distended to the size of an inch in diameter. Around the rim thus separated, they had half a dozen little rings of tortoise-shell, so neatly made that it was (liflicult to dist-ern the point of juncture where the ring was opened when • » M. O (• i: A N I C .M I (i II A T I () X S. IfiO taken f'nim the oar. Some had iiint he r-ol- pearl and other shells suspended from the neck, and every one had a cocoa-nut leaflet also tied around the neck, which we snpposed miLfJit be a si'^ii of amity ; for in a|)])roachin^ the ship, they seemed anxious to keep it in view. " Amonjf our \isiters in the canoes «as one woman, who refused to come on hoard. She was of the medium si/e, with a rather jiretty face, and a pleasiu'^ e.vprtwsion of countenance. She wore a very long and thick cincture, made of slips of pandanus-leaf fastened to a cord. It miglit he called a (jirdle of frintfe two feet in width; and its appearance was that of a dense mass of slrasv tied about the body, coverinif it from the breast to the knees. The native name for this dress was JaK. W hat cliielly surpri.seil ns was, to observe that she was tattooed, like the men, on her artns and sides. In this respect, also, these people differ from the other Polynesian tribes, among whom the women are tattooed very slightly, if at all. " Our first (juestiou to the natives was about the name of their island, which we found to be .\ii/i'i>f'c/oii. They were well ac(piaintetl with EUice's Cluster [Fiiiitifiiti); indeed, one of them dedareil himself to be the son of a chief on that ishuid. The island to the nf)rtheast was also known to them, and called Vaitupu.* \\'e asked them if these were all tlu^ lands with which tiiey were aef|uaiiiteil, when, to our surprise, thev pointed to the east, and ^.aid that beyond \'aitupu there were three islands, (hiinfu, yui^imtnto. ami FdhiKifo. I incjuired if this was all, and they aOded. nitli some hesitation, the nauie of O rotten (Jit, the smallest of il**- Navir 'O (,ri- /.u) M'./ihir :!i.' ■■• .mil c- luiiii; intcnli.in;;c':iliii' in lliis, ;>s in nil llic iilliir I'uly- iK'siun iliiilrcls. W'l' (wanl llii' iiaim- {iiMiiniiiii'iil mily uiici', and Tlmt in llir midst of nmrli ni)iso mid ruMrnsinii. Dillun, w lin heard iil' this island at llcilinun, « I'ili-s ihc name Vi///i/io, and CiKik givi's, in the list of islands rcrcMvcil lioni Ihi' nativis cp|' 'I'diiga, uno callrd \'i//iK,/ifjii, Vfh\rh i.s undunlili'dly the sanii'. t'hi' niiiru' mrans " gniwin;; water," and has, porhaps, , ler'-nep Id the viells or pits nf fresh water, which are su important im tlie.se i-orid islets. t It (till licit (lo.-iir til lis til use tiic' iiuine Sdviiih (I'n'- Saitiin. which thev would perhap^ have recngnised. 42 Km KTllNOti KA I'M V. At Fakaiifo wo were told of an ishiiul oxislinir smnewliero, called Viikdjiiihi : — llifse |)oo|)l(' rcrci^nised the name at once, and assured 1110 lliat it was an island well iidialiited.* This was the only tiunu- mentioned Ity them wliicli we were not able to identity. '• \Ve asked who was the ^od of the island, and where ho lived They told ns that his name was I'uilniji'. iinii that ho resided on shore. '\\^^ asked if Tiii-'t'o/tt/(iii also ii\('d tiiere, and they replied immediately in the n("j;ative, sayinjj that he was the jrod of Fakaafo. \\ hen the name of 'I'iin(/(i/iiii, the yreat divinity of Polynesia, was prononnccd, they apjieared to i)e holh sni(irised and annoyed ; at last, one of lin'in said (hat Tannaloa was a ;^od liihii to their eonntry, and refused to speak further altont him. "They informed us that ten vessels had visited their island, and added that a ship of iriiri people had liitely spent some davs ahont the island in fisliinu;. As the term iriiri is tiiat a[)|)lii'd by the New Zealanders to tlie French (from their word of aHirmationi), we thought it jjrohahle that the ease nii^dit ho tht! same for these islands. It is known that French whaliny;-ves.sels re.sort chietly to this part of the Pacific for their carijoes. "Tlie only eatables which the natives had with them were cocoa- nuts, and the fruits of tlie pandanus. Uut they assured ns that laro {Arum escu/cntiim) ts, a considerable town was .seen on shore, situated on an open space between the trees and the * 'J'liirc i-i an isliiml dl'tliis iiimic in llic I'liuiiiulii iir(lii|iclai;i>. It is liiirilly priilxiliie, lujwi'vi'r, tli.'it il (Mil Ih' iI Ill' ri'lcrnd i... t This iiukIi; (il'di'sii^jiiatidii, lliiii|i;li il may a|i|M'ar wliiinsical at lirsl, is yet that wliicli was ailiiplcci, ill roriiicr liiiii's, liy llit- I'Vcmli lliiiiisilvrs, as H|i|icar.s In tlii! a|ipmainiiig a few minutes, and receiving some presents, he pointeil to the sun, and explained that ho must take his leave, in order to arrive at the island before night. He also urged us to accompany him, but finding us not disposed to ac(^e|)t the invitation, he put oil in his caiioc, and was followed, at little intervals, by the rest of thn nativiis. Many of us were struck with the extra- ordinary likeiu'ss which this personage bore to the head chief of Fakaafo; it was so plain, that, taken in connexion with other circum- stances, the opinion of a family relatimiship between the two sove- reigns seems not unreasonable. " Wo cannot be expected to form any very near estimate of the num- ber of inhabitants on the island. We presume it to be pretty densely peopleil. The village which wo passed was cpiite large, and houses were observed on most of the islets. Perhaps forty canoes visited the ship during the day, having about two hundred persons on board, all of whom, with one exception, were grown men ; so that we are justi- fied ill assigning at least a thousand inhabitants to the island. " The resemblance, or more jiroperly, the identity of the dialect of these natives with tliat of the I'nion islanders, leaves little room to doubt that one was derivetl from the other ; and the fact that the people of Fakaafo had no knowledge of these islands, while on the contrary their own groui) is well known to those of V'aitupu, seems to indicate that the former was the source of population to the latter. At the same time, it is not unlikely that the Union islanders them- selves may have been a colony from Oroseiigti, in the Samoan Group." To the foregoing, which was written immediately after leaving the IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) // {/ ^A^ 1.0 V^ I2£ ■tt liU ■2.2 1.1 I.""'" ^> Sciences Corporation 23 WIST MAIN STRHT MltSTIR,N.Y. MSM (716) •73-4503 les KT II N tXi It A I'll V. ishinds, iiotliiiijf iiood l)o ndilcd licro willi ro^nrd to llio ori!(». toi.k from them a slave, a native of the island ol ('/itiiiifiiiiii, which lies tour days' sail from Taumaeo, and carried him to Lima. From him, when lie had learned to con- verse in Spanish. C^uiros obtained much information concernin;^ the islands in the neighborhood of Taumaeo. Amon;j; others he heard of (ii/iii/topo, un island which Pedro said was larijer than Chicayana. He described it as ly in, thev would jirobably be introduced by few at a lime, and might thu;; produce no I'hange in the dialect of the group, while, by intermarr: '^e with the natives, they might never- theless L'ive rise to some peculiarities in tluMr jihysical characteristics, as well as their customs. 'l''ie iiaiiu^ of Miraijidijla. the island to which they were sailing, may be a mistake in co|)ying or iirinting from Quiros's manuscript. We heard the natives of Funafuti speak frecjuently of a place called yiiku-rainii, or Miikii-lailai, which we at • Itiirrii'v"^ \iiyiij!os, vol. ii. p. 20H. OCEANIC M I C. R A T I O N S. 169 one time took to be an islet in their cluster, and at another, in that of Nukufetau, — but it may have been a small island, which we did not see, at a little distance from both. U t: \ E K A L I M, I' S T R A T 1 O N S. Besides the particular facts with respect to each group, which we have adduced in support of our opinions concerning the migrations of the natives, there are othisrs of a more general character, which may serve to illustrate and confirm these conclusions. Those which we .shall notice here are the names of the months, those of the prin- cipal winds, and the numerals. MONTHS. The following are the names of the months in the three most im- portant groups of Polynesia : SAMOAN. TAIIITIAN. HAWAIIAN . Fu'iuifu, . . . l'\l'(l-ll/lll, . . . Malii/ii, Ffbrunry. Lo ^ J'ii'iri, ) i Tiiiioii, J . Dtr/o, . March. Aiinmiu, . . AllMHIIIi, . . Tintiiin, April. iMimami, . jtpiinjMi, . , . SlIIKI, . .Mny. I'liMo-miw, , P/iioro-miin, . . Wi/o, . June, rri tn llic iiw ol' this icrm in Siiiiniiin. 'I'lw two moiitlis c'njliil I'lilulii-fiiiKi .-umI J'lilijii-muli, iiTf .liiiii' iiiiil .Inly, bill tlii' (ininiiil ili«'s not make iN a|i|>i':ii'iiiiri' lill OiIhIkt aini .\ii\iiiiI«t. In tlic I'njcf l.slaiiils, whin' il i.s also liiiiiiiJ, iIk' lii.^t-iianiod iniinth-^ an' called MluiliJii-liiilni ami ,W/«'/'V«./ri», or, lillli' and ureal Mliilijo. It seems prolialile thai at a liiriner ihtukI the name I'liliJo was a|i|ilii>(l in Samoan to tlicst- innnlhs, and that lor some iihknown reason, |M'rha|is coniiroted with their sii|)i-rstitions, the trrni was shirted to another part ol'the \e;ir, and its |ilarc" Kii|i|ilied hy liiiiiiKiJii, whiili means In rut, in the lanniia^i"' a|i|iro|)rialid to chiefs. This must ha\e liiili|Mned Ix'liire the de|iarliiie of the 'rahiliaii c-olonisls. l-'nr a (h'seri|ilioii of the Mlnild/o, anil tlie ccrenionifs wliieh lake |iliu'o on its apjiearance ut the l-Wjci' i liaiidH, sec (Mige 07. O C K A N I C M Hi II A T I O N a 171 sibly Ihin (or Ilutm) for Utiiraa. 'I'Iiosp chiinge.s are of a kind unusual in tho Polynesian dialeils, anil are an I'vidcnce of what many circMinistances woultl lead us to suspect, — that the lirst settlers of Hawaii were people of low rank, and iniptjrfeetly versed in those branches of knowledge which are usually left, in these islands, to the chiefs and priests. w I X » s. We have already had occfision to speak of the term tonga as ap- plied in tho Sainoan, New Zealand,* l{arotongan, Tahitian (/w/), and Hawaiian (tona), to the south wind. It must, of course, have been derived from the first-named group, which is the only one that lies to the north of the island ('I'onga) from which the wind is named. Another word which recjuires to bo noticed is tokeinu, (in Samoan. to'eliiu, in Rarotongan, lokirou, in Tahitian, to'erait, in Nukuhivan, tokodii, and in Hawaiian tdolaii.) In Samoan and Tongan this word signifies the east or southeast trades ; in Tahitian and Rarotongan it is the northwest monsoon; in Nukuhivan it is the north wind ; and in Hawaiian it is the name given to the north or northeast side of an island, opposite to tona, or the southwest. The secret of the.se changes of meaning is probably tu be found in the concluding syllable A/m. wbicb is presumed to be tlie same with the Malaisian woril hint, meaning sea. Throughout the .'ountries occupied by this race, we find this term a|)plied,to the wind, or the point of the compass, in the direction of the open sea. Thus in Malay, /aiff, by itself, is usel(it un the Knwi, vul. ii. p. 25U. 17-2 KTII X«)«i RAP II Y. tion would evidently ho "swft-wiiid," and litis is, no doubt, tlio truo mcnninu: nf tohluu. At tlio Xiivijriitor and Tonfra Ulands, the open wii hfs to the east; at Taliiti, it is to the nortliwcst ; at the Mar- (luosus to the north, and at the Sandwicli Islands, the natives had traditions of the existtMxe of islands to the southeast, south, and south- west ; they therefore jfave the nanie of limltiu to the opposite portion of the hori/on. The first part of the word, lukr or Iw, in most of the Polynesian dialeets, sii^nities ailil or ihilliiKj. In New Zealand hau- tokr, " cold air," is iriiitcr. 'I'ltlit-luii may therefore be rendered "ecH)lness from the sea," an expression which applie8 very well to this wind at all the islands. MuldiKjai seems to be the proper name for the trade-wind. This is its signitieation in Uaroton^an. Man^arevan, Tahitian, and Ha- waiian. In the first two it becomes tiKiningiii, and in the last ma- ItiiKii. The Tahitian had formerly iminiui, which has Iteen changed to mtmiumu by a sin>j;ular principle, for which see the Grammar, i 81. In Sainoaii and Tonyan this word is not used, its place being sujjplied by lokeUni. In New Zealand, where there are no trades, it is still applied to the wind from the cast. N V M E R \ I. s. A peculiarity of some of the numerals in the eastern dialects of Polynesia supplies us with a stroni^ contirmalion of the views ex- pressed respecting the emigration of the Ilawaiians from Tahiti, by way of Nukuliiva. Hy reU-rring to the Grammar, ^ HI, it will Ik) seen that several of the higher numbers, such as Irkiiu, rlly nor straight, but long and fri/./led. In form and feature they hold the same undecided position, and however it may be in reality, in appearance they canni't be better described tlian as a midattotrilie, such as would be produced by a union of Mt'iariesiuiis and I'olynesians. In character, they seem to have inherited tiie intellect, (piick, apprehensive, and ingeniou.s, of tlie latter, with the ferocity, sus- picion, and dissimulation of tlu; former; and tiiey have one advantagt; over bt)th, in uniting the arts proper to eacii. Like the blacks, they use the bow in war, and manufacture pottery ; whil(! they understand and [iractise tiie I'olym-sian mctluMis of making paper-cloth, culti- vating l(iro, preparing /iwii, tattooing, &c. 'I'lu- composition of tlie language not only supports the opinion of their hybrid origin, but can in no other way be explained. Four fifths of the words are unlike those of any other idioin witii which we an; acciuaiiited.* TIk^ other lifth, with most of the grammatical peculiarities, are Polynesian. Hut of tlie.se words, many are so altered, according to certain rules, that no native of Polynesia could pro- nounce tliem. Thus the p is almost always changed to the double consonant m/i, as — UTIAN. lM)I.VM:.'iI.»N. mhi, pa, mbiUulit, jMi/ii/n, tamlm Iiijiii, lumhu tiipii, mliurn'lii, jii//i,ln, . The / frecjuently becomes ml, as — linri'. II kind ol'si-a-Wdrm. Mucit'd, 1(1 nri)W. Klv^;o elass ol' words in which the \ itian uses tiie soil th (W) or the .«, and the Tonjjan, which wants these letters, has in their place an /«, while the Sainoan and all the Polynesian dialects have nuthiiig whatever ; as. VITIAN. rilNIIAM, HAllllAN, KTI'. fake, . . . h.tir, . . . (ikr, ii'f, . , ii|iwiir(N. *'tV<), . . . . hip, . . . . if", . . . . (liiwnwiinU. Vttit, . . pin, . . . . >., . . . . Iiiiw ninny f ftimii. . , htimit, . . lima, , . , . (iiitrinniT. vote, , . . . Julir, . . . . Jim; . . . , piKldlu. U(ll, . . . . ulia, . . . . Ull, . . . , rain. t'likini, . . . luikiiii, , . iikau, ii'iiii, . . nrf. unite. , niii/ir. . . miir, , . Ici Nlccp, sain, . . . . liiiJii, . . . ii/ii, . . plllll. mi, . . . . Iiiii, . . . ivi, . . . . bono. These in.stance8 of resemblance, affecting whole classes of words, and important graminatical characteristics, cannot be explained on the supposition of an ordinary intercourse, such as is at present main- tained between the two gro\ips. Nothing l)ut an intimate cotinexion, and some intermixture, would have availed to pnxluce .>«uch an effect. 2. In bringing together the materials for the Polynesian Lexicon, the meaning of the words Jiti (or rid*) and tomja became apparent. The first means properly to rise, ajipiied to the sun. The second is the noun formed by adding the sutli.v ya, to the verb to, which signi- fies to set, as the sun. The first is found in the dialect of Fakaafo as /iti, in Nukuhivan as Jiti or hiti, in T.diitian and Hawaiian it is hili, in Harotongan ili, and in New Zealand triti, — in all with the same meaning. 'I'he .secoml (to) occurs with the sense of /o .vt/, in Tahi- tian, Harotongan, Paumotuan, and New Zealand ; and in other dialects it has, though not the same, somewhat similar meanings. In Taiiitian, (which omits the y,] the sulHx ya Iwcomes a, and thus we have, in the tran.slation of the New Testament, Matt. xxv. 27, " ?nai te hitia o le ra i le looa o te ra," " from the east to the west," — literally, • Tlic I'liljno.sinn / becomes invariably r in llie Viliun language. nc K A N IC M KiU ATr O.NS. 177 from llic rising of the niiii In the si'ttiiii; of tlit? kiiii, [ah orinilv ail mri- ilintim)* It ii|»p('itrN, howovrr, tliiit in tlio first fX|irfssioii (liitiii) tilt' Miidiix (t is not iifccHsiiry, — for in Matt viii. II, we liiiv*? " uitii Iv hiti I) h' III >■ ff tiHifi o Ir in," " frciii tlu' oust and tiio wost," — litorally, from tlit^ lisi- of tlio snn, ific. It slionlil ho ohsorvivi tliat the doiihlo o in twill is written hy the missionaries to iiistinu;\iish it from Ion, sontli, hut the pronunciation of botli is the same, and, in propriety, tile Npeilin<^ slionld he alike. Hestorin^ therefore the latter phrase to wliut It would he in Sumoiin, or in the original foriii. wv shall havH "mat le Kin » le la e te TOiJA o te la." Hut tiie addition "« Ir la" in not necessary to the Hense. In Hawaiian hiliiia alone is tlie regular term for vast. We have, therefore, to ncconiit for two facts, each of them suflTi- ciently stranj^e; first, that two (fronjis, situated four hundred miles apart, an (or, more correctly, liiilnlii). He commanded them, saying, " (io and take with you your wives, and dwell in the world at Tonga; iliriilr llir laiiil into Iwo porlions, iiiiil ihall sviMiiiUhj friini larli nllur." They de|iarte(l accordingly. The name of the eldest was 'I'li/ii'i {Tnlmii); that of the youngest Vaka- akiiu iili, who was an exceedingly wise young man, and first formed axes and invented hejuis and cloth and looking-glas.ses. The other acted ditVerently, heing very indolent, .sauntering about and sleejiing, and envying the works of his younger brother. His evil disjiosition led him, at last, to waylay his brother and kill him. Thereujion Tangaloa came from Uulotu with great anger, and after rebuking the murderer for his crime, called together the family of his younger son, and directed them to launch their canoes, and sail to the east (ki tokelau, toward the trade-wind), to the great land there, and dwell • " From Nunriw until siinsel. All ciirlli nlmll liciir Ihy rmiir." Mtutiii/iii/'s "Projiliecy uj C'opys.' 45 ITS KT II .\ i)(i II A I'll V. tli('r(<. '* ^'llll hIiiiII Ii«> wliiti', iiM your iiiiinl Im itinmI; yixi nIiiiII iiIho lie wiMC, iiiakiiiu; iixcm iukI nil kiiidx nf valiiiililc iIiiiium, uikI liir;{o ciiiiin'n. Ill llic 1111:111 tunc, I will tell the wind to Mow iViini voitr hiiiil to 'I'lini,'!!. Ml tliat yoii sliull loini' liitluT to trade. Init your rldi-r lirotluT mIiiiII not u*' to yon with hii* Imd raiKH's." To tin* «-ldcr lirv)lli«!r lio Hind, — " ^ (III nIiiiII Im> lilack. mm your iiiiiid im liad. and you hIiuII Im dfstitute ; lew itckhI tliin:(!t hIiuII you liuvt<, nor sliall you i^o to your hrollu'r's laud to Irailt' "* 'riic natives told this story to aeeoimt fur the diHeri'iice in color mid civili/.atioii, lietweeii tlu'inselves and their l')uro|ieau visitors, coiisideriiiir thciiiselvos to bt* the deseendants ol the elder hrother, uiid the latter ol (he \i>iinL;er. ManiM-r was iiiuoh struek with its siiiLTularity, and siisjiecteil that it was ot tiuNleni iiianuracture, and a corrupted toriii ol the seriptiiral account of Cam and Ahel, learned i'roni some of their fureiiju visitors; hut he says "the oldest men atHrined their positivo helief that it was an ancient traditionary record, mid IIkiI it irii.i fniniihil in fnil/i." There is rertaiiilv no intelliLnhlc reason why they should have attem|iled to ceivc hiiii on the point of its antii|Uity, or Imcii themselves deceind. Hut }( it wore really an ancient story, it «'oulil not have referred iiriijinnllif to the whites, however it may he applied to them at present. 'I'lie proiiahility is, as before oliscrved, that it is an ancient mythos, undi^r which tiie early history of the islanders is veiled, though, in thu passuije of ci'iituries, the real parts have Im-cii for<{otl»'ii, and the story has received, of late, a new ap|ilicatiou. The orij^inal scene is probulily on the Feejee liroup. A party ol Milaiu'sians, nr I'jipiianw, (the elder brother) arrive lirst at this t;roup. and settle principally on the extensive alluvial plain which stretches aloui^ the eastern coast of Viti-lirit. Afterwards a second conijj.iny of emi^'runts, of the Polynesian race, perhaps from some island in the Kast Indies, called Jiu/ofii, make their appearance, ann).'ii I'-liiiiils, c-iiiii|iilr(l liy J. Martin, M. U., Irnin til iiiiiiiiiiii'iiliiMis III' W'llliiini M.iriiirr." ( ^l||•.talll(■'^i .Misii'llmiy, vnl. ii. ji, 11^ ami A|>|x'iiili.\, p. 4(1, wlirri' il is j>ivt'ii in lln- ••ii^iiial I'liiigiiii, li'iili'-'tiMriiliiriiilMiiaiii^ill or KA.N If M Mi It ATM».\ H. 17!» or r»V/ ami Tnm/ii* AHi-r ni'mtiiI ucucriiliiniM, tlir Mucks (or Viti), jfiiliMis III till' iiicrt-iiMML' \\('es, by w liieli alone tlie intc'reoiirsu liotween the Iwo^is iii:iititain*Hl. 'I'lio eonseipifiices of tliis eoiirse ofovents would be as loliows : I. Dnriii;^ tlie residence ol llie two races on tlie same uroiip, the clone connexion wliicli would iiecessarily exist between llieni conid not tail to liave some intliierice on tlie laniriiu^e ot uneli ; ot' wliicli wo see the truces in the 'roii;,'au dialect. '2. It is not to be supposed tliat nil, or even tlie irreater part of the ToiiLfa people would be able to make their escape. Tliose who remained would be reduced to captivity, iuid the women would iHJCome the wives of the compn!rors. The result would be u people of mixed race and l:in:;uaLre, in both ol which the Melanesiaii element would predominate. Such are the Feejeeans at tliis day. ;i. The words luti (or ////) and fo/n/ti would no loiiiri-r be a|iplicable as ri'i^ards their siiiiiilicaLion of inst and nrst. One of two results would nece.ssarily follow. Hither the words would cease to be employed to distiimuish the two tribes, or they would lose their proper and xce|it as the names of the tfroiips.t •t. The Samoan people are so near tht! others, anil maintain so con- stant u communication w ith them, that tii(> .same result must necessa- rily follow in their dialect, as we lind to 1h! liu^ case. /'/// and 'I'oiiya are used in it only as proper names. Hut it is de-servinj^ of remark, • So ill llic lOiifjlisli l|r|iliir('liy, ^^^(A iiikI Wrssivx, .Nnrlolk ami .SiiiHilk. it is unrlliy III' nMii.'irk llial, iil llir pri'si'iii iliiy, llir wrnli'm i-iiiikI ii|' \'ili.|i'vii iii Itiinwii liv tlir ^I'licrnl iiiiiiii' 111' y^', 11 wiiril wliicli |ini|M'rly iiu'iiiis /•/»«/, iiml liciirc (likr llir I'lilyiieHiuii liiio) Uruiiiil mill uistiranl. ] Till' wiiril .\(irmiiH is ii striking exum;ilo ol'u similar I'liiuigi! iirini'iiniiig. I ., 180 E T il N O (i R A I' II V. tliiit in nearly, if not (iiiiti", nil tlio diiilects derived from the Sitnioaii, as hefore slated, these words exist ; oonseiiueiitly the |)eople speakinjjr those dialects, (the 'rahitiaiis. New Zealaiulers, Nukiihivaiis, &.e.,) must have eniiu;rated before the words beeame obsolete in Samoan, — eoiisei|iieiitly before tiie 'I'on^aiis had been loiiy settled in the group vvhiih they now oeeupy. 5. But, on the other hand, it has been several times remarked, that tdUfia in Sanioan sio;nities, at present, the south (or 'I'omja) wind, — and tlie vord lias tiie same meauini; in the Tahitian, New Zealand, Rarotonifan, &c. Consequently, the emitjration by whieh tlicse islands were people«l must have taken plaee after the Friendly Islands were occupieil by the Toni^a people.* In the last two para;j[rapiis are jfiven the reasons for supposing that Tidiiti (and perhaps Nukidiiva and New Zealand) were peo|)led shortly after the (light of die Tonga people from Viti and tlieir settle- ment in their present seat. This deiluction calls 'o mind the infor- mation which we received from the missionaries at the iSamoaii Islamls, that, on .some of the hills in the interior, were e.vtensive walls, bearing the marks of great antiquity. The traditionary account which the natives gave of them was that they were fortilications erected during a war between their ancestors and the 'i'onga people. It certainly is noi unlikely that this war resulted from the settlement of the latter in the I'Viendly Islands, 'i'hese islands are at no great distance iVoni tSamoa, and may ha\e been shortly hefore coloni/ed from thence, and considered as ile|tendencies. A fleet of large canoes, such as are used by the 'I'onga and \'iti people, sudilenly arrives, bringing an army of fugitive, but i)rave and experienced warriors, des|)i'rate troiii their recent losses. The iSamoan colonists, sur|)rised and unused to war, are coiupiered w ithout dilliculty. Some of them seek refuge in tiie mother coiintrv, and the natural coiiseipience ensues, — a furious contest between tiie tSamoans and the intruders in the Friendly Islands. The latter, though probably inferior in num- bers, would l)e (as they still are) far better navigators and more skilful warriors than their northern neighbors. 'I'hey would naturally be the assailants, and might, at first, commit great ravages, and perhajis, partially con(|uer some of the hostiU? islands. Many of the van({uished * 'I'liii.s \vi' I'liii nri-oijiil liir iIk' siii;;iilar < iri'iiiiistiino' lliiil Ian in Tiihilinii, iiiiil toijii in |{iiniliiii;.'uii sliiinld siiinily Ixilli south mid insl. In Ihr lutlcr st list-, il i.s llir imuil of /«, and means |iri>|i«'rly siiiisrl ,• in llic liirincr, il is Ironi llic island of 7l>»^'a, und is drrivcd IruMi tlir l^aniiian uwol'lhi' Irrin. () (• i; A \ 1 (' M I «i R A T I O N 8. 191 pcoplo, as iisnnl in shcIi cases, wnulil take to tlu'ir canoes, ami spread tli»^ {Siimoaii rare and lanuua^e (ucr llie dislaiit islands of the I'acific. W th.! 'roiiira lii^jiitives, as tlins snpposerations. There is on this <^roup a chief called 'rni-/iiiif/(i, who is esteemed divine, and believed to he descendeil Irom a fjoil of ilulotn. lie takes .ank l)etorc all the other chiefs, the kins' not exce|)lcd, and receives from them peculiar marks of reverence, tlioui;h his actual authority is less than that of niiuiy others. 'J'lii- T(i/ii/ii means " L 'Vm-Sdrchrlv. 'I'lii- HiUiiuki. 'Viii-AdiKi, — these bcin^ districts on the larger islands. We may suppose that while Toiijfa was merely a district of \ iti-levu, its chief wodtl be tern\»>d 'I'lii-'I'Dinid, — and he woultl most probably be a (K'scendant of the leader under whom the lirst en\i;j;rants came from Bulotu. In the Friendly Islands, some other chief milfhl sei/.e the supreme power, leaving; to the disjiosses.sed .sovereiy;u his title, raidx, and the respect which he wt)uld derive from his sup|iosed descent. A fact which fjives pri>bability to this supposition is the custom which exists of straniflinjjt the wife of 'I'ui-Ton^a, at the burial of the latter. 'I'his is. as has been stated, the regular custom amonji; the Feejeeans at the burial of a chief, anil the wife considers it disjrracetul to survive her husband. If, while the Tontfa people lived on the Feejee Ciroup, their heaii-chief was accustomeil, Irom motives of policy, to seek the allianc*^ of hi.s dusky neiirhbors, it wovild account for the custom being intrinlucod into his family ; and, once introduced, 46 X8S E T n N O G R A P II y. I I i a sentiment of reverence for his high rank and attributes w c'j''l ""* allow it to be discontinued. But if the Tonga people once resided on the Feejee Islands, we should expect to find some evidence of the fact at tbc latter group, in the names of places and the traditions of 'lie people. And in this we are not disappointed. Whether the Vitians have any recollection of the war of the two races, such as the Tongans retain enibotlied in their mythology, is not known. The views which are now advanced did not occur to us until after our return, and, of course, no in(iuiries were made on the subject while wo were at the islands. But many facts were noted bearing incidentally upon it, and among them the following may be cited, as strongly confirmatory of these opinions. 1. On the west coast of Viti-levu, exactly at the place where our hypothesis supposes the Tougans to have first established themselves on that island, is a large district called Vci-Tmuja, which means " /o Tonga," or perhaps, originidly, to irestivard. We did not visit it, nor learn any thing concerning its inhabitants. Nearly opposite to this, on the east coast of the same island is a bay called Viti-levu, which may, in like manner, have been the pristine seat of the Melanesian emigrants, from which the name has finally been extended to the whole island. 2. We have spoken in another place of the clan or tribe called Lei^iikd. the original inhabitants of the island of Mbau, who are dis- tinguisliod from the other Vitians by their enterprise and intelligence, and carry on mcst of the trade between the dillerent islands. They are distinctly stated by the natives to be of Tongan descent, tiiough in appearance they do not ditfer from the other islanders. The prin- cipal town on the island of Ovolau is also called Leruka, and the people are e([ually remarkable for their intelligence anil good dispo- sition. It does not appear that there is, at present, any connexion between them and the tribe mentioned above ; but the identity of name and similarity of character woulil lead us to sus|)ect thai such a connexion may have formerly existed. Another name which is equally diHu.sed in \'iti is Mannt/at. This is the name of an island in the western part of the group, .south of Viti-levu, of another in the eastern part, near Lakenii)a, and of a di.strict tipon tiie last-named island, to which the sjiirits of the dead are supposeil to repair before they descend to their iinal residence in the Mbulu or Hades. Both these names are found in the Tonga Group, where they are applied to the two largest islands of the Ilabai Cluster [Lefuka and Nainuka), OCEANIC MIGRATIONS. 1S3 which are, politically, next in importance to Tongatabu. The mere similarity, or rather identity, of names is, of itself, suflSciently re- markable, and when coupled with the assertion of the Feejeeans that the Levuka people are of Tongan derivation, will be admitted to need some explanation. If we suppose that these appellations were those of two principal divisions of the Toiiffa (or western people) when they resided on Viti, we can understand that the fugitives would be likely to preserve the same names in their new homes, while those of tliem who remained in Viti, subject to their dusky eonijuerors, would natu- rally keep together as mudi as possiijle, and in this way their mixed progeny might retain .somewhat more of Tongan blood, and with it more of the bold, enterprising character of their ancestors, than the other natives. England offers us, in the province of Cornwall, an example of a people, who, though they have forgotten their original tongue, and are much interndngled with their Sa.xon conijuerors, retain yet many of the pecu! aritics of the Celtic character. These are not the only instances of similarity in names between the two groups. Mango, Fotiia ( Votnii), and Fiim ( Viiru), whicii are the names of islands in Tonga, are also found in Viti. The ruling family of Tonga, whose name is Tiibou, have a tradition, as one of the members of it informed us, that this name was originally derived from Tumboii, the principal town on the island of Lakeniba. 3. The mythological history oi jSdeugei, the principal deity of Viti, appears to refer to events in the early history of the two races. The word Ndengei is supposed by some to be a corruption of the first part of the name Tatiga-loa (great 'Vaiiga), the chief divinity of Polynesia. He is represented as making his appearance after the islands were j)eopled. He was first seen on the west coast of \'iti-levu, dressed in the malo, — a girdle worn after a peculiar fashion. From thence he came to Mbengga, and from Mbengga to llewa. After remaining there for a time, he removed to Verata, formerly the principal town on the island, leaving Rewa under the government of a Tongan divinity, callerl Wainta. Now as none of the black tribes, except the Vitians, wear the 7iialo, which .seems to be peculiar to the Poly- nesians, it is natural to sn|)pose that the former (the Viti) derived this fa.shion of dress from the latter. Hence this mythos may be explained as follows. After the Vitians had settled upon and par- tially populated Viti-levu, another people appeared at lla, on the western coast, wearing the ma/o, and having for a divinity Tanga-ha. From Ila they advanced to Mbengga, and from Mbengga to llewa, 184 ETHNOGRAPHY. L.i r in .search of a lietter land (for it is expressly stated that the gtHl would not (Iwfll at MluMiiftfa befmise the ground was stony). Durinjj their rcsidenco at Ucwa, tin* intercoiir.so between them and the Viti, wiiose head-iiiiarters were at Verata, was naturally much greater than before ; and it resulted in the latter ado|)tin<; the religion and garb, iw well as many of the customs of their more civilized neighlwrs, — a fact typi- fied in the removal of Ndengei to Verata, leaving Uewa under the ehiirm' of the Tongan deity Wainiii. There is no such gotl as this in tlie Tongan pantheon, and no such word in their vocabulary ; but in tlie dialect of .New Zealand, trtiin/a signifies a spirit, and is aj)- plied to all divinities. Such may have formerly been its meaning in ToiKjan. Tiiat the Tonga people really advanced from Ra to Mbengga and Rewa. is indicated by .several facts. The western island of Namuka, of wiiich we have before spoken, is situated within the same reef as Mbengga, and is |)olitically, as well as by situation, in close conne.\ion with it. .Vbout three miles west of Rewa is an e.xtensive and fertile tract of land, enclosed between two arms of the Xy'ai/evu, or great river, and known as the island or district of Tonga. The adoption by the Vitians of the religion and some of the arts of their Polynesian coinitrymen, probably preceded the war in which tiie latter were vaM(]Mished and partially e.xpellcd from the group. Of course, the amalgamation of the victors and the comiuered people would greatly contribute to the civilization of the former, and to their improvement as a race. It lias been intinnited, however, that the black settlers on the Feejee (iroiip were not, probably, of the pure Melanesian or negro nicf-, but Papuans, — that is, having some mi.vture of Malay bliKnl, as is .seen in the inhabitants of the north coast of New Guinea, 'i'his opinion is founded partly on the fact that the negro tribes rarely have canoes titted for a long voyage ; and partly on the presence, in the \'itian language, of several words of Malaisian origin, which are either not found at all in the Polynesian, or, if found, are in a dillbrent shape, as — I VITI.»>. /iiko, rata, . rulti, kurukuru, ttilra, . . .MAI.AI8I.%N. I'OI.VXKIIH.X. /i(kii, '//", hiule, . . . til yo. mill, ii/iki, .... I'liit'l". truliiii, hii/iiii, .... miisina, malamn, riinoii. yiij^ur, gni!;iu^, {\iu\\.) JaluttJi,, . . ihiimltT. i/anih, (.Mill.) rN. tll/nni, , rti/i, Vdlll, . lOSII, kut'o. , MAl.tlHIAN. til/ill, (lllljiis) fjiili, (.lav.) . Ixilds, (.luv.) iingiiio,* i-ut the cocoa-nut and pandanus were found upon the islands. If we are to consider this account as an historical fact, every cir- cumstance points to the iXavitjator Islands, (!Saini>a,) as the source of the Anwi people. The Tarawan lanjjua^c has no .«, nor any substi- tute for that letter; and the chanuje from Anion io Amoi (or rather, perhaps, Amoe) is not so jrreat as proper names fre(iuently undergo in the pronunciation of fnreisjners. linnip is probably Mie same as BniKi/iv : for the direction which Kirby assiifncd to it wa.s found to be a mistake. At Makin the natives knew of the same island, and de- scribed it as lying to the northwest. The evidence of language confirms this tradition, so far as the means of c()m|)arison e.xist. For the Samoan these arc ample, and the resemblance of many of its words to the corres|)onding terms in the Tarawan dialect is evident oi; the most cursory inspection. The following are a few instances. It must be recollected that the Ta- rawan has neither /", /, s, nor r. The first it sometimes omits, and sometimes sii[)plies by /> ,• the / is changed to ;• or // ; the ,v is dropped entirely, and the /• is changed to ;/•. The concluding vowel was fre- quently omitted by the interpreters, though it probably is not by the natives. W here the k has been dropped by the Samoan from a word in which it originally existed, the Tarawan sometimes inserts, and sometimes omits it. ■i.\MO.kX. TAH.WVAN. iiino. (into. lornrryon the back. l"i(, . Uiii, til tnke. }>ii. . l»i. the cuiich-shcli. I'liii, liiiii. to cry. pill, pou. |H>St. 'ifi. . i.(. liro. fii/im; tiiiir, womnn. lyifii, t)A (l. 0. tJIDl) , fnthom. Jiinuii, ln'niiii, . country. hil"j!tlii, . buruburu, fur. O i: K A N I C M I G II A 'I' IONS. 1S9 ■AMOAN, TARAU'AN. iyii, . llill, till 11)11, tiirinii, tiiniiin, miiliiln. miiriiiii. !■ri>ki'ii. liv.'r. eM. ml. niiit. malli't. This list nii(,'lit be lenj^tlirnod to two or tlirce limnlrcd words, hut the proccciiiiii will be siidicient to show the chanties which ihc Su- nionii words uiulergo when adopted into the Taruwan. For the dialect of Hanalw, the other supposed constituent of tiiis tongue, our means of comparison are much more limited. About a hundreil words, obtained from O'Coiuiell and Mr. Punciiard (see p. '^0), both of whom had a very imperfect knowled^^e of the langua<^e, are all that we possess wliich can be relied on. These wortls are, no doubt, somewhat altered in thciir pronunciation from the proper sound. Tliis is especially the case where a d or / occur, which are frecpiently chanifed l)y them to i/J or c/i (/(•). This was an alteration very often made by Grey and Kirby, at the Kin<,fsmill Islands, but the knowledire ac(piired durinsf our int"rcourse with the natives enabled us to tletecl it. It hajipens tiiat mo.st of the words which we havi^ in the laniruai^o of Banabe, are such as, in the 'i'arawan, have been derived from its Samoan i)arent. Tlu-re are, however, a few e.vceptions. In the Ta- rawan, vn'i sij^nilies /hint or J'l/ri', and is used for c/iirf] in which case it is commonly connected with djiii (pronounced by Ivirby ajj), mean- ing land, island, town, — as, mo-n le a/xi, "chief or front of the land." Both the inler|)reters pronounced this nii'i/if^'tip (or mrmtshnp). In lianabeun the word for high cliief, according to O'Connell, is infuiil- jab, which is probably the same, in com[)osition as in meaning, with the Tarawan term. Land, or country, in Banai)ean, is iljah ; in Tarawan it is te npa, pronounced by Ivirby /. I'lie pronoun / in Tarawan is yai, but in drey's pronunciation always iiai : in the dialect of Banabe it is also iiai, according to Mr. I'uncharil. An old cocoa-nut is called liy the natives of Taputeouea, penu : Kirby pro- 48 i 190 ETHNOGRAPHY. iiouiuTil it pni, and Mr. Puiiclinrd tho same for the Dnnnltoan. To think is in Taruwaii )iiiiiii, in Daimboaii, nim. In the latter lanjjuage, acoonliiiR to O'Coimell, edinmit Hif^iiilies i\ j)ric8t, but is rre*|uently useil lor a rliief of llie lowe; order. In Makin, where there are no priests, the tinnuit are tlie (gentry or petty cliiefs. 'I'hese examples will probably be siillicient to show that the evi- dence of language favors the opinion of the twofold origin of iiiin people. How far this evidtMice is supported by thai derived from their customs and character, will sutticiently appear from the descrip- tion given of them elsewhere. The fact that a chance commuincation between tho Kingsmill Group and Ascension Island has taken place very lately, though in the ojiposite direction to that here supposed, was learned from M. Maigret, French missionary at the Sandwich Islands, to whom we are inilebted for muih valuable information. During his stay at Banabe. in 1837, he saw a man who had been drifted thither in a canoe from an island called Mnruki, and who informed M. Maigret, among other things, that his people were accustomed to make a sweet drink called taknniir, unlike any thing to be found at Ascension. Mtinihi is one of the Tarawan group, and their kdiace (with the article, te kiirave,) is a beverage made of the sweet juice drawn from the spalhe of the cocoa-nut tree. But an examination of tho Tarawan vocabulary has led to other conclusions not less unexpected than curious. A great number of words in this dialect are found to have an evident adinity to the cor- responding terms in the \'ilian, — tho dilference being oidy such as would be produced by the dillerent pronunciation of the two lan- guages. Thus the t' of the Vitian is changed in the Tarawan to r ; the c to H- (or it is omitted) ; the / to ;• or // ; and tho compound let- ters 7>ib, 11(1, nilr, are reduced to the simple elements b ox p, d or /, and /•, or el.se omitted entirely, thus — ITIAN. TAB.\«AN. 8.\M<>.tX. Iii'i, tari. tri, . lirotlior. lU'd, lira, . iiirnl. imiiit'. t'tiimi, riiinii. lllllll, oiilrij;);i'r. Uflt'il, Orii, . iiiaiii, low.|i(k'. rial. ifii, . . Jfi, . Iiiiw iiiiiiiy villi. viriini, iininniiKi, . raiiiUiw. Off I, . It unit, ^itn'ini, tn .swim. liiko. niiko. iilii, sail, . to i^ii.ciiriie Ink a. nuk, . lllllll. surf. O C K A N I C M I U II A T U) N a 101 vrriAN. TAKAW tM. V'lli, iiinki, fttitiiu. to riY-koii. klHI, kiiiiki, Jvinu, let |iiiicli. kllHU, kiiiiii, 'ni, . Id i-nl. k'li, . kiiiii, — . nntivc. /«. . ri>, . miilu. (|iiii't. tciikti, t/V/^(l, ii'ii, . riM)t, k(iri. kttri\ mill. lo i4crn|>i'. liikii. htkii. tW/ll, lu Kliiy, n-Hide, tiiiiu'm, kiui-niitiuii. iiiianiifi, . yodltTiluy. llJOy ICI (il»l, r.i, . oik; . raiiiiiii'. iiiiiiiiari, lliiii. miiiiidr. viiinii, wi'iik, lifldf. timu. II mu, nil, . Iliy. Mil, . till, , Ii; . Ciitiin" purticlo ni, . III, . n, ciC. nilmi. Imi, . lllfll. viTy. m/io, . bo, . . i/l)il,/rtlli, . to liiicl, mcc't. iiiUiiji, llOl), . jx; . lli^lll. ItlllllKI, tllpll. lusi, . |l|llC'l'. mliiilii. hiiliirii. jKiii/i, iliirk. ?nliii. till, . JH-Iir/,), \\\Uv. ndiiiiK/iii, . tiii/iii, miiiii, |irrsinlly. mliiiiii, tOIIIII, III ill, to Niick. mloku. liikii, . Jinjii, top. luiuku. Ilk II, , tun, . liiick. nilra. nirii. Iitin, . blnO.I. aiDii/rr, iiiirii. j)iil>iilii. to shine. Tills list could be greatly cxtoiided, hut the fDro^oiiicf will be suflicii'iit to show that the Vitisui aiul I'arawau have derivcil uiany of their words from u common source, iitid that this source is not the Polynesian. \Vc have no means of determining if these words are found in the lanj^uayc of Banabe, but it certaiidy is not improbable. Wc have seen, in the description \r\\c\\ of the natives of tliat island, that they are of two classes, dilferin}^ so much in color and features as to make a dilTerence of origin hi<|;hly probable. Tiic one, which includes all the chiefs and free natives, is evidently of the yellow Microiu'sian race ; the other is ascribed, both liy Admiral Liitke and O'Connell, to the Papuan or Melanesian. At present thej- speak one languajfe, which is, perhaps, fornuxl by a fusion of their original idioms. In this case, a part of the Hanabean tonirue would have a cognsite origin with the greater part of the Vitiiin. The words of Melunesiaa origin, in the former tongue, would be brought by the IM KT II MHi K.\ I'll V. emiKiTintH to tlio Kiiijjsmill riroiip, iiiid tlioro, (N'rlmpH, unil('r(»o somo fartluT iilttTiitioii liy a inixtiirr willi the Siummii. If will Ik* ri'iiu'iiil)i'ro(l lliiit O'Coiiiu'll, in N|)onkin(f of llio voluntary omi^'ratioim which take place IVciii Haiialx' (ante, |). Nft), ohsorvps that those wiio coni|>oso them are nioMlly ol the lower elaMses, (i. e. iho Si(juitx, of I'npiian origin.) Kroni tiie suinrior inimbom of the latter, it would prohahly lio the same with a I'liiiitive war-party. In this way we may account for the hrowmsh complexion, midway between tho yellow of the Polynesian, and the dusky hue of the Fecjeean, which distinguishes the natives of most of the Kini^smill Islands. It is evident, moreover, that in such an emigration, the strict suhordina- tion between the higher castes of chiefs and gentry, and their nume- rous serfs, wonlil not Ix; easily maintain»"tl. 'I'he former would bo com|)elled, eith(>r to unite and become confounded with the latter, a measure abhorrent to all their prejudiceH,— or to separate from them entirely. The latter course is certainly that which they would l»c likely to pursue, if it were possible; tind we may thus account for one cluster of the Kini^smill islands (that of Makin) bein^ inhabited by people t>f a li^fhter hut; than the rest, with many cnsloms and traits of character distinu'uishiutr them from the southern natives, and assiinilatinjf them to the proper Micronesian race. It will be observed that some of the words tiillil, IdtHlhl)!!!, tdtnaiHii, tdiiiiimi. T»H\» A\. hllllil, ttiiiian, III Ilium II, tiiiiiiiiiii, . liillirr. my liillnr. Iliy liilliiT. Iiis liillior. Of the time which has rlap.spd siiu'c the islands were peopled, we have no means of forming a [uisitivc judgment. But from the dis- tinctness with which the native account of this event is detaileil, with tlie paucity of other traditions, and from viirious concurring circum- stances, .. seems probable that the arrival of the iirst colonists took ()(• K A N II' Ml ti It A T I O N H. io:» pliiro at a coiiipiirativfly iiuxlorii ihtumI, not rnon-. prrhnps, than fivi- or NIX leiilnrics n^o. 'I'lu' natives say llial, a ti-w generations back, the iiuinher of peoph) was nmeli U'sm than at prexent, wars wero Iuhh Ireipieiit, and the eonimnnieation l)et\v»;eii the iHhinils whh (roe ami Nufe Tilt' ^raiKh'atlier of the present kiii^ of Apainaina, more than II hniiilreil yearn a^^o, vJNited uvery island ol'tlie ^roiip, tor the purpose olHeeinj; wliat lie considered the world. At present, Iroin the hostility which prevails hetweeii tlio dillerent dusters, such nn uiidertakin{|{ would \h' iiiipossihle. We huvu elsewhere (p \'H)) ntutud our reasonH for belioviiiK that the name Saniim, for the Navit^utor CJroup, from which amui is prohahly derived, is of late adoption. One word of the 'rarnwan lanj^uatje, c///, may be noticed as an evidence of the communication which exists amoii'.^ the tribes of the Pacific. The Feejee Clroup, Kotnina, \ aitupii, and the Kinj^smill Group, are situated nearly in a line from north to south, with inter- vals of aitout five dej^rees between them. 'I'liey are inhabited liv ditl'erent races, having distinct laii^;uaL'es and customs. At N'aitiipu. the nativ(>s called some liaiianas which we had on board (a fruit that docs not j,'row on their island )y//// n Hiituma, or bananas of llotuma, showinj,' that they had intercourse with the latter island, 'riiey also called an iron a.ve toki fill, i. e. I'eejee axe, and we may presume that they first acipiired a knowledge of iron at Uotuma, to whidi island it had been brought from Viti. From Vaitupu the metal was probably carried, in like manner, to the Kinijsinill Islands, where the word fih became biti, and was used no longer as an epithet, but as a comnKui noun.* SYNOPSIS OI' MIXICI) LANOfACfES. Tlie table and formulte which follow are to be considered merely as expressing, in a succinct form, the conclusions with respect to the composition of some of the Oceanic languages which have been stated in the course of this essav as the result of our investigations. * S«"<' what IS said (pagfs 1U0, 13U,) coiiccrniiiy Iho ehuiiji"' iii meaning which proper niinnos undergo at lh«; ikiohi/ ranuvt. 49 104 KT II N Oli K A V II Y. I /' :i' I'olviiesinn liniiii-li, A. Mnlnv moo. II. Molanosinn rnoo. ('. Micronosian race. _/^ n Mnltiijiiaii hranoli. I k / Pii|>im (It+u ) A- Viti(H+"+ii ) ltniml).>(('+U + ii ) ./ _/ 'rnrawa (C-f H+a'+a") In this table the Micronesian race is regarded as j)erfectly distinct from the otliers, wliich is not altogether correct; as it is no where to he found (as far as our information e.vtends) in a pure state, hut always with a greater or less mixture of the .Malay. Moreover, it must he l)orne in mind, that tiie view here given of the composition of the Banabean tongue rests, in part, on a mere a.ssumption, which, though probable, is not to be regartled as proved. () I! I (i I .\ <» K i II i: r (( I, V N i: s i .v n s. That the I'olynesians belong to the saiTie race as that which peo- ples tlie Ivist Indian Islamis is, at present, universally adinitled. If any doubt had remained on this jMunt, the labors of Win. \'on Hum- boldt and Professor Huschinan. would have been siilhcient to set it at rest. Having traced all the principal triiics of Polynesia back to the 8amoan and 'Tongaii (iroups. it lu^\t becomes a cpiestion of interest, how far the intormation which we now po.sscss will enable us to verify the sup;)osed einit;ration of the first settlers in these groups Irom some point in the Malaisiaii .Vrcliiprlago I'rom the almost total Ignorance in which we yet remain of the dialects spoken in the eastern part of this archipelago, our means of forming a judgment are OC K A N 1 (■ Ml (I K A r I O \ S 1«5 vory limited. Ntnortlu'lcss \\v may vciitiirf to olVcr a conj urc, liascd iipim sticli nil amount of (•viiii'iicc as si-cms to briny; it at least williiii the l)oiiiuis ol proliahility. I. The natives of 'i'onjfii and Samoa, as has been betoro slated, refer the oriij[in of their race to a lar^e island, situated to the north- west, ealled l)y the former lii.lotii, by the latter I'lilnlti and Vurnlii As the / and ;• are used indilVerently in tlieso dialects, it would be doubtful which was the proper suelliny; ; hut the Feejeeans. who dis- tin^uisli i)etwei'u these two elements, have borrowed this and many other traditions from iheir eastism neighbors, and call the island in ipiestion Mhitrntu. Hence we may conclude that liitroln or Viirntu is the correct form. Now the easternmost island inhabited by the yellow Malaisian race, in the Kast Indian Archipelajro, is that called on our maps Ihniro m Hooro. It lies west ofCeram, which is occu- pied in the interior by Papuans, and on the coast by Malays. .Apart, therefore, from any resemblance of name, if wc derive the Polynesians from that onc^ of the Malaisian Islai.ds which lies nearest to them, \\v should refer them to the above-mentioned lioi/ro. "2. M. de llienzi informs us (Oceanit% vol. iii. p. ;184,) that he met. in the Hast Indies, a iJoujrhis captain, w iio had visiliid the Solomon Islands. The IJugis are a tribe of ("elebcs, of the .sanu^ race and the same de^rec of civilization with the natives ()f Houro. The Solomon [slands are at nearly two-thirds of the distance from CAjlebes and Bouro to Samoa. ;j. We have had occasion before to cite the description i^iven by Quiros, of Taumaco, whose inhabitants are "ol'dillerent kinds, yellow, black, and mulattoes." One item of information which he has re- cordeil respcclinir the island is very important. He sa\s tin- prisoner wh "'(*• Tiihhiih 1 IllkWII fc'fWW 9^m^ KiliMiah.t Hhf &mmm r«itiiiiii s.'iii.h Mlt-w (__ _-o SiihnpliM H.-.I MHB W;h|I.'1||hi flhtr m^mam T'liiiiiik t*iirf/* «qnM» h;tlii)iii\tt fin '-14 i«2nf.'?,-* l.iknit Nn-wH 49EJIUtir!3 1 iiMi.niii ii>.n.,ti,t -—--J K'ni.v()c.i;.\i'iii('.\i. XAi- jiJovyjiia-/>Ji:iJ»iij-riJOj'-/>j£VJiJiiia IIT H IIAI.r. » » «> NORTHWESTERN AMERICA. In the long and narrow section of this continent included between the Rocky Mountains and the Pacific, and extending from the country of the Esquimaux on the north to the Californian peninsula on the south, there are found, perhaps, a greater number of tribes speaking distinct languages than in any other territory of the same size in the world. Not only do these tribes differ in their idioms, but also in personal appearance, character, and usages. For convenience of description, however, they may be arraiiged under four classes or divisions, each of which includes a number of tribes resembling one another in certain general traits. 1. The Northwest dimsion. The tribes of this class inhabit the coast between the peninsula of Alaska, in latitude 60°, and Queen Charlotte's Sound, in latitude 52°. This part of the country was not visited by us, and the information obtained concerning it was derived chiefly from individuals of the Hudson's Bay Company. They described the natives as resembling the white race in some of their physical characteristics. They are fair in complexion, sometimes with ruddy cheeks; and, what is very unusual among the aborigines of America, they have thick beards, which appear early in life. In other respects, their physiognomy is Indian, — a broad face, with wide cheek-bones, the opening of the eye long and narrow, and the fore- head low. From the accounts received concerning them, they would appear to be rather an ingenious people. They obtain copper from the mountains which border the coast, and make of it pipe-bowls, gun- charges, and other similar articles. Of a very fine and hard slate they make cups, plates, pipes, little images, and various ornaments, wrought with surprising elegance and taste. Their clothing, houses, and canoes, display like ingenuity, and are well atlapted to their cli- mate and mode of life. On the other hand, they are said to be filthy in their habits, and of a cruel and treacherous disposition. 50 198 ETHNOGRAPHY. 2. The North-Oregon dirhion- All the tribes nortii of the Colum- bia, except those of the first section, and some of the WulUnvallas, belong to this division, as well as three or four to the south of that river. It includes the 'rahkaU-Uiiikivd family (the Carriers, Qua- liojjuas, Tlatskauies, and Unii^uas), \\\v'VnihaiU-SeliKh family (Shoush- wap.s Flathcads, Chikoilish, Cowelits, and Killamuks), with the ChiiKxih.i, the Ya/iones (or southern Kilianiuks) and, in part, the Ca/apiii/(i.s. The Noulkas, and other tribes of Vancouver's Island, also belonsjt to it. The people of this division are amonf tlic Slioiisliiijis, to liilitiitlc r>iV , inoluilmt,' Siuiiison's Uivi-r. • On llu> tnist art' till- IJockv Mountains, sc|iaratiii^ tlu'iii I'roin tlio Siciiiii, unci on tlio west the riii'm'il chain winch runs parallel witli tlu> coast. 'I'lic country is well watered with nnmcrons streams and lakes, most of wliicli discliar^re themselves into l''ra/i'r's Hivcr. Our inl'ormation with respect to this people is derived from a u;entleman comiectod with the llndson's Hay Company, who resided several years ainont( them in cliar^,'o of u fort; it will he tonnd to a^ree t;i!nerally with tlio account jfiven hy llarinon, who occui)ietl the same situation hctwcen the years IMM) and I'^lt). The Tahkali are divided into eleven clans, or minor tribes, whose names are — begimiiiit,' at the south — as follows: (I) the 'Dn'itiii or Td/koli/i : {'2) the 'l'silk6tin or Cfiiirotiii : (H) the S(tski',lin ; (J) the 'r/ut/iiitiii ; (.'■)) the Tsiilsm'ilin ; {(<) the Stilniuitin : ^7) tht; SlshdiiH- till : C^) the Sdllittiitin : (9) the Sikozliniitiii ; (10) the 'Valshiniilin . and (11) the linhim Indians. 'I"he iiumher of persons in these clans varies from fifty to three hundred. All speak the same laiigua^,'e, with some slight dialectical variations. The Sikiuii (or Secunnie) nation has a language radically the same, hut with greater dillerence oi dialect, passing gradually into that of the Heaver and Chippewyan Indians. The Taidvali. though a branch of the m-eat Chi|)pe\vyan (or Atha- pascan)! stock, have several |)eculiarities in their customs and cha- racter which distinguish thein from other members of this family. Ill personal aiipearaiice they resemble the tribes on the l'|)[)er Columbia, though, on the whole, a better-looking race. They are rather tall, witli a tendency to grossness in their features and figures, particularly among tlie women. They are somewhat lighter in coin- ple.vion than the triijcs of the south. Like all Indians who live principally upon fish, and who do not ' I'or llic (Xiii't liniils 1)1' till- liiriliirics ik'cii|iiic1 Iiv tlif lay llii-in down, llir thi' niosl part, with ininiilriir-s ami prt'i'isinii. + See Mr. llallalin's "Synopsis (ifllw Indiuii TrilK's,'" p. 10. N (» II T II \V K S T K It N A M K It I C A. 908 ac(|uire tlio lialilts of activity proper to llic lnmlinn trilmH, they ure exccssivclv iiulolfiit iiiul lillliv, and, us it iiatiiriil conriiiiiitiuit, Imse niitlMt'pruvcd in I'lianictcr. They aro liiiul ol' unt'tiioiis Mihstiwict's, and driiili iinmciiso (iimiilitios of oil, wliii'li they ohtniii from fish iinil wild animals. Thoy also licsmoar tln-ir iMKiics with tjrfaso and colored earths. They like their meat putrid, ami often lease it until its stench is, to any hut themselves, insupportahle. Salmon roes ure Hometiines i)urie(l in the earth and left for two or three inontiis to putrefy, in which state they are esteemed a delii'acy. The natives are prone to sensuality, and chastity amoin( the women is unknown. At the same lime, they seem to i>e almost devoid of natural alfection. Children are considered hy them a hurden, and they often use means to destroy thorn heforo hirth. Their relijrious ideas are very ^ross and coid'used. It is not ki uvn that thtiy have any distinct ideas of a goil, or of the existence of tlie soul. They have priests or "doctors," whose art consists in certain mummeries, in- tended for incantations. When a corpse is hiirned, which is the ordinary mode of disposinif of the dead, tlie priest, with many gesti- culations and contortions, pretends to receive in his closed hands, somethiiiij, — perhaps tlu! life of the deceased, — which he communi- cates to some livin^f person hy throwint^ his hands towards him, and nt the same time blowing upon him. This person then takes the rank of the deceaseii, and assumes his name in addition to his own. Of course, the priest always unil'i'staiids to whom this succession is properly due. If the deceased had a wife, she is all hut huriied alive with the corpse, heiiifj compelled to lie upon it while the lire is liniiled, and remain thus till the heat hecomes hcyond endurance. In I'ormer times, when she attempted to hreak u\\n\ . she was pushed back into the llaines hy tiic relations of her hrshand. and tiiiis olten severciv injured. When the corpse is consumed, she collects the asiies and deposits them in a little basket, which s! ■ always carries about with her. At the same time, she I'fcoinrs tiie servant and drudifc of the relations of her late lui.sband. \.ho exact of h.-r the severest lai)()r, and treat her with every indiirnity. This lasts for two or three years, at the end of which time a feast is made by all the kindred, and a l)road post, liltcen or twenty feel hiiih, is sit up, and covered on the sides wit 1 1 rude tiaubs, repre.sentiii^r tigures of men and animals of various kit On the to[) is a box in which the ashes of the dead are |)laccd. and allowed to remain until the post decays. After this ceremony, 11 > . •20\ \:t II .\ ()»; II A I' II Y. tlic widow is ivlensoil from lior state of servitude, and alloweil \o marry again. 'I'lio Carriers arc not a warlike people, thousjh they sometimes have quarrels with their neighhors, particidarly the trihes of the roast. Hut these are ns\ially appeased without much dillieulty. The Sikani, though speaking a language of the same family, dider widely from the 'I'ahkali. in their eharaeter and customs. They live a wandering life, and subsist hy the ehase. Tliey are a brave, hardy, and aetive people, cleanly in their persons and habits, and, in general, agreeing nearly with the usual idea of an American Indian. They bury their dead, and have none of the customs of the Tahkali with respect to them. n. a. TL.VTSK.VX.M. b. KWAMIIOQUA. These are two small isolated bands, neither of them comprising more than a hundred individuals, who roam in the mountains on each side of the Columbia, near its month, the former on the north, and the latter on the south side. They are separated from the river, and from one another, by the Chinooks. ^I'hey build no permanent habitations, but wander in the woods, subsisting on game, berries, and roots. As might be e.xpei^ted, they are somewhat more i)old and hardy than the tril)es on the river and coast, and, at the same time, more wild and savage. C. I'MKW.V, OH IMrmAS. The Imhivd inhabit the upper i)art of the river of that name, having the Kalapuya on the north, the Lntuami (I'lamets), on the east, and the ISainstkla between them and the sea. They are sup- posed to number, at present, not more than four hundred, having been greatly reduced by disease. 'I'hey live in houses of boards and mats, and derive their subsistence, in great part, (Vom the river. Two, whom I saw, dill'ered but little from the Kalapuya, except that they had not the heail flattened. One of them had reached the Columbia through the Tlatskanai country, and it appeared that a connexion of some kind existed between the two tribes. 2. It. K I r I' .\ .\ !I .\, O W C () I 'I' .\ ,N I K S, O U F L A T - H O W S. This is a small tribe of about four hundred people, who wander in I \ N O |{ I' II W K S T K U N A M K K I C A. SOS the rniiiiccl and iiionntainous tract oiicloscd lu'tweeii the two nortlicrn forks of tlu' Coluinl)ia. The Fhit-bow River and Ijake also bchnijj; to tliem. They are great liiinters, and furnish large quantities of peltry to the Ihidson's Bay Company, la former days, they wore constantly at war with their neighbors, the Jllackfoot tribes, by whose incursions they suffered severely. In appearance, character, and customs, they resemble more tlic Indians east of the Rocky Mountains than those of Lower Oregon. :t. "1" S I 11 A I M - S !•; L I S II F A M I L V. K. .slIl'SIlWArUMSIl, OK SIllTSllWArS, OR AlNAllS. The Shushwaps possess the country bordering on the lower part of F'razer's River, and its branches. From the vocabulary given by Mackenzie of the dialect spoken at Friendly Village, on Salmon River, in latitude 50° HO', and about ninety miles from the sea, it appears that tiie natives of that village belong to this tribe. Beyond them, according to Mackenzie, a dilTerent language is spoken, — probably t!;rit of the llailtsa Indians, of whom some mention will be made hereafter. The name of Atiiah is given to this people by the Tahkali, in whose language it means stniiK/cr or forrigiwr. The Shushwaps differ so little from their southern neighbors, the Salish, as to render a particular description unnecessary. By a census taken a few years since, the nund)er of men in the tribe was ascertained to bo about four hundred. The whole niunber of souls at present may be rated at twelve hundred. K. SELISU, SALISll. OR FI.ATllIiADS. llow the name of p'lathead came to be ap|)lied to this people cannot well be conjectured, as the distortion to which the word refers is not practised among them. They inhabit the country about the upper part of the Columbia and its tributary streams, the Flathead, Spokan, and Okanagan Rivers. The name includes several independent tribes or biuuls, of which the most important are the Salisii proper, the Kullespelm, the Soayalpi, the Tsakaitsitlin. and the Okinakan. The number of souls is reckoned, in all, at about three thousand. The Salish appear to hold, in many respects, an intcrinediate place 206 E Til NOG R A PU V. I ■ r .■ti I between the tribes of the coast, and those to the south and east. In stature and proportion they are superior to the Ciiinooks and Chikai- lish, but interior to the 8ahaptin. Tlieir features are not so regular nor tlieir skins so clear as those of the latter, while they fall far short of tlie grossuess of the former. In bodily strength they are inferior to the whites. A description of the habits of this tribe will give a good idea of the life of systematic wandering peculiar to the natives of Oregon. They derive their subsistence from roots, fish, berries, game, and a kind of moss or lichen which they find on trees. At the opening of the year, as soon as the snow disappears, (in March and April), they begin to search for the pohpoh, a bulbous root, shaped somewhat like a small onion, and of a peculiarly dry and spicy taste. This lasts them till May, when it is exchanged for the spatlam, or " bitter root," which is a slender, white root, not unlike vermicelli ; when boiled, it dissolves like arrow-root, and forms a jelly of a bitter but not disagreeable flavor. Some time in June, the itivlta or camass comes in .season, and is found at certain well-known "grounds" in great quantities. In shape it resembles the pohpoh, and when baked for a day or two in the iiround, has a consistency and taste not uidike those of a boiled chestnut. It supplies them for two or three months, and while it is most abundant — in June and July — the salmon make their appear- ance, and are taken in great numbers, mostly in weirs. This, with these people, is the season when they are in the best condition, having a plentiful supply of their two prime articles of food. During this period, the men usually remain at the fishing-station, and the women at the camass-ground, but parties are continually passing from one to the other. August, during which the sui)plies from both these source.- commonly fail, is the month lor berries, of which they some- times collect enough both for immediate subsistence, and to dry for winter. The service-berry and the choke-cherry are the principal fruits of this kind which they .seek. In iSeptember, the "exhausted salmon, ' or those which, having deposited their roes, are now about to perish, are found in considerable numbers, and though greatly reduced both in fatness and flavor, are yet their chief dependence, when dried, for winter consumption. Should they be scarce, a famine would be likely to ensue. At this season, also, they obtain the mcsiiui, an inferior root, resembling somewhat, in appearance, a parsnip. When baked, it turns perfectly black, and has a peculiar taste, unlike that of any of our common roots. This lasts them I N O R T H W K S T E U N A M E R I C A. 207 through October, after which they must depend principally upon their stores of dried food, and the game (deer, bears, badgers, squir- rels, and wild-fowl of various kinds,) which they may have the good fortune to take. Should both these sources fail, they have recourse to the moss before-mentioned, which, though abundant, contains barely sufficient nutriment to sustain life. Such is their want of forethought and prudence, both in laying up and in consuming their provisions, that there are very few who do not suffer severely from hunger before the opening of spring. Indeed, like their hor.ses, they regularly fatten up in the season of plenty, and grow lean and weak before the expiration of winter. As the different root-grounds and fishing-stations are at some distance from one another, they are obliged to remove from one to the other in succession, carrying with them, on their horses, all their property. This is easily done, as their articles of furniture are few and light, and their houses consist merely of rush-mats and skins, stretched upon poles. In winter they seek out some sheltered spot, which will supply their horses with food, and they then make their dwellings more comfortable, by covering the mats with earth. The Salish can hardly be said to have any regular form of govern- ment. They live in bands of two or three hundred, chielly for the sake of mutual support and protection. In former times there was much fighting among these tribes, but they still looked upon one another as portions of the same people. At present, by the infiuence of the Hudson's Bay Company, these quarrels have been sup])ressed. Intermarriages between tiiese bands are frecjuent, and in such cases the husband commonly joins the band to which his wife belongs. This proceeds, perhaps, from the circumstance that the woman does the most for the support of the family, and will be better able to perform her duties (of gathering roots, fruit, &c.,) in those places to which she is accustomed. In fact, although the women are required to do much hard labor, they are by no means treated as slaves, but, on the contrary, have much consideration and authority. The stores of food which they collect are regarded as, in a manner, their own, and a husband will seldom take any of them without asking permis- sion. The men, moreover, have to perform all the arduous labors of the fishery and the chase. They evince strong domestic feelings, and are very affectionate towards their children and near relatives. Unlike the Sahaptin, and some other tribes, they take particular care of the aged and infirm, i 1 208 E T II N () (! R A I' II Y. wlio tisvially faro the host of all. Tliero is, however, one custom amonif tlieui, which seems to evince an oi)posite disposition. When a man dies, leaving young children who are not ahle to defend them- selves, his relations come in and .seize \ipon the most valuable property, and particularly the horses, without regard to the rights of the children. The natives acknowledge the inhumanity of the prac- tice, and only defend it as an ancient custom received from their fathers. In every band there is usually one who, by certain advantages of wealth, valor, and intelligence, acipiires a superiority over the rest, and is termed the chief But his authority is derived rather from his personal influence than from any law, and is exerted more in the way of persuasion than of direct command. But if he is a man of shrewdne.ss and of a determined character, he sometimes enjoys considerable power. The punishment of delinquents is, of course, regulated rather by circumstances than by any fixed code. Notorious criminals are .sometimes punished by expulsion from the tribe or band to whicii they belong. They hail formerly, it is thought, a vague idea of a Supreme Being, but tliey never addressed to him any worship. Their only religious ceremonies were certain mummeries, performed under the direction of the medicine-men, for the [)urpose of averting any evil with which they might be threatenetl, or of obtaining some desired object, as an abundant supply of food, victory in war, and the like. One of these ceremonies, called by them SuhhisIi, deserves notice, lor the strangeness of the idea on which it is founded. They regard the spirit of a man as distinct from tlie living principle, and hold that it may be .separated for a short time from the body without causing death, or without the individual being conscious of the loss. It is necessary, however, in order to prevent fatal consequences, that the lost spirit should be found and restored as quickly as possible The conjuror or medicine-man learns, in a dream, the name of the per.son who has suffered this loss. Generally, there are several at the same time in this condition. He then informs the unhappy individuals, who immediately employ him to recover their wandering .souls. During the next night they go about the village, from one lodge to another, singing and dancing. Towards morning they enter a .separate lodge, which is closed up, so as to be perfectly liark. A small hole is then made in the roof, through which the conjuror, with a bunch of feathers, brushes in the spirits, in the shape of small bit.s of bone, and similar substances, which he N f) U T II VV E S T K II N A M K R I C A. 209 receives on a piece of matting. A fire is then li^lited, and the con- juror proceeds to select out from the spirits such as belong to persons already deceased, of which there are usually several ; and should one of them be assitrned by mistake to a living person, he would instantly die. He next selects the particular spirit belonging to each person, and causing all the men to sit down before him, he takes the spirit of one (i. e. the splinter of bone, shell, or wood, representing it), and placing it on tiie owner's head, pats it, with many contortions and invocations, till it descends into the heart, and resumes its proper place. When all are thus restored, the whole party unite in making a contribution of food, out of which a public feast is given, and the remainder becomes the perquisite of the conjuror. Like the Sahaptin, the Salish have many childish traditions con- nected with the most remarkable natural features of the country, in which the prairie-wolf generally bears a conspicuous part. What could have induced them to confer the honors of divinity upon this animal cannot be imagined. They do not, however, regard the wolf as an object of worship, but merely suppose that in former times it was endowed with preternatural powers, which it e.verted after a very whimsical and capricious fashion. Thus, on one occasion, being desirous of a wife (a common circumstance with him), the Wolf, or the divinity so called, visited a tribe on the Spokan River, and demanded a young woman in marriage. His request being granted, he promised that thereafter the salmon should be abundant with them, and he created the rapids, whicii give them facilities for taking the fish. Proceeding farther up, he made of each tribe on his way the same request, attended with a like result. At length he arrived at the territory of the Skitsuish ( Cmir d'alene) ; they refused to comply with his demand, and he therefore called into existence the great Falls of the Spokan, which prevent the fish from ascending to their country. This is a fair sample of their traditions. G. SKITSUISH, OR C(EUR d'aLENE INDIANS. We saw, at Fort Colville, the chief of this tribe, whose name was Stalaam. He told us that his tribe could raise ninety men, and the whole number of souls in it may therefore be estimated at between three and four hundred. They live about the lake which takes its name from them, and lead a more settled life than the other tribes of this region. As the salmon cannot ascend to their lake, on account of 53 t t ! !i 210 KTHNOORAPII Y. the Falls of the Spokan, anil as these natives seldom go to hunt the buffalo, their principal subsistence is derived from roots, game, and the smaller kinds of fish. Some of them have lately begun to raise potatoes, and it seems likely that the arts of cultivation will, before long, be common among ihcm. Being out of the usual track of traders and trappers, their character has been less affected by inter- course with the whites, than is the case with the tribes on the great rivers. They speak a dialect of the Salish, and resemble in appear- ance the other natives belonging to this stock. The origin of the appellation by which tiiis tribe is known to the whites deserves to be noticed, as an example of the odd circumstances to which these nicknames are sometimes due. The first who visited the tribe were Canadian traders, one of whom, it appears, was of a close, niggardly temper. The natives soon remarked this, and the chief at length gave his sentiments upon it, Indian fashion, observing that the white man had the " heart of an awl," meaning, a contracted, illiberal disposition — the term anl being used by them as we some- times employ the word jrin, to denote a very trilling object. The expression was rendered by the interpreter literally, " tin caiir (Tah'iie," and greatly amused the trader's companions, who thence- forth spoke of the chief who used it, as " the ccaur (Tulene chief," a soubriquet which came in time to be applied to the whole tribe. It was, perhaps, by some similar ''hicus a iio/t lucoido' process, that the very inapplicable names of Ti'tes-phUtes and iVer-^jera's chanced to be given to the Salish and Sahaptin, of whom the first never flatten the head, and the latter rarely, if ever, have the nose perforated. H. PISKWAUS OR PISCOUS. This name properly belontr^ to the tribe who live on the small river which falls into the Columbia on the west side, about forty miles below Fort Okanagan. But it is here extended to all the tribes as far down as the " Priest's Rapids," who speak the same dialect with the first-named. This whole region is very, poor in roots and game, and the natives who waniler over it are looked upon by the other Indians as a miserable, beggarly people. They have, besides, the reputation of being great thieves, which our experience went to confirm. It would appear, from the following list of their months, obtained from the chief of one of their bands, that their habits are much the N O R 'I" 11 \V E S T E II N A M E R I C A. 211 same with those of their neighbors, the Salish, — for the names of many of the months have reference to some of their most important usages. The name of the cliief was Sdkatatl-kiiiisam, or the Half- Sun (commonly called Le grand Jiiine homme), and that of his clan the Sinakaidusish, who live on the eastern hank of the Columbia, opposite the Piskwaus. The chief from whom the Salish names were obtained was called Silim-hmitl-mil/ikahk, or the Master-Raven, but he is better known to the whites by the appellation of Cornelius. His tribe is the Tsakait.sitli/i, on the lower part of the Spokan River. It will be observed that one of the chiefs made only twelve names, while the other reckoned thirteen. Both had some difficulty in call- ing to mind all the names. In several, the Piskwaus chief is one moon ahead of the other, which may arise from mistake, or possibly from some slight difference of seasons at the two places. riSKU'AL'8. SKLISII. Sz/irusiis, . . Siisliktvii, . . . . Skiniianiiiii, . So mill III, . Sitiiiii]), gathering l)erries, . I'dii/uilx/iX''"' • .SX(/«f,s, "exliausted salmon," akuui, . . Skiidi, dry, .... Kiitiii-i/\/iiteii, hoiise-lmikling. Siisttku-n , . Kcipndkualn, snow, . Dcceinlier and January, .lannnry and February, l-'ebniary, &c. March. April. May. .lune. '.Inly. August. Septeniter. OctiilK'r. Noveiid)cr and December. I. SKWALE OR NISQUALI.Y. K. KAWELITSK OR COWELITS. J. TSIH.VILISH OR ClllKAlLISlI. L. NS1ETSH\WIIS OR KII.I.AMUKS. Of these four tribes, belonging to the family which we have termed Tsihaili-Selish, the first iidiabits the shores of Puget's Sound, the second the middle of the penitisula which lies west of this sound and north of the Columbia, tlie third is settled on the banks of a small stream known as the Cowelits, wliich falls into the Columbia south of Puget's Sound, and the fourth is apart from the others, on the sea- coast, south of the Cohnnbia. They differ considerably in dialect, but little in appearance and habits, in which they resemble the Cliinooks and other nciurhborinc tribes. Their estimated numbers 212 ETIINOGR A I' II Y. are (or rather were in 1H40) for the Skwale, (500, the TMihailisli, 2000, the Kawolitsk, UOO, iiiul \\w Nsictsliawiis, 700. Atiioii^ tlic 'I'siliui- lish are iiiclwcleil tlio Ivwaiiiiitl iuul the Kweiiaiwitl (corruptiHl by tho whites to Queen llytlie), who live near the coast, tliirty or forty miles soutli of Cape Flattery, and wlio have each a peculiar dialect. J. s A II .\ I'T I .\. M. SAHAPTIN OR NEZ-PERCES. The Sahaptin* possess the country on each side of Lewis or Snake River, from the Peloose to tlie Wapticacoes, — about a hundred miles, — toifether with the tributary streams, extending, on the east, to the foot of the Rocky Mountains. They are supposed, by the mission- aries, to number about two thousand souls. In character and appear- ance, they resemble more the Indians of the Mis.souri than their neighbors the Salish. They have many horses, and are good hunters, being accustomed to make long excursions, in summer, to the Rocky Mountains, for the purpose of killing buffalo. They formerly had blooiiy wars with the Shoshonees, Crows, Blackfoot Indians, and other trii)es, whose hunting-grounds were in the same region ; but of late these (piarrols have become less frequent. The Sahaptin are the tribe who, several years ago, despatched a deputation to the United States, to rc(iuest that teachers might be sent to instruct them in the arts and k-eligion of the whites. Their good dispositions have been much eulogized by travellers, and there seems to be no reason to doubt that they are superior to the other tribes of this territory, in intellect and in moral qualities. There are, however, certain traits in their character, that have hitherto neutral- ized, in a great measure, the zealous and well-directed efforts which have been made for their improvement. The first of these is a feeling of personal independence, amounting to lawlessness, which springs naturally from their habits of life, and which renders it almost impos- sible to reconcile them to any regular discipline or system of labor, even though they are perfectly convinced that it would be for their advantage. Another trait of a similar kind, originating probably in the same cause, is a certain fickleness of temper, which makes • There is some doubt ouicerning the projier orthogmpliy, as well as the meaning, of this term, which was received from on interpreter. Tlii' missionorie.s ulwuys spoke ol" the tribe by the common niime of Nvz-2>ercis. N () U T It VV y. S T K II N A .M K 11 I C A. aiu them liable to chiin'j;o tlieir opinions and policy with every passing impulse. These (Icfects, thougli not inconsistent with many good qualities, are yet exactly of the kind most difficult to overcome. Until the Indians can be brought to reside in fixed habitations, it is evident that there will bo little opportunity for any permanent improvement. And this can never take place until some other mode shall be adopted by them for procuring their clotliing, than that to which they have been heretofore accustomed, namely, the chase, and particularly that of the buffalo. Cultivation, though it may supply them with fmxl, only solves half the difficulty. It will be necessary, if they are to depend on their own resources, that they should be taught to raise sheep, and manufacture the wool ; but to do this will require a steadiness of application altogether alien to their natural disposition. N. WALAWAT.A. WAI.LAWALLAS, PELOO.SE.S, YAKE.MAS, Kl.IKATATS, ETC. The territory bordering on the Columbia for some distance above and below the junction of Lewis River, is in the possession of several independent bands of Indians, who all speak one language, though with some difference of dialect. The Wallawallas, properly so called, are on a small stream which falls into the Columbia near Fort Nez-perces. The Yakemas (ladkenia) are on a large stream nearly opposite. The I'eloose tribe has a stream called after it, which empties into Lewis River; and the Klikatats (T/.lokatat) wander in the wooded country about Mount St. Helens. These, with other minor bands, are supposed, by the missionaries, to number in all, twenty-two hundred souls. They resemble the Sahaptin, to whom they are allied by language, but are of a less hardy and active temperament. This proceeds, no doubt, from their mode of life, which is very similar to that of the Salish. Their principal fo(Kl is the salmon, which they take chiefly in the months of August and September. At this season they assenible in great numbers about the Falls of the Columbia, which form the most important fishing station of Oregon. At this time, also, tlu7 trade with the Chinooks, who visit the Falls for the same purpose. The Sahaptin and Wallawallas compress the head, but not so much as the tribes near the coast. It merely serves with them to 54 314 ETIINOaa API! Y. mnko tlio forehead more retrcatiiiir, which, with the n(niiline nose common to tliese natives, gives to tliem, occusionally, a pliysiof^nomy similar to that represented in tlie hieroglyphicnl paintings of Central America. 5. w A 1 1 r. A T P ir. O. t'AILI-OUX, OK lAVl'SE. The Wniihifpu inhabit the country south of the Sahaptin and Wallawalla. Their head-(iuarters are on tlie upi)er part of the Walla- walla River, where they live in close connexion with a band of Nez- perces, whose language they usually speak in preference to their own, which lias nearly fallen into disuse. They are a small tribe, not numbering five hundred souls, but they are nevertheless looked upon with respect by the tribes around them, as being good warriors, and, what is more, as having much wealth. As their country affords extensive pasturage, they arc able to keep large droves of horses, one of their chiefs having as many as two thousand. They arc much of the time on horseback, and make long excursions to the east and south. In former times, they waged war with the Shoshonees and Lutuamis, but of late years these hostilities have been suspended. I'. MOI.KI.li. The residence of the Mokle is (or was) in the broken and wooded country about Mounts Hood and Vanco\iver. They were tiever very numerous, and have suffered much of late from various diseases, par- ticularly the ague-fever. In 1841 they numbered but twenty indi- viduals; several deaths took place while we were in the country, and the tribe is probably, at present, nearly or quite extinct. ti. T SHIN i; K. «. WATI.AT.A, OR I'l'l'lCIl ( IIINOOK. This name {Wut/.luhi) properly belongs to the Indians at the Cascades, al)out one hundred and fifty miles from the mouth of the Columi)ia ; but for want of a general appellation, it has been extended to all the tribes speaking dialects of a common language, from Mul- tnoma Island, to the Falls of the Columbia, including also tliose on the lower part of the Willammet. At the period of the visit of Lewis > N O R T l» \V f; H T r. K N A M K K I C A. 215 and Cliirk, this was tlic most doiiscOy pdimlatcd piirt of tlio whole Cohiinliiau iT)j[i()ii, ami it so contiinuHl until tlie fatal year IS'23, when tlio a^uo-fovi^r, iK'tbro unknown west of the Itoeky Mountains, broke out, and carried ofl" four-tilths of the population in a single summer. Whole villages were swept away, leaving not a single inhabitant. The living could not bury iho dead, and the traders were obliged to undertake this olfiec, to [jrevenl a new |)estilenco from completing the desolation of the country. The region below the Cascades, which is as far as the influence of the tide is felt, suffered most from this scourge. The population, which before was estimated at upwards of ten thousand, does not now exceed five hundred. Be- tween the Cascades and the Dalles, the sickness was less destructive. There still remain five or six villages, with a population of seven or eight hundred. They were formerly considered by the whites as among the " orst of the Oregon Indians, and were known as a rpiarrelsome, thievish, and treacherous people Their situation, on the line of communica- tion between the interior and the coast, gave them great facilities for trafficking with the natives of each for tli, also, that tlie eompressioii of the skull Ih (tarried to the greatest extent. 'I"he ehdd, s(M»n after birth, is laid upon an ohlon)^ pieco of wood, .sometimes ii little hollowed like a trou^li, whieli serves for a cradle. A small pad or eushion, stutl'ed with moss, is then placed upon its forehead, and fastened ti^jjlitly, at each Hide, to the hoard, so that the infant is unai)le to move its head. In this wr.y, partly hy actual compression, and partly hy preventin^r the {growth of tho skull except towards tiie sides, the desired delormity m |)riMluce(l. A profde which presents a straijrht line from tho crown of tho liead to the tve the ears, is then nearly twice as threat as the lonifituilinal, from tho forehead to the occiput. The eyes, which are naturally ileep-aet, become protrudinj,', and appear as if squeezed |)artially out of the head. In after years the skull, as it increa.ses, returns, in some det^ree, to its natural shape, and tlu- delormity, thouijh always sulliciently remarkable, is less shocking? than at first. Tho children of slaves are not considered lA suHicieut importance to undergo Ibis operation, and- their heads, therefore, retain their natural form. If the alteration of shape priHluced any important ellect on the intellectual or moral characteristics of the peojile, it would be perce|)tible in the ilitrerence lictsveen the slaves and tho frooinen, — which is found, however, to be very slij^ht, ai. \ only such as would naturally arise from the distinc- tion of cla.sscs. The slaves, who are mostly tie.scendaiits of prisoners taken in war, are of a tamer and less (piarrelsonie disposition than their masters, whose natural |)ride and arrogance is increased by the habit of domineering over tluMn. 'I'he Chinooks are less ingenious than the natives of the Northwest ("oast, but are far superior to those of Calitoruia. They mak(' houses of wide and tliick planks, whicli they chip with much labor from the large pines with which their country al)ouiKls. A .single trunk makes one, or, at the nmst, two planks. Tins hou.ses are of an oblong shape, with two lows of bunks or .sleeping-places on each side, one above N I » U T II W K S r i: H N A M K |{ I (' A. 'in the other, like IhtIIim in ii Nliip. TlitMr cuikhis, wliieh iiro nuule ot hollowed trees, are Moinetiiiies of yfretit Ni/.e. They are ol' eley;iiiit slia|H!, loh^r, rmrrosv, ami Hharp, and are li^'ht oiiou^h to live in a roiif^h Nea, wliere a lioat woidd he Hwainpoil; h\it they re(|iiire con- stant watehCnInesN, to miard ajjainst their upsetting?. The hahits of the Cliinooks, like tliose of the northern eoasl-tri lies, show a people aeeiistoined to derive their suhsistencc from the sea, and averse to wanderin^r upon land. They ditl'er widely, in this respect, from the Californiuns, who suhsist u|ion ucoriis and the seeds of plants, build temporary huts of hrushwood mid straw, and are constantly on the move from place to place. 7. K A I- A I' I' V A. The Kalaptiija (or Callapr-oyalm) pos.scss the valley of the Willam- mct* above the Falls, — the most tortile district of Oregon. It is included between the two ridges, known as the coast range and the California Chain, and is watered by numerous tributaries of the main stream. The natives were formerly numerous, but have been reduced by sickness to about five hundred. This rapid diminution will render nugatory the efforts of the Ameri'-an missionaries to improve their condition, in which, from the habits and character of tlie natives, there would otherwise have been some reason to hope for success. The Kidapuya, like the lUnkwa. hold a position intermediate between 'the wild wandering tribes of the interior, aud the debased, filthy, and (juarrelsome natives of the coast. They are more regular and quiet than the former, aud more cleanly, honest, and moral, than the latter. They shift their quarters at certain seasons for the purpose of pro- curing fotMj ; but could their wants be otherwise supplied, they might easily be induced, as some of them have already been, to adopt a fixed residence. The progress of disease, however, and the influx of foreign popidation will soon supersede the necessity of any further lalwrs for their benefit. I • As this word has Ukti written nnil pronounced by foreigners in viirioii.s ways, it may be well to note that tlie true orlhogra|iby, according to the native pronunciation, would br Wii/dmt, in two syllables, with the accent on the la.Ht. 55 -S.ii^i':;idji'j^!Siii2::i^'i. . 218 ETHNOGRAPHY. S.T. lAKON, OK YAKONES, OK SOtlTIIEKN KlLLAMl'KS. A small tribe, numbering six or seven hundred, who live on the coast, south of the Usietshawus, from whom they differ merely in language. Ih I 9. T. LUTUAMl, OK T L A M A T L, OK CLAMET INDIANS. The first of these names is the proper designation of the people in their own language. The second is that by which they are known to the Chinooks, and through them, to the whites. They live on the head waters of the river and about the lake, which have both received from foreigners the name of Clamet. They are a warlike tribe, and fre(]uently attack the trading-parties which pass through their country, on the way to California. They seem to be engaged in constant hostilities with their neighbors, the Shasties and Palaiks, one object of which is to obtain slaves, whom they sell to the Waiilatpu, and the Indians of the Willammet. 10. V. .SASTE, OK SUA STY. II. W. r A L A I I! .\l II, OK I'ALAIKS. These two tribes live, the former to the southwest, and the latter to the southeast, of the Lutuami. Little is known of them, except that they lead a wandering, savage life, and subsist on game and fruit. They are dreaded by the traders, who expect to be attacked in passing through tlieir country. Their numbers, however, as well as ihose of the Lutiiami, have been of late greatly diminished by disease, and all three tribes together are supposed not to comprise more than twelve hundred individuals. The women of the Saste, and perhaps of the other tril)cs, are tattooed in lines from the mouth to the chin. In Northern California the same fashion exists, amon" the tribes of the interior. Vi. S II O S II O N !•: E S, OK SNAKE INDIANS. X. SIIOSIIONI. V. WIIIINASHT. By the accounts which we received, this is a very widely extended people. The SkosM/ii and I'dnasht (Bonnaks) of the Columbia, the NORTHWESTERN AMERICA. 219 Yntas and Sampkhes beyond the Salt Lake, tlie Comanches of Texas, and some other tribes along the northern frontier of Mexico, are said to speak dialects of a common language. It will be seen, also, that the vocabulary of the idiom spoken by the Netela Indians on the const of California, in latitude 34^, shows evident traces of connexion with the Shos!u')ni. The country of the Shoshonees proper is south of Lewis or Snake River, and cast of the Salt Lake. There is, however, one detached band, known as the Wihinaslit, or Western Snakes, near Fort Boirie, separated from the main body by the tribe of Bonnaks. The Sho- shonees are generally at war with the Satsikaa, or Blackfoot Indians, and the Upsaroka, or Crows. The usual war-ground of the three nations, is the country around the head waters of the Snake, Green, and Platte Rivers. Some of tlie Shoshonees have horses and fire- arms, and derive their subsistence from the chase and from fish. Others, to the north, have no horses, are armed only with bows, and live on acorns and roots; tliese the hunters call Diggers, and consider the most miserable of the Indians. i:». Z. S A T S 1 K A A, O U R L A (J K F O O T INDIAN S. This is a well-known confederacy of five tribes, occupying an extensive territory in and near the Rocky Mountains, between the head-waters of the Missouri, the Saskatchawan, and the Columbia. The names of the tribes are (1) the Satsikna {Sutsi/:na), or Blackfeet proper; (2) ihv Kriia (in the singular Kf/ie/iiiii), ov Blood Indians; Qi) tlio Piekan {Vielwii), or Pagan Indians; (1) the yJ/,v/«^/, or Fall Iniiians, sometimes called Grox Ventres of the Prairie; and (")) the Sarsi (Svrsi), or Sussees. The name of the coufeileracy, as given to me, was Siks/ci'/.iKnia/i, but it is doubtful whether this word is not derived from the Cree or Knisteneau language. Of the five tribes, the first three speak one idiom ; the fourth have a language of tiieir own, of which we possess no vocabulary (except the very scanty one given by Umfreville), and the fifth speak a dialect of the Chippe- wyan (Athapascan), allied to the Tahkali. Tiie union of the tribes is a matter of late date, within the memory of persons now living. The Atsina are the same with the Arrapaluu^s, and formerly lived in the plains, but have been driven into the mountains by their enemies, and forced to ally themselves to the Blackfeet. They must not be 220 KTH NO (J R A I'll Y. confounded with the " Gros Ventres of the Missouri," — properly Minetari, who speak the Crow lani^uage. A few years since, the number and warlike spirit of the Blackfoot tribes made them the terror of all the western Indians, on l)oth sides of tiie mountiuns. They were reckoned at not less than thirty thou- sand souls, and it was not uncommon to hear of tliirty or forty war- parties out at once, against the Flathead (Salish), the Upsarokas (or Crows), the Shoshonees, and the nortiiern Crees. But in the year J836, the small-pox carried off two-thirds of their whole number, and at present they count not more than fifteen hundred tents, or about ten thousand people. Their enemies are now recovering their spirit, and retaliating upon the weakened tribes the ravages which they formerly committed. NORTHERN T R 1 B K S. N O O r K A. A vocabulary is given of the language spoken at Newittee, a port much frequented by fur-traders, at tiie northern extremity of Van- couver's Island. It proves to be closely allied to the language of Nootka, of which we have about a iiundred words given in Jevvilt's narrative of his captivity among that people. Nootka is about a hundred miles southeast of Newittee. By Jewitt's account, it appears that the same language is spoken to the southwest, through the whole length of the island, and also by " the Kla-iz-zarts, a numerous and powerful tribe, living nearly three hundred miles to the south." These are probably the Classets, who reside on the south side of the Straits of Fuca, near Cape Flattery. All that we could learn of them, and of their eastern neighbors, the CAalkms (T/lalam) was that they spoke a language different from those of the Chickailish and Nis(jually tribes. We might, perliaps, on this evidence, add to the synopsis and map the Nootka Familij, comprising the tribes of Vancouver's Island, and those along the south side of Fuca's Strait. S U K W A M K S, S U N A H U .M E S, II A I L T S ETC. A Canadian trapper, who had travelled i)y land from Fort Nisqually to the month of Frazer's River, gave me the names of the tribes that he encountered on his way. They were, — proceeding from the south. I ^ N () R r II W !■; S 'I" E R N A M E H I C A. SSI — the Siikwdmes, Sunahiimes, Tshikdtstat, Puinle, and tlie KawHshin, which last are upon Frazer's River. He said that there appeared to be a great diversity of dialect among them, a statement which was afterwards confirmed from other sources. But of their affinities with one another, and with the surrounding tribes, we could obtain no information. From this point, nothing is known of the tribes on the coast, until we arrive at Milbank Sound, in latitude 52°. A brief vocabulary of the language spoken by the Hailtsa Indians in this sound is given, as furnished by a gentleman connected with the Hudson's Bay Company. This is probably the tribe which Mac- kenzie met after leaving Friendly Village, on Salmon River, at which point he remarked that a different language commenced. ' sou T H E U N T R I n E S. The statements which were rf^eived from Indians and trappers concerning the tribes south of the Jakon and Umkwa were, in general, consistent as regarded their names and positions, but differed much with respect to the number and affinity of their languages. Imme- diately south of the Jakon are the Saitistkla, upon a small stream which falls into the sea just south of the Umqua River. Next to these are the Ktltwdtshat, at the mouth of the Umqua, and higher up, on the same river, the TsalH. South of the Kiliwatshat are the Kdus or Kwokwnns, on a small river called by their name, between the Umqua and the Clamet. On the lower part of the Clamet River are the Totutiine, known by the unfavorable soubriquet of the Rogue or Rascal Indians. Beyond these, the population is very scanty, until we arrive at the valley of the Sacramento, all the tribes of which are included by the traders under the general name of Kinkla, which is probably, like Tlnmatl, a term of Chinook origin. According to one account, the Saiustkla, Kiliwatshat, Tsalel, and Kaus, speak one language ; according to another, two ; and a third informant gave to each tribe a peculiar idiom. This will serve, as one instance out of many, to show ttie impossibility of arriving at any certainty concern- ing the athnities of different tribes, without an actual comparison of vocabularies. The next point at which we have any distinct information about the natives is on tlie plains of the Sacramento, about two hundred and fifty miles from the mouth of that river, where it was first seen by the exploring party from the squadron, on their way from the Co- 50 222 ETHNOG R A V U Y. lunibia to San Francisco. This was about sixty miles south of the Shasly country. Mr. Dana, to whom I owe tlie vocabulary which is given of this languajre, observes, in his note to me: "The natives seen on reaching the Sacramento plains, resemble the Shasty Indians in their regular features. They have thick black hair descending low on the forehead, and hanging down to the shoulders. The faces of the men were colored with black and red paint, fancifully laid on in triangles and zigzag lines. The women were tattooed below the mouth. They were a mirthful race, always disposed to jest and laugh. They appeared to have had but little intercourse with fo- reigners. Their only arms were bows and arrows, — and in trading they preferred mere trinkets, such as beads and buttons, to the blan- kets, knives, and similar articles which were in request among the northern Indians." Still farther south, about one hundred miles above the mouth of the Sacramento, Mr. Dana obtained vocabularies of the dialects of four tribes, — the Puzhune, Sekamne, T.iamak, and Talatui. He says of them : — "These Indians have the usual broad face and flattened nose of the coast tribes. The mouth is very large, and the nose broad and depressed. They are filtliy in their habits and stupid in look, like the Chiuooks. Throughout the Sacramento plains the Indians live mostly on a kind of breati or cake made of acorns. The acorns, after the shell is removed, are spread out and dried in the sun, then pounded with a stone pestle to a fine powder, and afterwards kneaded into a loaf about two inches thick, and baked. It has a black color, and a consistency like that of cheese, but a little softer; the taste, though not very pleasing, is not positively disagreeable." Five vocabularies are given of idioms spoken by the natives of California, who were formerly under the control of the Spanish mis- sions. The first of these was taken at San Rafael, on the north side of the bay of San Francisco, in about latitude 38° 10'. The second is of La Soledad, near the coa.st, in latitude 36°. The third of San Miguel, about fifty miles to the southeast of the last-mentioned. The fourth of San Gabriel (the KiJ), in latitude 34° ; and the fifth of San ,Iuan Capestrano, (the Netela,) twenty miles further down the coast. The " missions" are large s(piare enclosures, surrouniied by high walls of adobes or unburnt bricks. Around the inside are cells, which .served as dormitories to the natives. The latter were collected at first, partly by persuasion and partly by tbrce, into these missions, and employed there in agriculture and various simple arts, in which t I NORTHWESTERN AMERICA. 823 i. they were instructed by the priests, and the artisans who were at- tached to the establishments. There was also, to each mission, a guard of soldiers, who had the double duty of protecting the inmates from the attacks of hostile Indians, and preventing the converts from escaping. When the debased character, limited intelligence, and wandering habits of the Californian aborigines are considered, it would certainly seem that this plan, of confinement under constant superintendence, was the only one which could have been adopted for their improvement, with any chance of success. It nevertheless failed. The natives did, indeed, acquire some knowledge of civilized arts, and even of letters, but the great change in their habits, and the mode of life so alien to their natural disposition, had a fatal effect upon their constitutions. Many more died than were born, and it was necessary frecjuently to recruit their numbers by fresh captures, or by purchasing slaves of the tribes in the interior. Within the last ten years, most of tiie missions have been broken up, partly in conse- quence of the political changes which have taken place in the country. Of the inmates, some fled and rejoined their savage brethren, but the greater number linger about the towns, subsisting on charity, or by laboring for the Mexican settlers. These five languages are only a few oP those which are spoken in Upper California. It is a remarkable fact that while the interior of the country west of the Rocky Mountains is occupied by a few ex- tensive families (Tahkali, Selish, Sahaptin, and Shoshoni), the whole coast, from the neighborhood of Behring's Strait to Cape St. Lucas, is lined with a multitude of small tribes, speaking distinct idioms. A few of these, as the Tsihailish, Kwalhio(iua, and Nsietshawas are allied to the families of the interior, but tiie greater number are en- tirely unconnected, both with these, and with one another. In general it has been remarked that where popular report has represented a barbarous population as speaking a multitude of dissi- milar languages, subsequent researches have greatly diminished their number. Instances of this might be noted particularly in Australia and in the territory east of the Rocky Mountains. In Oregon, how- ever, the contrary has occurred, and the variety of idioms has been found to be much greater than was anticipated. Probably, as has been before remarked, no other part of the world offers an example of so many tribes, witii distinct languages, crowded together within a space so limited. If we might suppose that the hordes, which, at different periods, : ^,. 224 KT II NOU K A I' II V. overran the Mexican plateau, had made their way through this terri- tory, wo miirht conclude that tlie numerous small tribes there found were the scattered remnants of these wandering nations, left along their line of march, as they advanced from the frozen regions of the north into the southern plains. This conjecture ac(|uires some weight from two facts, which, though of a dissimilar character, both bear upon this point. The first is, that such a progress is now going on, particularly in the interior plains, where, according to the testimony of the most respectable traders and hunters, all the tribes are slowly proceeding towards the south. The Shoshonees formerly inhabited the country of the Blackfeet, and there are old men among the former who are better acquainted with the defiles and secret passes of that country than the Blackfeet themselves. At the same period, the territory east of the Salt Lake, now occupied by the Shoshonees, was in the possession of the Bonnacks, who have been thrust by them partially into the southwestern desert. The Shyennes, the Kaiawas, and the Comanches, were mentioned as another instance of the same kind. This movement is easily explained as resulting from the superior energy and prowess of the northern tribes, together with the general desire of attaining a more fertile country and genial climate. The other circumstance alluded to is the singular manner in which tribes speaking allied languages, are dispersed over this territory, in a direction from north to south. Taking, for example, the Selish family, we have the Shoushwaps on Frazer's River, and at Friendly Village, in latitude 53° 30' ; the Flatheads and Pisiiuous on the Upper Colum- bia; the Nisqually about Puget's Sound ; the Cowelits and Chikailish beyond these ; and a single tribe, the Nsietshawas or Killamuks, quite separate from the rest, south of the Columbia, below 45°. A yet more striking instance is found in what we have termed the Tahkali-Umqua family. The Tahkali, or Carriers, are closely allied to the Chippe- wyans,* who are spread over the whole northern portion of the American continent, from Hudson's Bay to the vicinity of Behring's Strait. On comparing together the vocabularies of the Oregon tribes, * These must not Ijc confounded with the ('hi|){)cways, or Ojibwaig, who belong to a diflbreni .slock. Mr. Gallatin, in hi.s i;reut work, the "Synopsis ol" thn Indian Tribes," has assigned to the (.'hip|>cwyaris and Carriers the general name ofAthupascas, derived from the original designation of a lake and district in the central part of the country which they occupy. The Tahkali-Umquft must therelbru I/ regardc^d as u subdivision of the .\lhnpascnn family. f 6 NORTHWESTERN AMERICA. 996 it became apparent that the languages spoken by the Kwalhioqun, a small band who live in the wooded country north of the Columbia, the Tlatskanai, a similar tribe south of that river, and the Umquas, in latitude 43° N., must all be referred to the same widely-extended family. The hypothesis which is offered in explanation of these facts, rilust, of course, be considered as a mere speculation, until it shall be con- firmed by the discovery of a resemblance between the languages of Oregon (or some one of them) and those of Mexico. The latter are known to be numerous, and about twenty have been reduced to writing by the Catholic missionaries. Of the grammars and dic- tionaries' which they have composed, several have been printed, but the greater number are still in manuscript. Many of the latter are preserved in Europe, either in public libraries, or in private collec- tions. Our own materials for comparison are limited to a few pub- lished works, in six of the principal idioms, between which and the languages of Oregon, no similarity is apparent. This result, however, need not discourage any one from pursuing the investigation with regard to the remaining tongues, especially those spoken in the north of Mexico. It is to be hoped that future inquirers, with better oppor- tunities, and more extensive materials, may be able to arrive at some definite conclusion on this point, which must be considered as one of the most interesting questions connected with the history of the aboriginal races on this continent. 57 I PHILOLOGY PHILOLOGY. POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR. A COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE POLYNESIAN DIALECTS. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. It has seemed advisable, for several reasons, to throw the mate- rials which have been collected for the purpose of elucidating the structure of the Polynesian dialects into the form of a Comparative Grammar. By this mode, the various idioms are brought together in such a way that the points of resemblance and of distinction among them all are perceived at once. The changes, also, which the general language undergoes, in passing from one group to another, are thus made apparent, and the principles which govern these changes, being once discerned, will prove, it is believed, of no little importance to the science of philology. It happens, moreover, in many cases, that what is doubtful and obscure in one dialect, is elucidated by a com- parison with others, — tlie mere ju.xtaposition being often sufficient for this purpose. Fkiidly, by this form, as the repetition of the same rules and explanations for different dialects is avoided, the whole is brought into a much smaller space than would otherwise be possible, with greater convenience of reference, and no loss of clearness. The materials Which have been used in drawing up the Grammar and Lexicon consist (in addition to the collections which our oppor- tunities enabled us to make) of the translations made by the mission- aries in seven of the principal dialects, namely, the Samoan, Tongan, 56 ■^IWIW 2.10 Pit 1 1,<) I, on V. Now Zealand, Karotongnn, Mnn^arovaii, Tahitian, and Hawaiian — of manu8crij)t (grammars and vocabularies, furniNlicd to un also by the missionaries in some of tbe islands — and of printed workn of the same kind, relating? to four of tbe dialects. Of the MSS., the most irniior- tajit are a brief jjraininar of tbe Sainoan by Mr. Heath, missionary at tbe Naviirator Islands, and a vocabulary of the language from Mr. Mills, of the same group; — the first part of a grammar of the Tongan (as tiir as tbe pronouns) from Mr. Ilalwne of Tongatabu, a vocabulary of tbe Nukubivan from Mr. Armstrong of Honolulu,* and one of the Mangarevan dialect from M. Maigret, formerly missionary nt the Gambler lsland,s, pud now resident at Oahu. Of printed works, the only ones wbicb have been of much service are the Grammar of the Tahitian, published in 19*23, by the missionaries at the Society Group, tbe invaluable Hawaiian vocabulary of Mr. Lorrin Andrews, and the notes on tbe peculiarities of this language, by the same gentleman, in the Hawaiian Spectator, for October, 1838. These publications, however, have i)een rather consulted than copied, the rules and examples given in the following pages having been drawn almost entirely either from manuscript notes, or from the translations. Mar- tin's Vocabulary of tbe Tongan, and Lee's of the New Zealand dialect have been used in preparing tbe Lexicon. All that is given concerning the lang\iagesof Fakaafo and the Paumotu Group rests on the authority of tbe writer, as likewise the remarks upon the pronun- ciation of tbe various dialects. A familiarity with the general struc- ture of the Polynesian speech, and with the minuter peculiarities of some of the dialects, which was acquired during three years spent among tbe islands, and devoted chiefly to this study, has much facilitated tbe work t)f compiling the Grammar, and may, perhaps, be considered as, in some degree, a guaranty for its general correctness. * hi Ihn first draft of thu Grammar, this voonbiiliiry, with one obtained at Tahiti, Crom n iiiilivr (iCraliiiata, and Ihr article, by Iho Kcv, William 1'. Alexander, in the Hawaiian Siicciiiliir (cir .laiiiiary, I'^MH, enlilled tlu! " .Mari|ii(siun and Hawaiian DiaU^ot.s Com- pared," liirnisbed all Iho inliirniation which wc |H>ssc.ssed relative U> the Nukuhivan dialect. .More ample nmlerialM liir jjiviiii; a complete accoimt of that idiom hove since been obtained in the MSS. of Mr. Crook, refern'd to on page 136 of this volume, and in the " lAltres siir Us Iks Miin/iiises, par le I'. .Mothius G * * *" (Gracia !), published at I'aris, in 1843. GRAMMAR OF THE POLYNESIAN DIALECTS. O U T II O G R A P H Y. 5 i. The elementary sounds proper to the Polynesian languages are fifteen in number, namely, the vowels a, e, i, o, u, and ten conso- nants, y; k, /, vt, n, y,p, .V, t, V. The only dialect, so far ns is known, in which all these letters are found is that spoken in the two groups of Fnknafo and Voitii|)U. In the other dialects, some of these letters ure dropped entirely, and others changed. In Snmonii, the k is dropped, its place being merely indicated by a hiatus or catching of the breath, as ali'i for lUiki, 'd'ano for kiikano. In 'riitigaii, the k is retained, but the s is changed to h, as luihake for sasake, alio for aso. The t in this dialect, where it precedes i, has a sound not unlike the English ch, or like li in Ckristian ; the missionaries have represented this sound by a _;', as jiito for tinu (pron. chinn). 'I'he .New Zealand dialect changes the s to h, the / to r, the v to w, and the/, before a and e to if, beforn o and u to /i, and liollire i commonly to w, but sometimes to h ; as heke for sckc, ivaka for viikn, tvarv for fale, vetCt for fitii, hoc for foe, huri for fuli, witi for _/?<«, and hia for fia. If two f's occur in the same word, preceding an a or an e, the first/is usually changed to iv, and the second to h ; as ica/ia for Jii/u, iceltc fiir J'efe. The dialects of Karotonga and Mangareva lose both tlic/and the « entirely, and have r instead o( I ; as are for fale, ae (i)r sue. The Paumotuan has the same elements ns the New Zealand, except that the/ is some- times heard in place of the w. Many of its words assume |)cculiar forms unlike those of any otlier dialect ; as mateu for matoit, tnauiia for maua. The k is sometimes intro- duced in words where it does not pro|wrly belong, as reko for reo, voice j kakicenei for akuenei, soon. The Tahitian dispenses with both k and ; ; the s is changed to h ,• the / before a and 232 P H I I,0 LOG V. f is rommonly, Ihoiigli not always, rrtnincd ; l)etbrc i, o, mill u, it is replaced by h ; the r also is used inslcnd of/; as cr, becomes mil, &c. The causative prcfi.x, which in Toiigan is fuka, in Samoan_/'(V;, in Tnhitian J\Ca and }uCa, becomes in Hawaiian h(Ca or lm\t, most commonly the latter. The diphthong ia in Tongan frequently becomes ic, and uii is changed to uo ; as Jie, to desire, for Ji is employed, nnd in Tnhitian and Rarotongan the letters h and d were at first occosionally used ; ns medua for metua, rolo/iu lor rolopii, &c. ; nt present, we Ix'lievc, the missionaries have decided upon employing only the p and t. The sound of/ is rarely heard in the New Zealand pronunciation, nnd that of r in the Tongan ; in all the other dialects both these sounds are used indiscriminately. The missionaries have adopted the / in Samonn and Hawaiian, nnd the r in Tnhitian and Rarotongan. In Vitiaii and Rotuman I and r are distinct sounds. The sound of t' is most usual in Samoan, Tongan, Rarotongan, and Tnhitian, — that of ir in the New Zealand, Pniimotunn, and Hawaiian. In all the dialects the / (or r) is frt^quently so pronounced as to have, to the enr of a stranger, a sound very similar to d ; FaleiiUli, the nnme of a town in Samoa, is gene- rally soumled Faleaiiili ; riri in New Zealand is pronounced didi ; raro in Tahitian has the sound of darn ; and HUo, the name of n district in Hawaii, is usually pronounced m/o. The confusiim in the pronunciation of ^ and t is not uncommon, oven in those lan- guages in which both the sounds are met with as distinct elements. In Fakaafo /d/ii, \c. This may serve to show llic process hy which Inith the ir and the h have Ix'cn substituted, in some of the dialects, (or llie /,• as in New Zealand, iviilni t'or/n/u, Arc. At Fakaafo, we also lVe(|uently heard the s pronounced like a strongly aspirated /(, as h'(i lor sa, sacred. A similar sound is scmietiines given to the h in New Zealand and Tahiti, as in /loiji or hoi (in Sanioan so}ji), to salute hy pressing noses, which some have supposed to be pronounced shoiji, shoi. In tact, the Samoan s is a dental letter, ap- proaching, in the pronunciatiScc. ha^a ha'a haka va''a tva'a vaka fare hale fac or hoe vaha icaha fafa or halia ''ujiea 'apena kuprka, &c. himniro hinanalo hinaktm ariH ali'i aiki hciiiia humui hvnwi^ iVc. tahkaiV) tahima titlmka, tuhuna ETYMOLOGY. ^ 10. The dialects of Polynesia have, properly speaking, no gram- matical inflections. The only changes which words undergo are by affixed particles, or by the reduplication of one or more of their syllables. Particli'S, both affixed nnd separate, play a great part in all these idioms. They may be divided into three classes, — particles which (piulily nouns, verbal particles, and con- junctives. In the former are included the articles, certain demonstratives, the signs of case and of nunibcr,^-of the first of which we i)rocecd to speak. T H i; A IITI C L K. tj 11. There are, in most of the dialects, two articles, one of which is definite, and at the same time singular, and the other indefinite, and prefi.xed either to the singular or the plural. In the dialect of Faknafo the definite article is tc, and the indefinite se or he {s and h being used indiscriminately) ; as ua lelci tc tama, good is the boy; sc nuita, an eye ; he iufitija koe f art thou a priest ? In Samiian, the articles are le and se; le tapata, the man ; sc taijata, a man. In Tongnn, there appear to Ik; but two articles, a and lie. The former is used before pro|>er names and pronouns, and becomes ae (probably for a he) before common nouns ; as. Ilea toki lea a Jesu, and then Jesus said; a liano tehina, his brother; bea tie ttiku ki 236 PHILOLOGY. 1, iii , iiiiil, iVc, Ixjcomos simply r, ns, lie yaiie ac Mrsin, the works of tho Mes- siah ; ke Ho nc Met moc Aovi, to know jjood niul evil. lie properly answers to sc in Snnioaii, but it has also the meaning of the dclinitc article in Knglish, as in one of tho examples given above. 'rimt on article tc once existed in this dialect we may infer from its (ircscnce in some of the nuMiorals, as Icknu., one score — mi iin-kdu, two score ; te-kumi, n measure often fathoms [line dizaine), — tola iju-kiimi, twenty fathoms ; iciiii, a hundred,— ;/« genu, four hundred, to-. [The missionaries moke two definite articles, a andr, "the former used l)efore the nominative when the verb is neuter or intransitive, and the latter where it is active or transitive." This, however, is an error, the result of another error, namely, the failure to distinguish between the active and possive states of the verb. The e is merely, as in all the other Polynesiaaking, was likely to be olli-nsive to the fastidious audiences of Samoa, Tonga, and Hawaii, in all of which great P O I. Y N E S t A N G R A M M A R. '237 nltcnlinn is pniil by \hv liij;li.>r rldsscs to I'l;? nrls nf orntury. In Tahiti, the nttcn)pt to avoiil tliis rcpoliiioii has led nu'rely to the l('iiij;lh(niiig nf thn rchitivc, wliidi is pro- noiiiiccil Iri. 'J'hat Ir is properly an article of iiiiily, there pan Ik; no doubt. It never precedes a iionii in the plural, unless where this lias n colleotivn sense; thus, tc tanald, in Hawaiian, may mean either "the man," or "mankind," or the " party of men," (spoken of before ;) but in tiic latter case it would usually liavo some collective particle nfter it, as tii man taiKttii, or to poc ttuiatii. It is, perhaps, connected with the numeral tahi, one, wliicli in Uoluniun becomes til, and in Tarawan Ir. — As regards the ii/ii, some (pi.) ; ettiha, certain, other; as liii tnijatn, some man ; J'lic itiii, i\ single cocoa-nut ; ki he matatahi elaha, to the other side. Ill the New Zealand dialect, titii/ii, some one, a certain one, another, — pi., ctiihi; ua/ti or tcifdiii, some (partitive). In l{arolongan, liliii, some one, another, — pi. clai; triai pac, some, a portion of. In Maiigarevan, Uii, one, other ; ma, some, — as ma vai, some water (but used rather in the sense •■'" ^'ve me some water"). In I'aimiotuaii, r liumai tc wahi kniiiu' nnku, bring here some water for me. In Tahitian, /(' htx\ some one, a single one ; ttahi, one, other, — \i\.ri'tahi; ma or maa, some, a iiortion of; as tvlim' ri, an apple; ria/ii ea, another road; maa jnijie, some water ; maa malai, some w iiid. iSoineliines this last has another article before it, as liomai elahi a If/ioc maa pajH', give me some water. [We have also maa henna, a piece of ground, a field, — in Rarotongan maija enua. Maa and maija mean also fiiiil,ii tijii, a sow ^ 14. The plural is frequently left witliout any mark to distin- guish it from the singular. In this case, the plurality must be inferred from the general course of the conversation or narrative. When it becomes necessary to mark the distinction, there are several modes of doing it; — 1st, in some of the dialects, by an indefinite or demonstrative or [)ossessive pronoun prefi.xed, as )iisi tmjuta, Sam., some men; omt toi, liis axes; era tvare, N. Z., those houses; '2dly, in most of the dialects, by the form of the adjective, as raaii raiti, Tah., large tree, pi. raaii rarahi, large trees; 3tlly, by .some numeral or adjective signifying number. These three methods will be further illustrated hereafter. Finally, the most general manner of denoting the plural is by means of particles, most of which have a collective sense, prefixed to the noun. Ill I'akaalii wu heard iii, knu, and tiii used liir this |Hir[Nw; as >ii no, clouds; kiiii j>u, .shells : /(■ tiiifdlr, the houses. In Saiiioaii the plural signs arc «i, an, iiiou, liti, ijulu, titii, ijii. Ai is also u.scd lor some, as )ii a oiiloit, some I'or you ; but it morc ollen has u general signilicalion, na e le u/n liii-ii III Idijiilti, men shall not li-e. 'i'his panicle dcK's not admit an article ln'fore it. Nai is used in ihe same way lor a small numlier, as iiai in dun, two fishes. An is useil for a class or collictioii : moil and Ini lor a multitude; tjnlu lor women and ebildrc'ii ; lOu is only used beiiire words sigiiilyilig country, isl.and, district, and the I'kn, as ti: lUu nun, the towns. Ihi is found onl_\ in the numerals, as srfula, ten, selaii, lu.ndi-ed : loll/ f/a/n/u, thirty; I'liii ijii /mi, three hundred. It should bo ob.served that the words nil, niou, Ini, ijiilii, iifii, are considered to be in the singular, and would take a singular pronoun ; as /n/iii mini injr/u, his angels (properly, bis coiii|iony of angels) : iniii iiihIo would signify, his angels, in a general seli.se. .1 1' ( ) I, \ N K S I A N (J 11 A M .M A It. 239 In 'I'ciiifiHii we Imvc no'i, iin/ii, /:iiii, liiim, Jiiiiii, fitij'iii, iitii. Oijo is used only in the ilu:il, anil in liict sii|)|ilii.s the |ilii<-<' cil' llii' woril Iwii, lliiiiij;li il prcvtMli's the noun, while till.' niiniiTiil MiMild rolliivv; iis /.«■ oijh (//,■<(«, the mo Ii'its. Iliilii is tin: niiist i»i'iicrnl plunil sijjii, US /,7*' iKiliidkdiiy Ihi; irccs. It is (|nrsliipniiMi' wlicllicr this U? di^rivcd from thu phu'iil ai'ticli! nn, wliicli wu I'lnd Iktci only in cLTtiiin nunitTiils, us imkiimi, ijii/mu, pc)(i is ulso for a limited nnmher, and is commoidy used with a numeral, as ya tulnii (iriiiic, five talents; it never has the article heliire it. Amyd and dii are collectives in fre(|uent use, — td rdldii iiriiyd kiijii'yd, their (several) nets ; Ic aroyii dyr/o, the angels ; tc rciiii an tidiliid, those things. Ui is a collective applied to persons, us tc id itriki, the princes ; tv III liiiiija viiniii, the chief priests. Ai occurs only with words expressive of relation- ship, as tdkii di tmhiii, >iiy parents; lokii ui hiiii/ir, my sisters. We find iirotjii used also independenlly, as, liiai iiriiyd, some; /c dioya i la, those who killed. 'I'he only plural particle ccailaiui'd in our Maiii,'arevan vocabulary is mini, us a mini tayiild lid, alt men ; hut others, no doubt, exi>t in the laiiiiuage. The Tahitian has iki, mini. Inn, pnc, and hiii. Sii denotes, in general, a small plurality, two or three, as iiu miliiii, the parents, fiither and mother ; nil tiiata, the men, a small number; hut il muy denote a great numlxT, when it is unccrt.'iin. Mini is an unlimiteil plural, us iinif tdiitii, men; mini mrtiiii, parents, in genernl. Tun denotes a small indelinile plurality, as iiiln ira tun liintii lii, hut lew men, two or three. Pnc and /(('(' arc^ colb.rlives, as pni' iiiii, the royal family, or principal chiefs; ])iic rniitira, the body of subordinate chiefs ; hiii nrii and hni rdiitini have nearly the same meaning ; hul Ji lie hinfn seems an exception, us being mtn-e limited; hni lioii is a general word for friends, [The loroi;oing is extracted from the Tahitian (irummar of the Knglish mis- sionariis; on referring, however, to the translations, by the same authors, we find the pnc anil nil used very much as jnikr and iid in Karotongan, as tnojiili jmi: liiuln, two men ; nn lii/ciii crinni, live lalenls. Il should lie observeil that mi is never preceded by the article, while all the rest admit of this construction.] In Hawaiian, the plural signs are mi, mini, jioc, pur, unil pnn, JSii is the most common, and expresstM a plural indefinitely large ; as, na nuinn o tti k-uii, the birds of the air. Mnn does not apply generally to a great number, rarely more than ten. 7'or restricts the noun to a particular company or set of |iersons or things spoken of, as ta 240 I'll I I.O I.O(i Y. poc Iciti sijjiiifios oillipr the children (bri'oro mcntidncil), or cliildrpn, ns cnnlrniliRtiii- Ri« islicd fruiii adults. \(ir nnci jiiiii nn" tiscti very imicl jHir, but more srldcuii ; In pir iiiiKi J/iiiniii mi .siuiiilii s tin- };riiii|i of llawiiiiiin i^lniids. AW, iis in llic Talii- ti.'ili, (lillrrs (Voin llic olliiT |iiirliclrs in not takinii nn iirticlc U'liirr it. rill y»*'. ylit'u to a small rciuliTcd liy .Mr. tVimk a pair, as r iiinn knhni, n pair ol' car-rings; jhx signifies a com- pany, as Ir juH' Inliinin, llic artisans, ['I'lic partii'le ijn, as lKli>ri' riiDarknl, appears to Ix- the proper plural article or prefix of the iVilynesian dialects. All the other words were originally collective nouns. Kiin (or 'an) seems to mean properly a parcel, or hunch. It is probably the root of llie Tongnn tckaii, n score. Knn-nji means, according to Mariner, a parcel of yams, twenty in number. Pnkc or pn'c is a lienp, or hillock. Mnn has perhaps the same meaning, and may Ik- the root of the word mnntjtt, moimlaiii ; indeed, the .Mangarevan has inoii, signifying hill. Tniin is from In, to stand, and means any thing whicli stands, and hence any thing piled up — a heap, n innund. I'nijni, /mi, ni, are from the ISamoon /mi (or more commonly /»»//('.<() to bind in a bundle, — hence, n sheaf or bundle of any thing, /'or, in Hawaiian, seems to lie from tlie Tongnn /«•, a mass, lump, or ball, — from which the Tahilian makes both its article le/nic (ante § Iv!) and the word y)w, pearl. I'oc, in New Zealand, means a ball, I'n'n, Haw., means a small round hill, a protuliemncc ; hnopn'ii is to heap up. [Vide Pnkn in Le.x.J In colloquial I'lnglish, the words knot, lot, bunch, are not unfri'<|Uenlly used in a similar manner ; and in some parts of our country, the Word heap is commimly eniployeil by the uneducated with this sense. In Mexico, n like meaning is given by the lower classes to the word niiii/ni/ni (machine); as mm tiidijninn i/e miilns, de cmhrs, a great imml)er of mules, carriages, &c. This was explained from the tact tlint the only machinery of conseiiuenco used in (hat country bi'ing in the corn-iiiills, the name oC iiidi/niini has Ih^coiiu' appropriated to them, — and ns they usually contain a large store of corn and meal, the word has undergone a further dcvialiiin, and is employed to signify a great ipiantity or mass of any thing — and hence, a great nuiuUr. This example may serve to show the dilViculty of tracing to their origin nil the particles employed in the I'olynesin > dialects, without a thorough knowledge of the habits and miHles of thinking of the natives.] i IT), A plural of a peculiar kind is formed in the dialects of New Zealand, Tahiti, .^nd Hawaii, by the particle ma appended to a proper noun, or to a wo-d sicoast ; Uthiina I'c/i; lliiw., priest of I'ele, The Itiirotiiiignn is peculiar in lengthening the finni vowel of the preceding word, as, riiii mi, well of water; kolii/d kaiija, divisiun of land. This, however, a|i|)cars to lake place only with the vowel ii. i 17. The Polynesian languaj^es have a peculiar particle to mark the nominative, or rather the airent, in a sentence. This particle is ko, or, in Samoan, Tahitian, and Hawiiiian, Vi. Its use varies some- what ill the dirterent dialects, but its general object appears to be to mark the governing noun. In all, it is used to reply to the questions " who or what is it?" " who did it ?" and the like. In Snmoan its iiso is very frequent. When prefi.xcd to common nouns in the singular, or collective plural, it usually has the article after it, as, o Ic tinjiitti, the man ; o le tiipu- Itiyti iimiildvii, all the generations; in the ordinary plural, however, it immediately pre- cedes the noun, as, o ttimii «iH((, the young children. With proper names and pronouns it has no article, as, o Vnviisii, Vava.sa ; o oiitoii, ye. It dixjs not always pri'cede the nominative, but only when this is at the begiiming of the sentence, or in apposition to a preceding noun ; as, o liniii. lane, o Josrjii, o Ic tdijtita iipii-lrlei, her husband, Joseph [U'ingJ a just man. It is also used independently of a substantive, as, o e luj'txii idle (lu, wh(X'ver shall reject me; use, who.s(K'ver. In Tougan, in is used before proper names, and sonu^ of the pronouns, and koc (for ko he) U'Core common nouns. This partiear dillerently to dillerent minds, there is, in all the dialects, some uncertainty about its use. In three chapters of Matthew (the .^th, 0th, and 7th) the Samoan uses this particle fifty-six times, the New %aland forty-nine, the Rarotongan forty-six, the Hawaiian forty-three, and the Tahitian twenty-six. The latter, in general, makes a more sparing use of it than the others. In the verse " all tilings whatsoever ye 01 24S I'M I !,(> I. or. Y. m f would thai others should do unto you," Sic, the Sanionn hns "o mm niiui," t\w Now Zcnlnnd, " ko >)ii mm kii/iid," the Tiiliiliuii, " Ir iiniii mm Imi" the |{iiri)liiri|{nii, " If mi men kiilixi" iiiid tlii" lliiwiiiiaii, " n mi mm n /uiii," Hire llii' Itiinitonnnu coincidi's with the 'I'liliiliim, bill in most casi's it njirci'S with the oilier iliiilcrls. In llir Nnilriiro " 'WiwswiVT siiiill Ik) aii^iry," lln' Siiiiionii has " i> /r fininln," Ilir New Zealaiiil and llio Rnrotoiiijan, " kn Iv Imjiiln" tlir llavMiiiaii, "otumra," aiul the Taliilian, sim|ily, " tc tiKlltl." This particle is also prclixrd to adverbs iiseij siilislanlively, or without n vorli; as in tho sentence " within they iire raveiiini; wolves," (i.e. as to the inside) — in Iho Sanioan it is tittniiii, in New Zealand, ko mtn, in Taliilian, o riito. So ko mini, liar., Iieliire j ko rririi, N. '/.,, then; ko riiijn tviiri,ki> nvniki (inn, Maii^., this is nl)ove (or the ii|i|ier), that is below. [It is curious that in Iho Australian dialect spoken by the tril)e on Hunter's Kiver, (which belongs to an entirely dillercnl class of lannua};e» from the I'lilynesian) this same particle ko is used lor precisely the same purpose, — namely, that of marking the active, or what Mr. Tlirelkeld terms the a^ent form of the noun, which i" jjenerally the uomiiin- live, thoufjh in some cases it rather answers to the ablative. The particle, however, dillcrs from that in the I'olynesian, in beinj; postlixeil to the noun. Kure is man, and koreko is the same word wlien used us the nominative to a verb, or in answer to the question " who did it ?" It thus corres|)onils precisely to ko tr tinjnlu. This tiwt is mentioned merely as an interesting eoincidence, and not as indicating any coimexion between the two languages.] i 18. The genitive is formed by the propositions a and o, both of which sii<;;ner to compreiiend, though the natives are careful to observe it, and never substitute one for the other. The proper meaning of a seems to be nf, in the sense of hlonping to, while o is more general and indelinite. The chief didiculty lies in determining what is to lie regarded as properly in the possession of a person. The Polynesians seem to consider that the child Mongs to the liilher, but not the father to the child ; that the husband and wili; are each other's property, but brothers and sisters not. A man's body or his limbs are not consi- dered as in his possession, — perhaps Ix'cause they rather form a part of him. So the house in which a man lives, and the clothing which he wear;^ are not spoken of as his pro|)erty (but rather as things which he uses), but* his food is. So a man's speech is considered as lielonging to him, but not his life. The almve distinctions pervade all the dialects, with some exceptions only in respect to words expressing relationship. In other classes of words the usage varies. The o, however, is the most common particle, .Vs the a is properly used in the sense of Monf;ing to, it can only come beliire a noun signi- fying a living being ; n is used b<'fore all other nouns ; thus, " the canoe of (or belong- ing tt)) Filunin," will bo, te vaka a Piltaga; but " the canix; of the ship," or "the ship's lioal," te vaka o le folau. \ 19. A peculiar form of the genitive is made by reversing the i % I' () I, V N K S I A N (J R A M M A R. 243 v«t;! .m iiHunl order, and placin(^ the noun in the ^unitivo lieCoro tho nomina- tive; in this case, tho o or « wliicli |)recedi'M tho gonilive coalesces with tlus article which precedes tlie nominative. Tliiis iiiHlPiiil cif /(■ /((/<• A' (//(/, till' SiimimiiH siiy /ii Ir iilii /iilr (/o lor /(• i>) ; in New Zi'iiliiliil, liir /(' kiipii II If tagiitii. 111'! H|)pt;cli of the iiiiin, wo Imvo /// tr liiijiilu kiipii / in Tnhilimi, (or te mnitiii n If itinii J''iiirisriisnr>sH of the I'linrisci'M, it is, In te vuiii I'/iiirisiu miiiliii ; in lliiwiiiiiin, te piie iiiiiii n Jiiiiriiii tiri, the iitliinils of lliiwuii lirrc, Im'coiiii'm, /m lliwiiii iiri piu- iiiiiii. In Tungiui tlii.s construction is niily fuund in tti)' |>rr ah. DtltiiiKi e le jtenijiltrtn, Sam., .spokon liy llif proplirl ; leu aki r hr tiigiiln, Tong,, ipokcn by a man ; u i Uiiniiilia in r le hiifu, N, /„ and ho wn« niocki'd by the pooplu ; r. niii/iiiiiiiiii Ill/nil e le Aliiii, Haw., we an' (in'scrvcd by (i(>d, ) 'it'). E is also tlie sii{ii of the vocative case, answering to o in English, but in more freiiuent use. K lull iilii, Sam., (1 my Inril ! /•."/>■/>'/»•, Tnng., O woman! K Iliiimona, N. Z., O Simon ! K le Dinuiiiiia, Tab., (> Lord I Tbu SaiMoan, |{aruloM){aii, and lliiwallan, siimctimc!* place Ihix parlieb' aHer Ibe noun, lu/ui/eaii e! O master ! — and sometime.s \»i[\\ U'l'on' and allrr, a* f Id miitim nlii e! O our Lord ! K le ulii e! liar., C) Lord ! F, le ntiia e! Ilaw., (> UihI ! Many, il' nut all, of ibe lanniiaj,'c\s, bave words wliirh an> used only in Ihc vocative, like the iMijilisb sir; u», mJe, Sam., sir! I'liiiu, Sam., woman ; ida, 'Von^., vi general word to call attention ; mum, .\. '/.., sir ; i>ii, N. '/.., lather. i T II E A I) J K I' r I V K. i 86. The adjective follows the noun which it iiualifies. bhle tele, Sam., leore rulii, .\. X., Iiule niii, Haw., larj^e bouse. In Ton^'an only, a lew i'\i eptions are (.(iven, wbicb anr probably rather apparent than real ; Ibey are ///, great, fiinmii, cbier, or most excellent, and /mi at fur, single; — -Ju ukaii, a large tree |or, as we miglit say, " a lump ol'a tree"). I'lnjuiii is probably I'rom /«(;«, meaning lnj>, wilb the V'ilian pri|K)siii(in tii afTi.xed ; _/« may \k from the Vilian t'«, a trunk, stock, foundation ; Jiir is, properly, a round ma.ss or ball. I) 27. In most of the dialects the adjective is frequently made plural by the reduplication of one of its syllables, and sometimes of the whole word. Sam. luau tele, large tree ; pi. Inau telele, large trees. Sam. miiiiijii maiiiUinju, high mountain ; pi. maiij/a muiiliiliiffa. Tong. tiiluii lulii, great whale ; |)l. tiifuA luluhi. Tong. muliuki, sick ; pi. muhumuhiiki, sick (|)ersons). N. Z. ikii /fii, good fish ; pi. iku jiu/x'i. Rar. ikti nieiluki, giKid lisli ; pi. iku memeituki. Rar. nuiki, sick ; pi. mukniitiki, sick (|xTsy II Niii){iiliir cxci'iilluii, ih/i, nihuII, lins I'nr itn pliirni, ili. I) QS. Tlio coinpariMori of adjtsctivcH is ottiictcd by various circum- locution.s; for, "lliis is creator tlum that," they say, "this is great ahovo tliat," or " hcvoiul tliat," or "this exceeds that in greatness," or simply, "tiiis is <,'ri'!it to that." Mom. (' ti/n tiiici I Ivlii, lliis ii jjrpiil to lliiit. Hnm. e si/i Imtn leki i Ion, IiIh ({(Kidnrsii excrpdji mine. Snm. n'aii ilili, iii lilr in, I iiiii siiiiill, liul lie is urciit. Sum. tdildi iinr, nimiii Ix'yiiiid, fiir nimhiit, iiiiirc rnidily, Tong, Kill) liiri lithi III' /nun/" la lie si/ii, n niiiii is grenlly good to a sheep, — i. e. s liinii is miH'li Inllrr tliaii a slin'|i. Tong. /((//( ill Silomiiiic, ^rral ti> .'"iiilimmii. Tong. Iiilii Itnke i — , grrat al*)vc ; Inlii inje hi — , grrnt Ix'yond. N. Z. hr liinnlti riihi iike in Ifotini, a ninn great above John. N. Z. knlin n/ii in in, strong beyond him, N, Z. /cm n/ii, iiiiirc, — i. r. Iliat iK^ymid ; rriiiin n/ii, five more. Rar. r miiiiln nin i /c iiro, b(> is great to (greater than) the temple. liar, kino iiinii/n iin n/ii /r ii/x-iin n /nun Inijn/n in, i /li miin/injnna, bad, great, lieyond (much worse) (is) the end of that man to the beginning, Toh. (' mid Tnlii/i i Mumrn, Tahiti is great to .MiK)rea. Tah, r nilii n/ii lierrtmir, Uritain is great Ix'yond (still greater), Tuh. f rnlii mil 'lit Aiiiiricn, America is very gri'at beyond (much larger). Tah. e men mniliii nr, a thing good alnivi' (or belter, but in u small dcgiec). Tall, nil linn /rir i Ir mnnin, this exceeds in length. [These examples are taken Irom llic Tahilian Grammar.] Haw. polo at, short aliove (lor shorter). Haw. e oi ntii to nit/oii nini/ni i lo Inloii, your goodness exceeds theirs. Nuk. mcitiii, good ; iiiei/ni n/ii, lieller. Nuk. {' ittit, inland ; t iiln ntn, farther inland. Nuk. o te ointiii mm nko i If litina ke n te Etua (G.), man [is] greater than (very great to) the other works of God, ) 29. The superlative is formed by means of adverbs which have the sense of very, exceedingly, or by a repetition of the adjective, as in Italian. It is unnecessary to give examples. NUlUERALa i 30. The following are the numerals in the Polynesian dialects : it will be seen that a great similarity pervades them all, with tiie ex- 02 •"ffm.^ 346 I' II I I, O I, O (i v. ception of the Paumotuan, wliicli differs in this respect, as in much of its vocabulary, from the rest. A few of llic Tahitiaii numerals nro also pwiiliar ; these have lx!cii sulistitiiteil for the conimoii words (wliich ore not altogether obsolete) by a custom termed te jii, for which see § 81. ONE. TWO. THREE. KOUR. FIVE, Fuk. tusi liin, lia tola /"■ lima Sam. tiisi Ilia to/ii fa liiiia Tong. tului na tolu /« nimii N. Z. tilhi ma torn wa riiiia Rar. Uii rua torn, a rima Mang tai rua torn a riiiia Pau. niri ite yrti ojyc ycka Tah. tii/ii run, pUi torn ha, maha rima,pac Haw. UM Ilia tola ha, taiina lima Nuk. tahi na tou ha otfii ima SIX, SEVEN. EKiMT. NINE. TEN. Fak. ono Jit 11 vain iva filn, yofiilu Sam. OHO JUu valu iva sefnln, ijafnln Tong. otto pu vain hiva hoijnfulu N. Z. ono wilit worn itva yiihnrn Rar. ono itu varii iva yiiiirii Mang. ono itu varn iva yaurii Pau. hcnc hi to hiuin nipa horihnri Tah. ono, fine hitii varn, van iva ahuru Haw. ono hitii vain iu'ii himi Nuk. ono hilii,filu I'll It iva onohiiii TEN I'AIR. TWENTV. THIRTY. rORTT. rirrv. Fak. Ilia Ijllf'ulll talii luifiiln Ja ynfiilu lima ijafnlii Sam. lllll fiilu tolu nnfiitu. fa ijiifit/u lima i/iifnln Tong. ickati uofiilit tolu ii'i/iuu fa yifiilu 71 ima ijiifiilu N. Z. tektiii rua ijuhuru torn ijahuru wa ijahuru rima iiahurii Rar. Mung. takiiii liikdu ma ijauru rua tiikau rua tiikau ma fiaurit Puu. tti'MH (?) Tah. ta'iiH la'an ma nh.irii rua la\iu run ta'aii ma iihiirii Haw. iuiUiiJiio tiiiiatolu tanitlii'i, ta'aii Uniiiha mc ta mm. Nu?i. lektiii tikiiu ma OHo/lUU tuhd, taiijd tolia >na imohuii 'f,K 'fi POLYNESIAN (i R A M .\I A l(. 247 ch the licli I'ltlii (III (hi 'hlu lint mc Ui ONK IIUNUKKU. TWO IIUNUIIKI). FOL'K lir.M) Fnk. lull Sain. lull, seliiu lull lull fii ijidaii Tong. an, ttnu ua ijiuii fa tjeaii N. Z. ran ruti nut wa rail Rar. rail Mang, rima takcnt run run rail Pau. IKtIll Tah. rima ta'itu ran run rail Haw. liiiUanahd me limn taiuilia Ian ta iiva/alna Nuk. ua tolia ma ima tohd an tckau ONK rilfll'SAM) AMJ urWAIlO.^. /.///, a lari!C iiu.;:'uT, illdi'lillilo «/(•, 1000 j luiiiio, lO.OC'l: ilu, 100,000 iiji; 1000; mniin, 10,000; kilu, 100,000 maiii), 1000; liiii, 10,000 maiio, -Zmu ; tini, •,'0,000 7iiam>, -JOOO ; Kin, 20,000 ; tini, a gi'ciit iiimiiIht mil no, 1000 (.') minio, -JOOO ; mamj/ini, •J0,000 ; rrhn, '-'OO.OOO ; in, ;i,000,000 nia/iij, 4000 j lini. 40,000 ; Ichii., 40(t,000 minio, 4000 ; lini, 40,000 ; t.u/d, 400,000 ; jio/ii, 4,000,000 Tho word aft; which in Snninan and Tungiin signilius a llunisand, is wanting in thf other dialects ; they have adapted, instead of it, iiiani), wliich, in lli<' Iwd (iirnier, signifies ten thousand. Kiln, Tong., U/n, Sam., a liundred thousand, is probably the same word with ill in Taliilian, which signifies a million, and kin, which, in Maugarevan, stands for twenty thousand, and wliid and two thousand ; while in Hawaiian and \ukuhivan they arc tpiadruplcd, and stand for four hundred and four thousand. Tiie missionaries, in order to induce the natives to return to the more convenient decimal enume- ration, have been obliefed to introduce into these dialects the English words hundred and thousand {/iiincri and tauscnii). The origin of these singular variations is probably To be fi)und in the fact I lat most of the objects which the natives h ve occasion to eiuuMcrale, being articles of f lod, and of small size (such as yams, cocoa-nuts, fish, and the like), can be most conve.iiently and expeditiously counted in pairs. Tliis mode is therefore universally adopted. 'I'aking one in each hand, the native, as he throws them into tlie storeliouse, or on to the heap, counts one; for two pairs, ho says lico; lor ten pairs simply Irn, and so on. Uence each iuiml)er has a twofold value, one lor objects counleil singly, and one (or those reckoned in pairs. Tlio first emigrants lo Tahiti hud naturally but little occasion lo employ the r EC sasrakc^r;;. 248 I' II I !,(> I, OU Y. p.i former or orii;inal viiliio, liavin^, of course, tew mcn.ciinoes, or other liirj;c olyects wliieli rctinired lo Im- cipinteil. We enii easily perceive, Iherelbre, liow, in process of time, the primary nieaiiini; ol' the words miylit 1h^ wholly forgotten, and the secondary bi^ used in coimliiij,' units as well as pairs. And if, aCti-r this nsaj.;e had Ix'icime fixed, a second emigration took place I'rom Taliili to Nid O I- Y N E S I A N OR A M M A H. 249 In tlic Tnliilinn and llnniton^nn thcv discniil llic tii'im iiiid tiiUnu iilt()f,'clli('r, usinjr only nliiirii or iidiirn for Ion, (iiid Ibrniin^ the lii^licr niiiiil)('rs rcj;uliirly (riia iiliiini, titrii nliiini, iVc.) lip hi Iiiiiirri, Innidrcd. In HaMaiiiin, they [irciccrd iVom /iinn/id, (iirty, to hniiiliiiiii, lilty, liiHit'ini), sixty, nnd so on to the sanir word liiiiirri. In llio Nuw Zealand Lirammar of I'rolbssor Lcc, and in the missionary Irnnslntions into that dialect, tekau is used for ten in nil the nutnhers nhovc nineteen ; for Iwcntj', they 1,'ive run tcknu^ — liir thirty, tnni tckn)i, \-c. Yet it is certain that these terms mean rcs|)ectivrly twenty pairs, thirty pairs, and so on; or, at least, this is llii'ir proper and original signiliealion, although some of the natives, under the instruction of the mission- aries, niay now nave adopted tlieir mode of computation. 'I'lie origin of tlie inistako pro- bably was the fact that the natives rnr ly have occasion to use the higher muiihers, except in counting fish and potatoes, — nnd ihesc are always counted in pairs, A person hearing a native sny for one pair, tiihi, mei ning simply one, — for two pairs, rim, meaning two, and so on, would naturally supposi that trknii, used for ten [inirs, meant simply ten. In the I'aumotuan we can ohser.e the process !)y which th(^ reduplication of the Tahi- tian and Unrotongan was probahl/ etlcclcd. In this language there is a double set of numerals, one for counting single objects, and the other for pairs. They are respectively as follows : ran, one itc, two tjiii, three 0}h; ((.ur )ienc, five yckii si.\ liilo, seven linn «, eight nij) I, nine lior.lwri, ten tikni/r, one pair tcriiCiijK, two pairs minliinr, three pairs tiiipikii, four pairs hnriliori, live pairs system. For twenty the term g'veii (as we inidiTstoixl it) was ilr Inkan. W'o supposed then that these natives followed he same mode of coiiipiitation as that given in thi" Xew Zealand grannnar, of the incrrcctncss of which \\v were not then awure. It seems likely that we made here precisely the same mistake as the compiler of that grammar, 'ind that Inknii does in lact IM-Iong to the second, or duplicate set of numerals, and means therefore ten pairs. It would then be just the double oi'/iorihori. when the latter is used for live pairs. It is easy to seo how Inkiui might, by a careless usage, be transferred hy the natives lo the hrst set of numerals, and Ik' taken for tin' double of horiliori when the lai;"r is I'sed for ten : in which case tnknii would mean simply twenty. The '',.ciii..;:ian word for huiulred, ix')iii,mcn\\s also the head: we are reminded of the Samoaii /»A^ ten, wnu \' me!>!is likewise hair, — nnd hnin, which signifies both live and baud. The notion of connecting the names of numl)ers with parts of the body would naturally arise from the habit of counting on the lingers. It should tx' observed that the natives, in most of the groujis, commonly pn^lix to the numi'rals the particles kn or n, and c, which are probably the verbal particles of allinna- tion and present time (viili' ^^ .")() and '^'i). The first (kn or a) is commonly used when the numeral precedes the noun, as kn lorn tja irnkn, N. 'A., there are three cnnoi's ; a 63 250 I'll I r,o I, or, Y. h If ' ' tahi raai', Tall., one tree ; the second both l)ct(iri' nnd a(ier, tvdkii Honi, \hTCc canoes ; niia ihi, Nuk., two clicslnuts. In llnwiiiian lim is mmnionly nsed in the pliicc of these particles belbro tahi. In repenting the nunies ol" tlie lirst nine numerals, ka or u is nsnnlly onMixcil to the first, and e to the others, iis kaldlii or nlahi, eliiu, vtolii, &c. \ 32. Somo of tlio terms for the higher numbers are only used in counting particular articles. For four, the llnwaiinns hiive two terms, lia and hr.uia; for forty, they have laiiiihd, itUo, nnd Ui'aii. The first of these (laiiulia) is the i;eiieral term ; into is used in counting pieces lA' Idjxi* (native cloth), and la'tiii in counting fish. It has been before observed [§ 14) that kim. the root of the Tongnn lekait, probably signified originally a parcel r)r bunch. 'Man would mean, llierefore, one parcel, which they consider to be twenty, though this is evidently an arbitrary application, — precisely as with the English scon; which means proiHjrly nny numlxT scored down. The natives of Tonga employ it only in counting yams and fish. They have also a similar collec- tive term, le/iihi, for hundred (though Mariner does not state its exact application) ; it is prolmbly the word /;///(, a sheaf, or bundle, (from the tinmoan /«ii, to bind,) with the article tc prefixed. The word tckiniii, pi. ijnknmi, is used in Tongan for ten, in counting qfa, or fathoms, — the common measun' of lenglh. In New Zealand kiiiiii signifies simply ten fathoms, as does iiini in Tahitian. In Hawaiian i/nii is the usual word for ten, nnd (iiinkiilu (from yafiilu) signifies n period of ten days. In tlie Mnngarevun vocabulary kioni is given as a word for ten, but with no explanation of its use. In .Nukuhivan, jxmd, fi)ur, and tdiidii, four hundred, arc used only in counting bread- fruit. V 33. The lower numbers are connected with the higher by the conjunction ma, meaning and. In Samonn, srfiilu ma tasi, eleven ; Idn ijdfiili/ ma tdsi, twenty-one ; in Tongan, Iwyqfiilii ma iia, twelve ; in New Zealand, ijahiint ma tdrn, thirteen ; in Rarotongan, paiiru ma a, fourteen ; in Nukuhivan, onokiiii ma ima, fiflecn, &c. In Tongan, ma before dfe becomes mo, as mano mo ufe, eleven thousand. In llnwuiinn, the word titma, which is rendered in the vocabulary "a number, com- pany, flock," is introduced l>efbre the conjunction, as itmi tiima-ma-talii, eleven; tanahd Inma-md-liia, Ibrty-two. It is only used, however, in connecting units with tens ; for larger numters, mc, the usual term for witli in that dialect, is emiiloyed, followed by the singular article (tc or id), or the plural sign (na)\ thus, fitly is tanahd me ta iimi, (forty with the tea) ; sixty is Uinahd mc ta iwdtaliia ; seventy is tanahd me te tanatola (forty with the thirty) — or, sometimes, tatinhd mc tia ami ctoln, forty with three tens. In the .Mnngarevan vocabulary, the word tiima is given with the signification of unity alter ten (aniti ajtris la dizaine), but there is no example to show its use. \ 34. The ordinal numbers are formed by prefixing the article to the cardinal, — and if the word be iti the nominative, or independent of other words, the particle hi also. • In Nukuhivan, hiatv \a liic iianu' oftiie ]ia|)tT-MlullHTry trcf, nt' wfiit-li tin- /rt;w is maiif-'. POLYNESIAN ti It A M M A R. 251 m. 'O /e liKi, Sum., the second ; hr torn or kae tarn, Toiig., tlio third ; ko Ic va, N. Z., tlio fourth i n tc rima, Tnh., the tillh, &c. i 35. The first time, the second time, &c., are expressed in most of the dialect.s by tu, or some similar prefi.\. In Samoan, atu lita, the second time ; ii/u lo/ii, llic third time ; in Tongnn, (no )ta, tlio tolii ; in Now Zenlnnd, liiuriia, tiiutoni ; in Rarotongan, tit-nui, tii-torii ; in Ha- waiian, tiia-hid, tna-tohi. In the latter dialect this form is olso used in counting generations: tnpiuia is ancestor; tupioKi tiKi/ii/i, grandfather; tii]>iniii limtiilii, great grandfather, &c. In the New Zealand diaii'ct the prefix Inn serves likewise to express the partitives, — as, tuuliitiy third part ; tiui-ijii/iUrn, tenth part or lithe. In Hawaiian, hajxi is used for this purpose, as, hapahta, half; ItiijmiCdhi, an eighth. ) 36. The particle tah, or ta'i, is used in many of the dialects to express a meaning similar to the English hij twos, by threes, &c. ; it is also employed in the sense of twofold, threefold. In Samoan, l(Ciliiiia, ani\ in \\ayia\\an,]ntliiii, 2Mtolti, puhd, cxyiieas double, treble, fourfold. In Hawaiian, these words also mean by twos, by threes, &c. i 37. In numbering persons, toka or toko (to'a or to'o) is prefixed to the numerals, and also to adjectives expressing number. In Samoan, ii/iidtdj>o, two blind men. In Rarotongan, tokonta ptikv taijald mdinpo, two blind men ; tokoia, how many? In Tahitian, im iir tunpili <■ tooloni, two or three witnesses. In Hawaiian, it becomes by reduplication tnto'Oyafi to/oWiW*;, five (persons) ; toto'olua, how many ? In Nukuhivan, tnkotahi (or more commonly tootdhi), tokoiia, Inkotmi, tokohid. In the Samoan and Tongan this particle is used more frcfiucntly than in the other dialects ; in these last i! is rather eni])loyed to express the number of |x?rsons in a com- pany, than for general enumeration. V 38. In Samoan, in numbering certain objects, they make use of words analogous to the English term head, in the phrase, "five head of cattle." P ■r^ 358 V II I I, () LO(i Y. ; f Tlio wcirils whicli Mr. Honlli jjivos ns exnniplos nre /m/, ijitoii, nuita, and fun. Imu (one moniiiiii; (iCwliicli is /cdl) U used in oomilin^ lisli, us /tin iiifiif'ii/ii o in, ton lislios ; /nil /nil ijiifii/ii, twenty. IIiiiki (pcrhnps stuno, ns yiiod means stony) is usod for cocoa- ntits and yams, ns iin /iiiin ijiioit iiiii, tlicro nro fivo cocoa-nuts. Miiln (cycj is for tido yoriim escii/ciiliim), — ns niiilit-iin/ii/ii n tii/n, ton turo-roots. Pun (frnit) is for bread- fruit, n* Jiin-iinfii/ii n %i/ii, ten lircid-fruils. \V(> jvnow (>rii(illiinj; siinilnr in tho ollior dialects, except tlint tiiin, body, is sometimes used in Tnhitian niid Uamloiignii in cniinieratiiig persons, ns tnnla linn n/uirii, ten men. In Uarotnngnn, also, ;vi«, and in Tnbiliiin nii^ are used liefore the word for ten in general enumeration, as mii-iiniini in idi, Knr., and nii-nliiirii in iii, Tab., ten [arc] those gencniiions. This niii may be a corruption of the Samian /nii, ns thi- counting of fish is by far the most common occnsion I'or numbering among these islanders, and the prefi.x which was at first appropriated to this might, in time, come to have a general application. In Nuliuliivan, ]>ii is used in counting esculent roots, as afn/ii jm ti, eiin jio ti, one root ofli, two roots of//,- po vn/iic signifies a billet of wood for fuel. P R O X () r N s. J 39. The pronouns of all the dialects, with the exception of the Tongan, are nearly identical. All have three numbers, singular, dual, and plural. The first person of both the dual and the plural has two forms, to which the terms exclusive and inclusive have been applied. The first excludes the person addressed, — or, should the conversation be of two parties or companies of persons, this pronoun applies only to that to which the speaker belongs, and excludes the other; as "we here are good," meaning that you who are spoken to are not; or, "we [Samoans] are honest," meaning that the people of Feejec, concerning whom the conversation has been, are not. The other, or inclusive form, comprehends both parties. Most of the Samoan pronouns have abbreviated Ibrms, which arc used only in the nominative, preceding the verb. These are given in the following list immediately after the full Ibrms : — HINOtlLAR. nil, o'li, '«, I 'oe, V, thou ui, he iiiniin, mil, me (e.vc.) >iiiiii, ta, we (inc.) 'u/iui, /itii, ye /tiua, /utou, toil, ye tntoti, they Oit, I, is generally followed by Ir, in the pn'seiit tense, as on le siivali, or au savali, I walk, 'f/is only used with the preterite particle nil, as iiiCii fiti, I said. All these pronouns, when in the nominative liefore a v<'rb, or used in answer to the question — who is it? — arc preceded by the particle of agency '«. Ja frequently has this particle, also, when following the verb. 1' (1 I, Y N K H I A N (i R A M .M A R. 363 The pronouns in tlio dtml iind plurnl, witli tli(^ exception iiColiKi nnd ''niiloii, take an 'i bclbro llieni whenever tliey are iiseil us noiniiintives nfler the verb, or when preceded hy the prepositions in, icic, <; am\ by the adverb jxi-ii, like; a.s »o o iiKii V /(ilou, tliey camo ; n/ii iatc '/ Intnii, fjo to lliem ; jiri-n i maun, hke ns two. Wometiincs this 'i is retained alter the nominative particle «, as o '* laloii, they. The pronouns lieard at Fakaalb were the same as in tlio Samoan, except that in the second person they usually snid ki)C, koliin, and koiiloii ; but tlio k was sometimes dropped. Ki iikiIoii was heard in the nominative, — e ltd ki malim iloa, we do not know. In Ton^an the pronouns ilillcr considerably from those of the other dialects. Like tlie Samoan, lliey liave a lull and an abbreviated htm, — or, to speak more correctly, as respects the dual and plural, a simple nnd a eonipound form. The simple or brief pro- nouns are only used in tlic nominative, before the verb. SI.Nfit'I.An. ail, 71, kii, 1. knc, ke, thou iti, lie, lie DUAL. mtiiKi, via, we, (exc.) ttiiiii, III, we, (inc.) iiioiKi, iiio, ye vuiia, nil, they ri.UHAU maiitolii, mail, we, (exc.) luiiliJii, tun, we, (inc.) moiilolii, moil, ye hiiiiIdIii, iiiiii, they U is always joined to the sign of the tense which precedes, as, }ici/ alii, I went ; ten alii, I will go ; kiiiiu tiikii, I delivered. In the present tense it is usually followed by tc, as, kiioii Iv ojii, I love. Kii is used only aller the preterite sign iiA, as iiaku viaiiavuhe, I feared. The compound dual and plural forms [iiiiinii, miiiilo/n, iVc.) have the particle ki before them in all eases except when used as possessive pronouns. Their complete forms ns personal pronouns are, therefore, kiiiniiiii, kimniitiilii, in'. All the pronouns of the full forms, when used as nominatives l)efore the verb, take the prefix ko, — as ko an, ko koe, kn ill, ko kimii''i, ko kiliwn, &;e. AH except <((/, when used as nominatives after the verb, or as aceuf"!!' I's without n preposition iH'fore them, take the prolix a, — as akoe, aiii, akimiiiia L v . ''^ 11], An may have, in reality, the same prefix, but if so it coalesces with the initial vowel. Kiln (according to .Mariner) is a pronoun of the first |wrson, used only in familiar c>/nversation, and rather a vulgarism. [The iia and tdii which are affixed to the dual nnd plural are properly the numerals two and three. It is probable that in the other dialects these same numerals are found in a contracted form.] The pronouns in the New Zealand dialect arc — SINGULAR. hiiu koe DUAL. maiia tuna korna rami PI.l'RAI.. viatmi tatoii koiitoii raloit All the pronouns, when in the nominative Ix'fort^ the verb, take the prefixed particle ko ; when ill the noiiiinalive after the verb the singular pronouns luiii, koe, and in, take the particle a ; the rest have no prefix. (it 254 PH I I, O I, Y. Ill Knroloni;iiii unci Mnngurovoii, tlio pronouns nrc Ihr same as in New /onland, willi the t'Xci'|(ti(in of the lirsl, wliicli is dii. Ttm missintmrics iilso write kiiloii, in ItnroUm^nn, instead dI' koiilnii. la in the nominative iilk'r ii mtI) becomes iiia ; the rest n'mnin unchanged. Kii is iist-d in the neeiisative oC the first |X!rsun singular, aller the preposi- tions kill and (>/, as kiakii, to me ; iiikii, mo. The I'ninnotimn varies considerably from the n'st, some of the words having a |)ecu- iiar form, us — 8INUl'I.AR. au koe DUAU ri.t'RAL. maiinn or maiia milieu tttuija or tuiM Illicit korua kulllOH riiiia lUtCIl The Tahitian pronouns are — ■oc 'oia mui.u, taiKt 'orua raua matou titloii 'outoii riiloii Vail hos in the dative '(«'(/, in the accusative iiCii ; 'oiii is used in the nominative both before and aller thv. verb ; wherson singular. I 1> () .s .s E IS s I \ F. 1' K o N o i; N s. ^ 40. The origifial form of the possessive pronouns seems to have been the personal, with the prepositions o and a prefi.\e(J. We may f , !• O L Y N K H I A N (J R A M M A R. 255 coiijccturo tliat there was once a personal pronoun na, of the first person,— as we find iie still existing in the Tongan ; and perhaps a pronoun ku of the first person. The Samonn pronnuns of the first nnd second persons singular and thi: second plural have two I'nrnis, ii full and a contracted. The pronouns which are joined witli singular nouns dillbr lioni ihoso which are joined with plurals in havin(r the I, of the article le, prefixed to them, ns :— KINCiiri.AR. Full roriii. Conlrictcd. laa^i, ImCu UCii, lii'ii lii'iie, Mtx: li'iii. Ion ham, lima la Million, In ^oiitoa Idiitoii, /diitnii. Pl.l'RAL. Full form. Contracted. tia'ii, nCu (Cii, o'li, my «'«', o\ie all, Oil, tliy iinii, ijHii, his a 'oiilDii, 'uiitciit diitoii, Oiitoii, your The remaining forms of the dual and plural are simply the personal pronouns with the particles /ii. In, it, o, prefixed, — as In maim, la maim, a maim, o maim, &c. The indefinite article sc, when it comes l)eforc these pronouns, coalesces with them, taking the place of the /; as c le ui somifalc, he has no house (for >■ h ai sc falc u ia, there is not a house k'longing to hirn) ; c le ai sa matuu mra c ai, we tiave nothing to eat. _ It will be -jbservcd that the |)ronouns beginning with / are an example of the pecu- liarity pointed nut in § 17 ; lini'ii tdiiia, my son, is for Ic lama a an; h matim faiiim, our country, is instead of Ir faiiua o malou. This formation is common to all the dialects. The diflercnct' between latCu and ImCii, hum and loiia, &c., is the same as ;hat be- tween (/ iumI I). [^. § 18.] Mil, nspMDng with or for, is also compounded with the possessive pronouns, as iiioii uau, with ihv brothers; iiiona Inn/a, for its evil. At Fakasilii, the following possessive pronouns were heard, — lal^ii, lukr (sing.), iiiai (pi.), my ; mukii, for me ; ton (sing.), on (pi.), thy ; /o nmtoii, our ; to outon, o outoii, your. The Tongan makes no distinction lictwccn pronoiuis joined with singular nouns, and those joined with plurals. It has, however, several classes of pronouns. Those which precede the noun are as follows : — BlNUL'tAR. eki(, hoku hoo, ho enc, hono DUAL. cma, homa eta, hota hoo mo, homo Ilia, hoiia PLURAL. email, human, etau, hotait lull) moil, homoii eilaii, hoiiau The.se foriris diller like those in a and o of the Samoan. The pronouns whif h li)llow the noun are a akii, o akii, mine or of me ; a an, o on, thine; a ia, o in, — a •ma, o oii'i, his; a mana, o mana; a mantoln, o maiiloln, &c. These are also used when preceded by the indefinite article Im, and the preposition ma 9M l>lt I I, OI,(M? V. or iiiii; ns //'/ mtiiii kiti, soitin oCtlicir CcmmI (or some food ofllicirs); ha (imnii liJo, Home of your oil ; ma nkii, for tiie ; ma iiiiiiiiitiilu, for yonrsolvi'S, or for your own ; mo onaii- tiilii, for llioir own. Tin- /( in //"/■//, //'I, iVc, is prolinhly from the nrtiolf //r ,• this nrliclr nlso frr(|iiontly prtvi'ilcs tlir> oilirr cliiMs, as liv ciir Jiir, his inolliur ; /«■ t/iiin liiiii, tliiir coming, (li>r lie hull II mill, llio coiiiinf; of llirm.) In the ilii\l«'cl of New Zciiliind tin- |)os9C8;ui maiia, no maun, &c., ore nlso used to signify for, of, or hy me, thco, &c. It should l)e observed thnt the si-eond (or plurni) cinss of pronouns is used nfter the nejjntive Innr, w lielher the noun be in Ihe singular or not ; — as, ka lioic una liiahia, it wns not his wish, or, he had no desire. In some cnses, moreover, this class is used for the ordinary giMiitive of the personal pronoun uOer a noun, singidnr as well as plural, as. If, alma nna c ::nho ana, Ihe appearaiiee of him who sut, >Vc. The Knrotongan has two classes of pronouns, resembling those of the New Zealand in soutui, but dilfering somewliKt in use ; they ar I 1 IsT ei.ASR. tiikii, Inkil' tniin, loan tana. Ion a la mana, lo maiia, &c. 3l> CI.ASfl. iikii, iikii aa.ii, ixM ana, ona a mana, o maun, &e. The first class, unlike the New Zealand, nre used with both singular and plural noims. The second cliissjire used priiioipally in the two liillowing cases: — (1) with numerals, as riinni aan nrr, five arc tliy houses ; (U) after the negative karc, os, karc ona are, he has no house or housjs. They weix", no doubt, originally plural forms. There is a class of obbrevioled pronouns, in the singidar, which ditTer from the pre- ceding in not regarding the dillerencc of a and o; they arc lAkii, my (pronounced short); to, thy, nnd tana, his. They seem to Ix' used liir the purpose of discriminating between ditli'rent meanings of a word ; loku racriia is, my soul ; tikii Vaeriia (said by the Supremo RiMiig), my Spirit. Nakii, tiokn, — mum, noon, — iiana, nona, — na mana, 910 mana, &c., mean of, for or by me, thee, him, us two, — and, also, simply mine, thine, &ic. In Mangarevan, the possessive pronouns, as given in the vocabulary, are, takn, toku, my ; Pol, V N r, SI A N (IRA M MA U. ','57 liiknr, lohiir, lliy j liiiid, lotui, hiii ; In Maim, to maiiti, our, iVe. Also, iinhn, iiiikii, — mikiH', iiiikin', — nana, iiiiiin, tiC, with tho miiiho niPniiiiiK!i. [tcHiilrs iIicmc, tini/oi i" Hivoii lis iiii|ilyiiif,' IkiiIi /(«• ;/»■, (lis iiiitkii Irtiii iiini , >um\v\\\m^ Wtt iwo,) nnt\ J fiim iiir (lie iiKiii /iiiii). Mil is iiImi II iiiiirl< of tlic gniiitivc, anil exprt'sscN iiiorr |iiir(iiMiiMrly iios.srHsioil. Ill I'niimotii, we liriiril lor nil/, liikii niid "/•(/, — liir lli>i, lukm', iiiikin-, — Inn iiiid Ion, — nil iind nil ; — niiil for his, Iniin. It scciiicil timl nn iiiiil nil wcro iHcd us in N'l'W /onlniui, — Inn iiiiikiii WHS your (iitlicr ; "" ninkni, your piirriils, l'iitlnr and niotlifr. The Tahiliiin has ihri'o clnsw^s, siiiiiliir to those of tho Itarotoniran ; — /(/ //, Inn llt^nf, Inoc liiiin, Iniiii Id iiiiiini. In miiiin, lirc. nn II, lion inline, nn'nf nniin, nnnn (I n, n II, my a'lK, n'nr, thy nitn, nun, his It has also the abhrcviated forms lii'ii, my, — In, thy, — and tiUiii, his, — called by the missinimries neutnil, as they apply to all nouns iii»ws.sivi' |iri>ni>iiiis aro liirnicil liy |ir<'li\iii;; In, In, /in, iin. In llio |)or- soiial, as III ml. III nil, ml im, ii'i im, lil *<»' "r III kin\ lil in. In tit, lit nttlliil, iVc, Tlu' soODiul [KTSuii lias likrw isi' the loniis Innn, Imiii, iiiinii, itittii. 'I'lli.'ro an: also two pro- nouns, til (or |K.'rlia|is //''"), my, and In, thy, which aru prulNilily neutral forms, 111. M O.N ST II ATI \ i;s Ml- Tilt' ticmoiistrative proiuuins arc formed, for the most part, by prefixiiifT the article to ndverbs of pltice. In faiiinaii — leiiii, this ; li nil, Mial : Iria and leu, thai ; |ll. /"'/, these |>l. /'", lllosu pi. Ill and la r, thosn As liiiri liinnlii, this man ; mi untn lininlii, all llirso men, iVc. IjIh sroms In dcslgnnlf a greater disianci' than /nui.na « /ma In i/nln, tUut man then- : 'J li/it nni, lo yonder village. /(/, llioiigli haviiiu the lorm ol" the |iri)iiouii hi; is used in llii! plural, as in iiri ii/m, these words ; in iiitn, those things. I have met with no example of In i; which is given liy Mr. llcalh. In l''akaali>, liii'i nw\ linn weif iisi'd llir this and Ihnt, In Toiigaii, the deiiionstratives are heiii, this or these, and hiitn, that or those. Tlioy lake llie particles /■« and '/ U-I'oru iheui, according lo their place in the sentence, — in which case llii'y dro|p the //, and bi'coine Icm iin iid m iin. They are Irecjuenlly divided, the article he pn-oediiig the noun, and the particle iii and na following it ; os, he hnlii ni, this place (the place her<') ; he lamtn nii, that man (the man there). The \ew /Zealand dcmouslralives arc — Ifnei, this ; li ml, that ; tern, that ; pi. rtiei, these pi. emi, thase pi, (/•'/, those Titiii and /'•/•'/ diller, in that the (iirmr'r is us<.d in 8|»'akiiig of things in sight, or to which the attenlion of the parlies is directed, and tern of things at a distance. 'IV/ici is I'mtiuintly divided, as te iwi nci, this |X'ople. I'niiii, that, pi. nun, those, — arc used not in jiointiiig out ohjects, Init in r<;ferring tir iheni ; as n i niiiri ihn i nun rn, an* of |Mwsc.ssiv(; proiioims Ih> fsiniiiii); wjlli (' mill » ilillir I'l'inn llii' nllii'is ; iluit In, tin y iirr iisi'd uilli iiiiiiirrnls, nr with IIki |iliiriil |iailirlr.s /<»/,( anil «", anil allcr ihi' nrjialivi' /,((/<,• as ^^'/ cc" y'/.r tniinlii III, niK' of lliDsi' (wo iiirli. ii /■('<; lii'iii i piiLr /,ii/,i , \vf air Iwu swiirils (or two urv Ihcw^ sworiU). Ill Miiiignrcvnn, « — »i'i, iIiIh, niiil c — /ir. 7i (t, acrordiiifs to llir missinnary i^ramiiiar, " si-nns to niiswiT rxarlly to thi' l'"rciicli ixci, this, mid liiiini to cvlni-ii, iilli-ii, this lure, closu at hand." Tnnn rii nnd iinara,\\mX or those; the diUbrciice hctwetii iIh'si' two, uiul Ijotwii'ii trie mill lir is tlie same as in IJai'iitoiigan. 'Dim and tern Utxh iniiin lliai, as in N'rw Zialaiid ; Inin means " that tiling mar yon," or near Iho [htsom addrcssid, liiil at a distanri' iVoiii Ihi' s|MaUi'ri tern iiiians " that yolidrr," at a dislaiici; Ironi hotli. 7!' nirn, that llirri', is also nsid. In is ollcn used as a drinonslralivi', but «illi ralhrr an induriniti' scnso, — nin in, that is it. It is l'rei|nrnlly inlrodncid liy llii' nalivrs whiiv no similar word would Ijo nscd in Eii);lish. Ill Hawaiian tlio ilomonstralivrs am Icin or rin and ;»/",thisi /'/", /",lhnt; nn— tici, this, and "" — /", that. Tin' last two an; used in nlirring to ohji rts whirh have rornicil till! snhji'pt of coiivorsation, as /"/ /mi n'n nn Innnln In, that man (Iwloi'iMnin- tioned) has rcliirncd. Em is synonymous with ;cin, but is most coinmnnly rm|iloyiil nt the lH'j;inniiij4 ol'n sontcnro, to cxpn'ss " this is," or " thrsc arc." Till' Xukiihivan has Iriiri or liieini, this, tinn, that (nonr or by yon), and ^vi or Irm. that (yondrr or ImaoiiiI yon). The mi and nn arc ficiiurnlly posHixoil to tlio noun, ns If line iiei, this ivdaliasli ; Ir iimi ini, that i;irl ; nn nnf nn, llioso f;irls. //;/(' is used like nil in Hawaiian, ns Inia vn'ii mi, this very cmioi', linn kiiiiiiln nn, that very man. I NTKIlKOd .\TI\i:s i 42. Tlic interrogative pronouns are seen in the simplest form in the Samoan ; but tiiey arc nearly the same in all the dialects. In Fakanlii, those which were hoard wi're ni, who ! os kii ni kne, who art thou \ i ni. whom .' and o, what / whirh look the arlirli- bofoii- it, as sr rf, kn Ic rf, whnt I Pr si a. like what, or how ! Ai, who, is usiil in this, ns in all the diulei-ls, in asking the name of any [jerson or lliiiij; ; as hxii Inn innn, what is thy name f Ko ni to onion Inn nu. whnt is (the name oQ thy eoimtry '. In Saniomi, iii, who t as 'n ni, w ho '. (noiii.) ; o ni, a ni, of w l.oni .' '«( le ni, to whom ' A, what f ns c d, sc rt, '« /»• rf, ni rf, whnt 1 Ace., i sc li, i ni rf, ns c va'iivii'ai i ni rt, to see what '. Fin, which ? as '« Ir fin, which f (oC two or severnl) juifrn ? juifrn f which, tins or that ? Fin, how many ? as rjinjiili, how mniiy houses ! 'Ih'njia ni tnynln, how many arc tho men \ '2flO l> II I 1,1) I. (Hi V. 111 III Tiiii)(!iii, />"/, who ' tnki'ii iIh' |>nrtii'li-!t /" nml ", iici nnliii); In IIh |i|iiit in tin' wii. ((lice ; ff-l\., " Ion iiiiil n Imi, H Iiiim' ? //'.iliiiiil, iIh' IntiTrii^alivi' |in>iii'iiiii iin- t'"', ului, >i/ir,i, nml lini. Wni lakes till' x.iiiif |Kiriiilit mill |iri ixniiidiii iis till' ipniiHiiiii-i ;— « (/•,//, wlio? in (/'>//, wlium f null III, Intiii nr l>\ ulioiii ' Alri \vf hi in llir luiiiiiniilivi-, iiiiil li in llic uliliijiii' <'iim-!> ; n» hrnliii, wlinl ? im li tilin, liir wliiil ' / /(' iilni, wliiit (iiri'.) f Tilirn in wliirli \ kii trlirii 'I in liik'iniii, HJiirli iiI'iIm' two ? Jim in liow tiiiiny '. Il liikis III)* |in lix lokii tiir imtmiiih. Ill Knriiloii^nn, ni. wliof mi, wlinl .' '"", »liir|i I in, Imw niiiliy f Ku in, who F id III, whom ' Klin, whiil F «" '> mi, lor wiml ' /.d /<(ii i min iki tnijnhi Inkuiiiii mi, which odlii-w iwo imii ! fiik'iiii, liow iiiiiiiy |Nr*>n« f III MiinL'iinviiii, tlh- iiilirrofinlivrs iirc tin- siiiiic iim in lh<' Itiirolonifnn, rxrr|il ^xd, which ' — II lonii which wc Irivc nol limnil iii llic hitter, llmiifih it iiiiiy exist. Ill I'niimoliinn, ko irni, who F r iihii, whnt ? In 'I'uhilian, viii,ti/iii, Iriliin, anil /"". Vni hnn o viii, who? In vni, tit mi, mi riii, mi rni, iif whom ' whow F 'in mi, to whom? in viii, whom F Alui hn« r nlin, mi le nliii, I h iihn, iVr, 'lYilirn, which F an inlnii li ninilui, which i» the Im'kI 7 (literiilly, which IS th<- (JikmI ') i^ hill Inn, how ninny hoiisiM F Imiliin Innin, Imw iimiiy men F III lliiwniiiin. I'd/, nlin, hm, nml Inn. Wni liiis 'u vnt, who F n irni, n imi, ol'whom F III nni. III fill, whow F mi wni, iin iini, lor wlioiii F 'in imi, lo whom F in irai, whom F \c. Aim linn hrnkii, wimt F n It nlin, n Ir nlin, ol' whnt F mi Ir nlin, mi le nlin, lor wliiit • iVc. llin hn§ 'o Inn, which F n hm nn/ m, who F tn m. In m, mi ni, no ni, ol' of liir whom F iim III, iVoiii whom ' III III, lo wlioni F \c., nlin, whul F lilnn, which F iin Ii Inn Inn, which gourd ' Jlin, how many F I N D E K I .M T K I' II (I .V O I \ S. i 48. Mo.st (if the words wliich would fall under tliis head (answer- ing to some, other, many, and the like) have been already i^iveii, in treatini^ of the article [v. 'y 11] The followinff are a few wiiich may i)e here noticed. Snmoan. .Yijii, some; mi, other, its num., 'n mi, another or other!! : ficii., ii i»i, o i.ii, 111" another, of others, A:c. Jjc ni sr or /'• ni ni, nol any, none (iVom fi , not, in, there, mill the article), us r Ir ni se men e ni, then.> is not any thing to ent ; r Ir ni tit Inyitn, there arc no men. fma, unudtivn, nil, every (frtiin umii, done, linislieil) ; as ia mat iiiiin, all llie^' lhiii;is ; 'n Initnlii umnlnrn, nil men i 'o Imni nmnlnvn, every In-e. Sr, the articli', is used in all indi liiiite sense, which can hardly Im' nnilereil in l')nt;lish, an 'o III rn fr lihfili, \\\\i> \s Hitnw one (or, who is it| thai cIiinim's F /(Mi, as tilnsi fnsi nun ititi, niiy little thiiii; (or rather, any littli! jHirtion ofa thin^). Tungan. Mihi, some, nny, other; /»//, or ///// lie, nil (in niimlM'r), every one ; kotmi. or kotoa U, all, the whole, evirv ! '"' Iminln knlini lie, every inmi, or nil the men. I' O I, V N K S I A N C K A M M A K. 201 Nrw /I'liliinil. M'lifii, Irirahi, some; Irrii rrsons) ; Mnhi /kit, siimr, n pnrt ; ctiii-kf, ntlinrs ; nuitfiiiiiii, a grnit niuiiy, " / /'ni ijiii i lertt jci'." is given I'or " in divurs |ilnct's." KatiKt, ull, — Ir nil mm kiitmi, ull tilings. Taliitiun. lUnlii jHir, sdinc ; fiiiiii, sonM', — ns /r;«« in, some lish ; Inqfiiiiii man rim- risen, sonir of (he I'haristTs. Alixi, all ; Innn tiinii mm ntiHi, ull tlmsc things. Iluwuiiun. Wnhi, suinc; liiii, another, ustnl only afhtr u |irL'|H)siti(in, us u hni, n hat, oronothrr ; to hni. In Imi, another's j Un hai, to another, ic. A pan, or a jmn liia, all (rroni jxiii, (lone, riiiisliiil) ; ns in man mni n jnii, nil those things. In Nukuhivun, tclnln, lUilii, some, others ; InOihi ntn, inoro; iitua, all. •i , l( K I, A T I X K H. ii 44. The Polynesian dialects have, properly speaking, no relative pronouns. Their place is supplied by words Iwlonging to other parts of speech, or they are left to be understood from the con.struction of the sentence. Pnknuro. 2^ i-aku n Pilmifn, — Ir vnka nhi, the cunoi: of I'ilinjfn, the cnnoe [which is] going. Snnionn. O Ir, sing, and o r, pi., — in ohiique cnseH simply Ir and r, arc used as rela- tives, or to snpply the pln<-e oI'sik li ; ns, ir JiinJrUiin o Ir mil, hiesscd is he tlint comes, or, the oiinic-r ; Innjxm i liimujiilii n r nil- nin, ten virgins who took ; aloj'n ntii i r frtiiii mni, love them tlint eurse. Li-iia, pi. rmi, ntt- usenk ; 'o Inlnii sn mni, they who were sick. A'k, the pro|M'r sign of |viRt time, is ollen so pinced ns to indii'nte that u n'Inlive is to lie understood ; as, 'o Ingnlii nn miiliniiili mni, the ns-n who followed; Irtin na ra/"-sides these, the |N-rs used where a rt'lulive would Is- employed in Knglish. O Ir, or simply o, is used for " whosoever ;" as ') r fnnilnn nu, whuaucver shoil confi'ss inc(or it i*, perhaps, a plural,— whatever persons shall, iVc.) In Tongnn, the n-lntive is I'ilher expn-ssed hy the personal pronouns, or left to be inferri'ii ; knrni koin r Jnknhii nn, he who shall confess me ; Ir mini mini nin Ir mon Irn nki, ye shull nt-eivc- tlint which ye shnll s|K'nk ; knr fili nr nr-lnliii in, the enemy who sowed it ; nr linjnln nil nr iinolii, the ninn whom he hud iiinde. New /enlund. Kn kiir rn nn nin r linrrr mni, nrl thou he thni should come f 7) Inniiln hm mm trnlii, n iiinii who bus no plai-e (lit. not of hii i n pluce). Koin rn liiiri c korri'ilin, this is In- tliut was s|Hiken of. In Uurotongan, iri mid ko In, and in Tahitian, In and '" lei, arc used as relatives : 00 202 I' II 1 l,<) l,0(i V. itifV sorm til Ix' iiiproly llii' nrlirlo Ir Imnlhrncil l>y mipliimis, nml nnswrr thorrforp lo the ^ ,' r iid Iniin ii In hiiihiu, hlissril is lii> |iir blcswdiU'ss \n |iis| who ti'iim, \c. i tiiiii tinidlii 1,0 hi iikiitii, ii cirliiin mnil who built j le ta^Uii tri aire ini mini, llio moil wliii ■.vciil liflbn-. Ill lliiuniinn, le i§ usml in Ihc snmc mnnncr, (ih jnmiiiltii Ititoii tr >i, hli-xsml nrc they thnt iiKiiirn. This le ilix's imt iHromi" /'/ U'Coro nny consdiiniil, mid is Ihrri'forn In tip cuiisidcn'il as ilislinrt from the iirliilr, lli(iii<
  • hnvn Ikvii tlir Miiiir. In ollirr riisp!! the rolalivc must ln' uiidcrstmi'l rriim llu- ninslriictinn. Mr. Aiidn-ws n'lnnrks, — " from tlio mode of tliinkiii^ nmimi; the islanders, it is rvidcnt that tlicy linvt- no niorr use fur llir rclalivo prinioiiii, lliaii llicy liavi- for tin' vrrli In tx ." In Nukuhivaii, Ic is uwd for a rrlalivc. n», n kiic It i kniilni in ((i.), it is tliou who art saluted ; Ir piii la .fan i luikiiile nitii, the proyer wliicli Jpsus laii);lit. Ilul commonly the relative is understood, ns tut Ic puna r iiliu i If cjx) (C.), it is the pig that roots in Ihc earth. In all the dialects there exists a relative particle ai, unknown to any of the Kuro|>enn lanpmges, which freciuently supplies the place of the relative pronoun, It will be men- tioned in treating of the verb. V 45. The reflective and emphatic pronouns sr!/ and otrn have, in some of the dialects, no correspond i no; terms ; in others they are e.\- pre.ssed by some emphatic word appended to the personal and posses- sive pronouns. The .Samoan and Tongan have nothing lo .supply the place ofthe.se terms : " he killed himself," is simply, " he killed him ;" " against himself," is merely, " ngninst him ;" " thine own eye," is, " thy eye," \c. The New Zealand dialect em|iloys nun, a woni used in various senses, such as, olso, indeed, then, truly, \-c. ; r vnkunra in in nnu, to save himself; t ton kanolii ano, in thine own eye; r knraijn nnu kin rutoii ami, calling to one another. In Uarotongan, orai (|)erhaps from rai, great, mucli) is the common word ; its proper menning seems to b<; very, in the sense of — '■ this rcnj thing ;" it freipiently has the particle iia, " merely," pn'fixed to it ; — kia taton urni, lo ourselves ; ko JJnvitIa orai, David himself; tonu unurni imknii, his own heart, lo is sometimes used, like i/io in Tahiliaii, as, loiinio a/i, his own stature. In Tahitian, ilin, which pro|)erly means down, or ilnivmiaril, is alTixed to the personal and posses.sive prmiouns, — as, i rolo ia i.uloii-iho, within yourselves ; Inu iho ninta, thine own eye; nnna iho i liamatii, he made it himself. In Hawaiian, iho is used in a similar maimer ; as, tnii iho mntn, thine own eye. In Nukuhivan, according to M. (iarcia, " I strike myself," would be simply " I strike mo,'"— f ])rhi net ait ia nu, — as in Samoaii, r II i: V K H II. I) 46. The accidents of tense, mood, voice, nvimber, and person, are in f^eneral denoted by particles allixed to the verb. The oidy inflection which it undergoes, consists in the reduplication of the I' tt r. V N K S I A .\ (i II A M M A R. 963 wholo word, or a part of it, to cxpross cither pliirulity, or a repetition of the action. Ill Siinixin. Ilir nMlnplicalion, rutin! or imrtini, nl" ihi' vrrli is coinmoTi (or Ixilli iIipsi' pllr|Xl^M•s ; ns rnuii Jr/r, In linr, »o liiiVf, in the |iliiriil, ii, H/mHor, In sl(i'|i Idfjcihcr. '/'/;/<', In ilivirli', Ims (ijr its fro- run together; jxiii, to descend, jtnpoii, to descend togethi'r. Aniiilni, to split, timiihdmiihti, lo split repeatedly ; hiiti, lo pull or pluck, hiililiiiti, to pluck n?|KMitrdly, as the leathers of n Ibwl ; hoc, to padille, lio/inr, lo paddle n'|K'atedly ; jxiraii, to s|ieiik, pararaii, to 8|ii-ak together (two persons), — jHinijUiruii, to talk, converse. In Hawaiian, this roriii occurs only in the s(>ns<> of a iVeipientative or inlcnsitive. /.c/c, to jump, to (ly, to de|iart, makes / II I I. <) l.ou V. i partirlex of a/firmation, or artit'e particles, has been applied to certain prefixeH which arc used for tliis purpoMc, ami which bear the name relation to the verb that ko does to the noun [v. ^ 17]. Of these hta is the most important. This particle has been considered by some a sijjn of past or (jresent time; by others, an auxiliary verb. It is u.sed, however, with all the tenses, though not so often with the future, whicii lias a verbal particle of its own, as with the others; and the only case in wiiich it appears to have a nieanin}r apart from the word to which it is joined, is when it precedes what is pro[ierly a noun or atljcctivc, — in which case, as it gives to them a verbal sense, it may often be translated by the substantive verb. In Fnknnfi), kiia tnate, dcnd ; kun jto, it is night ; kua leUi te tanm, the boy is gnod. In Snmunii, it becomes 'iia, ns, '«.i matrlaiii't ia, ho (listed, or, was fasting ; '/«» 'c Hut t(i / dust thou know ! 'u/t Irlii inir nii, it is agreeable to me. In Tongnn, it is kmi or kuo ; lira kiiu an a Finaii, and Finau cnine, or was come ; kua to ar la, the sun is set ; kua tctei in, it is [or it was] good. When preceded by o, and, (which is frequently used wlH>re it would not lie employed in English), it Ijecomcs nku, — as, oku mau ilo ia, wu know him ; oku ou kole kiale kof, I beg of the*. In New Zealand, the use of kua is less common than in the other dialects, its place bring supplied by ka ; it is, however, not unlrc<|Uent, as, kua kilt nuUou, wc have seen ; kiia nuite ratuu, they are dead. In the other dialects, kua (or 'ua) is used as in the Samonn. In Mangarevan and Nukuhivan, the final a is sometimes dnip|HMl, — as, ku'' ava Maijareva i te ua, Man- gnreva is lost in thu mist ; ku' Uinu ia (Mnng.), he is buried. IP hanau ia (Nuk.), he was born. This liap|K'ns in Tahilinn and Hawaiian, but apparently not so oDen. i 50. Besides kuu, dilferent words are used in some of the dia- lects, apparently for a similar purpose, though with various shades of meaning. In Samoan, olao, or, as the missionaries write it, o Ino, is a very common prefix to the verb, at the Is'ginning of a sentence. Mr, Ileath thinks that it may bt* consi(K'red a sub- stantive verb. It Nivms to give a meaning similar to that of the pn'sent participle in English, combined with the ditferent tenses of llie verb to lie ; — n Ivi aai taijata, the |)eople are eating ; o Im tu Ic iiiutau i poijai, the axe is lying at the root ; o loo manalu ia i lea men, he was thinking of those things ; o loo iatr nu, I have (" there is to me," rst milii ; ua iate an, would express the same meaning). This may lie the word lo'o (for loko), to come, iisisl in the s<'nse of lo hronu; like hoko in Tongan, which has both these meanings ; the o would then be the conjunction aiul prefixed, but listed rather inde- finitely, as in the Tongun oku. In the New Zealand translations, orcAo is often prefixed to verltal nouns, to signify the commencement or first doing of an action ; thus we find, te oriikditaiynjii n te iw, the liiuiulallon of the world, from haya, to make ; luit/aija, a making or cn^ation ; i Ir orokomeatu ija , at the Is'ginning, from mra, to do; viailaija, a doing, — hence this word will nvNin, at the first doing, or the beginning of doing; so, Ir onikouoltoaija o It laijala ki If uc/iua, the first dwelling of men on the earth, from uo/w, to dwell. I'd I. V \ KS I .\ N iIh' nill.| (hui iiiiiv tri'<|ii>'iitly \f rcii- (lirnl /III », ir/iin, tlml. Sti ix ikimI in ii siinilar nmtiiKr hiiIi mi jiii' iIh' i'\iiiii|i|i', ^ 1 1 |. Ill Tiiii^iiii. ' I" ii'«il If ill SiiiiHxiii : I'll I fill" "' I'lifitu kiil"i '•, mill nil iiiiii nliiill lintr. 7! \* iist'il Milli iIm' |ir>>iiii<, Iml, liy ii ?>iiii.'iiliir c|iiiiii'y, mIiiIi' hi Siiiiiiuiii it lolliiwfl, ill 'riiii^iiii il |iriiT(liM llir |iriiiiiiiiii ; ill Siiiiiiiiiii, '< tr Im, in 'I'l '111:1111, /r kr lui, lIuHi "liiilt (1(1 ; il,iii II iiiiii iiiii-tiiiiiii>e, iIkj ('iiniict kill ; w, 'if '//", I will )!«, Ilic pro- iKiiin '/ iM'iiijj iiirixcil Id the |Nirli('lt', iYrt (or iih the iniii-> 11 |(n>n', liilt ikiI with 11 riiluix' Ni^iiiliciilioii, US iiiir ihni Ir mmi iilii, we linxe iKd Ixiiclied. .V» is (■oiiiiiniiily iincd with the pronouns, like mi, Iroiii which il miiiis to dillir only in lieint: le— < eiiiphiilic : neii tiin'iitii, I hnve lieiird ; «c m iiiit.\, lnjnn/i'im/, and lorms thus, with the preterite, a sort of plu|Hrfect, and with the liitun'. id I'uture, — fi /iiur r nil, I took previously, or I had taken; 1 /aur r nii, I shall lake U'l'tirelinnd, or shall have taken. In N'ukiihivan, r is the i>\jin nf tlie present and the I'utiire. In the loniier rase, to dis- lin^uish Ihc tense, the parlich mi is usually postli.ved to the verh ; as r kile mi mi, I • ■>(•(', Tlio sense of liitiirity is (iciierally made apparent hy the form of the sentence, as miOirii ( liir III liiliiii, which way shall we go? E lina jxijxn r fill mm iii miiiui, lo- morrow we two will c^onie. 1 ia the preterite particU', ns mi ce t koiui ton Uilui, you have taken away my place. r O I. V N K « I A N «i K A M M A H S67 \ lll'HI.K.S ll» Miioii k A3. Tlie HulijitiH'tivr, cuiKlitiiiiiiil, potiMitinl, impcrntive, ami m- riiiiliv(> iidmnIs, lire (listiiitriiislifil Iriiiii llic iinliralivc, iiMiially liy t'linjiiiutiDiiH or otiii-r iiurtulcN pn lixnl to llu^ Milt. Ill SiiiiMmn, tin- Hiilijunrlivc i* ili'iinliirlii'li'N I'l/ iitiil dui, — iix m in li lulu, tlinl ill)' '•iiMiii! iiii^'lit l«' riiHilliil ; II 'i liilii mil luin, if llmii mj^IiimI In Ix' iHrliii (nr, lliiit tliiiii In- |»rl'-iiiIiI li'il n liirii. 'I'll'' iM.iiililitMiiil, Willi 1/ iir c/i/H, i<( ('\|iri'<«ril li\ n, n/fii, I'liin {-\nniu-i ), i'l, !'• /"'• mill ]"i; nx >/ ' iln nun if, il' llimi uiil Iniu iIum ii ; nlm it > nlii, il' llmii ||iM-Nl ; III r iMiiHiilK IV, irilmii wilt ; in Jni onlmi iiii n/nmn, wlini \v liu ymir iiliim; /M- V Ir Ii4n I iii, il'lhim ilmin' il ; /on Jai ulii niiliin, il" >r kIiiiH Miiy ; /«( «■ niniii, il" it In- truly thoii. J^i/ in I'xiin-xM'il liy nri, — an iiri nlin J'ui nnliiii, lent ye Ini hilliii. Cnii, at rn\\*it I'OtilJr, l>y iiinlni, ii»tiiill\ iMIuwril liy niin, ur hi/,^ii< r niii/iii inli in iin full, Im" run liniik (or, il i- jHwsil.lf llir Iiiiii U< liniik). 'i'lii' iiii|iiTiilivr rillirr liiii Im |iiirtirlc; Its siiii mm, 1 iiiiK' ImR', — nr liikis in :il1ir it, iiml •ouiirliiius aUn mn U Ibri' il : li iiiir in ' go nwiiy ! mil Iiii/d hi i hi.' lake lluit ! I'riiliiliilii■* r,\|ir<'KKril liy iinn, willi />, li, ur f nrtfr it, — an ii"'« li Jiir, du iml Irar ; una 'r Ir Inuln, ilii not tliou Hwnir ; nun lim limn r Hon, kl mil thy liniiil kimw. IV'wnri' in ri'inlrri'il liy in, — »» in niilnu tin Jni i- union, licwnn' Ii'kI yi' ilo (nr, list Ix' ilmii' liy y<>ii). Tin' iiiliiiiilvi' Iiiim >' lu'lim' it, — iin nn nn >nii r fiirnii, I am i-i>iiii' In ili'«trn\, — lull il is rri'i|iiciill) i'X|irrsH<'(l liy lln' Hiilijiiiiclivi' Willi in. Ill 'I'nii'^iiii, iIh' sii|ijiim'ti\i' li I'Xjiri -w'll hy A(, — an l.in nln, lliiit I may j;n ; Kr innii Jnknl'iiii, lli.il wi' limy ilrstrnx. In the ncpilivr liy /.c nun nn, iis /,r nun nri iinii Ininliii in, lliul lliry slnmlil lint iiiiiki' liini known. // is piKliri'il l>y kn and luilnin, — as, In kn urjiii ac githi ftmr, liir il'lhr wnrkK liinl Ihtu ilmir; hnlmn h iiniii niitn in, il' y will rw<"ivi' it ; irlifii is i'\|ir<'Ns<'il hy kn, whii'li is i^incrall) n jhiiIi il alVr tin' |>i'niiniiii, — as ka iHini kit ilii in, wIhii si- sli'ill liiiil liiiii. hn rrri|ui iill\ lias n lu'lnri' il, — as nkn hln in nl.iji, wlini it is will with lliir. I^sl is lilin nri :—hlin mi nnii nininnin, Icsl llii y slmiilil SIS'. 'I'lii' iiii|i<'ralivi' iillur has im |iarli('li', — lis, nniu nln, pi ye! linn Linir nn, nmw 111 iiR' ! — or liikis the siijii n(' thr siilijiinclivi', — as, l.i- inon luilii. In- yi' wise. Tlw |inihiliitivi' »ii;n is nnn nri, — as nnn nil iiioii nln, jjii yi' iinl. Tin' iiilinilivc lias kr, — ii« tiaku liiiu kt Jnkniln, I hnvt mo to wt nl vnriiiiirc, (this kc niiHWtTs, nut to Ilii- >Sunioiiii r, hut lo till' 'iri, llic si;;ii of the siihjlin('tivi'.| III New /•'alanil, km ami inn nri' sijiiis ol' thr Niihjiliiitivr, — jis, kin Innrr nln nn, that I nmv j;o; inn knr kn linin, lliat tlioii slimilil.st nuiii'i in Iho nr^ativi', — km knnn rntini i hnki, that tlii'y slmulil imi nturn. Mi rxpn'ssrs a sort nl riiliiri' njilativi', — nn luirrv III, he slioiihl (»<>, or must (jn; inrnkr iiiiiy Ih' ri'iiilrri'il " is to U-," a*, inrnkr liikiiii tr In imln, thi' iii:in in lo b>' (or iniisl simrtly Ih') tlolivrri'il ii|i. Inn is aUit triini, — as. ina nrnmin knulon, wIm'H yi' arc iktsis'iiIiiI. For ij there arc no p.\|iii'SHions i'xn'|il ki If mm, n,r Ir nnn, (hy ll«' tiling, with llm ihinj;,) nr siin|ily ki h. ami «/< ti ; — as, l,i It mm < linrrr mat in, il'lii' shall I'nim'; kl li liinliin lilnlii Iniinin, il'aiiN man wish. (/iiH, itT jianUi; is nlni, I'nilowi'il hy llir arlicli', — as, < nlm in linn Ir kilr, I inn sic (the s«s'. iii^ is (Hissihlc fur iiH'). Tin- iiii|icralivc cniiiinniily has im |iurlii'lc : il is sniiiciiincs I'ul- lowcd hy rii,—a», linrre fii koiitun, go ye, — and Honieliim'M pret'cdod hy mi; — iw, mr Innrr, j>o ! Knnn, knniikn, nnn, iiniikn, and kri, nil sijinily do not ; — knnn or nnn •.»0H l> II I I.O I.IMi V. Isi'iiliMi r mnliikii, li'iir ye ii' hlr, lr il iiiiil irlirii, — IIS, km iikiilD/xi null 1,'ir, IT llimi uili liill ilnwn ; km till- nun nn ri« 1 knn 1 likn in km' 1 Ir nkndiUin, tlioii I'linal mil wliilcii (lit, il it nut n^'lil, nr nlliiuiil, liir tliii' In wliili'ii). 'I'lir iiii|K'riilivi' in iliiKitnl liy kii, — UN, ka nnr kn kiiiii, )j lirniitftil lii'liin>, 'I'lii- liirliiililiiiu iii'j^nlivi* IM niirnkn,—nii,nlirnkn r »i>//iiM'<, lliiiik iinl, — iiihI iimn' rim'ly liy III"' I'liliilian nnn,— nn, riiin • /./«(.< .(/«, (Ill n'lt cnt'T. Tin' |)rii|«>r inriiiilivi' sign ia 1, liul in (.'XjirciM |mr|hi«<' or ili'MUii till' Hiilijuiii'livr |iiirtii'li' ^iii Ik iiwiI, III Mmi^iin'\iin, iliii'ii in il {|iriiliiilily lor llir pri'lcritr mily, iiki' i/Ait't in Tnliitinn); /"ki i» /'.«/, — n», iki inn kne, li'tl llmii liill ; inn is nnn/il llmt [pliil J Dim i/iii), niiswcr- 111)1 |M'rlin|ia tn mf in .New X<'iilniiil i kn i» tin- aign nl' llir iiii|i<'riiliv<>, — iix, tiilou kn oro i le Inkno, Irl us ji" In niid ; il |irii|i(rly Hiiiliilii'it "t/ii'i/ if n ittvoir, iiiiiritniiiiT, /inuiliitili, t\-i„ jHir nipjiDrl it rntliiiH ilu iiiU." 'I'lii' iiii|H'nilivi' Iiiih Hiinu'liinrn c Ixiliiri! il, — liiil rrri|iiintly il h williniit niiy "i^in In di'iiiiiiiiilt' it, III I'linniniimii, ^(1 si'i'iiis In la' iim'iI lit in MiinKiircviin : kn /mi it inn i, ntnv \vrv.'. inlnii kn Ininnki, lit iia li^lit, nr, ur uill ti|i|it. In 'riiliiliiin, !<■ iiiiiu't-ri* to km in Uiirnlnnijiiii, nii (t'nr Inn) to /(Xi;,niiil nhin to nnnint. A is llitr prclix of iIh* iiiipi.-niiivc, iiml r ><( ilii- inlinitivc : m, n, nnd » /'', nrc lined lor /ist, lis.! i/z-d 'I ;» In in in 'I'aliitiaii, as n si;;ii nl' llic Niilijiiiii'livi', iiiciiiiin;; l/inl, and marks ali«i llii' iiiiidiliniial, Willi iIk; wnsc of 1/ and u/nn, — as, 1 itr r« , thai tlinii niayi'sl kimw ; 1 iVrrj iiiiii < iin Iniinta, lo be sisn liy mrii ! i piilc outiiii, whi'li yc pray; ; inn Inn iimlii, il'lliim' ryi- l«' evil. Inn sijiiiilics il, — ns, inn onlnii r lini/r, il" vi' I'omo, O is lisl, a» nuti ni niitnii o iimie, cut not, li'sl |yi'| dir ; |tliis is |H'rliaps the Sainn:in o, ini'aniii)i nr ; " cat imi, nr ynii ilii-."| Cnn is cxJiriH-i'd liy liili, In arrin' lit, willi n onn. slriirlinii siniil.'ir In lliai nl' tlic Nrw Xialiiiid nlii 1, — as, In/i mi i liin /kit IniniUii li lieln- lii/ii, iIh'm' rliildnii iiri' aliii- in rend (lit. it has cniiii' In Ihrsc cliiMrrii tn nnd). I'nno, right, gissl, i<> iisid III ihr saiiii' way In «'.\pn.'ss ought, should, has coiiK! to the rhildren. Wo may siippnsi' that when (he In was iiilriHliiced il was only einplnyeil in lliom' rnm-n in wliiili till- artirle prisrdrd what was rliarly a nniiii ; when it was used us a relative |v. ^ ll|,nr, as III the present lase, Uliire a snrt nl' iiiliiiiiiNe nr gerund, il was iiol rhaii;.'ril.| /.' is the usual prefix cif the im|M'ralive, — na, r hnnui ik, \ii\t: thou; U'lore Humc verbs il is n'pliirisl by o or ««, — us, n luir «', go thon ; on hoi oiun, do ye Iwo I'M I. V \ KS I A N (i K A M \[ \ l( •>^ rrtiirn. !\fiii it llir pmliilnlivr imrliclf, — iih, m•', mill nnih n", I iiiii miirly il' ml. nr iiImhiI In iln', /.' i< IIk' iiiliiillivc |iiirli<'li', liiil r, nt'lln' Niilijiiiirlivr, i)i iiTil will II iiliji'i'l iir |iiir|i ix iiitrnilnl, m ill llii' Ni'i'iml <'\nni|ilr itiviii iilmvi*. Ill Nllllllllivilll, >'< IN II ai^ll III' llic Klllljllllrlivi',— IIH, III Dlllill Hlllhlll, tllllt W)' llT OVIT* cnini'; il ii|i|H'iirx In In' iil-tii iHiil liir llii' lliiril |»tkii|| nl' llir iiii|ii rnliM', — ii<<, in liiiiiiij,iu hill III (»' /iiiKi/,1111, III ili\ will l«' iliiiir. A K llir ii'-iiiil iiii|ii'niiivi' (iiirli'li ,— iiN, n /i#» .' Uii. Aii'i 14 till' |irnl I timoi >«' r Iuihii ( tliix ship ynii »ill l«' killiil ; i", limU'ViT, is "niiirlillli-i iwil liir //, — ii", in iiiiiLn unit ill, il' Iir sliii<>, //.«/ is oi, — UN, III I'll, Irst yiiii liill, nr, li>r li'iir III' tiilliiig. Mm \» iimiI fbr iiImiiiI, In, nr iKiir in, ixiicllv as mni in lliinniiiiii. I" \ 11 I'M' I. KM (ir KiHt M \ M. \\y jiiiiiiiit: rcrtniii |iarlifles to tlii' vcrli, Imtli n« iirpfixes and BuflixGH, the I'lilyiu'Miaii dialuctH ^ivo to tin* orii^iiial iiu'aiiiii|r of tlie Wfird, nilditioiial sliaiU-s of siL;nilii'atiiiii, anal(i<;inis to some of llie Ik'liri'w coiijniiatioiis. 'I'licsn derivatives we have termed Forms, They nro causative, desiiierativt-, reeiproeal, and potential. Tlicv receive all the si^is oC tense and inowl like tlio single verb. Ill Siiiiinaii, llir caiisatin' liirm is maiii- liy pn Hxiiit? Jn'ii In ill"' vcrti; nt J':i'iio/ii, m save' In nm',— I, 1'. In riiiisi' In li»r, I'rniii fVir, In livci J /ii'iu/k. In hIhiw, call!*' In kliiiW, frniii i/n, In IdiiiW. Ihsiri' In i\pr)(rtlivr ; fi-iiii-si. In sniiii Inyi'llirr,— /(-.'I*/**!//), In lii'lp nrir aiinllirr. A'i niiil nut, whiii Ibl- Inw'iiijj a vrrli riiilin^ in ", i-nali'sci' willi il, a.s in llii' last rvainpli', ami in ti-niinii'i, lo qiiarirl, iVniii iiiisn. In liiar ill-will,— /<. /<(/(/(, In sprak in imiiiril, rrniii /(//<., to s|i«ak. 'I'liis Haini! liinii is iisnl tn rxpri'ss irrr^iilar imitiiin, liark ami Inrili, up ami ilnuii, alMiul, iiC, — uit/r.ii/ii.ii'i, In walk iiImiiiI, up ami i\iiwu,—^H ■/n/ii-ii'iiiii (passivr), 'nst aUmt, a* n vcssrl. ' III 'rnnnan, /iikn is tlir caiisalivi' profix,— ns Jiikiinioiii, tn savr, trnni inniii, to live : fiiknliilii. In iliniinisli, I'min tiilii, small. Tlir ili'siilcralivi' parlirli' is Jia, or, as it is niiiri' rniiimnnly prniinliiiri'il, /c, — as mmi Jul n/ii, wn wish tn fio ; in) imii fir fmiinn, tlii'V wisliril III liiar. 'I'lu' nripriical liirni (wliirli lias tlic sanii' tnranin^s as in Samniin) is niailr by /'■ prclixril, anil aki, Juki, laki^niii, sull'ixril, — na Jr-filii-aki, to wroHllo logrihrr,— /i'-z/o'/rt//, lo look upon ono aiiotlirr,— /(•.«/(«/iiwi, to urct't ono another, IVom fjii. In saliito ; — iVnni tnii, to riiinn upon. In roach to, \('.,»c hn\v frtiiu/nki, to jnin with nlio aiinlhrr,— /i'/.';/'7(//(/i(/./, lo incrl a [HTson, — mid Ji-jiikiijiiiiii/nki, io im-vl with one 08 270 P H I I, O L O G Y. nnotlwT. i''rf, or, ns the inissionnricN write il, Jim, is iho pntniliai prefix, — ns «<«• ikai /(■ turn I'a-iiit/ii, tlicy cmild mil dwell ; knhiii r Jiuiluii r hi. tdiiiiti', il'ii nmil run number, (or, if it mil Im' iiumlx'nil liy ii iiiiiii.) Tliis liiriii cxisls only in the 'roii)j(iii. Ill Ni'W /ealniid, the eaiisiilive prefix is vidil, — ns K (/^(/l';(/, In mive ; uiihiikili, to cniise to know, llin is used in a li'W eiises, ns a desidcrnlive sifjii, ns hin-iiiii, to wish to drink, to W. tliirsly; //((/./,(((, to wish l<> ent, to Is- hiinjiry ; hut it is not n (^■iiernl prelix. lliitliia si^nilies to desire, bnt it is used ns nn iiulepeiiilenl verli. 'J'he reci- |iriH-nl I'orm does not exist in this, or in nny ol' the Enstern dialects, which hnve only ihc eniisniive. Ill l{nroliin<;an mid Mnn^^nrevnn, the e.-nisntive siun is iika, in I'aniiiotiKin fiiLu or li(tk(i, in Trihilinii fii'a or //«'(/, ill Hawniinii Sdinetiiiies Ini'ii, hut more commonly /lo'o, and in Nukuhivaii il assiiines the li>iir l(>rms lAjiika, /nikii, Jo'ii, and kn'ii. In most, if not all, of these dialects, tii is nlso i'ni|iloyed ns a eniisntive prefix : — it is prohahly the same with the verb In, to strike; ns nk-ikn, |{nr., low, loakiiiikn, to ahnsc (to strike diiwn); //, eiilaiii^led, /(///, to enlaniile. In 'l";iliilian, ^n//rt, to cleans,', from //m, cliiiii (to distiii;;uish il perhaps iVom //f/f(/'(n, ashaiiieil). In Hawaiian, ^(/i//f//, to anoint, from /liiiii, uininieiit : In/ii/ii, to eiitan^jle, Vom //////, entaii^'led (|ierhiips to dis- tinguish it from liitJiilii, to covet another's pro|H"rty). In Niikuhivan, la/iiii, to upset, from hiii, to turn over ; lajiii, to stii'k on, from /)(/, to adhere. PA liTICI.KS OK VOICK. ij ar). The Polynesian ilifilecl.s makt a very Croiiueiit use of tlie passive form of the verb. In many cases it i;- "mjiloycd where tlie Eno;iisli would have the active ; and there are, in all the diidei'ts. verbs wliich, tiiough active in form, are only used in a passive acceptation. The lasl.nieiitioned class of verbs dill'er, however, from the rejiular passives, in taking aHer 'hem th<' alilntive .vitli i, iiisteail of that with c, (v. ^^ 'S.i, 24), as raiikii i Ic Itii/dla, Rnr., oblaini'd liy the man ; jxtii i tr tJn, Haw., destmved by fire. ^ 50. The passive particles are numerous in tliu ditferent dialects, but nearly all terminate in a. Tiiey are all sutli.ves. In !Sninoan, these particles are a, iti, Jia, luu, tin, and inn, — ns iijiiifi, to cover, /^M/i'/, covered ; tnnfi,\o hinder, pa.ss. /w*//./" ,• si/n,U> see (cereiiionial) s/Az/iV;,- i/a, to hnte, itiiniii ; si'i, to lit) up, si'itin; nvr, lo give, niv-i/in. Of these particles the (irst two and the last are by far the must I'onimoii. The passive particle may lie separated from the verb by an adverb, but, in this case, the particle thus separated always is, or liecomes iiiii, — as ijnnnln ntna inn a nittoit nijnsn/n, yoiir ."ins will nlso be forgiNcii, — where the ndverb niim, " also," conies Is'twix'n the verb and the iHiiticle. In the Tongnii, we nre led in doubt by an evident mi.stake on the part of the mi-ssion- aries, who have regarded the ablative particle r, nieaiiiiig ////, as an article of the nomi- native [v. f) II], and have thus, ui many ca.-ics, iransliirmed n passive into an n<'tive verb. In numerous instnnces, in the versions of the .Scriptures, the verb is liilloweil by a particle (, which iip|)ears to have [lerplexed the translators, — as they have printed it not I' <) I, Y N K S I A X (i 11 A M .M A II. 271 as n purl of the word, imr yet wlidlly sc'|mrnle, Iml iihti'Iv divided (Voiii it l)y ii very lliin " (-IHici'," — lis ill iIk,' scnli'iicc, / //(' Ixiikiii Imlimtir l;ii(i fiiiniiii ilir ijalii Ji'finr, iiinciii}; nil the mill [«li(i| liiivc Ix Til JKirii nl' woiiicn, Arc-. ; licrf tlic inissicjiinrics coiisidi'i' the c Im'Ioi'c Id' as a si^rii nl' tin' iKJininallvi', ami translile, " anxiiii; all wIidiii wuineli have Iwriie ;" it is, however, iiii(|iiesti()nal)ly the |ire|Mi.sitiiiii A;/, mid llie i wliicli IoIIohs 7(////n, " if I cast out devils," whriT ihi' n of tiu is the nominative pro- noun J. This is the Vitian construction, as \v\\. be seen by referring to the grammar of that language. In some cases, however, the passive acceptation has bo'U so clear that Ihe translators eoiild not remain in doubt, — as lie Ic ke tmuiliiii i Iiik> lett, lie tc kc lialuiii i limileii, for thou shall be justified by thy words, and llioii siialt Ik; condemned by thy words ; the preposition '»/ is here rendered i (ai'cording to the general rule in tl' .' ly- ncsiaii), and not r, — Ihe ablative Ix'iiig not thai of Ihe agent, but that of Ihe means or instrument. The particles thus far observed in the Tongiui aiv / (llir in), in, Ida, ki (for kill), Ii (lor lilt), and na (|K'rhaps for inn) — as c nko/iiikiiin ukiiiiiiitolu c lie Oliiii, "they shall Ik- taught by God" (from nkiiiiaki, to leai'h). In Ihe New Zealand dialect the partiides are more numerous than in the rest, and in this point its grammalical system appears to Ik- more complete and regular than thai of the ollK'rs. It is to Ix' observed that no! only is the passive, as such, used much more frccpiently than in Knglish, but in the iui|>eri'.live of transitive verbs, the passive I'orm is generally employed where i! must Ix; renderi'il into Knglish by the active, — and this is also sometimes the case in other mtKids. Ki le men c wnkiiniiiliniinliii nun knc r Inn knilnlii ninliiii, if Ihy right eye ollend thee, — lit., if thou be oU'ended by thy right eye ; mnlinin-lin ijn rriinrrijn, observe the lilies. One remarkable peculiarity of this dialect is that instead of tin: passive sign iM'ing separated from the verb by an adverb, as in ihe other dialects, Ixith Ihe verb and the adverb have the atlix, — that of the latter lieing always tiii, — ns ka tiikit-n mtirie-tia Ion ponnijn, thy servant is let go in pence (tiikii, to let go ; marie, peacefully) ; korrro-tia kino-tin, evil spiken of. The passive suflixes arc (/, in, liin, kin, min, >)in, rin, tin, tin, ijii, inn, and kinn ; as tonii-n, seni, — iinti-in, broken, — Imjo-liin, taken, — infi-kin, loosi d, — nni-tiiin, I'olloweil, — inikntn-iin, placed, — tiiiimiiii-lin, Ix'trolbed, — Inliu-nn, biirnl, — irnimi.iin, li'd, — liiin-inn, called, — lini-kinn, cut do'Aii. The're appears to Ih' no certain rule by which we can determine what is the affix of n particular verb; on this |Kiin! usaj.e is ihe only guide. It would seem, how- ever, tlint certain lerminalions are liest adapted, according lo the euphony of the lan- guage, to particular allixes. \'erbs I'liding in ne, nkr, it, rii, iri, oi, nli, iii, mi, nil, ukii, urn, iitn, have usually n; those which terminale in nki and titi, have ollen in; 272 I'll I I, O l.()(i Y. mnny in ";;«, dim, i>ii, iikii, rhr, hnvo hiii; tliosn wliirh toriiiinnto in in, niid in a nnd 6 ncrcnicd linvi" m'ncrnlly X/«; ninny in tiiiii, itiii, itni, nnd tiro, haw win; most tlint nnd in di ' ivp ijio ; riii is only (!iiind with vrrbs ending in « nnd o; tin is tin; most common of nil, nnd is joiiii'd with nny tcrniiniilion ; mnny vcrlis rnding in i, iki, nnd tiiii, liiko tin; llioso in /)(" firncTiilly mi; llii' l!'W cnsos in which we hnve fonnd inn nnd kiiiii Imvi- brrn with verbs en(hn;; in n. In some words ihi" usage seems to vnry ; we find hoth J/vf7| nnd inikdlii-iiin (Malt. xi. (i| lor " oIliMiiled ;" so also, Hiihiipiilit-id nnd uiikiipiitn-iiiii, " made to n|)|ienr." Words sonnded nlike with different nrrcptntions, will hnvc ditFerent aflixes, — as kata-iiin, Innglicd at ; ktiliikatu-\ji(i sroreheil. In Unrolongnn, the |iassiv(> particles are n, in, kin, nnd mm, — as nic-ii, loosened,^ nron-in, loved, — njm-kin, seized, — Innii-i/iin, buried. The last two are, however, rare. Sometimes a tin is inserti'd Ix'lween the verb anil the particle in, which may Im- the remains of nn old passivi' Ibrm, — as nko, to buy, — pnss. nko-in or okotiii-in (in .New Zen- hind, liiiko, to buy, mnkes in the pnssive lioktmn); tiitnki-iii or tiitnkitiii-in, rewarded (in \. Z. tiilnki makes tiilnkiiin) ; so kiii, to cnt, pass, knitjnin (N. Z. kui mnkes kniijit). The passive particle may lie se|iarated from the verb by nn adverb, — ns rnio-iiinric-in, laid up rarefully. In .Mnngnrcvnn, the usual passive particle is in, ns nkiivnnikn-in, revealed, made known, — cnusative passive Irom rnrnkn, to know. In Tahitian, the only suffix of the pnssive is /(/((; it may be separated from the verb by nn ndverb, — as /iiijHii.i'./iin, tnken away ; hniiiniii-itin-hin, treated ill. In llaHniInn, the sullixes are n, in, liin, nnd lin, — ns liJir-n, lieard, — Invr-in, tnken, niihiili.liin, driven away, — tnii-liii, hung up. The last two particles, hovvevcir, are em- ployed in but very lew instances. Tniilin is probably used to distinguish the word Inn, in the meaning of /') linn^, frmn Inn, iiieaniug In jinl, or set down, pass. Inn. in. We hnve, |M'rliaps, another passive siilVix in jii/i-tin, crowded close, from ]ti/i, to join or ndlien' to. The N'ukuhivan has fiir sullixes of the passive (/, in, hin, and tin ; ns hiinnii, to bring forth, Iniiinii-n, Imrii ; knohn, to sidute, kniilni-in, saluted ; nin, to inspire, iirii-liin, inspired ; hnnlnpii, to sanctify, hnnlnini.tin, snnclilied. It is remarkable that soiiii> of the active verbs of the Ivistern dinleets sec-m to be ilerived from the passive forms of N'ew Zealand, — as : jturi, X. Z., to take, pnss. piirilin nkiri, " to thri 57. The verbal nouns being closely connected in this language with tiie passive Ibrtns, it will be most convenient to treat of them in this place. They are formed by joining to the verb crrtain suffixes which usually terminate in ya. P O I, Y N E S I A N O R A M M A R. 273 As Iho fiirrtialion of these nouns, like that of the pnssivt! voice, is most clenrly nnd fully (lispliiyed in the New Xenland dinlcct, it seems advisnbli^ to depart from fiur usual order, and draw our first examples from this tongue. The general rule is that the par- ticle of the noun depends u|)On that of the passive, ii, ui, rui, ««, and j)(« being changed into >)ii, iind hia, kin, miti, ria, nnd lin becoming respectively luii/ii, lunjii, maija, rai/a, and tiiiKt, as — ACTIVE. piitii, to kill Willi, to break tiihit, to burn kiii, to cat piii, to favor liiUt-inti, made to ap|)car, or shown, has witkiijtiiluijii, a showing forth, — but then this verb has also another form of the passive, nakiiputnia, from which the noun may be derived. 'I'lie sutlixes ijii and hitjit are tho«! which are generally used where a noun is to Ih' I'ormed from a word which is not a verb, — as from niii, great, we have yiiiitju, greatness; from y»»ri, dark, ;»;»/■//"«'(, darkness; from «(/;/if, peacefully, «(«r(W«j)rt, ix-acefulncss. Someliines a slight irn'gularily may be observed, — as iriikapiiiiki, to testify, which should properly have iiiikii}miikii)ii, has viikiipiiakiiijii, testimony. When the verb of which the noun is to Ix; liirmcd is (pialilied by an adverb, this adverb, also, receives a nominal su(li\, which is always <«y«; thus w« /onii is to live continually, from which we have oriniii li»iii-l seen that the Kastern dialects (Itarotongan, Tahilian, &c.) have generalised this exceptional rule into a regular system, and thence derived two classes of verbal uoims. In Samoan, the usual sulTix is ii«, which sometimes becomes iii/a, — as Inmnja, inter- ment or sepulchre, — tiifn-iiyn, tl I I. O L U G V. picx syslrm rcarmblinK (he New iConlanil rurincrly r.xiiitrd ; — 111)111, to );mw, inakc* lupu-n>K'th, mill lH/tii/)ti is birth, and wnnuiitxi iitl'spring ; i/j>r-iii/i4tit-iikiiitn and rnttii ; as nuiteijti, death, nuite-raita, tlie act of ilying; mtjrpii, bed, niDc-rn^i, tlic act of sleeping. In Tahitian, the stilfixes are 11 (fiir gassive particle may lie affixed, as in Karotongan ; as te vnhavdha-riia-hia, the Ixjing abused ; tc nrnlai-rnii-hiti, the lieing led. In Hawaiian, the jiarticles are «« (for ifii) and nun (liird/j/i); as (oenn, remainder, toe-ana, a remaining; uUina, burthen, iita-ann, a conveying. The former, however, is U8«>d only in certain words, while the latter is universal ; it may Is; separated from the verb by an adverb, — os Ui oiitoii Ininn-mnilni-nna, your well-doing, or your gfusl dee«U. Ana is used also like tlie present participle in Knglish, to form a kind of present tense, — as e lam nnn an, I am taking; it follows the sign of the passive, — as laitc-in-nna. being taken. Some wonls seem to show that olhi'r liirms once existed, — as tomoliann, the west, Irom lomo, to enter, to sink into (i. e. the going down of the sun — uccnleiis); tu/fina, a place where many things stand, — as a village, garden, &n\ (Irom tii, to stand). At the Manpiesiis, the regular sullix nn Isvonies, in the soiilhern islands, nn, and in the northern ka; as /f/j or /liti, to go inland, /?/f>i« and hilikn, nn inland journey ; /««, to sleep, nioena and morka, a bed. The latter suffix, kn, freiiuenlly lakes a vowel- sound, I or r, licforc it, for euphony, as to)/, to arrive, Uiuika, an arrival. M. Uurcia POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR. 976 gives also tilt nnd Ihm, an roriiinlivfs, but no cxampU-s of llieir use. lie mcniiuns ulso th«! pnrticle ami, an licinj; ummI to dHtiiiKuish the pri^'iil luiisc, but it is uncerlniD whether wc are to consider it a noniiniil suffix (from aijit), or a locative pnrticle. DIRECTIVE PARTICLES. I) 58. Tlie verbal directives are words which are postfixed to verbs, to signify the direction in which the action is supposed to proceed, — either with respect to its place of origin, or to the place of the speaker. Thepe parlii-les are most accurately distin);uished in tlie Tongan. They are five in numlier, nuii, lUu, aijr, hake, and hifo. Mai signifies motion or action towards the speaker, — atii, motion towards the (ktsoii addressed, — atje, towards a third |K^rson,— luike, u|)wards, and hifo, downwards ; tula mat kitUe an, tell nic ; ten Uda tUu kialc koe, I will tell you ; tola aijc kiatc ia, tell him ; alii hake, go up ; alii hifo, come down. Tharticlcs, nuii, atu, ake, and iJh, — atie not being found. These four are used as in the Samoan. In Rarotongan, the din-clives are mni, atu, ake, and w. Ake, besides its meaning of upwards, seems also to take the place of ane in Samoan ; at least, it is used in many cases where the former meaning will not apply j as riri ake ra totia pii iaia, his master was angry with him ; kite ake ra aiti i te reira, he knew that. The directives are used with great frec|Uency in this and the following diidects, and in many oases, to ap- pearance, arbitrarily, where no motion or direction of the net can well bi- uiiderstisid. In Mangarevan, the particles are the same as in Rarotongan ; ake, besides its ordi- nary meaning, is used to signify that an act is now in progress towards completion, — as c moro ake ana, it is drying ; e rat ake ana, it is becoming large. They also say, nora koe ake tiei, whence come you f In Tahitian, Hawaiian, and Nukuhivan, the directives arc mai, atu, ae, and iho; ae signifies direction either upwards or aside, according to the context. LOCATIVE PARTICLES. \ 59. While the last-mentioned particles show the direction in which the action is supposed to move, there is another class which indicate the locality or vicinity in which it is considered to take place, — whether near the speaker, or at a distance. Their use, how- ever, is not always clearly defined, and it is generally impossible to render them into English. Some of the dialects employ them much more frequently than others. 976 1' H I I, O L O O Y. In Snnionn, vri (hrrr), w« (lluTi"), nn* in common iiw,— as iiii fiii iitii nri mte milou, I snj unto yim ; Jninitii i on sim mi, Im'IiuIiI lliy disfiplrs ; Ir ilrmniii i o onion iitalti e tiili iiii, Ific ili'vils H'lioni your cliililrrn ciist out. A'o, it would scrm, gcnrmlly di'miloa a imiiit near tlir |MTson N|>ok('M to. Iai is Homi'linics iiM'd iillcr nil iiii|xTiitivc, a* in New /cnlnnd ; .Mr. Ilrnlh, liowcvrr, coiisidors it n coiitrnclion of tlio rnipliiitic ndvi'rb luvti, — lis Inn mini In in, just j;o slriiinlil liirwiird ! In tlic Tollman, I lind no |>arti<'l('H i'in|il< n's|xvl, as in many ollirrs, iVum its .sisiir diali'cts. In .\i-w Zi'ulaiid, mi (lirrc) and niin (ilicri') arc llw particli's most fnH|Ucntly used,^ as c mm ntii nri nlniii kin konliiii, I ."ay unto you ; nrii nun rniiii in in, llipy tiillowcd him. Un is used alUr the iiupcnitivc, and in snme iiistanct'S niler other moods, when a siipiiosiiion is iiilcndcd ; it may also have some roferpnce lo place at a little distance from llio s|K.'akor; nrii nini rn in linn, liillow me! kin rile knloii no iiuo,\\\\ nil be Ailtillcd ; knn mini rn kniitiiii, yr liavc lii'ard. In Uarotoiij^an, the i..c/.?:"v particles are mi, rn, tin, anil iimi. Xri and rn am Imth in frecpH'iit use, the liirmer signil'yiii}! Iirrr, and the latter there ; and as an action which is present in place i.s usually so in lime, and as one which is distant is m(ir«! likely lo be p.Tt, Ihest! two have come to be also connected with tens<\ — the former lieing used with the pn'scnt, and the latter generally, though not always, with the past [v. § 5a], i\« (yonder) as signifying a greater distance in .spac<^ than rn, signilies also a greater distance in time ; te tnnt.in mi nii, I say (here) ; le tnntiin rn nn, I was .saying (then') ; i liiiiliin nn mi, I .said (yonder). This dislinclioii, however, is not always maintained with strictness, Rn is used freipienlly as an emphalic word, without reference to place or time, and may Ik? translated liiit, indi'cd, only ; le lunliin iitii nri ru nn kin koiiloii, but I sny unto you. Ann is sometimes used, though it is diilicult tu sny with what pre- cise ineiining ; knn riro iiini iinn n Klin, Klias has come ; kn momono nnn i tnan koke, put up thy sword. In Mangarevan, nri, urn, nn, and nnn arc" the locative particles. Nri, nrn, and nn, seem lo 1h' used much as nri, rn, and nn, in Uarotougan. Am, according to the vcwa- bulary, iiidi>'ates distance Ih>||i of place and lime. Ann is given with several meanings : (l)ns a particle of present tinn-, — as r pure nnn ^w, thou prnyest ; ('i) as meaning peril I ps ; — mikn nnn rn, — nn Irlnijiiln ki' nnn rn, it is |H-rlinps mine, — |M'rliaps the other man's; and (M) as used in answering a (|uestion, as e nliijn tni Ir Unnj/ekn, is Kua|H:ka a reel'(lireaker of the sea) ? r knnltni nnn in, [no;] it is a |H>int of land. The Taliitian uses nri, rn, anil nn, precisely as the Uarotougan. In Hawaiian, nei indicates present place and time ; In, a distance in place, and some- times, though not always, in time. In .Nukuhivan, nei and nn are u.sed as nei and In in Hawaiian. It will Ik- SL'cn that the use of nri ri'inaius nearly or quite the same in all, while na, in (rn), nnn, and nrn are somewhat variously usi-d in the dilferent dialects, though, in general, they may all be considered corii'liitives of nri. HKLATIVK I'ARTICLK. ^ 60. Tliis name has been given to a particle which in many cases supplies the place of the relative pronouns in English, though > I' (> I. Y N K 8 I A N n R A M M A n. 277 frequently it cannot well be translated. It usually refers to some word in the first part of tlie sentence, expressive of time, place, cause, means, manner, &c. In most of the dialects this particle is at, — in Uarnton^ran ei. Jiiiitiin){ ofni is titerr, ntnl in those Innnunm-Ji it frns " iIhti'IVoiii," " llicrctil"," " tlii'ri'iii," used ("(ir"!!!' il," " of them," " of liiin," " fniin il," " in il," &c. It nmy iilso Ik- coniiinrcd willi llii; Krciicli y. O h till c I lit II oiitoii mi, lit. Ilir pliirc is tlii'rc tliy wrallli, i. i-. tlm pliK'c wlicri'in lliy wrnllli is ; Irliisi mi i ui I'lhiii i/iiiin, llid one wlicn'unld were fivc! tiilenis, i, c. ho who hnd five talents ; Jiii iilii i ui, sny unto him or them, or say thereunto. In Tongan, iii evidently signifies tlirre, n» lifii iir liikii ki ui, and he placed there ; but it is freipienlly used ns a relative, — as o lin iitii niiii /ir Ixilii okii ke In ui, and look away from the pinec thou slandest there (when; thou slandesi); iir i/ii/ii mm iiku iiio/iDiniio III, the things ye listen ther«;to (for, the things which ye liear) ; kiiluii ia e fd-Mic at, who is he wheri'hy it can U; said (tcir, who is it lliat can say). In New /enhind, iiu jxi i niriiju ui, Iho towns wherein was done ; tc nuitr e niiii ui koiitoii, the death which ye n-ceive ; i iiiriijuliii kiitoutiii tciiri kiii rile ui, and all this was done thai might Ix' lidlilled Ihercliy, ■ iii, not, none, — e /iiii sr tiinju tcttrc, between the houses ; i iiiiia i /r jxt, Ix^forc the town. In Itanittingan, those of thes4< adverbs which end in it liave n sullixrd lo them, and take l)esides another |)re|K)sili()n, — as, ki riit/ii (adv.) ulxjve, on high, — ki niijiio i Iv arc, upt)ii the house ; ki mini, in front, — ki miiiio iu Jrsii, before Jesus. In Tahitian, toi frequently precedes them, — as, tei mln i li' tiiri; within the houso. In Hawaiian, «/(/, ns iiinliit't o Ir Ini/t; within the bouse. This i)iii is also employed in Nukuhivan, as well as {'. In this dialect the adverb is liillowed by /li or /ir, as inn una hi iiiiDiiu, upon the U'd ; i miu hi fur, over the house ; i otii hi hiiv (( '), within the cala- bash ; i i)to he iiiii ((J), in heaven. \ (>5. Nearly all the intorroirative adverbs are formed from fea, which seems to mean properly which. [\. \ 42.] With the pre|)ositions, /('(I refers to place, — as, i fm, Sam., where ! (i. e. at which place ?), — Hiui Jhii, whence \ &c. Willi jie, like, it relers to nianner, — as, ]Kfiii,fiiiijH/iii. like what, — i. e. how ? — the answer to which is, jieiiri, j)rnii, jnhi, like this, like that, i. e. thus, so. With the signs of the tenses Jin bas reference to lime, as, n/cu, when ! (fut.), vtifni, when \ (post.) These, or similar words, are liiund in all the dialects. In Tongan. fen bi'coines /(• ; in Kinoloiigan and .Mangnrevan, en ; and in the other dialects, hcu ; Jin, however, is sometimes used in Tahitian and Nukuhivan. ij 06. All the dialects (except perhaps the Toncjan) have particles, whose office is to give an interrogative meaning to the sentence, like the ue and rtum of the Latin. In Sanioan, this particle is en, — as, /la 'c i/ati. en, dost thou know ? 'o ni ea te linjntit, wlio is the man ? The New Zealand dialect bas commonly in/iei or ravei ; the Uarotongan, aiiin ; the Mangua-van, ai (!); the Tahitian and Hawaiian, unci; and the Nukuhivan, ienei. 280 P H 1 L O L O (i Y. p R K r () H I T I u N a I) r>7. Most of the prepositions have been nlrcndy given in the remarks on the declension of nouns. The following list contains nearly all which are found in the several dialects. SiiniiHin : a, of; r, liy ; V/, in, nt ; t, in, liy ; '/, lo, into; ma, with, for, on acrount of; mill, iVoiil (|iliicr) ; //ii, I'rom ; we, with ; mi, no, of, from, by. Ill linrotongan : ii, r, ki, i, o, m above ; ri, at, in ; tri, in ; kio, with, c/ie: ; mii, with ; ytui, from ; mi, no, of, for. In Manfinrrvnn, bcsiilos the first livo of the Karotongan, rki, with, by means of; in, with, rlir:- ; mil, for, froiii ; »ii\ with ; mo, of, liir, from ; nil, no, of, from. In 'riihilinn the sanK" ns in llnroton^itn, oxcopt '* tor ki, mai for met, ond 'lo for kio. In flawniian, a, e, i, 'i, », as in Sninonn ; 'io, to, with ; mti, ut, in, — by, by means of; »i((i, from ; mr, with ; im, no, of, for. In NukuhiviiM, (/, r, ki (or V), i, ", as in the (iireguing ; 'io, to, with ; mn, at, in ; niei, from ; mr, with ; nn, mi, of, for. i i CO.N J r X» T I O.N s. 4 68. The conditional conjunctions if, that, le.st, &c., have already been mentioned in treating of the verb. As for the rest, the Poly- nesian makes but sparing use of them. It seems, however, to have had originally two conjunctions signifyiiiff "«'A — the one uniting nouns and the other verbs ; the former was probably ma, and related to the preposition iril/i ; the latter was a vowel. In .*r nnil ; mn In only iimciI with llii- niinirrnlii. In llaMiiiiiin, n I'dnni-i'ln ktIw, - t'oniiccU vitIm, uml mr (wild) nuiins t »/>/ in iihi'iI with tlir Miiincrnis, I N T K l{ J KCT I (t N a. I) fi9. The interjections are not very nuniprouH. Tlio only one which merits notice is aiir, wliich seems to he pociihikr to the Poly- nesian, and is lound in nil the diiilucts. It is used to express ^riet' in all its shades, from a slight CeeliiiR of re^ret or sympathy, to the wildest and most clamorous lainenlulion. It is constantly heard in their wailing for the dead ; and as each vowel can be drawn out to a great length, with a variety of tones and moilulations, it has often a singularly dismal and even painful elfect upon the listeners The word is also used l)oth as a noun, nicaning nonoH; rigrit, si/nipathij, ami as a verb, siguitying to yiienfor, to luimiit. S \ S T A X. ', 70. Most of the rules of construction have been anticipated in the jircceding sections. From the lack of inllcctions in these dialects, these rules are necessarily few and sim|)le. The following are the most important which ren»ain to be noticeil. V 71 Almo.st all the words in these idioms, which are the names of things, (|ualities, or actions, may be used at pleasure, either as nouns, adjectives, verbs, or adverbs, their acceptation being deter- mined by the context and the accom|)auyiug particles. In Snniimn, »<' Imvc, (or exnnipl'.', f'li/iif'ii/ii, n fonthcr, — iin fiiliifiiltt lin iiiiihk, llinl liirrt is IriilhiTi'd : mimii, nm*m\\U<,—i<" iiiiniii /«• V. IH'i'iiliiirily <>r III)' I'lilyiii'iainii Ihii^jik-h : il' n ix'rxiii i'< n'Inliiiu tliiil lir liiicl cm mhih' iiorn- mull, lUiiwtil liiiifH'll 111 liiiii' ildiM' nil ncl, he vtiiulil miy "oiinii ti/ii hi Inn mi," " I j.i'ij III him," liir " I tiilil liiiii tluil il wiix I ;" llx' |iri>li|»Tly '//*", liiil i« ciniiliiynl iiOi'ii im ii mrn' wnrd ol' iilliriniilion, liki! imlitil, VI I ill/. AiiiillH'r iXMiiiiili' \* "iiiiiii III mill /miHi/i ii n niilnii '" '• »||>i liiix ii NlrawJiiil anioii^ you '" ulnri' im/i^ili-ir, <>!rii» liiil, i" iimiI im ii mirl ol' i'iiiii|hiiiiii| \rrljiil iiiljLt:- tnc, — who in iht' tliiiu'-hiiliitt ihtmhi aiiioii^ you t V 7'-!. WluMi tlii< iiiuniimtive to \\ vcrli in a pronoiiii, it rr*M|U(Mitly pri'i't'ili's tilt* vi-rli; wlicii it is u iimiii, il more foiiiiiiDiily CoIIowh. In the luttor case tlie uhiiuI tmlor of tlio wonU is — lirNt, \\w w\i,\\ of tlie tciiMc, or uHirinativf purtu-jo (or, in ils plucc, soini' coiijunctii/ii, or coniuTtiiiti ailvorl), or inti-rro^jativo) ; — secondly, tlio vorb; — tlunlly, thi- qualilviiiK ailverb; — fourthly, tliu verlml tliroctive; — fifthly, the locative parlifii' ; — sixthly, th»> rclalivo p.irliflo; — w^vonthly, the iioiniiiativt', with or wilhmit tlif artu-li; holore it. It hIiouIiI be olwerved, however, that the relative and lociitivo pnrticleH nro rarely used loi»etlu'r. 71 //(//;" riMi iiiiii lilt II iitiiii, Maw., (ioil is very 'iii(iry ; mi Jul ntii in /limi Inijutti, •Snni., 'I (i-rt.iiii inaii Haid lh/, iiiiil tlicy >liall kill hiiii (tlii'irM il Nliall Im' Io kill him). A' 1 llrrnlii mi ia limfi Jiniiir, IIitinI hiitl wi'/cij .Idlm (llcriHrx it wn< to wize .lohii). /v iiioiii II Ion II fill iilii lilt nil iiili' iiiiliiii, virily I say niiln you, — hero all llml lolliiHa Inn i" I'liiisiiU'it'd as n iiiiiiii with ulili'li Ion a^'n rs, ami iIk' s<'iilriii'<' iiii^iht Ik n'liilrpil " truf is my saying' I" .M'ii ;" lli'' ri|«'lilicii' cpl'iiic nn, fur I, in llic latlir [part ol' lilt' iHnilciir't' is iiirri'ly li>i' ('in|iliaKis, anil iiiijjhl lie ilis|ii<>ii Icir tr milt u Ir «», nr ti> If no mm, tin' iliiii^i iil'ih)! worltl |v, ^ 71 I ; lliJH iiiiilianioii iiCii wiiril wlii<'li will In' iiiiiliTntiHKl IVdiii III iittriii'linii i> mit uiiciiiniiiiiii ill iIh'm' Iiiii^iiiiuix). Ax an iiiniaiiii' nl' -iinkiii^ n'Miiililiiiini in liiniix ln'twti'ii Iwii wiili'ly W'lHiriiti'il iliiili'i'N, wc tinil lliiil in Siinimiii, ■■ ttliiil I Irll you," la IriiiiHlnliil «(('» mill I Im iilii in'r niihiii (lil. my |||IIIK>I In lill In yon), iinil in I liiwiiiiiin, " mIiiiI I hnvi' I'liininiiiiiliiil yoii, ' i* '"'" ""« i kniiuliii nln in itiilmi (my lliiiiKH ln," ho inertly wiys "tuiin," " wi; Iwo," i. e. we will jjo togetlHT. Til K Kd It M .\T KIN <• V Willi lis. i) 75. Words lire vi^ry (roquriitly formed l»y tlic du|iliciitioii ol 8in^;U' words. No mMicral rule, however, can lie ^iveii on tliis ]ioint There arc iiiaiiy wonls whieli are never douliled,— otiiers which are never found except in this form. Sometimes a noun by hein^ doubled bceomes an adjective; but frequently tlie duplication, whether of nouns, verbs, or adjectives, j^ives oidy au iiiteiisitive or fremientalive force [v. H 27. 1(1]. iSonietimes the doubled word has an en'irely diircretit meaning from the single. Kxampleii of lhc«e eases an-, — /n/n, Tniinn, oil, — lnliJnln, oily ; jxtkn, Rar., »lolH, — pokii/xikii, .ftony, I'ilnjiln, Sam., strong {Jil", — no meaning). Lugo, Sum., a lly, — liiffiiltitji), to lean ii|)on, i/»rf«, Toiig,, wiw, litiliibiilii, romiil. i) 76. A sort of adjective with a pa.ssive sense is formed from many verbs by prefixing ma. Samoan: sue, tn tear, — miimr, torn; sun, to H|)ill, — niiisiia, spilt; lii/n, to lixise, nuitiil'i, loosed, iriM'd. Toii(;an : _/"/(!, to strip, |Hfl, — miiji/l,i, strip|X'd oil' (as hark) ; ye/i, to break, innt'ctt, lirokeii. New Zealand: riiji, to |H)ur ont, spill, — iiinrhji, spilt; rrre, to go, depart, nuirerr. <;o:,e. liarotoiigan : veli; to lfHis<', to o|)en, — iiiiivitr, o|Hi|ied ; tjnm, to hide, maijnro, hidden. Taliitiuii: lu'ii, to o|)cii, — mulaii, ofieiied ; tarn, to loose, iiuitarii, luosetl. 291 I'H I LO I, OCi V. niiwniiiin ; h>lii, — as, iirrn, hot, — ■jmurrn, Itikewarm ; one nnd oin-jiii, sand ( jiii as n separate word means earnestly, strongly, intently) ; piilnlii, ol'one .source or origin ; piitiiki, till' trunk ol'a tree; pii-tnilni, a buridli' of the grass called Initiii. [This pii may 1)0 connected with thi' Tongan yi', Viti, rii ; v. ^ '.'(i.| Kii, — as, nkiri and kokiri, to throw ; jiihii and kii/iiko, curved. Hariilongan : Inn, — as, ninin, strong,— /id' hwao, lo strive; turn, lo help, — tnntnrny to minister to. Pn, — as, rnlo and nitnjin, within, inside; pii.ninniin, lukewarm, from mnniin, warm. Ilawii"",:: : nn, (perhaps from the collective particle kmi or \iii ; v. ^ 14) signilii's, in soaie coiMpoiinds, a t'tilU'ction, — as, nnlnitnin, a [MMiple, nation (from Iniintn, man) • niiinin, a cluster of caiux's ; nnninliin, a class of ancient gods; but it freipieiitly has no delinile meaning, — as. niint and nnniint, lo carry ; — iiii/ii and nninilii, to repent. O, ns iiiilo anil Diiiilit, lo twist; jiili, lo slick, Ix' I'lose, — iipiti, to I'ontracI as in the cramp. V'l. — as, iiiniini, giKvd, — jHiiiiniIni, t'orlimale, happy ; nni, bad, — jk)I)iii, alilicted ; pililia, crowded I'lose, narrow, — jxipililin, distressing, dillicull. y 78. In .some of tiie dialects the words emtij and lUflkult are joined in a peculiar manner to ttie verb, so as lo form in pronuncia- tion but one word. In Sanioan, these words are «.''',<''"*>'. ""d w^/, ilillicull : they are suflixed lo the verb and pronounced ivilli it, — as A//. wVi'i, easy to Ao, Jni-\inUi,\\i\n\ to do; sno-ijiilir, easy to eiiier. sno-ijnlA, dillicull lo enter. In Tongan, ii»sibly lie eoiineoted with i))itii. i 70. Ill compmind words tlio Polyiiositin diU'ers fioni tlio En<»lish in pliiciiiff tl»o ifDveriicil or iiiiulifyiiio; svurd last: iiistojid of sea-coast, it has coast-sea ; instoad of kiiid-licarted, beart-kitid ; instead of swift- sailinij;, sail-swift, \c. Snmoaii : lait-n/ii, hair (lit. loliiij^e ol" the head); sili-iilii, scissors (hair-ciitters, cr rather, head-cutters). Tiia-sivi, the back-lxnie, iiieans, therefore, not as in l'"n);lish, the IxMie of the Imck, hut the " hack of the Ixmes" — i. e. ot' the skeleton. Tonjia') : Miimivii-lii, lear (iillle-hnalh) ; /<'/c-/»»((X7/, pij,'-sty ; tiifiiint-tii-vmka, a mason (lit. artisan eiitlinj; sloiie, — or a stone-cutter). New Zealand: ni: sky increasing, and striking the great heaven." I, A N (J r A a V. tl F (■ K R K M O N V. \ 80. The Samoaiis are a remarkably ceremonious people, and very attentive to the foritis of politeness. This peculiarity appears in their languajre, which abounds in terms of salutation and compliment. Besides alofa, or lalvfa, (love,) which is common to most of the Poly- nesian islands, they have particuhir expressions according to the time of day : I'd iisii nidi, — is ihc morning sululation; Ud Idind nidi, — at noon; Ua a/d/d iiidi, — in the evening. 7V> PHILOLOGY. Uti mtii ! is the address to n person entering a house; and when ho tukcs leave, they say "c alii «•/" do you go? The words expressing thankfulness, ^fM/f/ff* and fiuimanu, arc used on receiving ony pa-sent, and usually accompanied by the motion of raising the article to the head. A native will not do any act, or s|>cak any word which might be considered rude or unbecoming, without first saying, vacanc ! which may be rendered " excuse me !" or " by your leave !" But it is in addressing their chiefs that the Samoans arc particularly careful to mani- (l^st their res|)ect by their language. There are many terms in the conunon idiom, which it is considered improper to employ in s|icaking to or of u |)erson of rank, and their place is supplied by other words of the same signification, which arc never used but on such occasions. Sometimes there are distinct words for the diflcrent grades of cliicfs, and those who are careful to speak the language correctly will never address a high chief with the terms appropriated to those of lower rank. Thus the salutation to a common man, on entering a house, is, as above stated, ua mai, you have come j to a tida-fak, or house- holder, it is ua alula mai ; to a low chief, to a high chief, to the sovereign. iia nialiu mai ; ua susu mai ; ua afio mai. Afio, meaning to come or go (like «/») is u.sed also in s|)eaking of a deity ! uo maliu, gone, is used (iir all ranks to signify tlrml. In the speaking of the canoe of nn inferior chief, thi-y would say — ua silafia ra le van 1 is the canoe in sight? — of a high chief, it would lie, .la Utuhi^ia ea Ic vaa f 'J}>/d and to'it both mean to sleep, the latter of a high chief, the former for one of low rank ; — they arc also used for a parting sclutation in the evening, — lofd ina soi/ua, sleep, that you may live I Tausami signifies to eat, applied to a landholder, — tuumqfa to an inl'erior chief, and tautc to a superior. It is probable that the ilitlercnt words for sickness and dreaming in the following list, also appertain to dilVerent ranks. arm to come, go son daughter belly head to bathe wife dream fii(;e, eye sick hair to dream ; vision in good health llOUSC to come, to go ; dead CEKEMOSIAU COMMON. Alio lima Afio; iilala alii Ah tama Alo/iifine ajiifinc Alo maiidva Ao; litiji vlii luuimiilu 'au'aii Fiilcliia avd Fnlepo mili Fn/ntja Vllltll Fiiatiifa; yasnjase tiiii'i Laii-ao; UiH-la^i liiu-iiht LVii mili MiUiifitiifi miiliio Mim/a fide Miiliii ulii ; oli POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR. 287 CEREMONIAL. COMMON. Mdleifita (da I'idi/piiliisi maH U(i jmduyia mat ua (iMa mni Sisita ; passive, silcijid mutamaUi, ilua Ua mitlia tnai ita 1ISH vuii Soga tauliia Soisoi ata Siisil stiu, idit SoifiKi ola Siiafa ijfoti Tdiiid Jitse oil 7}t'tiMo sasu'c 'Jhisd ita Ib'u; tofd moe Taiisftmi 'ai Ttiumafa « Tiiiite (( TiiuUi, pass. taultiyia viataviata, ilai Tulei Uiiatfti'i to awake sick evening salutation to see morning salutation servant to laugh to come to live name to kill to disperse anger to sleep to cat to see to speak The dialect of Tonga has also several words of ceremony, but not so many as the Samoan. Some of these have synonyma, whicli arc especially used in addressing the " divine chief" Tiiitoiiga. The following list was obtained from two high chiefs of Tonga, Tidiou TaiiUd and Tuboii LiUU;e, whom we met at the lAjejce islands. It will be seen that several of them are the same as the corresponding terms in Samoan. CEREMONIAL. TUITOSOA. COMMON. alio taka ua to awake alo foha son Joftnja Itnji ma/a face hiKifa hiijoa name Ho taitmafa kai to cat mdinuta tiika tio to see mea hacic halt, all! to come, go moiii Iclci well, not sick ofai h(da tiuite dead tojitatji biUiihi mahaki sick toka lojd moe to sleep III the other dialects of Polynesia there is nothing of this description. The Tahitiaii has, indeed, some expressions which arc used with a peculiar, metaphorical meaning, when applied to the sovereign. " His houses were called the aoriii, the clouds of licaven ; aniia tiia, the rainbow, was the name of the canoe in which ho voyaged ; his voice was ' thunder ;' the glare of torches in his dwelling was denominated ligliliiing, &c. When he passed from one district to another on the shoulders of his bearers, they always used ■ i 289 PHILOLOGY. the word miilixtii, siunifvinji; to fly."* This lif^'urnlivc stylo of sjionking is not the same with the ocrenmninl tlialcct of Snmon and Tonga, though both may Imve originnted in the same Ceding. It is, however, a point of interest to inquire whether there are any traces in the dialects of 1-^stern Polynesia, fmni which we may infer that the lanj^uage of dcleren<'e was in use pri'vious to the departure of the Tahilian and other colonists. A careful examination shows till! existence of many indications of this sort. The word fri/'()ijti(xi,&!.c., — "whose image and su|>erscription is this?" Li'a is ihc Samoim word of ceremony l<>r to i/rmm, — a visi')ii ; in Hawaiian, it means to Ihinh, ^xtiidrr. Soisoi is to laiigli; in Hawaiian, lioihni means jilmsal, gratifud, ji»ltiil. Soi/a, sijiiiifying the servant of n chief, is (x-r- haps the origin of the word //mw, which in .New Zealand tneans the lower class of jieople, and injd, which, in llarolongnn, signifies a tenant. Ttiiiiiiiijii, in Samoan, is to rat, said of a common chief; in Tongan, it is applied to Tiiiloiiud, to whom divine honors are rendered ; in Hawaiian, taiimnhd is a sticiijicc (i. e. the food or eating of a goolie for ?nate, dead, iSiC. Some have Iren adopted from the neighboring Paumotuan, as riii, night, from ruki, dark ; /f«c, six, from henr ; arar, moon, from katcake. It is evident that but fiir the rule l)y which the old terms arc revived on the death of the person in whose name they entered, the language might, in a few centuries, have been completely changed, not indeed in its grammar, but in its vocabulary. Of the ten simple numerids, live are ditlerent from what they were in the time of Cook, — as : ORIGINAL FORM. PRF.SKNT FtlHM. tahi faJii one Tua pili two tarn torn three ha viaha f"our nma jxie five OHO Jene SIX hitu hitu seven ram van eight ira iva nme ahiiru ahum 73 ten ESSAY A LEXICON OF THE POLYNESIAN LANGUAGE. As in the precediiif^ Grammar an attempt has been made to deduce, from a comparison of the various dialects, the general princi[)lus of the primitive language to which they owe their origin, it has seemed proper to complete, as far as possible, the view of that language, by bringing together, from the 'iitlerent vocabularies, those words which, from the fact of their existence in several dialects, may reasonably be supposed to have formed a part of the original Polynesian idiom. It is evident, from the n.iture of things, that such a collection caiuiol lie complete, and that it must be liable to errors. Some words may be found in two or three dialects, — as, for example, in those of Eastern Polynesia, — which never formed a part of tlie primitive tongue, i)ut have come into use since the separation of the Tahitians from the original stock. On the other hand, each dialect has, no doubt, pre- served some words of the parent language, which have been lost in all the others, and which we have, therefore, no means of distinguishing from such as are the peculiar property of the dialect. Our materials, moreover, for such a work, though probably mt)re ample than any that have been before collected, are yet very imperfect. When com- plete dictionaries of all the dialects shall have been formed, no doubt the number of words common to all, or to the great .'r number, will be materially increased. It is believed, however, that this Lexicon con- tains the mass of those vocables which constituted the jirimitivc wealth of the Polynesian speech. It comprises the terms for all the most common objects, ([ualities, anil acts, and would probably furnish a r 292 PHI I,() LO(J V. i sufficient vocal)ulary for the purposes of ordinary intercourse among a scnii-l)!irl)arous [»oople. The plan of tlie Lexicon will be readily understootl on inspection. Tlu^ primitive or radical form of the word (or that which is considered to he such) is first ^iven in large type, and then the variations in form and meaning which occur in the dilferent dialects are added, together with the most important derivatives. Some difficulty has been found, occasionally, in the determination and arrangement of the latter, and it is not likely that in all cases the disposition which has been adopted will be found to be correct. Some words may have been referred to a common source, which are really from ililferent roots, and, in other cases, the thread of connexion uniting apparently distinct terms may not have been perceived. In many instances, it will be seen that the primitive form of the word is not found in our vocabularies, but has been ilcduced from a comparison of the variations. In such cases, a note of interrogation is affixed, which must not be understood, in general, as implying a doubt of the correctness of the deduced form, but merely an uncertainty with respect to its actual existence. Thus, for example, we have in Samoan .sfV, meaning "to lift up," and in Tongan ftiki ; the former dialect has no k, and the latter no s ; hence there can be no doubt that the original form of the word was siki, v\hicli is, accordingly, given in the vocabulary. The dialect of Fakaafo, and probably al.so that of Niua, have all the elements, and a full vocabulary of one of them would therefore be extremely desirable, as it would probably present us with most of the words of the Polyne- sian language in their primitive completeness. Thus, in Samoan, saa, and in Nukuhivan, haka, signify "to dance;" the ground-form must therefore be saka, which is accordingly found among the words obtained by us at Fakaafo. The brief vocabulary given by Schouten of the language of Cocos Island [Nina-tahu), the first ever published of any Oceanic dialect, affords us, in the word for " beads," or rather "necklace" [casoa), the original form of the Samoan asoa, and the Tongan kahoa. In some few ca.ses, however, the radical form is really doubtful, tlie variations not being such as to give a clue to the word from which they are derived. Thus holio/m, which, in the dia- lects of New Zealand, Tahiti, and Hawaii, signifies " deep," may be a corruption of xosoiiu, or oi fufonu, either of which would, in those dialects, assume that Ibrm. In some instances, words of the Vitian, Ilotuman, and Tarawan dia- lects (all of which are partly of Polynesian origin) have been intro- P O L Y N E H I A N L K X I C O N. 203 duced by way of illustration; but it did not entor into the plan of the work to make any reference to other lanfjunges of the Malay family. Had this been done, many terms which are liere given as primitives, would have been referred to still simpler roots. Thus there is little doubt that the words mahnlii, sick, viatnkii, fear, atul atun, god, are derived from the Malay sakit, laknt, and tiihan. In the Lexicon, however, the Polynesian is regarded as a primitive speech, and the simplest form in which any word occurs in it is considered the ground-form. Thus, in our own tongue, the root of tlic word lUsrern- menl is not properly the Latin ccrno, but the Huglish disarii. Less attention has been paid to the particles, numerals, and pro- nouns, than to words of otiier das.ses, as the former have been already given in the Comparative Grammar, and their nature and connexion more fully elucidated than would here be possible. It will be sulFi- cient, therefore, to refer, in each case, to the sections of the Grammar, in which these explanations will be found. The abbreviations employed in the Lexicon are such as will be easily understood. Fuk., Haw., Mang., Nuk., N.Z., Pan., liar., S(nn., Tah., Tahii., Tar., Toiig., signify, respectively, the dialects of Fakaatb, Hawaii, Mangareva, Nukidiiva, New Zealand, Paumotu, llarotonga, Samoa, Tahiti, Tahuata, Tarawa, and Tonga. L'biq. (for ubicpie) means " throughout Polynesia," or, in all the dialects, (of course, with the regular permutation of letters, as given in the Grammar, ij 9.) Sa?n. et cat. (Samoa et ca'tera) signifies "the Samoan and the rest of the dialects." Pron., adv., prep., part., stand for pronoun, adverb, prepo- sition, particle. The mark (qu. .') indicates that the origin, or mean- ing, of a word is doubtful. 74 r L V N K 8 I A X L K \ I (' N. r- Ai Tiili. Knr. Miin;;., n |mrticli> pn lixi'cl lo riouiH anil |>riiiiiitins. ((iniiii, ^ II.) A, |irc|),, dl'. ((irarii. § I".) A, N.Z. Haw., cdiij., and. ((train. ^ •1'^.) .1, jiion., what .' ((irani. ^ rJ.) A, \.'/,. Tall. Iliiw., an i'.\|ir<'rii\-^. Uar.. <('(), Sam. Tall. Maw., lo leaeli, iiislriii-l ; d/.n, .Niik., to adinil a ^H'rson into a elass or society. Akil iU, ii'i'< Sam. Tall., needle, pin; iikii, .Niik. ,(/'«, Tall. Iliiw., till' snord- lisli, j.'ar-lisli, vVe. Aid, Sam. Haw., iini, 'I'ali liar. Mang., ((((, Tong. Nuk., awake, wnlcliful. Auil, Haw.,'/n'(, N.Z. Mang., toobstrurt, liiiiiler, op|)os<'. Alllld, Sam., to come, used only in s|M'ak- ing of a chief; ahiliii. Haw., lo eon.se. crate, to n-nder sncred by ooming in contact with some .sacn'il object. Ale (ipi. f), liilf, Sam. Tikop., to congb ; Inn-, .\. '/,., to groan. Miilr, (law., nuire, N.Z. Tah., mariiiat, Nnk., to raise phlegm, c.x|)ectorntc, cough. lliiiin; N.Z. Tab., iiavarr, Rar., siiittte, phlegm ; (ipi. siiu-nlr, liquid ofci igh- ing AMo, Sam. Ilnw., rlelo, Tong., arrro, Tnh. Uar. .Mang. ; rm, Nnk.. tongue. Allki. I-'ak., ((//■/, Sam. Haw., tiriki, Rar. Pan., iiri'i. Tail., riki, Tong., anki and iikiiiiki, .Mang., tiik< and luikniki, •Nnk., a chief, noble; ariki, .N. Z., n chief distinguished from other chiefs by n |K'cnliar sacrediiess of character; I'liii/i'i, Sam., a high priest. Alo, Sam. 'I'oiig., to paddle, to fan; Haw., to swim, to make the motion of swim- ming. Alo, Sam., the inside ; also, in sjienking of a chief, the belly; Haw., the front, face, breast, belly ; (iro, N. Z. Tah. I \ POI, YNEStAN I, EX ICO \. ',>9r> Itor. Mniig., no, Tong. Nuk., Iliu triint, liiiT, |iri'iu'ii()', Alu, Sinn. Tkiijj., iki (nr i|ii. ), Nuk., to g(i; ii/o, Tung., til liiiiit; urn, N. /. Tiih. Knr., niiin/n, llnw., to I'ullow, |itiiNiie; iilnu, ti/i/, llnw,, to oiiniliiiiu I'lir miiliiiil a«»istiiiK-(', lo lii'lj). AlH, llnw., to H'liix, Im' Iikmc, liiin;; ilnwii ; iininni, llnw., tanrnurii, 'I'lili., Iihisi', Hinck. Ariiiiru, N. /., ii siniill liiiii(l-ni'l. Atnn, llnw., aiiKtnui, Sum., grievoil, Amo, iihiq., to ciirry on ilio slioulilcr; Ixiict', II biinlrii so I'lirriril. Amu. timiKiiiiii, N.Z. llnw., til ri'vilf, iibii*,-. Ana, ubi<|., n cnvc, ilcii. AflO, Tall., ilcKolali-; anonno, llaw., mili- tary, still, rrlircd. Ano. lUr., to wish, til Id! willing; xi, N. 7.., hakti, liana, Nuk., hnna, llnw., work, Intior, to do, to make ; nija, N. /., to bi'gin. Ayn, Tong., habit, custom, knack ; a>jsitioii, temper of the mind ; hnijn, .\. 7.., stutp, condition. •^y(^ (0, (ipnn^, Tong., n corpse ; heaha, henna, Nuk., the corpse of a huiiinn victim oirercd to the gixis ; hctina, llnw., the IhhIv of n person slain in battle ; n^njti, N. /., n human skull. Agaga, Sam., a spirit. Age, Tong., "iir, Sam., ne, Tab. llnw.. yonder, nsido (I! ram. ^ oh). Ayi, Hnr. Maiig., (//»vn/r, llnw,, a gentle lin TZe, lo blow Hol'lly. il/(//(i))/', Sniii. Tung. N./. Knr. Mnng., nnitti/,i, or iiiniiiiii, Nuk., tinifint, llaw., iniiliii, Tab,, f"v', Vili, wiiiil. Al), ubiij,, iliiN light, as ibsliiigiiisln d I'mni jii>, iii^bt ; lii'iici', ll rrnlnl wiirlil. as iljstliigiiislii'il I'ruiii Ibi'aiii'iriit iii^ibt, iiriliaiis; also, a rlnuil. [The urigiiinl imiuiiiig wns prolinbly the sky or vlsllilr lirniaini'Mi, iVoin uliirli, by iippiisiie Iniiisilicins, the two senses uf " liiilil" anil " cloud" were derived.) Aoiiiiili, .Nuk,, till' sun. Airiilrii, N /, I'aii, llaw., (dvi^v', Tnh. Kar. .Mnng. Nuk,, nomi (i. e. no-nlfii. broad day) ; mitin und tfii, Nuk,, daylight. AwiiLr, \. Z,, tiiuikc, Mang., the day niter to-iiiorrow (i. e. tin-nke, the dny iH'yiiml). Ana, Tall. Uar. llnw., to Imrk, howl. Apt, Sam., nhi, Tong., a residence, lodg- ing-plnce. Ahi, Tong., Iinapiiju, IJur., property, possessions. AplClpt, Sam., narrow, strait ; ahidht. Tong., crowded, ns n rond. Ase, Snm. Viti, a/ii; Tab., jiiitilie, Nuk.. ilialii, llaw., sandal-wiKid. Asiosio, Sum., ]>mthioliio, Tah. Haw., n whirlwind. AsO, Sam., ii^.,'//'-f/Ai, Knr. Ilnw. Niik., (iii-itiiiilii, Tiili., Hiiiok)', I'/ni, miihii, lliiw., tuiiliii, 'I'lili., Ktonni, v]i|Mir (v. kiisii). A.ill, Slim., to liiilc wiitrr, til illp lint, to iMriirl; iiii, Maii^.,lo |MHir nut wiilrri iiliii, Niik., Ill lranN|iIiinl. Atu, iilil(|., II similiiw, rclli'ctiiiii, iiMii);i'; Tiih., n cliiiiil. I'li'iiiild, Slim., /tii-ii/i ili's|iJHr, intuit, ninlrniii (niiikr iiKiiillit iil >). /' ojii, 'ViiUK., Iiti/id, lliiw., Hiihiiiiii, N.Z., III till iilKiiit, III iniivi' Itir Imiiil over n tliiii)( ; Jiijii, Tiili,, to try, to ti'iii|il, '' '{/'i i\'iil(., Ill ■•liillir, rliilliiiin, — II liiin- illr wriipt ill rliith or li'iivra ; inilii. Haw., ir/i/,Tali., vai, Wnr., to wrnp ii|i, Hwntlii', ciivi'luiH', — II wra|i|K'r, shriilh, Fa/lP, Sam., Jrjir, I'lHit?., iniliif, N. Z. Haw., rnliii; Tah. Nuk., tvi/c, Kiir., I'lirl, liriwiKiil. r njllic, J^iiiii., /i/itir, Tiinji., wiihiiie, N. Z. I'liii. Haw., ?v(/i/)/c. Tall. Nuk., vainr, Uar., .Miiiii;., iii/ic. Tar., wo- liwiii, li'iiialr. t (ijo, Sam., i'v///H, \. Z. Haw., valw, Tah. Nuk,, tv/o, liar. .Mnng., without, oiitsjilr. rat, .Sam. Tonn., to iln, to uiiikr; ni, .Miiiif;., to n'fiiilalf, iliiirt, jjovitii. Miijiii, Sam., iilui, N. '/,., pos-siblc, loasi. iili', iiblc. I'liifiiiliiki, Toiijf., to imitnto, mimio, ilo nrooriiin); In; Jiiit'ni, Sam., Jiiila, .Nuk., to m(M-k,tli'ri(li', almsi' ; limtlini- lidi. Haw., to Iraw, vex, |irovok ^>'« 'o speak, toll ; /(((, Nuk., /idi, 'I Miiw., dki. Uar., to It'll, confess. 75 Fll/ti {!),/d'i, Sam., to pull il..wn, to di?. ulniy, — III extricate j Iraki, kmrnki, .N. Z., to pluck, hn'nk otl', pull up; lidi. Tall., to lirenk olf; Imi, uhui. Haw., to jerk, pull mil, break olf, or in piices, — III ileliver from Imiiilnxc ; Jd/iii, jMi/di, Nuk., dki, Uar., to pluck, to ){iilhi'r, as fruit. I' ilkl ( f), fit'i, Horn., fi'i, Tah., the plan- tain. r lull, lidi, lidrit, iVc, uliii]., the pnnilanus olIorilliHsilllllN, Fulnlil, Sam. Tong., Iiilele, Hnw., to lean upon. I'dKird, Tiih., nriird, Uar , to bi-ot upon, as the wiiiil, to strike n^'ain.sl, /' nil', Ihrr, Jur, iniir, hide, hare, nrr, uliii|., house, Faliki, 'J'onjt., imriki, N, Z„ arikiriki, Unr., hdlii. Haw., to spreiiil on the ^niiinil, to spread a m.il, to make a til Kir. I'ani, Tah., oriki, Uar., to receive, holil, contain, — a vessel tor holding liiliiiil.i, n iHillle. Fallllu ( !), Iidriiiii, .N. Z. Tiih., dnirii, Uar. .Miiii ' . hdliihi. Haw., a loud noise, the miriii); of the wind, tlic noise of siirt', .), Jit (qu. Jiia.'), Tah., vni.a, Haw., to ap|icar, come in sight ; mtilu- faijd, Sam. Tong., shore, bench (i. e. the front or edge apiKiiring to a voyager). Fayo ('), fa/aijo, Tong., to whisper, — fai^ofhifo, to blow tin; nose, also a (lute blown by the nose ; mtijo, N. A., a groan ; hano, Haw., the asthma. Fao, J'ajan, Sam., to collect things, and put them in order; fan, fajno, Tong., fao, Nuk., hao, luUian, Haw., ao, Mang., to put in, to fill up, to load. I' tlO, I'ak., a spike, a nail ; Tong., a [K-g ; hao, Tall., a nail, chisel ; hao. Haw., iron, a horn, r do, Sam. Tong. Nuk., hao, Tah. Haw., riO, Uar., to take things with violence, to plunder, Faxt, and fa/asi, Snm., to open, to bn^ak o[)en ; riU'i, Viti, to cut ; fiihi, Tong., wahi, vinnihi, N. A. Haw., valii, vaviihi, Tah. Nuk., rami, Uar., to divide, rend apart, break open ; Jiisi, Sam., a fraiiinent, portion ; fiihi, Tong., a class or division of men ; u-ahi, N.A. Haw., vahi, Tah., a part, (Hirtion. Fast, Sam., ]Hhi, jxj>rhi, Nuk., prjwhi. Haw., to strike, Iteat, kill. Pchi, Tah. Haw., pet, Uar., to pelt with stones. r (ltd, S'ma,/at(ila/fi, Tong., Tikopia, the breast, chest. Fdtd, Sam. Tong. Nuk. Tah., irata, N. A., atii, Uar. Mang., a shelf, seallold, table, altar, «5kC. ; hala. Haw., a ladder. r dtt, Sam. Tall. Nuk,, /f/«, Tong., irali. .N. A., hiiti. Haw., a/i, Uar. .Mang., to lireak ; /ali, Tah., tmti, N. /., all, Uar., to break and (lee, as an army ; /((//', Sam., ati, Mang., to break, as waves. Tr(/^V;j,'f(, N. A., aliya, Mang., hatimi. Haw., a (Vagment, piece. Fdtll, Sam. Tong. Tah. .\iik., to folil or roll up; /n a plume or (ly-brush ; ic(i/ii, N. A., to weave by hand, to work on a mat. i'rt/M, Sam. Niua, Fak., a .stone; Sam., seed, the heart ; Tong., the stomach (!) ; lintn, N. A., hail, howatii, slcme ; alii, Mang., seed ; hatii. Haw., a hard lump of any thing, the tongue of a bell ; poliatii. Haw., poatu, Uar. Mang., vatu, Viti, a stone. Faln-lilili, Sam. Tong., fatnlii, Nuk.. (Uiiliii, Mang., ii:(UUiri, N. A., patiri. POLYNESIAN I, K X I C O N. 299 Tall., Iiiiili, Haw., tliiindiT ((|U. lliiin- ilcr-lxill, sIdhv Ihrinrn /). r Cllll, Tiih., hiitii, lliiw., iilii, Uiir,, lord, Minster. r (XU, Sam. Tiini;. Niik., Iliu hibiscus lijin- 1 cells, II tree Irnm \vlios<' Imrk llie mitives make their twine; hence, to li<', to tiinil ; itii, .Mnng., to hind ; Jim, Tdiig. Fiik., iVdntlel, wreiilli for the heiid, cnp; Tiih., cup, helmet. Vail, Viti, the hibiscus, — nlso, the cinc- ture worn by the women, which is mndo from its hark ; Jiii', Kiik., pmi, Haw., the cincture worn by the women. FaU {>),f}iiifth in .sound and iiii'aiiiug, a ik'gree of resemblance which cannot Ix- considered accidiMilal. The same may lie remarked with re- gard to other words, such ns Jiisi and viisf, fell' and sele, fisi and fose, kapii and siijio, kiirr and lave, knie and soli, kikiu and iiS'i, I'lilii and miilii, iirkr. ]»ki; srki; and trl,r, jxka and lika, Iriiio and stiiio. It and ti, hia and piia, &c. This resemblance must be nscrilM'd to the natural tendency, in all languages, to ri'present similar ideas by similar sounds.] Fiudljnh, ii:\m. 'i'oiig,, lii>iai),irn, N. Z.. iiKiiKirii, Kar. Mang., Iiimmrn, Tah.. Iiiiiaiiaii, liintikdo, Nuk., will, desire. Fio (!), icin, N. Z., vivio, Mang., hiohin, I'au., to whistle; liin. Haw., eructa- tion, — hiiiliio, " to draw in tho breath as if eating a hot potato." FisU{]),Jih, Sam., hukc, N. Z., to lake food out of an oven ; liuf. Haw., to unload a ship. T Ufa, fufula, Sam. Tong., huhua, Nuk., to swell, swollen. r ull, hurt, hull, uri, hid, ubi(|., to turn or roll over, — upset. Fulu (?), J'ufulu, Sam. Tong., vuluvulu, V'iti, pulu. Haw., to wash ; pupu (qu. puptiu /), Nuk., to rinse. Fulu (\), fulufulu, huruhuru, hultthulu, uruuTU, huuhuu, ubiq., the short hair of the bmly, fur, feathers. 76 Fulu, ten (Gram. ^ 30). /' USt, fusifusi, Sam., to bind, to tie, as a bundle or sheaf; hui, N. Z., to gather, — huihui, N. Z., hui. Haw., to unite, assemble ; huilahi. Haw., girded, l)eltcd. l^uifui, Tong., a flo<;k of birds ; huihui, Ilaw., a bunch, applied tu vegetables; hui. Tab., ui, Rar., a company, class, sign of plural (Gram. § 14); lahiii. Haw., rahui, N. Z., a company, a collection of [)eople ; kiiliui, N. Z., n flock, a hero ; Nuk., a bunch of fruit. FuSU, Sam., fuhu. Haw., Ix>xing; a pugi- listic contest ; huhu. Maw., angry. Futa, Tong., to boast, vaunt,~-/emufuta, to strive together, contend ; muJuUi, Sam., mtJtuta, Tah., to rise up; ma- huta. Haw., to flee away. Futt, Tong. Fak. Tikopia, vutuU, Viti, banana. 1' Uyo (?), vupo, Viti, a child-in-law, — vet- ruijoui, the relation of child and parent- in-law. Iluijoni, N. Z., Nuk., ngoai, Rar., hooai. Tab., huiioai. Haw., a parent-in-law. Uundoya, N. Z., unnija, Kar., hutioa, Tah., hunona. Haw., Nuk., a child- in-law. H By referring to the Grammar it will be seen that the letter h is not one of the ori- ginal elenienl.s of the Polynesian speech, but is a variation either of s or f. A few words, however, must be given under this initial, until further investigations shall de- termine to which of these radical letters (s or/) they properly belong. Hererei, Pau., erri, Mang., eei, Nuk., cocoa-nut. Hohonu, N. Z. Tab. Haw. Nuk., oonu, Uar. Mang., deep. 302 PHILOLOGY. L» ■ I Hoko, \. Z. Niik., hon, Tnh., oko, Knr. 1 .Mnng., tu buy and sell, to trade. Holua, Haw., to pliilc down hill on n sledge : home. Tali., to swim in the surl", to flojit. Hope, \. '/.. Tnh. Haw. Niik., ojh; Uar. Mang., end, exireniily, hinder part. HcupO, Niik., riujio, Mang., the heart ; /lOiijM, Haw., the thorax, the region ol" the heart, — palpitation of the heart. Huhu, N. '/,., till, Kar., a moth ; hii/iii, Nuk., an insect of the bee kind. Hukahuka, N. Z., to last, endure; uka, Mang., firm. Hume Pau., a girdle ; mnlo. Haw., to bind round the loins as a girdle. Htimu, \uk., to bind tight ; Haw., to sew cloth, to fasten together. Hupo, Haw., hitj)fliHjx; Tall., savage, barbiirous, ignorant. HulU, a species of tree, — at Tah. and Nuk., the Barringtonia speciosa ; at N. Z., the Phjilocladus trichoma- noidcs. I /, a particle prefixed to the accusative case (Gram. § 22). /, part, sign of past time (Gram. § 52). /, prep, in, by (Gram. § 23). la, pron., he, she, it, &c. (Gram. § 39). Ifi, Sam., Tong., to blow with the mouth. Iji, Sam. Tong. ilti, Nuk., a species of chcsnut (see lata). Ika, i'fl, ubiq., fish. Ike, Nuk., Mang., »V, Sam. Haw., ikcike, Tar., mallet used in beating out bark- cloth ; ike, N. Z., to bruise bark. Da, Tong., ini, N. Z., ia, Nuk., iliia. Haw., a mole, mark on the skin. Ih, Sam., iri, Vili, ii, Tong., a fan (see lalii). Ilo, Sam. Tall., to know, perceive, see. Ftikdiln, Tong., fa'iii/o, Sam., to show, announce, U'loken ; hooiiiilo. Haw., to predict evil. Faktiil(»i»a, Tong., fit'ailinigu, Sam., iikaiio, Kar., akairoiiga, Mag., htxii- Iniia, liuiloiiu. Haw., a sign, token. mark, trace; uakaiio, N.Z., to carve (i. o. to murk). Ilo, Maw., iri). Tab., io, Nuk., a maggot. Ina, if, lliat; sign of conditional and sub- junctive moods (Gram. § 53). IlUl, ubiq., to drink. lyoa, .Sam. N. Z. Rar., hima, Tong., ikni, iiioa, Nuk., inoa. Haw., ioa, Tab., name. Io, Sam. Tong. Fak., yes ; 1 law., true, R'al. IpH, Sain. Nuk. Tong., a cup; Tah. Mang. Haw., a calabash, a cup. Istl, ihii, ill, \\hu\., the nose. Ita, Sam. Tong., niaita, makilii. Hat., anger, angry. Iti, ilili, Sam., ili, ti, Tong., iti, Tah. Haw. Nuk., gili, Rar., small; itiiti, Mang., child, infant. Teiti, Haw. Mang., a child ; toili, Nuk., a boy. Kiiiti, N. Z., oili, Rar., haiti. Haw., narrow. K Ka, V(, verbal particle. (Gram. §§50,53.) Kafa, \ifii, kiilui, 'aha, kaa, ubiq., (ex- cept N. Z.,) sinnet, or cord braided from the husk of the cocoa-nut ; 'aha. Haw., a prayer supposed to be strong in holding the kingdom together, as sinnet is strong in binding; kaha, Nuk., a charm or spell, N. Z., strength, power, — strong. Kafika{l.), kaldka, Nuk., ahia, Tah., oliia. Haw., native apple, — (cugcnia Malaccensis.) POLYNESIAN LEXICON. 303 Kafu, Niun, knfii, Tori};., 'nfii, Snni., kiihii, N. '/.. I'mi. Niik., lam, Riir. Miiiig., '(//;», Tiih. I law., rlolliiiifi, — III clollic ; l,), kdilm, Tong., kein, Kar. Pau., eitt, Tuh., td/uic, N. Z., to steal. Kaka (?), <«/, Tah. Haw., to insult, defy ; VKikiikii, Nuk., allronting, vexatious, annoying. Ka/ii, N. Z. Uar. Mang. Nuk., Wi, Tah. Haw., the neck, — properly the na|>e of the neck. Kala {>), kakdla, Tong., kdkdrd, N. Z. Mang., kakaa, Nuk., iila,ddla, Huw., fragrant. Kala (?), kara, Pnu., ara, Tah., a/«. Haw., a pebble, a smooth, round stone; krd, Nuk., a stone, or stone pestle. Kalae.a{i.), kmwa, Nuk., araea, Tah., d/dra, Haw., red ochre. Kalajau, Niua, dldjiui, Sam., fau. Rot., the check. Ralaya, Tong., to cry out, to shout; 'dlaijti, Sam., karam, N. Z., to call, to summon ; kdraga, Kar., to call, to numc. Kale (?), kdrc, Kar. Mang., «yf, Tah., ale. Haw., wave, hillnw, undulation of wa- ter ; ktirc, N. '/.., kackdc, Niik., reflec- tion of light from running water, glancing, flashing. Kah (!), Id''dli, Sam., the spatlio or sprout of the cocoa-nut ; hakdri, Vixu. , lui'dri, 'J'ali., dkdri, Kar., the cocoa-nut ; ha- kdii, \. '/.., a feast, — al.>(o, biids'-eggs. r(K's offish, .seed, &C. halt, 'i'ong. Vili, dli, Sam., a wooden pil- low. KallOt (?), karioi, Pau., to sing and dance ; arioi, Tab., a class or society of per- sons who passed their time in festivitiDS and the practice of debauchery, under the .sanction of religion; kdiui, Nuk., a p<'culiar class of people, under cer- tain restrictions from the tabu; karioi. Mang., iniinoilcst. Kalo, Tong., to turn aside or parry a weapon ; hilokdhi, to shake, as the head; «/o, Tah. Haw., to dodge, to elude the stroke of a weapon, to move out of the way ; ahxilo, Haw., to turn this way and that, as in fear. Kamo, Tong., kdkaiiio, N. Z,, dmo, Haw., to wink. Kakdiiio, Tikop., a flash of lightning. Kamo, Mong. Nuk., to steal. Kanae, Tong. N. Z., anac, Sam. Haw., a s|)ecies of mullet, Katiapa, N. Z. Kar., anapa, Tah. Haw., kddjHiapa, Nuk., to flash, to shine forth. Kano, Tong., 'diio, Sam., the inmost sub- stance of a thing, the kernel, flesh : 'aim. Haw., meaning, signification, moral quality, character, likeness; kdkdiio, N. Z. Nuk., kdnohino, Mang., anoaim. Haw., seed, kernels. Kdno o he mata, Tong., boll of the eye ; kanuhi, N. Z., the eye ; rniohi. Haw., ball of the eye. Kaya, N. Z., to swear, to curse ; anaana, 304 PHILOLOGY. : '.'\ : '.n How., sorcery, a prnycr to procure the death of a |)erson. Kao, Unr., no. Haw., to sprout, to put lorlli leaves. Kaon, Riir., tun, Tah., to crow as a cock (Se, Tuh., to assail, insult ; kiipe, N. Z., to sin, to transgress a law. Kape, Nuk., Uar., k(il>c, Tong., e, Sam. Tuh. Haw., arum coslatum. KapU, Mang., to enclose, contain, — a cup, vase ; kapii, Uar., apit. Haw., a cup; kfipiik'ipK, Nuk., to take up water with a cup. Apu-lima, Snm.,(ipii-rim), kelckclc, Tong., eleele, Sam., earth, soil, dirt ; kiica, Tong., elia, Sam., dirty, stained with earth. Kerekcrr, Kar., creere. Tab., e/ee/c. Haw., keekee, Nuk., black, brown, dark- colored. Kelt, 'fli, keri, 'eri, kei, ubiq., to dig. Kemt, Mang., to depart, disappear ; emi. Haw., to retire, subside, ebb. Kese (?), '«(•, Sam., kehe, Tong., ke, N. Z. Rar. Mang. Nuk., c. Tab. Haw., dif- ferent, other, — strange, foreign. Keta (?), ketnkcta, Rar., eta or rtiteta. Haw., foul, gross, filthy. Kcle, Rar. Mang., ^ete, Sam. Haw., a basket. Kete, Tong. Viti, the stomach, the belly. 77 Ketl'l, Nuk., to jump, to jerk, to e.xcavato with a sudden motion ; kctii, Tong., lame, to hobble ; ctii. Haw., to root, as a pig ; kelii, N.Z., to displace a corpse; ketii, Mang., to seek, search for. Ketl, Nuk., Rar., keiikeu, Mang., ciieii. Haw., to move, agitato, excite. Ell, Sam., to remove, as a mote from the eye. Kcii, Nuk., eii. Haw., mischievous. Ki, 'i, ubiq., to, towards (Gram. § 21). A7, N. Z. Rnr., t. Tab., full. Ki, Mang., t, Haw., to speak ; ki, N. Z, Rar., to answer. Ki, Tong., to whistle, chirp, squeak, — as birds, rats, &c. Kia, 'id, kc, conj., if, that, — sign of con- ditional and subjunctive moods (Gram. ^ §53). Kte, Tong. Viti, 'ie, Sam., mat ; kie, Mang., ie, Tar., sail of a canoe (com- monly made of mats). A7A'0, N. Z. Mang. Nuk., to. Haw., flesh, meat. Kilt, Fak. Tong., kiri, N. Z. Rar., iri. Tab., Hi, Haw., kii, Nuk., skin, bark, rind, — also, a lile or rasp (originally made of shark's skin). Kilikili (?), jV"'//, Sam. Haw., kirikiri, N. Z. Tar., gravel, pebbles. Kiln, Tong., 'ilu, Sam., a hundred thou- sand ; kill, Mang,, twenty thousand ; Fak., a large, but indefinite number ; ill. Tab., a million (Gram. § 30). Kinit, Rar., imi. Tab. Haw. Nuk., kiimi, Tong., to seek, search. Kimoa, Tong. Tar., imoa, Sam., rat. mouse. Ktnaki, N. Z., inaki, Mong., inai, Nuk., victuals added at a meal, as a relish to the principal dish. Kini, N. Z. Viti, kiniki. Tar., iviti. Haw., to pinch. Kino, N. Z. Rar. Mang. Nuk., two. Tab, 306 P 1111. O L O Ci Y. Hiiw., /.//■«, Pan,, liad; j«oi//«, Sum., nluiinlniililc, lintdul. Iiioinn, Shiii. 'I'uh., iiiiiimi, Haw., In ilctrsi, hale. Kiole (I), kiorc, N.Z. Mang. I'au., 'ialr, Sam. IIiiw., nil, mnusc. Kisi (I.), isi, Sam., other, ilillbrcnl ; kikihi, Tong., to opposf, clash, contradict. Kite, Tonj;., to view at n distanco, to per- ceive, discern ; kil<; N. X. Uar. .Mang. Nuk., iti; Tall., I hiw., to see, to know. AO, V), ubiii., a particle desinnatiiii; the nominative case (liraiii. ^ 17). Ao, the root of the pronoun of the second |)erson singular, dual and plural. Tor lUI the diiducts but the Tongan (Uram. Kg, N. Z. Rar. Nuk., 6, Tah. Maw., a sharp stick used in cultivating the ground ; hence, to dig, plant. A'', \.Z. Rar. .Mang., u, Tah. Haw., there, that place. Koakoa, N. Z. Mang. Nuk., moti, Tah. Maw., joy, joyful. Knje, 'o/c, kohe, knr, ^olir, ubiq. (except N. Z.) the bamboo. Ko/c, Tikop., kolir, N. Z. Nuk., a knife (origimlly of bamboo). O/te, Tah. arrow. Ao/? (?), ofi, Sam , to have space to enter ; ko/ii, N. Z., tu put in, to gather into ; koi, Mang., old, Haw., to collect, gather up. Koi, Rar. Nuk., oi. Haw., sharp, a point. Koka, Tong., V«, Sam., noa, Tah., a tree (ficus prolixa) from whose bark a brown dye is obtained for staining cloth; oil, Haw., " a species of woo in I. oLO(i V. Liia, I law., Ilia, Tnh., aiicred (pcrlinp« more oorri'dly lil iiikI rA, — s«! nii). ItOe, rar, nr, ul)i(|., livrclii'iiil. Luf'd, /ii/n/ii/ii, Ti)ii>;., Hal ; sii/ii/n/nlii, Siiin., /ii/iii, pii/ii/iii/ii/ii', I law., jxiii- fuuihii, Niik., jHirAm, Har., jMirahn- nihil, 'I'lih., rumlmriinilKi, Vili, lirond, wiilo. Im/ui, Haw., lo cxtcml, sprcail out, — to publish, circulatp j iii/iii, N. /., lo Bhow. Laja, Sam. 'rung., spots liuriit in llie skill ; Fak., a ciitaiieoiiM tliscaso, ring- worm. Lahlli (qii. ?), Haw., ruhiii, N.Z. Tali., aiiui, Nuk., to prevent, prohibit, re- strict. Lailai (?), mimi, N.Z. Tab., lahUnlii, Haw,, thin. LuKdH, Fak., Mail, Sain. Haw., iikaii, Tong., rakiiii, N. Z. Rar. Mang., rrtflM, Tnli,, akiiii or kaiiii, Nuk., A."nf«, V'iti, tree, wo.), rakiiriikii, N. Z. Mang., »y/'«. Tab., lo scrntcb, scrape; /iin. Haw., to feel after a thing. IMlO (?), laliiu. Haw., sahihiii, Sam., pu- ram, Tah., scattered j jHirarii, Nuk., broken to pieces. Lalt, Haw., rari. Tab., wet. Law, raro, ao, ubiq., below. Maiitiinio, Sam. Tong., moraro, Rar., low, not high. Lama, Sam., oww, Nuk., the candle-nut (aleuriles tr aba), hence, ubiq., a torch or candle. Maliimiilama, Sam. Haw., maramara- ma, Tah., maamaamii, Nuk., fitd- ramn, N. Z. Rar. Mang., mama (for maxima), Tong., ri/miirama, Viti, light, lustre. Malama, Haw., marama, N. Z. Tah. Rar. Mang., maama, Nuk., the moon. l^niiiiliima, Sam., to watch, »py ; wkj- /(("/((, Haw., lo obsorvP, ri'gard, obey, take care of. Lnntll, Sam. Tung., to chew, craunch ; liiimii. Haw., iiiiiii, N. Z. Mang., to eat Iragmenis, lo eat what is lell oftcr a meal ; iiiiiu. Tab., to eat, IMim, Sam., iit/iiinii, Viti, ran'. Tar., /iiiiiii, .N. '/,., Iresh water. Ann, Tiiiig., u lake. liiiiiii, .\. Z., a mixture, as grnvy. Laya, lulnfjn, Simi. Tong., raijii, riiiiipii, N. Z. Mang. I'au., /•»«/, ranm, Tuh., iiliiiiii. Haw., to weave, braid, Laya (I), iiriiii. Tab., akil, ana, Nuk,, light, not heavy; faint. Haw., to flool, swim on the water. Layatila (?), ragtUiru, N.Z. Rar. Mang., raii/ira. Tab., |X'tty chief, freeman ; Iniiiilila, Wuv., conqueror. Layi, rmji, laiii, tai, aki or ani, ubiq., the sky, heaven. Ilinji-marir, Rar., fair weather; N.Z,, mild, gentle, g(Mid-natured, Layo, Sam. Tong. Viti, rujii, Rar. Pan., run. Tab., »7((r«, N. '/.., nalo. Haw., mil), .Nuk., a fly ; luioiian. Tab., a gnat. Layona, Sam., raijmia, N, Z,, to under- stand, perceive. Laoa, Sam., Aocn, Haw., to lie choked. Lapakail ('), rajiakau, Rar., riiptuin. Tab., tajkiaii. Haw., ajHiiiu, Nuk., medicine, to physic. £.«/>// (f), wy)^, N. Z., to scnrch, look lor; liipiiUipii, Haw,, to collect to- gether, to pick up, as small slicks for fuel, Lapiivak, Sam., a mistake, slip of the tongue: lapuwate. Haw., foolish, worthless. Lasi, »am.,lalii, Tong., rnhi, N. Z. Tah., rai, Rar. Mang., great, large. RaveriUii, Tah,, ruverai, Rar., many. ! POLYNESIAN I. R X I (' <) N. :J0<) Jjdtn, Sam. 'run;;. Kiiw., ruin, S. '/.., Iiiiiic, (liiiiic.Hliriiti'il ; /(ixii, \'ili, (|iii('t, COIItl'lllt'll. Iiata (I), Tittn, a kind nl' Irrr,— nt Tnli., tiiscnrpus I'cliili.s ; at N. X.. mclnisi. (Icros roliiiNtn. ijdU, Id, Slim,, lini, loll, Timij;,, ran, N. '/.. Uitr. Mnn;;., I'aii. ; run, run, Tiili., Inn, lliiw., an, nil, Niik., iiilraii, mini, Vlli, Iciil', ti'liagc. Liiii-iilii, Sam., Idii-iiIii, 'I'oiil;., riiiirii, Uar., riiiini. Tali., rmimt, .Man;,'., Iiinolin, Wnw., iiiinlin, Niik., mlrn-iii- iilii, Vili, hnir (irihc lioail. Lini-nmUi, Sam. Tong., pyclasli. Imu, Tong., mirfncp, nn-n, — lau-lnhi, broati ; liiiiliiii, Sam., a plain, a tiililc ; riinriiii, N. Z., a plain; liiiilii. Haw., brimil, — liiumanui, level gurface. L(IH, Tiiii^., to It'll, (lismiirso, reckon; liiiiiin. Slim., s|)occh, wrmon ; liiiinn, ' Haw., rricnilly, Kix'lal, iiitimnU*. I Pariiii, Tab. .Manj;., jiriiii, Nnk., to 1 8|M'ak ; jki/iiH, I law., to lie, tell (also, hixxl, — lian-jiiiliiii, to iK'triilh : jnirii- jxtriin, N. '/.., to rummand. Lail, Tong., Jrlii II, Sam,, to pinch. Lau, Sam., nil, Tong., run, N. 'A., mlrnn, , Vili, a biindn'il; WM,Tah. Kar. Aliing., ' ««, Tabu., two hundred; Inn, llaw.,«(/, ! Niik., four hundred. (Gram. ^ 01.) | Land (.'), niiikii, Uar., Iixiit, Haw., »(w;«, , Tab., koiikii, N'lik., rittea, Viti, lo have, |H>ssess, obtain ; riiwii, N. ■'/,., ! possessions. | Lava, Sam., enough, indeed, c.vceedingly; ; ri/iv/, Kar., /«iv/. Haw,, enough; riiiva, I N. Z., a remainder, — to the utmost, — i e.xceedingly ; Iciii, Tong., thereupon, indeed. Lat'O (>.), /ii''nr(ir(i, Satn., tiirava, Uar., a lienm in a house, a rafter; kiitiva, Nuk., a round log serving as a beam along the front of a house. 78 Ldllilkdi ('), iiii'iihii, Uar., riiniiii,'\'i\\\., Iiiviiiii, Haw., nrnikii or iivnin, Nuk., lo catch IIhIi, — a lishcruiaii. Lave, Haw., nivi\ Tall. Kar., rniir, I'au., niT, Tong. Nuk., to take, to lake away. J-iivnii, Sam,, to protect ; run-. Tab. Kar., lo do. Le, ric, Sam,, kore, linrr, N. Z., knrv, knrr, Kar., oir, nr. Tab., olc. Haw., koe, Nuk., no, not. ((iram. ^ li:).) iifjll or rfn, Sam., rfn, Tong., rrlm, N. '/.. Tah.,/f/', Kar.,/(7i", llaw.,ry(//, .Nuk., ashes. I'inlin, N. '/.„ (luHl, — lo lly as dust ; jnirlin. Tab. Haw. Nuk., piirn, Kar., scattered, blown niHHit like dust. Helm, Tab., two hundred thousand ; Mm, Haw., four hundred ihousand. (Gram. Ll'i (>.), rri, Viti, lilii, Sam. Tong. Fok., good. Leka (.'), rrka, N. Z., rckanka, Kar. Mang., rciiren, 'l"ah,, Iciitrii, Haw., rcki, Viti, pleasant, delightful, joyful ; eku, Nuk., melodious, pleasing to the ear. Ttinhkiilekd, Tong., poca, Nuk., hand- some (a|)plicd only lo men); tunlinlrn. Sum., a young man ; tnnirknirka, N. '/,., a captive, a slav<'. Lek, Sam. Haw., rcre, N. Z. Tah. Rar. I'au., lo lly ; Mc, Tong., lo rim. Lrliii, Sam. Tong., lo drift away; rrrcn, N. '/.., to depart. ITclrlei, Tong., to run together, or in com- pany ; Jiirrrri, 'J'ah., lo meet. Wiikiirerr, N. Z., ([uickly, immediately ; nkarerr, Mang., thereupon, straight- way. Marrrc, N. Z. Mang., to perish, to pass away. Kiirere, N. Z. Kar., elelv, I law., a mes- senger. Letno, Sam., lo drown ; miilcmo, Sam., \ 310 V II I l,<) !,()(! Y. jMrrinn, Mnni;., ilniwnnl ; jhi/ciiio, lliiw., Ill Kink iiilK llir wilier; piiiiiiii), Tnli,, jui mil, N'uk., »li|>|Hry. Lemii, '('"111,'. Viii, lliiw., ilir l)iiiiiM-ki rtiiiii, \. Z. Kar., llic skirt ol" a gar- lllrllt. Leifd. Sam., mil, Tung., nua, Unr. Vili, /run, I law., /m. Tall., inn iillil (A((, \iik.. Iiirmci-ii', — yi'll.iw puiiil. Jli ii'i, \. '/,„ till' scrri'lioiis Ml' the cjc, — rrwinmi, a Nrllnu lily. Leo, .Sam. Tdim., to wak-li, j-iiard. Leo, Sam. Tung. Iluw., ini, S. '/.. 'I'ali. Knr., voice. Leu, Tcin^., lo »|K'ak ; nko, I'aii., Ian- giia^.-. ijepr, Wiww, ijxijif, Niik., Ilio I'liiiil) of a riK'k. ; Lejm, I law., ;•'/»), .\. /. Tall. I'aii. ,«■/»(, ' Nuk., I'arlli. ilirl. Li I'll, Sam., mnclily, slngnant; Tcing., n LeU({\\i. .'),7""'»'",Tali., kiirtii, Uar. I'aii., kiieu, Nuk., cincliirc, dn-ss of tlio women. LeiI'd, Haw., siisjirndcil, iM'ndiiluus, — llio u|i|)or rcgicin of Ihc nir, — n flag, slrcnmiT; /(tk, Tali. Mang., tlic over, hanging firinnmcnl, — .Mang., a Hag, a trni ; reini, N. '/,., die cyilid ; ri'ii, Niik., lo droop, to hang down, — a (lag, — the red flesh hanging from a fowrs neck, &c. Lctfit, Sam., reva, Tah., era, ,\iik., a trt*;, the galaxa spnrla. Lt, Tong., lo tosa, throw, — Uli, to fling with liiree, — /iaki, to ca.sl nway, alxin- don ; ti//e or tulci, .Sam., to throw, lo drive, — //'«'/, lo root up; In', Haw., lo rise up, lo lift up, — hno-lri, lo cast away, reject ; nkiri, N. 7,., to throw, dan ; kirili, .Mnng., to turn, shako, throw ; kiriti, Kar., irili, 'I'ah., to lill up, to draw out; kokiri, N. Z., fo spring up i Dili, I law., lo am'end. (Stf aJNo (iti.) hi, Haw., til hang' liy llie neck, to slraiigle, — lilr, lo gird, liiiid aUiut ; ri, Uar. Mang., to lie, liind ; siih, Sam., tied, made liiHt : /((//, Haw., Inii, .Mang., til tie nil. Ilia, .Sam,, a dream, a vision, — used in speaking iif a chief; Haw., to pmider, medilate. IjUI, TiMig. Il:iw., ill, Nuk., a nil, — the egg of an insect. Liu (!), //"//((, 'I'ling., rilinriliii, N. '/.„ liiiii, M.'iiig., disagnialile, hateful ; liiilin, \'ili, limlisli, alisurd. Likil ('.), rikiirikii, N. 'A. Uar., nnrin. Tall., almiiiiiialile, Llliit (.'), liliii, Sam., giddiness, fear fnim U'ing on a height; tin, Haw., shaking or trenililing thriiiigh fear; rikii. Mang., Ill wake with a start. Iiiki (<), nki, .\. Z. Uar. .Mang., ikt, Tung., ikiiki, Nuk., ///, Haw., lii. Tall., iiiiiiii, Sam., little, small. Lii/ii, Haw., riirii, Tnli., lillle, piece- meal, liy hits. Ltll, lii, ii, uhiii., anger, angry. I'li'ii-li/i, .Sam., lo rebuke ; lui'o-lili, I law., lo ipiestiun with [lertness, to assume airs. Lllo, Sam., u secret ; Tong., to hide, con- ceal ; riro, N. Z. Uar. Mang. Tah., lilo. Haw., io, Nuk., to pass from one state lo another, lo pass away, — gone. Ii»l. LltlKl, Sam. Haw., rimti, Uar. Mang. I'uu., imii, Nuk., nimn, Tong., tiiju. Viti, riijii, N. '/.., hand, linger. Liiiiii, rimn, iina, iiinia, five (Urain. §30). Limil, rimii, imii, uhiq., sca-wccd, s<'a- moss, sponge. Ltno, Haw., rino, N. Z., a rope, cord. t . h P O I. V N K H I A N I, K X t C () N. 311 lillfl, Sam. 'I'oiin., ///)/, liiiiii, \,'/„ lliir,, t/'", Niik., iiiiii, lliiw,, tin, 'I'lili., Ii' IMiiir mil. I\lii/iiii, iiiiiriiit, miiiiiiii, iiimiii, |i(iiiri'cl Dill, lllllil^ll'll, Njllll. Jjltl', Haw., li/r, N. '/.., iiri/r, lliir., like. Lito, I law., ii/ii, N. '/,., a liiiil. Jjllt, 'I'liiiy., ;•/(/, MaiiL,'., /r//'", .Sam., fiiriii. Tail., mill, llai'.,tip lurii niiiiiil ; //////, Tiinj,'., Ill cliaii;;''. Nliiiii, I law., lo wliriil, turn iis a lup ; niii, Nnk., a thi, Tah., loi, Kar., toil, labor, fecblcnea.s from labor. Lo or toil (!), Inlnii, \'iti, to stoop, bow down (applied to women) in mourn- in;{ ; tiilou, Fak., Haw., /«/o/«, Tong., to sirtop, liond, l)ow down, Tiiioru, N. Z., to lie weak, inlirin j titrori. Tab., to stumble. Tall down. Loliii, Tong., a crook, a hooked stick ; loii, Haw., a hook. liOil, rmi, mi, iiliii|., lung, — also, much, very, exceedingly. Im-milt(l, Sam. Tung., rni-miila, N. Z. Itar. Tall., tears. lill/iO (!), /ii'ii, Sam., rii/,11. Tar., to come, 111 liap|ien, lieiiiiiie; rnhmi, Itiir., riKi- hill, 'I'ali., Imiliiii, I law., itkiJiia, Nuk., allecli'd liy, reailied, uvercunie by. Koko, N. '/,., Ill liiid. Loll, Haw., imi, \. '/,., til iiirn oyer, iiiiliilil, cliange. Loll, Haw., m//. Tall,, holulliiiria, bicho da mar. liOlo, Sam., the kernel ol' the uld cocoa. mil; the oil expressed Iruiii it, — liiliilo, lilt ; liJii, Tung., uil, iiily ; liili). Haw., riiro, N. Z., on, Nuk., the brain, — mar- row ; iKi, Nuk., llie con,' of breadrniil, sap. hilit, Maiig., til have the taste ol", to savur 111'. Vitkiiliitii, \"\li, /ii/(ii,'l\tnn., fii/ij/o. Haw., Iiiiiiro, .Mang., a pudding in which cocoa-nut oil is an ingredient ; roroi, N. '/.., a kind of pudding. IjOnil, litli)iiii,'\\m^„U\ press; lonii, Sam. ihiw., rumi, N. Z. Rar., onii, Nuk., to rub or pniss » ith the hand, to shampoo. Loyl (?), riii. Tab., aki, uui, Nuk., loijii. Viti, Ix-'d, couch. Loyo, Sam., niin, Tong., a sound, report, news; lono. Haw., n report, news, fame. lut'ii/iijio, iSani., Jiiniiijo, Tong., roijo, tcakiiroijo, N. Z., roix>, iikarum, Uar. Mang., loim, hnoloiio. Haw., fmirao. Tab., oh), ono, Nuk., ««, Tar., to lieor. Loyo, /o/«yo,Tong.,(|uiot, peaceful; holiuii- roijo, N. Z., to make peace. (S(«7o.) Loto, Tong. Haw., rolo, N.Z. Tab. Uar., olo, Nuk., the middle, cenlr<>, within. Liito, Sam. Tong., the mind, heart, dis- position. In other dialects it has this sense in compound words, as luto- 312 P H I L O L O G Y. maiUii, Ilnw., godcMionrtcd ; rnto-riri, Riir., iII-li'iii|H'rril, nngry-mimleil. Lnio, Slim. Tong. F{iir. Tnh. Haw., a liikf, jioiul. Lntixi, Sam. 'Pong., nn enclosure. (See d.) IdMo, Snm. Toiig., dtn-p. LotU, Si\m. Tiiiig., prnyer, religion. Lli, /ii/ii, Miiw., /•(/, ;•«/•«, nii, N. Z., ////», Snm. Tong., i/ciir, Tiili., to sliiike (act.), to scatter, to sow. naliihi, Tong., to shake, to quake. narncnie, Uar., earthqiiake. nuiiiiir, Tong. N. 7.., txioioi, Snm., naite, miiieiie, iirue, Ilnw.,
  • ri'luil>l<' lliiit till' iH'i'iilliiritii'x, Imlli in llii> liiiiuiiii;;rs iiiiil In tlii' |iliyMii'iil clinraclrrixlirH nl'llii' ('iillVr irilnH, iii'iy Iji- (liii' In mii.n' iiiliriiilMiiri' v»illi tlic ni inlilxiriii« llotlmtolit. 'I'liii liittrr an* miiil III hnvi! liiriiH'rly >M'i'ii|>ii'>l niiicli nl' tlir miintry mm in liiMiu'NHiiin III' till' liiriniT. UhIiiIimI liiniilits iiml IiiiiiiIh nl' thi'ni iiri' slill ((iiiiiil liy inivil. Irrt in lliiH rrKiiiii. '""I "f Mii|i|«iM'ii In Ih- llif ri'inniinli mI' ihc iiri;!iii!il |iii|iiiliiliiiii, nC mIiii'Ii ill)' ^ri'iiliT (iiirl liiii Ih-iii rillirr iili^nrlN li i> ilrivrii HoiilliunriU liv llir iiilvniii'in|r licinli'" III < 'all'rrH. III till' liill'mliiu viH'iilMiliirIrN, many nl' iIh' unriU iirr iml civin in lliiir siinpli' nr ItriHiiiil-rnnii, lull liiivi' II |iiirtirli' jirrfixi'il. This ii|i|H'iirH in itimc i'iiw'n In uliicli llii- Iwn nmnlwTH an- (jivin. 'I'liim llir |iriiprin of llif ninj^iilar kulii, iiiiil in llii> plnrnl vialii. Ah Ihrir pri-rivil |iarliili'» nrim liiki' llir an rnl, Il is, in many ciim'h, inipiiNNlliji' In ilislinunlsli Ihrm rrniii llii' ro'l, uillimit u iiiiiri' arriiriilr kliiivtli'il);i' nl' tlir lnii;:iia);<'H than wr havr the iiH'iint nl'iiri|iilrin;;. OIiIh' ('1111^11 anil Annnlii lnnt.'iii's, (jraiiiniar'. Iiavr Ihi'Ii imlilnhril Ity iho I'atliiilir inisHiniiarirK; Iml tln'V iiri' imt In Iw rmiiiil in iIh- llhraricH nriliis rniintry. ami iinr I'liili'avnri in nlilain ihrin I'miii Kiirii|N' Imvi' Imi'ii iinsin HNfiil, Tlii' |Ki)isi>H»i(in nrihfw- wiiiilil linvi' rnuhli'il uh tn cnrrccl any I'rnirH which may cxixl in onr vncaliularicN (if tliiwi' lannnii)!!'* i Iml llii'V arr iK'lirvi'il ihil In Ik: viiry iiiimrrniiH nr iin|i(irtanl. Snnio allnwanri'H kIiiuiIiI Ih' iniiilc liir llii' ilitli'rcni'rN of ilialrrt whiih iniiHt lie I'uuild in a ru^inii ol'mirh I'Xicnt n« that imcii|iIi'iI liy iIh'w iwn niilliuiK. lino. aiiviiii. Mllll kiiiiiiDir Dill u nil 11. Miiknnilo III III. sit III II II a II ihkunii iiimiliinir 111. 'I'akwaiii iiiii/unffi 11:11/11 tiiiiMioilHii, niiMi- muiia II .Masma iizimii (f) tizimii mmmiiiin 12. i^njiilli miihinu" It 11 III II iiioiDiiiinii 13. Nyaiiilmna jiikiffiiifn', froiii/m ilt/ii, rt'inuiHii U'lllltltllt (a.) Zi'ilii Slllllll, llli/ll I'Zu/ll iiidinlii., umtu (1..) Itlcliiiana miiniiiii l)i)i;oriino, nnuiro IHOHIIIIU 660 liyo Knmbindn Mundiolii Congo Angola BpngL-rn Makua Miuljana Mnkondc Tiikwnni Mnscna Solala Nynnibnna Zulu Bicliuana Eyo KandiinHa Minidjola Congo Angola B<'ngo, uitf.lo nant/adnii, ijuana ia/.o, luiia aba HEAD. oruo funUxntsi lu miDiuo molur soma, pitDilKi-sumlHi mii/ituc mi/ctie/i^i niiiliie osoma iiliic ohiimii-moe/ii iiiiini msiviic-kiiiaiiilKi mutni' mulienga iiiii/iir mafumii miisom mfiimu, mdm/ju soro or so/o grimi-ku/iiimandtn .soro, msolro Nvanibnna iiiatnam, rnyin iliimsi ifloko Ziilii ma, itii/oha, nnenn iijkosi rkiiiita Biclmnna tna, nia/.o khiisi ko/.n, l/.lof.o HAIR. KVE — EVEfl. EAR— EAHS. Kyo Fniij iiilifd cU Katnlilnda Isiiki tbsil — VDSU kulii — miilit Miindjola Vlfll — milt II — matijUi Congo tsiiki, mit.\i>iL'ii i/.sii — mimi kiifu — tnatii Angola zindemlxi lisu — maltsu ihtui — matiii Bengera kisdme tsu — odsu okiiliii — oattii Makua kdrdrii ; milti Itlu — mitu maiit — mdru Mudjana iim/jo dizit — mrzii ilikulii SOUTHERN AFRICA. 6G1 luia. r.tE— Kres. rAK— KARS. Mjikoiulc oliiiln — iiirho kulii — iiiiikiilii Takwiini mitlili di/ii — iiirtii — miini Mnsoiin msiiiisi, tstsi dixii — muau — iiiiikiilii SolHIn iMsi diiiii — iiiiilsii n ; it lie — iiiukiiliw Nyninbnna inlsiiii r/i/.lii — emii/.lii iisi IT — liiikivr Xiilii ifSiicli lino — amet/.h iiit/.lilic Bielitiaim miirir, morin lit/Jo Ixr'f Nme. MnlTll. rEETll. Eyo OIIIUI) fIlUt) •pi Kainbinda mlmngo una HUH II Mumljoln niai/idu nlfHlHlXIIU III III II Coiigi) >Niii/u/u HI II mill, ome/a lllt'lll' Angola moziilii kniioa iiui : II Bi'iigora ctuftnj omtra ')ii-»ii/ii .Miikiin jnila laiio, mnlakii miiiii Mudjnna hlpiila jHikuHoa ininu Mnkoiidc cmiila kaijirit menu Tnkwaiii miilii miiliniiii menu .Miiscnu mp'hitnH iiiidiiiiiii iiunii Sufiila biihuna nioiomo munii Xynmtjann iiiofo, iiioijfi) '■/»»«« ••minyii, mutiiiu Zulu impiiDiiilo inoloiiin, itiithniifi iziiiio Hicliuuna iinko iiio/oiiio, kuaiiu menu, mi no TONGUI. BEARD. xrCK OR THROAT. Eyo iigo uraliii llllllll Kiunhinda kizH-n fiiiiao Mtiniljolii lilimii iidtlii iiktii Congo luka, itdakti 'htvii, miuzi frmao Angola /iiiii, iliiiii iiiiiivii, tiiiiizi ;iiigo litMigcra ilimi, ekkah OiiMuiiie ■isingo Mokua hmi '■rori ••siko Mudjnna III I nut iideii liikozi Mnkondo dn-ii, crtlii i;u/u 'l\ik\vnni iin/iimi diiidilm ■•koti Mast-nn II hmi tidev' or iidevf kosiii .Sofala ilidiiiiii .kv' kozi Nyanitjana diniim iirdirju II kit/ II Zi'ilu iiilrvii, isilevii iiithimo Dicliuana tuUme levu 166 ihainn 662 PHI J. O LOGY. Eyo IIAXD. tm Kiimbinda kaiiiliise kaht Mumljola niion!!i> hik, liilnniii ( 'orij^o mo'iionito, miionsjola liikakii omai Angola ittionfio kiioku kimiimi BiMigera oni/tiiia rka oriijmi, oniiiialii Mnkua etuli iitata tij/aii, iiifa, u6 Mudjana nwaoiign, kiimtiima iliadsa liikoyi) Mnkonde tllOlliiO tllOIIII tiicilo Takwaiii oiluni koiiH m'llii Ma.«cna kntsii/t M;,' (!) iiiuleii»r Sorala Uii/sii/f Irillltll fiimiiila Nyambann i/./iiiia, ciii/i/nkii iivkn, iiiainkiii vcn^e Zulu uiiilfjiinn esiiiil/.lii. inytio, loin/no Bichuana mokiit)l/li iitf.lii loiiait llnnT. IIOKB. BLOOD. Eyo aija egu egV* Kambiiida MiMidjola makila Congo iiCti^imas iithuiido tliii^i snnii, me null Angola tnii^iiiiii ijiij'iiii meiia Bt'iigera iitimu ekipii Miikiia tiniiiiiiii uikura pomi, nikiimi Miiiijaim III III} mil miitzi Makomie hintllllil tnairofifrou tiiiailt Tnkwani tiliiiiii, miidi/ii tiinfiiWo muJovu Mnsona III lit i Dill , iiioio Jiijiii molofm Sofala utiiriiiiii /«P« niolnjHi Nynnibnnn rliii^ixi niarambu ii^ati Zulu flizii' rill III pi 1 inkiisi Bichuana julll /fSll/IO man' HKN. fjin — (uua. »VAKF. Eyo edi/f fpe f'lh/ii Kambinda Mundjola titrilhll In Congo tSll/tll ilin/i — iiuif.i tii/okii Angola siiii/i-iiiiikii/i rill — iiiiii m/okii Bungcra iiili — miiiidii Makua /flkii, liliuilftkn /I lit/ III — iiioli/i niHi Mudjana l/iilllliknlo iiiitziia (lii/okii SOUTHERN AFRICA. fifi3 IIKX, Eiiii — r.cifl». flNAKE. Mnkondo ei/iikii tfjiika Tiikn'nni Mascnii iihiikii tizae — nwc nzoka So (hill Nyiinibana ihukii-yfnua nut nth a — imiiii iitla iiii/oku Zulu iijknkii-kiizi ii/iiiilti iin/okn nicluiana koki< Isai tw/.a ox. TRKF.. ■I'.N. liyo amjii ei/i, ij-i oil nil Kuinbindn miiiiii Miindjola mpnJui w/ii/ji mui Congo iiiiomlii mi'iti imiim/i, kiiniln Angola iiiidnilri «JH/jI muani/a, kumlii Bcngcra on/:onihi uli iitdiii/u Makua eijnmpi, nari iiiiin iiSua, fulji'Ki MuHjnna ndijali vMrii /iutra, diiiira Mnkondo l/6mbi iitera didulm Takwnni liziia Masoiia j/OHllli tntili dziia Sofoln tiztia Nyombana timlriire, tihtima dinhi, cntji.Uiri amuiitii Zulu inko/ir imiti i/aiika Bicliunna koiiio iMka, sel/ilara ktsatse MOON. STAR. OAV. Eyo U^u rras') orsdij, edyii Knmliinda tigoamle Mundjola >it^-i'ii gKiDjHn knram&i Congo ns&nife, mbrji tdenilriihi kiliimhi Angola mhji ttilemlkm kizua Hcngprn ixKii, iitfke olomlmii!;iilti Makun mi(Ori ntoiilfxi, ileiifri ohiisd, otuiiii Mudjana miirti mionifmi mmzi, kuntai'i Makonde nifk'/fi dinotigoe Tnkwani mofri maliilo Mnsona twxzui sigati Sofala mofzi Nyambana goentle rliaisitrdi et/Jikimri Zulu iiii/apka inkiiin/tsi asiiko nii'luinna ngiieri iinlcri moty^la, iimisi 664 P II I L O I. O G V. Byo NIfillT. RAIN* tie Kninbiiida t6tO Miiiuljohi mpulii mvola Wf» Congo taiigOfu mvfild, hiild imiiitio Angoln itsuku mviila mdva Bengnru (>jt, eur Miikua ohiu/tt, ohi'i/ii cpfila eld id Miidjaim Lira, t^ilo ilia (lildka AInkondc tpra m'liigii p6hi Tnkwiini Imla vati Masenn nyctiytzui mviira mdhvii, pdtisi Sofnin jMiisi NyaiiilMina vasikii, mtiliii mfiiia, nifii/a iiicsdira Zulu ubiisiikii imviiUi, lieta eliziii, lepitfisc Bichunnn lxisi/.o piila, ana leliatsi WATKR. nil. aTONE. Eyo omi imoij okiitd Knml>inila mnzii tuia Mundjola nuijd mid Congo mdza tOia Uili Angola mfui fdia diinrc Bcngera mcimit nmldlu futce Makna imifi, »i(iri mom, tnttdnt mnala, nldkii Mudjana mfsi motii rlii'dnaa Makondc mtti inotii mayanga Takwani mdsi mdlu Masena mddzi miidto, muli/o hutve Sofa In mdtsi nioto Nyambnna iiuili iizih, iii/iro maribuv Zulu ■imanzt muli/o '> Richuann iiir/xi mulrln leiicli III' PATH. HOUIK. DKAII. Eyo litta •/fe uka Kambinda fon,/iiuli Mundjola njd odkda Congo iinjiUi md OdftMl Angola miim/ji/ti iizd, ii/izii onfoa Bengera ondjila niifljo, xnilio Makua iipini-mpati '»ij)d, niipn nkwa Mudjana (liUtla injiim/jo atrile, attire SOUTHERN AFRICA. 665 I MM. II0U8K. MUD. Mnkoiido epiindi ndiifa Tukwnni tii/iimlia Maarna iizira in/fimlm kii/a, iiJ'Oa Sofala nijumlm Nyambona tigflii i>it/.la, ingii, iingio kufa, v/ile Zulu iiil/.Ma int/.la oftiy liiila Bichuaoa tselu ontyu, einl^la ■shiia, liiirlii TO KAT, TO DBINK. ost Eyo ounilidU Oti €11 11/ Knmbinda mini Mun/i tutu tyn Mundjola bieie liitfdit Una Congo Villi tutu kirana Angola kiadi, tali tutu iriiiia Flcngeru Villi tutu ktvntia Makua nUili, jii/i viarnru mapfje Mudjana ^'rtl■i/•^ eviri sntdtii mutyetyc Makondc ividi itiit.a ilyetye Takwoni mili, vtri virarii vinai Mascna piri tiitu kiiia iSofula 1)1 ri talu ?iai Nyambana pirire ftiiiiiro, tinhiiio giiniinc Zulu miihini VKiChatii (?) ine, vtani Bichuana peri Iitrii 167 ini, niie 666 I' n 1 1, o L o r. Y. rivE. •i>. •ITtfC. Eyo filup >'"/" eihjf Kainbinda tliHU samlMtHU siiin/)iiiila Mundjola hituiiu bisieiimii til^iimu Congo tiiiiii nmsamlHttiii lltSlllll/uMtlli Angola til II II samaiiH samlHMiiH Rongera taint piiiiilii ]Hiiiiliiii/i Makua tnatnnu vuUdnii tin iii tiioilya iiiatiiHii nil id m Muiijnnu miaanu mzanai/i mo iiinli mziiimzimri Miikondo tihi/aiiu vitiinu nil iiinsi vitiinii na viri Tukuani vilunii iihi/uiiii nil iiioji nhi/iiiiii mi iviili Mnsenu Sllllll iiiiholu kinoiiie Kiilnln j(Ih;< titnlintii ti^inoiiii' Nynmhiimi nkiiiio ukiiitai/una nkitnntivrre Zulu t/./niiu isitiipn kiimlrini Kiohimna t/.hii), t^anii yatarii iujxt ElUHT. NINK. T«.V. Eyo eili/o esiiy nrii Kainl>iii(Ju IIUIIII twd kit mi Miitidjnia mpiio WMrci kiimi Congo iimitiu avoa kii'ni, ktnni Angola iiiiki ivoa kiimi Reiigera kir/iiiiiii kirkiii km Mukiia miUanii iKiiii nuiraru nuUiinii iiii ni mni^v^e muloka Mudjana mzanazitiUu tnz(iiiaiiiti/iti/e i/iktimi Mukondo vitaiiu Ml virArii vilaiiii nil vi/ini miikfwii Tukwani tihi/iDiii mi itiilii nhyaiiii iiii iti/iti/e kuini Ma.'w'na sire fimlKi kiimi Hiilula ifre ftlll/nl kiimi Nyumbanri iikiimUiiiaro nkaimmune ikumi Zulu /muiHifto'ia meiiim- tolni no mont/i /.limr ( ') Bichuana liina hem mriioiimt iiielicri hira mnnoana tnon- /.iimr, ^iiiiie aehria T II K EN I).